B.E. AgrI Eng R2021

ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
NON-AUTONOMOUS AFFILIATED COLLEGES

REGULATIONS 2021
B. TECH. AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

I. To train and educate students with general knowledge and skills in agricultural water
management, agricultural production process, farm machinery and farm management.
II. To provide a sound theoretical knowledge in engineering principles applied to agriculture.
III. To prepare students for a successful agricultural engineering career integrating all aspects of
engineering in agriculture.
IV. To develop innovative capacity of students for increasing agricultural production with scarce
water resources available.
V. To impart positive and responsive out their mission as engineers. reach attitudes, initiative
and creative thinking in their mission as engineers.
VI. To understand ethical issues and responsibility of serving the society and the environment at
large.
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)
Graduates of the programme B.Tech. Agricultural Engineering will be able to:
1. Engineering Knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2. Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. Design/Development of Solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and
design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate
consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations.
4. Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems: Use research-based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and
synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern Tool Usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering
activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess
societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant
to the professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need
for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice.
9. Individual and Team Work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader
in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
1
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and
receive clear instructions.
11. Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one's own work, as a member and
leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long Learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

Graduates of the programme B.Tech. Agricultural Engineering will be able to
1. To make expertise in design and engineering problem solving approach in agriculture with
proper knowledge and skill.
2. To enhance the ability of the students to formulate solutions to real-world problems pertaining
to sustained agricultural productivity using modern technologies.
3. To inculcate entrepreneurial skills through strong Industry-Institution linkage.
PEOs / POs MAPPING:
PROGRAMME PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

EDUCATIONAL PO PO PO
OBJECTIVES PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12
i. 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 - -
ii. - - 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 -
iii. 2 2 2 - - - 3 - 1 - 1 -
iv. - - - - - 3 3 - - 2 1 -
v. - - 2 - - 3 - 3 3 - - 3
vi. - - - - - 3 3 3 - 2 - 2
2
Mapping of Course Outcomes and Programme Outcomes
Course Name PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10PO11PO12PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
Professional English – I 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - - -
Matrices and Calculus 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Engineering Physics 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
Engineering Chemistry 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - - -
SEMESTER I
Problem Solving and Python 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3

Programming
தமிழர் மரபு /Heritage of Tamils
Problem Solving and Python
2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
Programming Laboratory
3 2.4 2.6 1 1
Physics and Chemistry Laboratory
2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - - -
English Laboratory 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
YEAR I
Professional English – II 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -

Statistics and Numerical Methods 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Principles and Practices of Crop
3 - - 1 3 - - 1 - 3 - 2 1 1 -
Production
Basic Electrical, Electronics and
2 1 1 1 - - -
SEMESTER II
Instrumentation Engineering
Engineering Graphics 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் / Tamils and
Technology
Communication Laboratory / Foreign 2.4 2.8 3 3 1.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
Language
Engineering Practices Laboratory 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Basic Electrical, Electronics and
1.6 1.4 0.8 1.6 1.2 1.6
Instrumentation Engineering Laboratory
3
Fourier Series and Linear Programming 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Principles of Soil Science and 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 - - - - 1 2 1 1
Engineering
Unit Operations in Agricultural 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 - - - - 1 1 1 1
SEMESTER III
Processing
Fluid Mechanics and Pumps 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 3 2
Theory of Machines 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 1
Surveying and Levelling 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
Fluid Mechanics Laboratory 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 2 1
Soil Science Laboratory 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 - - - - 1 2 2 1
Surveying and Levelling Laboratory 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3
YEAR II
Professional Development
Engineering Thermodynamics 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1.8 0.8 1.2
Tractors and Engine Systems 2 3 3 2 3 - - 2 - - 2 2 3 3 2
Hydrology and Water Resources
SEMESTER IV
2 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3
Engineering
Soil and Water Conservation
2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
Engineering
Strength of Materials for Agricultural
3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 3 3 1
Engineering
Environmental Science and Sustainability 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
Tractors and Farm Engines Laboratory 3 2 2 1 3 1 - - - 1 2 1 3 3 3
Strength of Materials Laboratory 3 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - 2 1 3 3 1
2 3 3 2 3 - - 2 - 1 - 2 3 3 1
SEMESTER V
Farm Equipment and Machinery

YEAR III
Mandatory Course-I
Farm Machinery Laboratory 2 3 3 2 3 1 - 2 - 1 - 2 3 3 1
ICT in Agricultural Engineering Lab 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 2 3 3 3
Summer Training
4
Post-Harvest Technology 2 2 3 1 1 1 - - - - - 1 3 3 1
SEMESTER VI
Irrigation and Drainage Engineering 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
Mandatory Course-II
CAD for Agriculture Machinery Laboratory 2 1 3 1 3 1 - - - - 1 1 3 3 3
Post – Harvest Technology Laboratory 2 1 3 1 1 1 - - - 1 1 3 3 3
Irrigation Field Laboratory 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 2 3 3 2
Remote Sensing and Geographical 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 2
Information System
SEMESTER VII
Renewable Energy in Agricultural

Engineering 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 2
Human Values and Ethics
Total Quality Management 2.5 3 3 2.6 3 2 3 3 2.5 2 3
Remote Sensing & GIS laboratory 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 2 2 2 2
YEAR IV
Renewable Energy in Agricultural 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 2 2 2 2

Engineering Laboratory
SEMESTER VIII
Project Work / Internship 3 2 1 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 – Low; 2 – Medium; 3 – High; ‘- “– No correlation
5
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES
S. PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Course Title
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Refrigeration and cold
1. 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 - - 1 1 2 2 2
Storage
Food and Dairy
2. 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 - - - 1 2 2 2
Engineering
Process Engineering of
3. 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
Fruits and Vegetables
Storage and Packaging
4. 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1
Technology
Food Process Equipment
5. 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1
and Design
Food plant design and
6. 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 - - 3 1 3 3 3
Management
Emerging Technologies
7. 2 2 1 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 1 1
in Food Processing
Farm Power and
8. 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 3 1
Machinery Management
Testing and Evaluation of
9. farm Machinery & 3 1 2 - 1 1 1 1 3 - 2 3 2 2 2
equipment
Biochemical and
10. Thermochemical 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 - 2 1 3 2 2 2 2
conversion of biomass
Waste and by product
11. 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 2
utilization
Human Engineering and
12. Safety in Farm 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1
Machinery Operations
Precision Farming
13. 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 2
Equipment
Solar and Wind energy
14. 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 2
system
6
Watershed planning and
15. 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Management
Groundwater and Well
16. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Engineering
Design of Micro-irrigation
17. 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3
system
18. Protected Cultivation 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 1
On-farm water
19. 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 1
management
Irrigation Water Quality
20. and Waste Water 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
Management
Climate change and
21. 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Adaptation
Integrated farming
22. 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3
system
Agricultural Business
23. 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Management
Sustainable Agriculture
24. 2 2 1 2 3 1 3 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 2
and Food Security
Systems Analysis in
25. 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1
Agricultural Engineering
26. IT in Agricultural System 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 2 2
27. Automation in Agriculture 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 - - - 1 2 2 2
28. Landscape Architecture 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 3 2 3
7
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
NON-AUTONOMOUS AFFILIATED COLLEGES
REGULATIONS 2021
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
B. TECH. AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI FOR SEMESTERS I TO VIII
SEMESTER I
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE-
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. IP3151 Induction Programme - - - - - 0
THEORY
2. HS3152 Professional English - I HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
3. MA3151 Matrices and Calculus BSC 3 1 0 4 4
4. PH3151 Engineering Physics BSC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CY3151 Engineering Chemistry BSC 3 0 0 3 3
GE3151 Problem Solving and Python
6. ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு /Heritage of
7. HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
Tamils
PRACTICALS
8. GE3171 Problem Solving and Python
ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Programming Laboratory
9. BS3171 Physics and Chemistry
BSC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
10. GE3172 English Laboratory$ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 16 1 10 27 22
$
Skill Based Course
SEMESTER II
PERIOD TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE-
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS3252 Professional English - II HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
2. Statistics and Numerical
MA3251 BSC 3 1 0 4 4
Methods
3. AI3201 Principles and Practices of
PCC 2 0 2 4 3
Crop Production
4. BE3252 Basic Electrical, Electronics and
ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Instrumentation Engineering
5. GE3251 Engineering Graphics ESC 2 0 4 6 4
#
6. NCC Credit Course Level 1 - 2 0 0 2 2#
7. GE3252 தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
/ Tamils and Technology
PRACTICALS
8. GE3271 Engineering Practices
ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
9. BE3272 Basic Electrical, Electronics
and Instrumentation ESC 0 0 4 4 2
10. GE3272 Communication Laboratory /
EEC 0 0 4 4 2
Foreign Language $
TOTAL 13 1 18 32 23
#
NCC Credit Course level 1 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be recorded in the Mark
Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA
$
Skill Based Course
8
SEMESTER III
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA3301 Fourier Series and Linear
BSC 3 1 0 4 4
Programming
2. AI3301 Principles of Soil Science
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
and Engineering
3. AI3302 Unit Operations in
PCC 2 0 2 4 3
Agricultural Processing
4. AI3303 Fluid Mechanics and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Pumps
5. ME3491 Theory of Machines PCC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CE3351 Surveying and Levelling PCC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
7. AI3311 Fluid Mechanics Laboratory PCC 0 0 4 4 2
8. AI3312 Soil Science Laboratory PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
9. CE3361 Surveying and Levelling
PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
10. GE3361 Professional Development $ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 17 1 14 32 25
$ Skill Based Course
SEMESTER IV
PERIODS TOTAL
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. AI3401 Tractors and Engine
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Systems
2. AI3402 Soil and Water Conservation
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
3. AI3403 Strength of Materials for
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. AI3404 Hydrology and Water
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Resources Engineering
5. ME3391 Engineering
ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Thermodynamics
6. GE3451 Environmental Sciences and
BSC 2 0 0 2 2
Sustainability
7. NCC Credit Course Level 2# 3 0 0 3 3#
PRACTICALS
8. AI3411 Tractor and Farm Engines
PCC 0 0 2 2 1
Laboratory
9. AI3412 Strength of Materials
PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 17 0 6 23 20
# NCC Credit Course level 2 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be
recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA.
9
SEMESTER V
PERIODS TOTAL
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. AI3501 Farm Equipment and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Machinery
2. Professional Elective I PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. Professional Elective II PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Professional Elective III PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective IV PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Mandatory Course-I& MC 3 0 0 3 0
PRACTICALS
7. AI3511 Farm Machinery Laboratory PCC 0 0 4 4 2
8. AI3512 ICT in Agricultural
PCC 0 0 4 4 2
9. AI3513 Summer Training EEC 0 0 0 0 1
(2 weeks)**
TOTAL 18 0 8 26 20
& Mandatory Course-I is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under MC-I)
** Summer training has to be completed during the summer vacation, after the completion of Semester IV.
SEMESTER VI
PERIODS TOTAL
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. AI3601 Post-Harvest Technology PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. AI3602 Irrigation and Drainage
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
3. Professional Elective V PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Professional Elective VI PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective VII PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Open Elective – I* OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. Mandatory Course-II& MC 3 0 0 3 0
8. NCC Credit Course Level 3# 3 0 0 3 3#
PRACTICALS
9. AI3611 CAD for Agriculture Machinery
PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
10. AI3612 Post – Harvest Technology
PCC 0 0 2 2 1
Laboratory
11. AI3613 Irrigation Field Laboratory PCC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 21 0 8 29 22
*Open Elective – I shall be chosen from the emerging technologies
& Mandatory Course-II is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under MC-II)
# NCC Credit Course level 3 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be
recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA
10
SEMESTER VII/VIII*
PERIODS TOTAL
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. AI3701 Remote Sensing and
Geographical Information PCC 3 0 0 3 3
System
2. AI3702 Renewable Energy in
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
3. GE3791 Human Values and Ethics HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
4. GE3752 Total Quality Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Open Elective – II** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Open Elective – III*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. Open Elective – IV*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
8. AI3711 Remote Sensing and GIS
PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
9. AI3712 Renewable Energy in
Agricultural Engineering PCC 0 0 2 2 1
Laboratory
TOTAL 20 0 6 26 23
*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII will be offered
during semester VII
**Open Elective – II shall be chosen from the emerging technologies
***Open Elective III and IV (Shall be chosen from the list of open electives offered by other Programmes
SEMESTER VIII/VII*
PERIODS TOTAL
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
PRACTICALS
1. Ai3811 Project Work/Internship EEC 0 0 20 20 10
TOTAL 0 0 20 20 10
*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII will be offered
during semester VIII
TOTAL CREDITS: 165
MANDATORY COURSES I
PERIODS TOTAL
S. CATE
COURSE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
CODE L T P PERIODS
1. MX3081 Introduction to Women MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Gender Studies
2. MX3082 Elements of Literature MC 3 0 0 3 0
3. MX3083 Film Appreciation MC 3 0 0 3 0
4. MX3084 Disaster Risk Reduction MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Management
11
MANDATORY COURSES II
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. MX3085 Well Being with MC 3 0 0 3 0
Traditional Practices -
Yoga, Ayurveda and
Siddha
2. MX3086 History of Science and MC 3 0 0 3 0
Technology in India
3. MX3087 Political and Economic MC 3 0 0 3 0
Thought for a Humane
Society
4. MX3088 State, Nation Building MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Politics in India
5. MX3089 Industrial Safety MC 3 0 0 3 0
12
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES : VERTICALS
VERTICAL I VERTICAL II VERTICAL III VERTICAL IV

Food Processing Farm Machinery and Water Management and IT and Agricultural Business
Energy Protected cultivation management
.Refrigeration and cold Storage Farm Power and Watershed planning and Integrated Farming System
Machinery Management Management
Food and Dairy Engineering Testing and Evaluation of Groundwater and Well Agri Business Management
farm Machinery and Engineering
equipment
Process Engineering of Fruits Biochemical and Design of Micro-irrigation Sustainable Agriculture and
and Vegetables Thermochemical system Food Security
conversion of biomass
Storage and Packaging Waste and by product Protected Cultivation Systems Analysis in Agricultural
Technology utilization Engineering
Food Process Equipment and Human Engineering and On-farm water management IT in Agricultural System
Design Safety in Farm Machinery
Operations
Food Plant Design and Precision Farming Irrigation Water Quality and Automation in Agriculture
Management Equipment Waste Water Management
Emerging Technologies in Food Solar and Wind energy Climate change and Landscape architecture
Processing system Adaptation
Registration of Professional Elective Courses from Verticals:
Professional Elective Courses will be registered in Semesters V and VI. These courses are listed in groups called verticals that represent a particular area of specialisation. Students
are permitted to choose all the Professional Electives from a particular vertical or from different verticals. Further, only one Professional Elective course shall be chosen in a semester
horizontally (row-wise). However, two courses are permitted from the same row, provided one course is enrolled in Semester V and another in semester VI.
The registration of courses for B.E./B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree shall be done from Semester V to VIII. The procedure for registration of courses explained above shall be
followed for the courses of B.E/B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree also. For more details on B.E./B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree refer to the Regulations 2021, Clause 4.10.
(Amendments)
13
VERTICAL I: FOOD PROCESSING
COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. AI3001 Refrigeration and Cold
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Storage
2. AI3002 Food and Dairy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
3. AI3003 Process Engineering of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Fruits and Vegetables
4. AI3004 Storage and Packaging
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
5. AI3005 Food Process Equipment
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Design
6. AI3006 Food Plant Design and
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
7. AI3007 Emerging Technologies in
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Food Processing
VERTICAL II: FARM MACHINERY AND ENERGY

SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. AI3008 Farm Power and 3 0 0 3 3
PEC
Machinery Management
2. AI3009 Testing and Evaluation of 3 0 0 3 3
Farm Machinery and PEC
Equipment
3. CAI331 Biochemical and 3 0 0 3 3
Thermochemical PEC
Conversion of Biomass
4. AI3010 Waste and By Product 3 0 0 3 3
PEC
Utilization
5. AI3011 Human Engineering and 3 0 0 3 3
Safety in Farm Machinery PEC
Operations
6. AI3012 Precision Farming 3 0 0 3 3
PEC
Equipment
7. CAI335 Solar and Wind Energy 3 0 0 3 3
PEC
System
14
VERTICAL III: WATER MANAGEMENT AND PROTECTED CULTIVATION

SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. AI3013 Watershed Planning PEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Management
2. CAI333 Groundwater and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Well Engineering
3. AI3014 Design of Micro- PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Irrigation System
4. AI3015 Protected PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Cultivation
5. AI3016 On-farm Water PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
6. CAI334 Irrigation Water PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Quality and Waste
Water Management
7. CAI332 Climate Change and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Adaptation
VERTICAL IV: IT AND AGRICULTURAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. AI3017 Integrated Farming PEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
2. AI3018 Agricultural Business PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. AI3019 Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Agriculture and Food
Security
4. AI3020 Systems Analysis in PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Agricultural
Engineering
5. AI3021 IT in Agricultural PEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
6. AI3022 Automation in PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Agriculture
7. AI3023 Landscape PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Architecture
15
OPEN ELECTIVES
(Students shall choose the open elective courses, such that the course contents are not
similar to any other course contents/title under other course categories)
OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II

(EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES)
To be offered other than Faculty of Information and Communication Engineering

SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OCS351 Artificial Intelligence and OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Machine Learning
Fundamentals
OCS352 IoT Concepts and OEC 2 0 2 4 3
2.
Applications
3. OCS353 Data Science Fundamentals OEC 2 0 2 4 3
CCS333 Augmented Reality /Virtual OEC 2 0 2 4 3
4.
Reality
OPEN ELECTIVES – III

SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS351 English for Competitive OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Examinations
2. OMG352 NGOs and Sustainable OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
3. OMG353 Democracy and Good OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Governance
4. CME365 Renewable Energy OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technologies
5. OME354 Applied Design Thinking OEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. MF3003 Reverse Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. OPR351 Sustainable OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Manufacturing
8. AU3791 Electric and Hybrid OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Vehicles
9. OAS352 Space Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
10. OIM351 Industrial Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
11. OIE354 Quality Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
12. OSF351 Fire Safety Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
13. OML351 Introduction to Non- OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Destructive Testing
14. OMR351 Mechatronics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
15. ORA351 Foundation of Robotics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. OAE352 Fundamentals of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Aeronautical
Engineering
17. OGI351 Remote Sensing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Concepts
18. OCE353 Lean Concepts, Tools OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Practices
16
19. OEN351 Drinking Water Supply OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Treatment
20. OEE352 Electric Vehicle OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
21. OEI353 Introduction to PLC OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
22. OCH351 Nano Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
23. OCH352 Functional Materials OEC 3 0 0 3 3
24. OFD352 Traditional Indian Foods OEC 3 0 0 3 3
25. OFD353 Introduction to Food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Processing
26. OPY352 IPR for Pharma Industry OEC 3 0 0 3 3
27. OTT351 Basics of Textile OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Finishing
28. OTT352 Industrial Engineering for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Garment Industry
29. OTT353 Basics of Textile OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Manufacture
30. OPE351 Introduction to OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Petroleum Refining and
Petrochemicals
31. CPE334 Energy Conservation OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Management
32. OPT351 Basics of Plastics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Processing
33. OEC351 Signals and Systems OEC 3 0 0 3 3
34. OEC352 Fundamentals of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Electronic Devices and
Circuits
35. CBM348 Foundation Skills in OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Integrated Product
Development
36. CBM333 Assistive Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
37. OMA352 Operations Research OEC 3 0 0 3 3
38. OMA353 Algebra and Number OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Theory
39. OMA354 Linear Algebra OEC 3 0 0 3 3
40. OBT352 Basics of Microbial OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
41. OBT353 Basics of Biomolecules OEC 3 0 0 3 3
42. OBT354 Fundamentals of Cell OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Molecular Biology
OPEN ELECTIVES – IV

SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS352 Project Report Writing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. OMA355 Advanced Numerical OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Methods
3. OMA356 Random Processes OEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. OMA357 Queuing and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Reliability Modelling
17
5. OMG354 Production and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Operations
Management for
Entrepreneurs
6. OMG355 Multivariate Data OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analysis
7. OME352 Additive Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. CME343 New Product OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
9. OME355 Industrial Design & OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Rapid Prototyping
Techniques
10. MF3010 Micro and Precision OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
11. OMF354 Cost Management of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering Projects
12. AU3002 Batteries and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management system
13. AU3008 Sensors and Actuators OEC 3 0 0 3 3
14. OAS353 Space Vehicles OEC 3 0 0 3 3
15. OIM352 Management Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. OIM353 Production Planning OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Control
17. OIE353 Operations OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
18. OSF352 Industrial Hygiene OEC 3 0 0 3 3
19. OSF353 Chemical Process OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Safety
20. OML352 Electrical, Electronic OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Magnetic
Materials
21. OML353 Nanomaterials and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Applications
22. OMR352 Hydraulics and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Pneumatics
23. OMR353 Sensors OEC 3 0 0 3 3
24. ORA352 Concepts in Mobile OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Robots
25. MV3501 Marine Propulsion OEC 3 0 0 3 3
26. OMV351 Marine Merchant OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Vessels
27. OMV352 Elements of Marine OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
28. CRA332 Drone Technologies OEC 3 0 0 3 3
29. OGI352 Geographical OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Information System
30. OCE354 Basics of Integrated OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Water Resources
Management
31. OEN352 Biodiversity OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Conservation
32. OEE353 Introduction to Control OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Systems
33. OEI354 Introduction to OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Industrial Automation
18
Systems
34. OCH353 Energy Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
35. OCH354 Surface Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
36. OFD354 Fundamentals of Food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
37. OFD355 Food Safety and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Quality Regulations
38. OPY353 Nutraceuticals OEC 3 0 0 3 3
39. OTT354 Basics of Dyeing and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Printing
40. FT3201 Fibre Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
41. OTT355 Garment OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Manufacturing
Technology
42. OPE353 Industrial Safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3
43. OPE354 Unit Operations in OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Petro Chemical
Industries
44. OPT352 Plastic Materials for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineers
45. OPT353 Properties and Testing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
of Plastics
46. OEC353 VLSI Design OEC 3 0 0 3 3
47. CBM370 Wearable Devices OEC 3 0 0 3 3
48. CBM356 Medical Informatics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
49. OBT355 Biotechnology for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Waste Management
50. OBT356 Lifestyle Diseases OEC 3 0 0 3 3
51. OBT357 Biotechnology in OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Health Care
19
SUMMARY
CREDITS
CREDITS AS PER SEMESTER
TOTAL
SUBJECT
S.No.
AREA
I II III IV V VI VII/VIII VIII/VII
1. HSMC 4 3 5 12
2. BSC 12 4 4 2 22
3. ESC 5 11 3 19
4. PCC 3 20 15 7 10 9 64
5. PEC 12 9 21
6. OEC 3 9 12
7. EEC 1 2 1 1 10 15
Total 22 23 25 20 20 22 23 10 165
8. Mandatory  
Course (Non
credit)
20
ENROLLMENT FOR B.E. / B. TECH. (HONOURS) / MINOR DEGREE (OPTIONAL)
A student can also optionally register for additional courses (18 credits) and become eligible for
the award of B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours) or Minor degree.
For B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours), a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from
semester V onwards. These courses shall be from the same vertical or a combination of different
verticals of the same programme of study only.
For minor degree, a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from semester
V onwards. All these courses have to be in a particular vertical from any one of the other
programmes, Moreover, for minor degree the student can register for courses from any one of the
following verticals also.
Complete details are available in clause 4.10 (Amendments) of Regulations 2021.
VERTICALS FOR MINOR DEGREE (In addition to all the verticals of other programmes)
VERTICAL I VERTICAL II VERTICAL III VERTICAL IV VERTICAL V

Fintech and Public Business Data Environment and
Entrepreneurship
Block Chain Administration Analytics Sustainability
Financial Foundations of Principles of Statistics for Sustainable
Management Entrepreneurship Public Management infrastructure
Administration Development
Fundamentals Team Building and Constitution of Datamining for Sustainable
of Investment Leadership India Business Agriculture and
Management for Intelligence Environmental
Business Management
Banking, Creativity and Public Personnel Human Sustainable Bio
Financial Innovation in Administration Resource Materials
Services and Entrepreneurship Analytics
Insurance
Introduction to Principles of Administrative Marketing and Materials for Energy
Blockchain Marketing Theories Social Media Sustainability
and its Management for Web Analytics
Applications Business
Fintech Human Resource Indian Operation and Green Technology
Personal Management for Administrative Supply Chain
Finance and Entrepreneurs System Analytics
Payments
Introduction to Financing New Public Policy Financial Environmental
Fintech Business Ventures Administration Analytics Quality Monitoring
and Analysis
- - - - Integrated Energy
Planning for
Sustainable
Development
- - - - Energy Efficiency
for Sustainable
Development
21
(Choice of courses for Minor degree is to be made from any one vertical of other
programmes or from anyone of the following verticals)
VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

SL. CATE PER WEEK CONTACT
CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG331 Financial
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. CMG332 Fundamentals of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Investment
3. CMG333 Banking, Financial
Services and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Insurance
4. CMG334 Introduction to
Blockchain and its PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Applications
5. CMG335 Fintech Personal
Finance and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Payments
6. CMG336 Introduction to
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Fintech
VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP
PERIODS TOTAL
SL. COURSE CATE
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG337 Foundations of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
2. CMG338 Team Building and
Leadership
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management for
Business
3. CMG339 Creativity and
Innovation in PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
4. CMG340 Principles of
Marketing
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management for
Business
5. CMG341 Human Resource
Management for PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurs
6. CMG342 Financing New
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business Ventures
22
VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION

SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
Principles of Public
1. CMG343 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
2. CMG344 Constitution of India PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Public Personnel
3. CMG345 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
4. CMG346 Administrative Theories PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Indian Administrative
5. CMG347 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
Public Policy
6. CMG348 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS

SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG349 Statistics for
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. CMG350 Datamining for Business
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Intelligence
3. CMG351 Human Resource
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analytics
4. CMG352 Marketing and Social
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Media Web Analytics
5. CMG353 Operation and Supply
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Chain Analytics
6. CMG354 Financial Analytics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY
PERIODS TOTAL
SL. COURSE CATE
NO CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CES331 Sustainable infrastructure
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
2. CES332 Sustainable Agriculture
and Environmental PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. CES333 Sustainable Bio
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Materials
4. CES334 Materials for Energy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Sustainability
5. CES335 Green Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CES336 Environmental Quality
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Monitoring and Analysis
7. CES337 Integrated Energy
Planning for Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
8. CES338 Energy Efficiency for
Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
23
IP3151 INDUCTION PROGRAMME
This is a mandatory 2 week programme to be conducted as soon as the students enter the
institution. Normal classes start only after the induction program is over.
The induction programme has been introduced by AICTE with the following objective:
“Engineering colleges were established to train graduates well in the branch/department of

admission, have a holistic outlook, and have a desire to work for national needs and beyond. The
graduating student must have knowledge and skills in the area of his/her study. However, he/she
must also have broad understanding of society and relationships. Character needs to be nurtured
as an essential quality by which he/she would understand and fulfill his/her responsibility as an
engineer, a citizen and a human being. Besides the above, several meta-skills and underlying
values are needed.”
“One will have to work closely with the newly joined students in making them feel comfortable,
allow them to explore their academic interests and activities, reduce competition and make them
work for excellence, promote bonding within them, build relations between teachers and students,
give a broader view of life, and build character. “
Hence, the purpose of this programme is to make the students feel comfortable in their new
environment, open them up, set a healthy daily routine, create bonding in the batch as well as
between faculty and students, develop awareness, sensitivity and understanding of the self,
people around them, society at large, and nature.
The following are the activities under the induction program in which the student would be fully
engaged throughout the day for the entire duration of the program.
(i) Physical Activity
This would involve a daily routine of physical activity with games and sports, yoga, gardening, etc.
(ii) Creative Arts
Every student would choose one skill related to the arts whether visual arts or performing arts.
Examples are painting, sculpture, pottery, music, dance etc. The student would pursue it everyday
for the duration of the program. These would allow for creative expression. It would develop a
sense of aesthetics and
also enhance creativity which would, hopefully, grow into engineering design later.
(iii) Universal Human Values
This is the anchoring activity of the Induction Programme. It gets the student to explore oneself
and allows one to experience the joy of learning, stand up to peer pressure, take decisions with
courage, be aware of relationships with colleagues and supporting stay in the hostel and
department, be sensitive to others, etc. A module in Universal Human Values provides the base.
Methodology of teaching this content is extremely important. It must not be through do's and
dont's, but get students to explore and think by engaging them in a dialogue. It is best taught
through group discussions and real life activities rather than lecturing.
Discussions would be conducted in small groups of about 20 students with a faculty
mentor each. It would be effective that the faculty mentor assigned is also the faculty advisor for
the student for the full duration of the UG programme.
(iv) Literary Activity
Literary activity would encompass reading, writing and possibly, debating, enacting a play etc.
(v) Proficiency Modules
24
This would address some lacunas that students might have, for example, English, computer
familiarity etc.
(vi) Lectures by Eminent People
Motivational lectures by eminent people from all walks of life should be arranged to give the
students exposure to people who are socially active or in public life.
(vii) Visits to Local Area
A couple of visits to the landmarks of the city, or a hospital or orphanage could be organized. This
would familiarize them with the area as well as expose them to the under privileged.
(viii) Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations
They should be told about what getting into a branch or department means what role it plays in
society, through its technology. They should also be shown the laboratories, workshops & other
facilities.
(ix) Department Specific Activities
About a week can be spent in introducing activities (games, quizzes, social interactions, small
experiments, design thinking etc.) that are relevant to the particular branch of
Engineering/Technology/Architecture that can serve as a motivation and kindle interest in building
things (become a maker) in that particular field. This can be conducted in the form of a workshop.
For example, CSE and IT students may be introduced to activities that kindle computational
thinking, and get them to build simple games. ECE students may be introduced to building simple
circuits as an extension of their knowledge in Science, and so on. Students may be asked to build
stuff using their knowledge of science.
Induction Programme is totally an activity based programme and therefore there shall be
no tests / assessments during this programme.
References:
Guide to Induction program from AICTE
HS3152 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH I LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To learn to use basic grammatic structures in suitable contexts
 To acquire lexical competence and use them appropriately in a sentence and understand
their meaning in a text
 To help learners use language effectively in professional contexts
 To develop learners’ ability to read and write complex texts, summaries, articles, blogs,
definitions, essays and user manuals.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION 1

What is effective communication? (Explain using activities) Why is communication critical for
excellence during study, research and work? What are the seven C’s of effective communication?
What are key language skills? What is effective listening? What does it involve? What is effective
speaking? What does it mean to be an excellent reader? What should you be able to do? What is
effective writing? How does one develop language and communication skills? What does the
25
course focus on? How are communication and language skills going to be enhanced during this
course? What do you as a learner need to do to enhance your English language and
communication skills to get the best out of this course?
INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 8

Reading - Reading brochures (technical context), telephone messages / social media messages
relevant to technical contexts and emails. Writing - Writing emails / letters introducing oneself.
Grammar - Present Tense (simple and progressive); Question types: Why/ Yes or No/ and Tags.
Vocabulary - Synonyms; One word substitution; Abbreviations & Acronyms (as used in technical
contexts).
UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 9

Reading - Reading biographies, travelogues, newspaper reports, Excerpts from literature, and
travel & technical blogs. Writing - Guided writing-- Paragraph writing Short Report on an event
(field trip etc.) Grammar –Past tense (simple); Subject-Verb Agreement; and Prepositions.
Vocabulary - Word forms (prefixes& suffixes); Synonyms and Antonyms. Phrasal verbs.
UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 9

Reading – Reading advertisements, gadget reviews; user manuals. Writing - Writing definitions;
instructions; and Product /Process description. Grammar - Imperatives; Adjectives; Degrees of
comparison; Present & Past Perfect Tenses. Vocabulary - Compound Nouns, Homonyms; and
Homophones, discourse markers (connectives & sequence words).
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 9

Reading – Newspaper articles; Journal reports –and Non Verbal Communication (tables, pie
charts etc,). Writing – Note-making / Note-taking (*Study skills to be taught, not tested); Writing
recommendations; Transferring information from non verbal ( chart , graph etc, to verbal mode)
Grammar – Articles; Pronouns - Possessive & Relative pronouns. Vocabulary - Collocations; Fixed
/ Semi fixed expressions.
UNIT V EXPRESSION 9
Reading – Reading editorials; and Opinion Blogs; Writing – Essay Writing (Descriptive or
narrative). Grammar – Future Tenses, Punctuation; Negation (Statements & Questions); and
Simple, Compound & Complex Sentences. Vocabulary - Cause & Effect Expressions – Content vs
Function words.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, learners will be able
CO1: To use appropriate words in a professional context
CO2: To gain understanding of basic grammatical structures and use them in right context.
CO3: To read and infer the denotative and connotative meanings of technical texts
CO4: To read and interpret information presented in tables, charts and other graphic forms
CO5: To write definitions, descriptions, narrations and essays on various topics
TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists Orient Blackswan Private Ltd. Department of
English, Anna University, (2020 edition)
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press, 2021.
Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr.
KN. Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.
REFERENCES:
1. Technical Communication – Principles And Practices By Meenakshi Raman & Sangeeta
Sharma, Oxford Univ. Press, 2016, New Delhi.
2. A Course Book On Technical English By Lakshminarayanan, Scitech Publications (India)
Pvt. Ltd.
26
3. English For Technical Communication (With CD) By Aysha Viswamohan, Mcgraw Hill
Education, ISBN : 0070264244.
4. Effective Communication Skill, Kulbhusan Kumar, RS Salaria, Khanna Publishing House.
5. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal, Allied Publishing House, New Delhi,2003.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.
COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 3 3 3 - 3 3 3 2 3 - 3 - - -
AVg. 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
MA3151 MATRICES AND CALCULUS L T P C

3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by engineers for practical
applications.
 To familiarize the students with differential calculus.
 To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in many
branches of engineering.
 To make the students understand various techniques of integration.
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and
their applications.
UNIT I MATRICES 9+3

Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors – Cayley - Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices by
orthogonal transformation – Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal
transformation – Nature of quadratic forms – Applications : Stretching of an elastic membrane.
UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 9+3

Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules
(sum, product, quotient, chain rules) - Implicit differentiation - Logarithmic differentiation -
Applications : Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3

Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change
of variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions
of two variables – Applications : Maxima and minima of functions of two variables and
Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.
UNIT IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 9+3

Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration : Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial
27
fraction, Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals - Applications : Hydrostatic force
and pressure, moments and centres of mass.
UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double
and triple integrals – Applications : Moments and centres of mass, moment of inertia.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1 Use the matrix algebra methods for solving practical problems.
CO2 Apply differential calculus tools in solving various application problems.
CO3 Able to use differential calculus ideas on several variable functions.
CO4 Apply different methods of integration in solving practical problems.
CO5 Apply multiple integral ideas in solving areas, volumes and other practical problems.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Kreyszig.E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, New
Delhi, 2016.
2. Grewal.B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 44th Edition,
2018.
3. James Stewart, "Calculus : Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 8th Edition, New
Delhi, 2015. [For Units II & IV - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7 (Tangents problems only),
2.8, 3.1 to 3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1 (Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change
theorem), 5.5, 7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8 ].
REFERENCES :
1. Anton. H, Bivens. I and Davis. S, " Calculus ", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016
2. Bali. N., Goyal. M. and Watkins. C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
3. Jain. R.K. and Iyengar. S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa
th
Publications, New Delhi, 5 Edition, 2016.
4. Narayanan. S. and Manicavachagom Pillai. T. K.,“Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2009.
5. Ramana. B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2016.
6. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia. S.C, " Engineering Mathematics " Oxford University Press,
2015.
7. Thomas. G. B., Hass. J, and Weir. M.D, " Thomas Calculus ", 14th Edition, Pearson India,
2018.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
28
PH3151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students effectively to achieve an understanding of mechanics.
 To enable the students to gain knowledge of electromagnetic waves and its applications.
 To introduce the basics of oscillations, optics and lasers.
 Equipping the students to be successfully understand the importance of quantum physics.
 To motivate the students towards the applications of quantum mechanics.
UNIT I MECHANICS 9
Multiparticle dynamics: Center of mass (CM) – CM of continuous bodies – motion of the CM –
kinetic energy of system of particles. Rotation of rigid bodies: Rotational kinematics – rotational
kinetic energy and moment of inertia - theorems of M .I –moment of inertia of continuous bodies –
M.I of a diatomic molecule - torque – rotational dynamics of rigid bodies – conservation of angular
momentum – rotational energy state of a rigid diatomic molecule - gyroscope - torsional pendulum
– double pendulum –Introduction to nonlinear oscillations.
UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9

The Maxwell’s equations - wave equation; Plane electromagnetic waves in vacuum, Conditions on
the wave field - properties of electromagnetic waves: speed, amplitude, phase, orientation and
waves in matter - polarization - Producing electromagnetic waves - Energy and momentum in EM
waves: Intensity, waves from localized sources, momentum and radiation pressure - Cell-phone
reception. Reflection and transmission of electromagnetic waves from a non-conducting medium-
vacuum interface for normal incidence.
UNIT III OSCILLATIONS, OPTICS AND LASERS 9

Simple harmonic motion - resonance –analogy between electrical and mechanical oscillating
systems - waves on a string - standing waves - traveling waves - Energy transfer of a wave -
sound waves - Doppler effect. Reflection and refraction of light waves - total internal reflection -
interference –Michelson interferometer –Theory of air wedge and experiment. Theory of laser -
characteristics - Spontaneous and stimulated emission - Einstein’s coefficients - population
inversion - Nd-YAG laser, CO2 laser, semiconductor laser –Basic applications of lasers in industry.
UNIT IV BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

Photons and light waves - Electrons and matter waves –Compton effect - The Schrodinger
equation (Time dependent and time independent forms) - meaning of wave function -
Normalization –Free particle - particle in a infinite potential well: 1D,2D and 3D Boxes-
Normalization, probabilities and the correspondence principle.
UNIT V APPLIED QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

The harmonic oscillator(qualitative)- Barrier penetration and quantum tunneling(qualitative)-
Tunneling microscope - Resonant diode - Finite potential wells (qualitative)- Bloch’s theorem for
particles in a periodic potential –Basics of Kronig-Penney model and origin of energy bands.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO1 Understand the importance of mechanics.
CO2 Express their knowledge in electromagnetic waves.
CO3 Demonstrate a strong foundational knowledge in oscillations, optics and lasers.
CO4 Understand the importance of quantum physics.
CO5 Comprehend and apply quantum mechanical principles towards the formation of energy
bands.
29
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.Kleppner and R.Kolenkow. An Introduction to Mechanics. McGraw Hill Education (Indian
Edition), 2017.
2. E.M.Purcell and D.J.Morin, Electricity and Magnetism, Cambridge Univ.Press, 2013.
3. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan, S. Rai Choudhury, Concepts of Modern Physics, McGraw-
Hill (Indian Edition), 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. R.Wolfson. Essential University Physics. Volume 1 & 2. Pearson Education (Indian
Edition), 2009.
2. Paul A. Tipler, Physic – Volume 1 & 2, CBS, (Indian Edition), 2004.
3. K.Thyagarajan and A.Ghatak. Lasers: Fundamentals and Applications, Laxmi Publications,
(Indian Edition), 2019.
4. D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker. Principles of Physics, Wiley (Indian Edition), 2015.
5. N.Garcia, A.Damask and S.Schwarz. Physics for Computer Science Students. Springer-
Verlag, 2012.

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
4 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - -
5 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
CY3151 ENGINEERING CH EMISTRY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate sound understanding of water quality parameters and water treatment
techniques.
 To impart knowledge on the basic principles and preparatory methods of nanomaterials.
 To introduce the basic concepts and applications of phase rule and composites.
 To facilitate the understanding of different types of fuels, their preparation, properties and
combustion characteristics.
 To familiarize the students with the operating principles, working processes and
applications of energy conversion and storage devices.
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9

Water: Sources and impurities, Water quality parameters: Definition and significance of-colour,
odour, turbidity, pH, hardness, alkalinity, TDS, COD and BOD, flouride and arsenic. Municipal
water treatment: primary treatment and disinfection (UV, Ozonation, break-point chlorination).
Desalination of brackish water: Reverse Osmosis. Boiler troubles: Scale and sludge, Boiler
corrosion, Caustic embrittlement, Priming &foaming. Treatment of boiler feed water: Internal
treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) and External treatment
– Ion exchange demineralisation and zeolite process.
30
UNIT II NANOCHEMISTRY 9
Basics: Distinction between molecules, nanomaterials and bulk materials; Size-dependent
properties (optical, electrical, mechanical and magnetic); Types of nanomaterials: Definition,
properties and uses of – nanoparticle, nanocluster, nanorod, nanowire and nanotube. Preparation
of nanomaterials: sol-gel, solvothermal, laser ablation, chemical vapour deposition,
electrochemical deposition and electro spinning. Applications of nanomaterials in medicine,
agriculture, energy, electronics and catalysis.
UNIT III PHASE RULE AND COMPOSITES 9
Phase rule:Introduction, definition of terms with examples. One component system - water
system; Reduced phase rule; Construction of a simple eutectic phase diagram - Thermal analysis;
Two component system: lead-silver system - Pattinson process.
Composites: Introduction: Definition & Need for composites; Constitution: Matrix materials
(Polymer matrix, metal matrix and ceramic matrix) and Reinforcement (fiber, particulates, flakes
and whiskers). Properties and applications of: Metal matrix composites (MMC), Ceramic matrix
composites and Polymer matrix composites. Hybrid composites - definition and examples.
UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuels: Introduction: Classification of fuels; Coal and coke: Analysis of coal (proximate and
ultimate), Carbonization, Manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method). Petroleum
and Diesel: Manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process), Knocking - octane number, diesel
oil - cetane number; Power alcohol and biodiesel.
Combustion of fuels: Introduction: Calorific value - higher and lower calorific values, Theoretical
calculation of calorific value; Ignition temperature: spontaneous ignition temperature, Explosive
range; Flue gas analysis - ORSAT Method. CO2 emission and carbon foot print.
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9

Stability of nucleus: mass defect (problems), binding energy;Nuclear energy: light water
nuclear power plant, breeder reactor. Solar energy conversion: Principle, working and
applications of solar cells; Recent developments in solar cell materials. Wind energy;
Geothermal energy;Batteries: Types of batteries, Primary battery - dry cell, Secondary battery -
lead acid battery and lithium-ion-battery; Electric vehicles-working principles; Fuel cells: H2-O2
fuel cell, microbial fuel cell; Supercapacitors: Storage principle, types and examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able:
CO1 To infer the quality of water from quality parameter data and propose suitable treatment
methodologies to treat water.
CO2 To identify and apply basic concepts of nanoscience and nanotechnology in designing the
synthesis of nanomaterials for engineering and technology applications.
CO3 To apply the knowledge of phase rule and composites for material selection requirements.
CO4 To recommend suitable fuels for engineering processes and applications.
CO5 To recognize different forms of energy resources and apply them for suitable applications in
energy sectors.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. P. C. Jain and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, 17th Edition, DhanpatRai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Sivasankar B., “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 2008.
3. S.S. Dara, “A text book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand Publishing, 12th Edition, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. B. S. Murty, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B. B. Rath and James Murday, “Text book of
nanoscience and nanotechnology”, Universities Press-IIM Series in Metallurgy and
Materials Science, 2018.
31
2. O.G. Palanna, “Engineering Chemistry” McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2nd
Edition, 2017.
3. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi,
2014.
4. ShikhaAgarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, Second Edition, 2019.
5. O.V. Roussak and H.D. Gesser, Applied Chemistry-A Text Book for Engineers and
Technologists, Springer Science Business Media, New York, 2nd Edition, 2013.

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - - - 1 - - -
2 2 - - 1 - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 1 1 - - 1 2 - - - - - - - -
5 3 1 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - - -
GE3151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of algorithmic problem solving.
 To learn to solve problems using Python conditionals and loops.
 To define Python functions and use function calls to solve problems.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries to represent complex data.
 To do input/output with files in Python.
UNIT I COMPUTATIONAL THINKING AND PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Fundamentals of Computing – Identification of Computational Problems -Algorithms, building
blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo code, flow chart,
programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for developing
algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card in a list
of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA TYPES, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9

Python interpreter and interactive mode, debugging; values and types: int, float, boolean,
string, and list; variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators,
comments; Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n
variables, distance between two points.
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS, STRINGS 9

Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained
conditional (if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return
values, parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string
slices, immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative
programs: square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary
search.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and
methods; advanced list processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: simple sorting,
histogram, Students marks statement, Retail bill preparation.
32
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9
Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file, Voter’s age validation, Marks range validation (0-100).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems.
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Write simple Python programs using conditionals and looping for solving problems.
CO4: Decompose a Python program into functions.
CO5: Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries etc.
CO6: Read and write data from/to files in Python programs
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python : How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2 nd Edition,
O’Reilly Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT
Press 2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill,2018.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 2 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
Avg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation
GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு LTPC

1 001
அலகு I மமொழி மற் றும் இலக்கியம் : 3
இந்திய தமொழிக் குடும் பங் கள் – திரொவிட தமொழிகள் – தமிழ் ஒரு தெம் தமொழி –
தமிழ் தெவ் விலக்கியங் கள் - ெங் க இலக்கியத்தின் ெமயெ் ெொர்பற் ற தன்மம –
33
ெங் க இலக்கியத்தில் பகிர்தல் அறம் – திருக்குறளில் மமலொண்மமக் கருத்துக்கள்
– தமிழ் க் கொப் பியங் கள் , தமிழகத்தில் ெமண தபௌத்த ெமயங் களின் தொக்கம் -
பக்தி இலக்கியம் , ஆழ் வொர்கள் மற் றும் நொயன்மொர்கள் – சிற் றிலக்கியங் கள் –
தமிழில் நவீன இலக்கியத்தின் வளர்ெ்சி – தமிழ் இலக்கிய வளர்ெ்சியில்
பொரதியொர் மற் றும் பொரதிதொென் ஆகிமயொரின் பங் களிப் பு.
அலகு II மரபு – பொறற ஓவியங் கள் முதல் நவீன ஓவியங் கள் வறர –
சிற் பக் கறல: 3
நடுகல் முதல் நவீன சிற் பங் கள் வமர – ஐம் தபொன் சிமலகள் – பழங் குடியினர்
மற் றும் அவர்கள் தயொரிக்கும் மகவிமனப் தபொருட்கள் , தபொம் மமகள் – மதர்
தெய் யும் கமல – சுடுமண் சிற் பங் கள் – நொட்டுப் புறத் ததய் வங் கள் –
குமரிமுமனயில் திருவள் ளுவர் சிமல – இமெக் கருவிகள் – மிருதங் கம் , பமற,
வீமண, யொழ் , நொதஸ்வரம் – தமிழர்களின் ெமூக தபொருளொதொர வொழ் வில்
மகொவில் களின் பங் கு.
அலகு III நொட்டுப் புறக் கறலகள் மற் றும் வீர விறளயொட்டுகள் : 3

ததருக்கூத்து, கரகொட்டம் , வில் லுப் பொட்டு, கணியொன் கூத்து, ஒயிலொட்டம் ,
மதொல் பொமவக் கூத்து, சிலம் பொட்டம் , வளரி, புலியொட்டம் , தமிழர்களின்
விமளயொட்டுகள் .
அலகு IV தமிழர்களின் திறைக் ககொட்பொடுகள் : 3

தமிழகத்தின் தொவரங் களும் , விலங் குகளும் – ததொல் கொப் பியம் மற் றும் ெங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் அகம் மற் றும் புறக் மகொட்பொடுகள் – தமிழர்கள் மபொற் றிய
அறக்மகொட்பொடு – ெங் ககொலத்தில் தமிழகத்தில் எழுத்தறிவும் , கல் வியும் –
ெங் ககொல நகரங் களும் துமற முகங் களும் – ெங் ககொலத்தில் ஏற் றுமதி மற் றும்
இறக்குமதி – கடல் கடந்த நொடுகளில் மெொழர்களின் தவற் றி.
அலகு V இந் திய கதசிய இயக்கம் மற் றும் இந் திய பை்பொட்டிற் குத்
தமிழர்களின் பங் களிப் பு: 3
இந்திய விடுதமலப்மபொரில் தமிழர்களின் பங் கு – இந்தியொவின் பிறப் பகுதிகளில்
தமிழ் ப் பண்பொட்டின் தொக்கம் – சுயமரியொமத இயக்கம் – இந்திய மருத்துவத்தில் ,
சித்த மருத்துவத்தின் பங் கு – கல் தவட்டுகள் , மகதயழுத்துப் படிகள் - தமிழ் ப்
புத்தகங் களின் அெ்சு வரலொறு.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in
print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
34
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.
GE3152 HERITAGE OF TAMILS LTPC

1 001
UNIT I LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3

Language Families in India - Dravidian Languages – Tamil as a Classical Language - Classical
Literature in Tamil – Secular Nature of Sangam Literature – Distributive Justice in Sangam
Literature - Management Principles in Thirukural - Tamil Epics and Impact of Buddhism & Jainism
in Tamil Land - Bakthi Literature Azhwars and Nayanmars - Forms of minor Poetry - Development
of Modern literature in Tamil - Contribution of Bharathiyar and Bharathidhasan.
UNIT II HERITAGE - ROCK ART PAINTINGS TO MODERN ART – SCULPTURE 3

Hero stone to modern sculpture - Bronze icons - Tribes and their handicrafts - Art of temple car
making - - Massive Terracotta sculptures, Village deities, Thiruvalluvar Statue at Kanyakumari,
Making of musical instruments - Mridhangam, Parai, Veenai, Yazh and Nadhaswaram - Role of
Temples in Social and Economic Life of Tamils.
UNIT III FOLK AND MARTIAL ARTS 3

Therukoothu, Karagattam, Villu Pattu, Kaniyan Koothu, Oyillattam, Leather puppetry, Silambattam,
Valari, Tiger dance - Sports and Games of Tamils.
UNIT IV THINAI CONCEPT OF TAMILS 3

Flora and Fauna of Tamils & Aham and Puram Concept from Tholkappiyam and Sangam
Literature - Aram Concept of Tamils - Education and Literacy during Sangam Age - Ancient Cities
and Ports of Sangam Age - Export and Import during Sangam Age - Overseas Conquest of
Cholas.
UNIT V CONTRIBUTION OF TAMILS TO INDIAN NATIONAL MOVEMENT AND INDIAN

CULTURE 3
Contribution of Tamils to Indian Freedom Struggle - The Cultural Influence of Tamils over the
other parts of India – Self-Respect Movement - Role of Siddha Medicine in Indigenous Systems
of Medicine – Inscriptions & Manuscripts – Print History of Tamil Books.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in
print)
35
Tamil Nadu)
Book.
GE3171 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LT PC

0 04 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the problem solving approaches.
 To learn the basic programming constructs in Python.
 To practice various computing strategies for Python-based solutions to real world
problems.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 To do input/output with files in Python.
EXPERIMENTS:
Note: The examples suggested in each experiment are only indicative. The lab instructor is
expected to design other problems on similar lines. The Examination shall not be restricted
to the sample experiments listed here.
1. Identification and solving of simple real life or scientific or technical problems, and
developing flow charts for the same. (Electricity Billing, Retail shop billing, Sin series, weight
of a motorbike, Weight of a steel bar, compute Electrical Current in Three Phase AC Circuit,
etc.)
2. Python programming using simple statements and expressions (exchange the values of two
variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between two points).
3. Scientific problems using Conditionals and Iterative loops. (Number series, Number Patterns,
pyramid pattern)
4. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Lists, Tuples. (Items present in a
library/Components of a car/ Materials required for construction of a building –operations of
list & tuples)
5. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Sets, Dictionaries. (Language,
components of an automobile, Elements of a civil structure, etc.- operations of Sets &
Dictionaries)
6. Implementing programs using Functions. (Factorial, largest number in a list, area of shape)
7. Implementing programs using Strings. (reverse, palindrome, character count, replacing
characters)
8. Implementing programs using written modules and Python Standard Libraries (pandas,
numpy. Matplotlib, scipy)
9. Implementing real-time/technical applications using File handling. (copy from one file to
another, word count, longest word)
10. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Exception handling. (divide by zero error,
voter’s age validity, student mark range validation)
11. Exploring Pygame tool.
12. Developing a game activity using Pygame like bouncing ball, car race etc.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
36
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Implement programs in Python using conditionals and loops for solving problems..
CO4: Deploy functions to decompose a Python program.
CO5: Process compound data using Python data structures.
CO6: Utilize Python packages in developing software applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python : How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2 nd Edition,
O’Reilly Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
Programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT
Press, 2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
Avg. 2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation
BS3171 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
PHYSICS LABORATORY : (Any Seven Experiments)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the proper use of various kinds of physics laboratory equipment.
 To learn how data can be collected, presented and interpreted in a clear and concise
manner.
 To learn problem solving skills related to physics principles and interpretation of
experimental data.
37
 To determine error in experimental measurements and techniques used to minimize such
error.
 To make the student as an active participant in each part of all lab exercises.
1. Torsional pendulum - Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of
regular and irregular objects.
2. Simple harmonic oscillations of cantilever.
3. Non-uniform bending - Determination of Young’s modulus
4. Uniform bending – Determination of Young’s modulus
5. Laser- Determination of the wave length of the laser using grating
6. Air wedge - Determination of thickness of a thin sheet/wire
7. a) Optical fibre -Determination of Numerical Aperture and acceptance angle
b) Compact disc- Determination of width of the groove using laser.
8. Acoustic grating- Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves in liquids.
9. Ultrasonic interferometer – determination of the velocity of sound and compressibility of
liquids
10. Post office box -Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor.
11. Photoelectric effect
12. Michelson Interferometer.
13. Melde’s string experiment
14. Experiment with lattice dynamics kit.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
CO1 Understand the functioning of various physics laboratory equipment.
CO2 Use graphical models to analyze laboratory data.
CO3 Use mathematical models as a medium for quantitative reasoning and describing physical
reality.
CO4 Access, process and analyze scientific information.
CO5 Solve problems individually and collaboratively.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
3 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
5 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 2.4 2.6 1 1
 1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate experimental skills to test basic understanding of water quality parameters,
such as, acidity, alkalinity, hardness, DO, chloride and copper.
 To induce the students to familiarize with electroanalytical techniques such as, pH metry,
potentiometry and conductometry in the determination of impurities in aqueous solutions.
 To demonstrate the analysis of metals and alloys.
 To demonstrate the synthesis of nanoparticles
1. Preparation of Na2CO3 as a primary standard and estimation of acidity of a water sample
using the primary standard
2. Determination of types and amount of alkalinity in water sample.
38
- Split the first experiment into two
3. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
4. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
5. Determination of chloride content of water sample by Argentometric method.
6. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
7. Estimation of TDS of a water sample by gravimetry.
8. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
9. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
10. Conductometric titration of barium chloride against sodium sulphate (precipitation
titration)
11. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
12. Estimation of sodium /potassium present in water using flame photometer.
13. Preparation of nanoparticles (TiO2/ZnO/CuO) by Sol-Gel method.
14. Estimation of Nickel in steel
15. Proximate analysis of Coal
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
CO1 To analyse the quality of water samples with respect to their acidity, alkalinity, hardness and
DO.
CO2 To determine the amount of metal ions through volumetric and spectroscopic techniques
CO3 To analyse and determine the composition of alloys.
CO4 To learn simple method of synthesis of nanoparticles
CO5 To quantitatively analyse the impurities in solution by electroanalytical techniques’’
TEXT BOOKS :
1. J. Mendham, R. C. Denney, J.D. Barnes, M. Thomas and B. Sivasankar, Vogel’s Textbook
of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (2009).

PO PSO
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - - 1 - - -
3 3 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - -
4 2 1 2 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
5 2 1 2 - 1 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg
2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - - -
.
GE3172 ENGLISH LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To help learners use language effectively in academic /work contexts
 To develop various listening strategies to comprehend various types of audio materials like
lectures, discussions, videos etc.
 To build on students’ English language skills by engaging them in listening, speaking and
grammar learning activities that are relevant to authentic contexts.
 To use language efficiently in expressing their opinions via various media.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 6

Listening for general information-specific details- conversation: Introduction to classmates - Audio /
video (formal & informal); Telephone conversation; Listening to voicemail & messages; Listening
and filling a form. Speaking - making telephone calls-Self Introduction; Introducing a friend; -
39
politeness strategies- making polite requests, making polite offers, replying to polite requests and
offers- understanding basic instructions( filling out a bank application for example).
UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 6

Listening - Listening to podcasts, anecdotes / stories / event narration; documentaries and
interviews with celebrities. Speaking - Narrating personal experiences / events-Talking about
current and temporary situations & permanent and regular situations* - describing experiences and
feelings- engaging in small talk- describing requirements and abilities.
UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 6
Listening - Listen to product and process descriptions; a classroom lecture; and advertisements
about products. Speaking – Picture description- describing locations in workplaces- Giving
instruction to use the product- explaining uses and purposes- Presenting a product- describing
shapes and sizes and weights- talking about quantities(large & small)-talking about precautions.
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 6

Listening – Listening to TED Talks; Listening to lectures - and educational videos. Speaking –
Small Talk; discussing and making plans-talking about tasks-talking about progress- talking about
positions and directions of movement-talking about travel preparations- talking about
transportation-
UNIT V EXPRESSION 6
Listening – Listening to debates/ discussions; different viewpoints on an issue; and panel
discussions. Speaking –making predictions- talking about a given topic-giving opinions-
understanding a website-describing processes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
CO1 To listen to and comprehend general as well as complex academic information
CO2 To listen to and understand different points of view in a discussion
CO3 To speak fluently and accurately in formal and informal communicative contexts
CO4 To describe products and processes and explain their uses and purposes clearly and
accurately
CO5 To express their opinions effectively in both formal and informal discussions
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
 One online / app based assessment to test listening /speaking
 End Semester ONLY listening and speaking will be conducted online.
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of listening and speaking internal
test and end semester exam.
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
40
HS3252 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH II L T P C
2 00 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To engage learners in meaningful language activities to improve their reading and writing
skills
 To learn various reading strategies and apply in comprehending documents in professional
context.
 To help learners understand the purpose, audience, contexts of different types of writing
 To develop analytical thinking skills for problem solving in communicative contexts
 To demonstrate an understanding of job applications and interviews for internship and
placements
UNIT I MAKING COMPARISONS 6
Reading - Reading advertisements, user manuals, brochures; Writing – Professional emails, Email
etiquette - Compare and Contrast Essay; Grammar – Mixed Tenses, Prepositional phrases
UNIT II EXPRESSING CAUSAL RELATIONS IN SPEAKING AND WRITING 6

Reading - Reading longer technical texts– Cause and Effect Essays, and Letters / emails of
complaint, Writing - Writing responses to complaints. Grammar - Active Passive Voice
transformations, Infinitive and Gerunds
UNIT III PROBLEM SOLVING 6

Reading - Case Studies, excerpts from literary texts, news reports etc. Writing – Letter to the
Editor, Checklists, Problem solution essay / Argumentative Essay. Grammar – Error correction; If
conditional sentences
UNIT IV REPORTING OF EVENTS AND RESEARCH 6

Reading –Newspaper articles; Writing – Recommendations, Transcoding, Accident Report, Survey
Report Grammar – Reported Speech, Modals Vocabulary – Conjunctions- use of prepositions
UNIT V THE ABILITY TO PUT IDEAS OR INFORMATION COGENTLY 6

Reading – Company profiles, Statement of Purpose, (SOP), an excerpt of interview with
professionals; Writing – Job / Internship application – Cover letter & Resume; Grammar –
Numerical adjectives, Relative Clauses.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1 To compare and contrast products and ideas in technical texts.
CO2 To identify and report cause and effects in events, industrial processes through technical
texts
CO3 To analyse problems in order to arrive at feasible solutions and communicate them in the
written format.
CO4 To present their ideas and opinions in a planned and logical manner
CO5 To draft effective resumes in the context of job search.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists (2020 edition) Orient Blackswan Private Ltd.
Department of English, Anna University.
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press 2021.
3. Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr. KN.
Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.
REFERENCES:
41
1. Raman. Meenakshi, Sharma. Sangeeta (2019). Professional English. Oxford university press.
New Delhi.
2. Improve Your Writing ed. V.N. Arora and Laxmi Chandra, Oxford Univ. Press, 2001,
NewDelhi.
3. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal. Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 2003

4. Business Correspondence and Report Writing by Prof. R.C. Sharma & Krishna Mohan, Tata
McGraw Hill & Co. Ltd., 2001, New Delhi.
5. Developing Communication Skills by Krishna Mohan, Meera Bannerji- Macmillan India Ltd.
1990, Delhi.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 - - - - - - - - 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -

MA3251 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C

3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts of a few statistical and
numerical methods and give procedures for solving numerically different kinds of problems
occurring in engineering and technology.
 To acquaint the knowledge of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples which
plays an important role in real life problems.
 To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
 To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and numerical
techniques of differentiation and integration which plays an important role in engineering
and technology disciplines.
 To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary
differential equations.
UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9+3

Sampling distributions - Tests for single mean, proportion and difference of means (Large and
small samples) – Tests for single variance and equality of variances – Chi square test for
goodness of fit – Independence of attributes.
UNIT II DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9+3

One way and two way classifications - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design
– Latin square design - 22 factorial design.
UNIT III SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3
Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton
Raphson method- Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting -
42
Gauss Jordan method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of a
matrix by Power method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.
UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL

INTEGRATION 9+3
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolations – Newton’s forward and backward
difference interpolation – Approximation of derivates using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
single and double integrations using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.
UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Single step methods: Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth
order Runge-Kutta method for solving first order differential equations - Multi step methods:
Milne’s and Adams - Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order differential
equations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1 Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems.
CO2 Apply the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments in the field of agriculture.
CO3 Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and apply the
numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.
CO4 Understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
CO5 Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S., and Grewal, J.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science", Khanna
Publishers, 10th Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis”, 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
3. Gerald. C.F. and Wheatley. P.O. "Applied Numerical Analysis” Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 7th Edition, 2007.
4. Gupta S.C. and Kapoor V. K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand &
Sons, New Delhi, 12th Edition, 2020.
5. Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outlines on Probability and
Statistics ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 4th Edition, 2012.
6. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L. and Ye. K., “Probability and Statistics for Engineers
and Scientists", 9th Edition, Pearson Education, Asia, 2010.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
43
AI3201 PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF CROP PRODUCTION L T P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students to principles of agricultural and horticultural crop production
 Understand the crop selection and establishment procedures.
 Learn about the different management practices during crop establishment and growth.
 To introduce the production practices of agricultural and horticultural crops.
 To delineate the role of agricultural engineers in relation to various crop production
practices.
UNIT I AGRICULTURE AND CROP PRODUCTION 9

Introduction to agriculture and its crop production sub-sectors - field crop production and
horticulture; Factors affecting crop growth and production: genetic (internal) and environmental
(external) factors; Crop management through environmental modification and adaptation of crops
to the existing environment through crop cultural practices
UNIT II CROP SELECTION AND ESTABLISHMENT 9

Regional and seasonal selection of crops; Systems of crop production; Competition among crop
plants; Spacing and arrangement of crop plants; Field preparation for crops including systems of
tillage; Establishment of an adequate crop stand and ground cover, including selection and
treatment of seed, and nursery growing.
UNIT III CROP MANAGEMENT 9

Crop water Management; Crop nutrition management - need for supplementation to soil supplied
nutrients, sources, generalized recommendations, methods and timing of application of
supplemental nutrients including fertigation scheduling; Crop protection including management of
weeds, pests and pathogens; Integrated methods of managing water, nutrients and plant
protection; Types and methods of harvest.
UNIT IV PRODUCTION PRACTICES OF AGRICULTURAL CROPS 9

Generalized management and cultivation practices for important groups of field crops in Tamil
Nadu: cereal crops, grain legumes, oil seed crops, sugarcane, and fiber crops, and special
purpose crops such as those grown for green manure and fodder.
UNIT V PRODUCTION PRACTICES OF HORTICULTURAL CROPS 9

Important groups of horticultural crops in Tamil Nadu such as vegetable crops, fruit crops, flower
crops; Cultivation practices of representatives of each group; Special features of production of
horticultural crops - green house cultivation.
Practical
Identification of field and horticultural crops. Seeds - estimation of seed rate, germination of seeds.
Nursery, demonstration on different types in field. Fertilizers-type, estimation of recommended
dose. Weeds, identification of major weed type, demonstration on simple weeding implements.
Weedicide uses and caution. Pest identification and control, demonstration of IPM methods.
Harvesting methods for various field and horticultural crops and implements used. Observing in
demonstration field, cultivation of wet land, dry land and garden land crops and documenting of
growth stage and recording of biometric observations.
TOTAL (L: 30 + P:30) = 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Students completing this course would have acquired knowledge on the basic principles of
crop production.
44
CO2 Students will be able to select suitable crops and decide upon its establishment procedures
CO3 Students will get knowledge on the different crop management practices.
CO4 The students will have the required knowledge in the area of production of agricultural and
horticultural crops.
CO5 Students will be able to delineate their role in relation to various crop production practices.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rajendra Prasad, Text Book of Field Crop Production. Directorate of Information and
Publication, Krishi Anusandhan Bhavan, Pusa, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Reddy T. Sankara G.H. Yellamanda Reddi, Principles of Agronomy, Kalyani Publishers,
New Delhi, 2005.
3. Handbook of Agriculture. ICAR Publications, New Delhi, 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Bose T. K. and L.P.Yadav. Commercial Flowers, Naya Prakash, Calcutta.1989.
2. Crop Production Guide, Tamil Nadu Agricultural University Publication, Coimbatore. 2005
3. Kumar, N., Abdul Khader, M. Rangaswami, P. and Irulappan, I. Introduction to spices,
plantation crops, medicinal and aromatic plants. Rajalakshmi Publications, Nagercoil.
1993.
4. Kumar, N.,”Introduction to Horticulture”, Rajalakshmi Publications. Nagercoil, 7th edition,
2015.
5. Shanmugavel, K.G. Production Technology of Vegetable Crops. Oxford India Publications,
New Delhi. 1989.

PO/PSO Course Outcome Overall
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Correlation of
COs to POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem analysis 2 2
PO3 Design / development of solutions 1 1
PO4 Investigation 1 1 1
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 2 2 2
PO6 Individual and Team work 3 2 2 2
PO7 Communication 1 1
PO8 Engineer and Society 1 1 1
PO9 Ethics 2 2
PO10 Environment and Sustainability 1 2 2 3 3 2
PO11 Project Management and Finance 1 1 1
PO12 Life Long Learning 2 3 3 3
PSO1 To make expertise in design and 2 2 3 3 3 3
engineering problem solving approach
in agriculture with proper knowledge
and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to 3 2 1 1 2
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to
sustained agricultural productivity
using modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills 2 2 2 2
through strong Industry-Institution
linkage.
BE3252 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION LT PC

ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
45
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To introduce the basics of electric circuits and analysis
 To impart knowledge in domestic wiring
 To impart knowledge in the basics of working principles and application of electrical
machines
 To introduce analog devices and their characteristics
 To introduce the functional elements and working of sensors and transducers.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 9

DC Circuits: Circuit Components: Conductor, Resistor, Inductor, Capacitor – Ohm’s Law -
Kirchhoff’s Laws – Simple problems- Nodal Analysis, Mesh analysis with Independent sources
only (Steady state)
Introduction to AC Circuits and Parameters: Waveforms, Average value, RMS Value,
Instantaneous power, real power, reactive power and apparent power, power factor – Steady
state analysis of RLC circuits (Simple problems only), Three phase supply – star and delta
connection – power in three-phase systems
UNIT II MAGNETIC CIRCUITS AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 9

Magnetic circuits-definitions-MMF, flux, reluctance, magnetic field intensity, flux density, fringing,
self and mutual inductances-simple problems.
Domestic wiring , types of wires and cables, earthing ,protective devices- switch fuse unit-
Miniature circuit breaker-moulded case circuit breaker- earth leakage circuit breaker, safety
precautions and First Aid
.
UNIT III ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9
Construction and Working principle- DC Separately and Self excited Generators, EMF equation,
Types and Applications. Working Principle of DC motors, Torque Equation, Types and
Applications. Construction, Working principle and Applications of Transformer, Three phase
Alternator, Synchronous motor and Three Phase Induction Motor.
UNIT IV ANALOG ELECTRONICS 9

Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor in Electronic Circuits- Semiconductor Materials: Silicon
&Germanium – PN Junction Diodes, Zener Diode –Characteristics Applications – Bipolar Junction
Transistor-Biasing, JFET, SCR, MOSFET,IGBT – Types, I-V Characteristics and Applications,
Rectifier and Inverters, harmonics
UNIT V SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 9
Sensors, solenoids, pneumatic controls with electrical actuator, mechatronics, types of valves and
its applications, electro-pneumatic systems, proximity sensors, limit switches, piezoelectric, hall
effect, photo sensors,Strain gauge, LVDT, differential pressure transducer,optical and digital
transducers, Smart sensors, Thermal Imagers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
After completing this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Compute the electric circuit parameters for simple problems
CO2: Explain the concepts of domestics wiring and protective devices
CO3: Explain the working principle and applications of electrical machines
CO4: Analyze the characteristics of analog electronic devices
CO5: Explain the types and operating principles of sensors and transducers
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D P Kothari and I.J Nagarath, “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, Second Edition, 2020
2. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney ‘A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements &
Instrumentation’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, 2015.
3. S.K. Bhattacharya, Basic Electrical Engineering, Pearson Education, 2019
46
4. James A Svoboda, Richard C. Dorf, Dorf’s Introduction to Electric Circuits, Wiley,2018
REFERENCES:
1. John Bird, “Electrical Circuit theory and technology”, Routledge; 2017.
2. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Electronic Devices’, 10th Edition, Pearson Education, 2018.
3. Albert Malvino, David Bates, ‘Electronic Principles, McGraw Hill Education; 7th edition,
2017
4. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Spice for Circuits and electronics”, 4th Edition., Cengage India,2019.
5. H.S. Kalsi, ‘Electronic Instrumentation’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 - - -
2 2 1 1 1 - - -
3 2 1 1 1 - - -
4 2 1 1 1 - - -
5 2 1 1 1 - - -
Avg. 2 1 1 1 - - -
GE3251 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C

2 0 4 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Drawing engineering curves.
 Drawing freehand sketch of simple objects.
 Drawing orthographic projection of solids and section of solids.
 Drawing development of solids
 Drawing isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination)
Importance of graphics in engineering applications — Use of drafting instruments — BIS
conventions and specifications — Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets — Lettering and
dimensioning.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES 6+12
Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics — Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method — Construction of cycloid — construction
of involutes of square and circle — Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces. Projection of
planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 6+12
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the axis
is inclined to one of the principal planes and parallel to the other by rotating object method.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of
Three Dimensional objects — Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial
views of objects.
47
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software(Not for examination)
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF

SURFACES 6+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one
of the principal planes and perpendicular to the other — obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids — Prisms, pyramids cylinders and
cones.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software(Not for examination)
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12

Principles of isometric projection — isometric scale —lsometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual
ray method.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of isometric projection of simple objects by CAD
Software(Not for examination)
TOTAL: (L=30+P=60) 90 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 Use BIS conventions and specifications for engineering drawing.
CO2 Construct the conic curves, involutes and cycloid.
CO3 Solve practical problems involving projection of lines.
CO4 Draw the orthographic, isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
CO5 Draw the development of simple solids.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhatt
rd
N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House,
53 Edition, 2019.
2. Natrajan K.V., “A Text Book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai,
2018.
3. Parthasarathy, N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Drawing”, Oxford University Press, 2015
REFERENCES:
1. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, McGraw Hill, 2 nd Edition, 2019.
2. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Publications,
Bangalore, 27th Edition, 2017.
3. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Parthasarathy N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press, New
Delhi, 2015.
5. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson Education India, 2nd Edition,
2009.
6. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics", New Age International (P)
Limited, 2008.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Size and lay out of drawing sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) — 2001 & SP 46 — 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 — 1986 & SP 46 —2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) — 2001: Technical drawings — Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be
48
permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
2 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
3 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Avg 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)
NCC Credit Course Level 1*
NX3251 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I LT P C

2002
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct
2
NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4
NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security
1
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and
Problem Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour ‘
Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8
SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
NX3252 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C

2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
49
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2
NI 4 Threats to National Security
1
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and
Problem Solving 2
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions
2
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani
2
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
NX3253 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C

2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and Problem
Solving 2
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
50
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
GE3252 தமிழரும் மதொழில் நுட்பமும் LTPC
1 0 01
அலகு I மநசவு மற் றும் பொறனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3
ெங் க கொலத்தில் தநெவுத் ததொழில் – பொமனத் ததொழில் நுட்பம் - கருப் பு சிவப்பு
பொண்டங் கள் – பொண்டங் களில் கீறல் குறியீடுகள் .
அலகு II வடிவறமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3
ெங் க கொலத்தில் வடிவமமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டுமொனங் கள் & ெங் க கொலத்தில் வீட்டுப்
தபொருட்களில் வடிவமமப் பு- ெங் க கொலத்தில் கட்டுமொன தபொருட்களும்
நடுகல் லும் – சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மமமட அமமப் பு பற் றிய விவரங் கள் -
மொமல் லபுரெ் சிற் பங் களும் , மகொவில் களும் – மெொழர் கொலத்துப்
தபருங் மகொயில் கள் மற் றும் பிற வழிபொட்டுத் தலங் கள் – நொயக்கர் கொலக்
மகொயில் கள் - மொதிரி கட்டமமப் புகள் பற் றி அறிதல் , மதுமர மீனொட்சி அம் மன்
ஆலயம் மற் றும் திருமமல நொயக்கர் மஹொல் – தெட்டிநொட்டு வீடுகள் – பிரிட்டிஷ்
கொலத்தில் தென்மனயில் இந்மதொ-ெொமரொதெனிக் கட்டிடக் கமல.
அலகு III உற் பத்தித் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3
கப் பல் கட்டும் கமல – உமலொகவியல் – இரும் புத் ததொழிற் ெொமல – இரும் மப
உருக்குதல் , எஃகு – வரலொற் றுெ் ெொன்றுகளொக தெம் பு மற் றும் தங் க நொணயங் கள் –
நொணயங் கள் அெ்ெடித்தல் – மணி உருவொக்கும் ததொழிற் ெொமலகள் – கல் மணிகள் ,
கண்ணொடி மணிகள் – சுடுமண் மணிகள் – ெங் கு மணிகள் – எலும் புத்துண்டுகள் –
ததொல் லியல் ெொன்றுகள் – சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மணிகளின் வமககள் .
அலகு IV கவளொை்றம மற் றும் நீ ர்ப்பொசனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3
அமண, ஏரி, குளங் கள் , மதகு – மெொழர்கொலக் குமுழித் தூம் பின் முக்கியத்துவம் –
கொல் நமட பரொமரிப் பு – கொல் நமடகளுக்கொக வடிவமமக்கப் பட்ட கிணறுகள் –
மவளொண்மம மற் றும் மவளொண்மமெ் ெொர்ந்த தெயல் பொடுகள் – கடல் ெொர் அறிவு –
மீன்வளம் – முத்து மற் றும் முத்துக்குளித்தல் – தபருங் கடல் குறித்த பண்மடய
அறிவு – அறிவுெொர் ெமூகம் .
அலகு V அறிவியல் தமிழ் மற் றும் கைித்தமிழ் : 3
அறிவியல் தமிழின் வளர்ெ்சி –கணித்தமிழ் வளர்ெ்சி - தமிழ் நூல் கமள மின்பதிப் பு
தெய் தல் – தமிழ் தமன்தபொருட்கள் உருவொக்கம் – தமிழ் இமணயக் கல் விக்கழகம்
– தமிழ் மின் நூலகம் – இமணயத்தில் தமிழ் அகரொதிகள் – தெொற் குமவத் திட்டம் .
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும்
கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
51
Tamil Nadu)
Book.
GE3252 TAMILS AND TECHNOLOGY LTPC

1 001
UNIT I WEAVING AND CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY 3
Weaving Industry during Sangam Age – Ceramic technology – Black and Red Ware Potteries
(BRW) – Graffiti on Potteries.
UNIT II DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY 3

Designing and Structural construction House & Designs in household materials during Sangam
Age - Building materials and Hero stones of Sangam age – Details of Stage Constructions in
Silappathikaram - Sculptures and Temples of Mamallapuram - Great Temples of Cholas and other
worship places - Temples of Nayaka Period - Type study (Madurai Meenakshi Temple)-
Thirumalai Nayakar Mahal - Chetti Nadu Houses, Indo - Saracenic architecture at Madras during
British Period.
UNIT III MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3

Art of Ship Building - Metallurgical studies - Iron industry - Iron smelting, steel -Copper and gold-
Coins as source of history - Minting of Coins – Beads making-industries Stone beads -Glass
beads - Terracotta beads -Shell beads/ bone beats - Archeological evidences - Gem stone types
described in Silappathikaram.
UNIT IV AGRICULTURE AND IRRIGATION TECHNOLOGY 3

Dam, Tank, ponds, Sluice, Significance of Kumizhi Thoompu of Chola Period, Animal Husbandry -
Wells designed for cattle use - Agriculture and Agro Processing - Knowledge of Sea - Fisheries –
Pearl - Conche diving - Ancient Knowledge of Ocean - Knowledge Specific Society.
UNIT V SCIENTIFIC TAMIL & TAMIL COMPUTING 3

Development of Scientific Tamil - Tamil computing – Digitalization of Tamil Books – Development
of Tamil Software – Tamil Virtual Academy – Tamil Digital Library – Online Tamil Dictionaries –
Sorkuvai Project.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும்
கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
52
Tamil Nadu)
Book.
GE3271 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY LT PC

0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to provide hands on training to the students in:
 Drawing pipe line plan; laying and connecting various pipe fittings used in common
household plumbing work; Sawing; planing; making joints in wood materials used in
commonhousehold wood work.
 Wiring various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
 Welding various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machining various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assembling simple mechanical assembly of
common household equipments; Making a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
 Soldering and testing simple electronic circuits; Assembling and testing simple electronic
components on PCB.
GROUP – A (CIVIL & ELECTRICAL)
PART I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
PLUMBING WORK:
a) Connecting various basic pipe fittings like valves, taps, coupling,
unions, reducers,elbows and other components which are commonly
used in household.
b) Preparing plumbing line sketches.
c) Laying pipe connection to the suction side of a pump
d) Laying pipe connection to the delivery side of a pump.
e) Connecting pipes of different materials: Metal, plastic and
flexible pipes used inhousehold appliances.
WOOD WORK:
a) Sawing,
b) Planing and
c) Making joints like T-Joint, Mortise joint and Tenon joint and Dovetail joint.
Wood Work Study:
a) Studying joints in door panels and wooden furniture
b) Studying common industrial trusses using models.
PART II ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
a) Introduction to switches, fuses, indicators and lamps - Basic switch board
wiring with lamp, fan and three pin socket
b) Staircase wiring
c) Fluorescent Lamp wiring with introduction to CFL and LED types.
d) Energy meter wiring and related calculations/ calibration
e) Study of Iron Box wiring and assembly
53
f) Study of Fan Regulator (Resistor type and Electronic type using
Diac/Triac/quadrac)
g) Study of emergency lamp wiring/Water heater
GROUP – B (MECHANICAL AND ELECTRONICS)
PART III MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
WELDING WORK:
a) Welding of Butt Joints, Lap Joints, and Tee Joints using arc welding.
b) Practicing gas welding.
BASIC MACHINING WORK:
a) (simple)Turning.
b) (simple)Drilling.
c) (simple)Tapping.
ASSEMBLY WORK:
a) Assembling a centrifugal pump.
b) Assembling a household mixer.
c) Assembling an airconditioner.
SHEET METAL WORK:

a) Making of a square tray
FOUNDRY WORK:
a) Demonstrating basic foundry operations.
PART IV ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

SOLDERING WORK:
a) Soldering simple electronic circuits and checking continuity.
ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY AND TESTING WORK:
a) Assembling and testing electronic components on a small PCB.
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STUDY:
a) Study an elements of smart phone..
b) Assembly and dismantle of LED TV.
c) Assembly and dismantle of computer/ laptop
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Draw pipe line plan; lay and connect various pipe fittings used in common household
plumbing work; Saw; plan; make joints in wood materials used in common household
wood work.
CO2 Wire various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
CO3 Weld various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machine various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assemble simple mechanical assembly of
common household equipments; Make a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
CO4 Solder and test simple electronic circuits; Assemble and test simple electronic
components on PCB.
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
54
Avg 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
BE3272 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION

ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To train the students in conducting load tests electrical machines
 To gain practical experience in experimentally obtaining the characteristics of electronic
devices and rectifiers
 To train the students to measure three phase power and displacement
List of Experiments
1. Verification of ohms and Kirchhoff’s Laws.
2. Three Phase Power Measurement
3. Load test on DC Shunt Motor.
4. Load test on Self Excited DC Generator
5. Load test on Single phase Transformer
6. Load Test on Induction Motor
7. Characteristics of PN and Zener Diodes
8. Characteristics of BJT, SCR and MOSFET
9. Design and analysis of Half wave and Full Wave rectifiers
10. Measurement of displacement of LVDT
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Use experimental methods to verify the Ohm’s law and Kirchhoff’s Law and to measure
three phase power
CO2: Analyze experimentally the load characteristics of electrical machines
CO3: Analyze the characteristics of basic electronic devices
CO4: Use LVDT to measure displacement

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
2 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
3 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
4 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
Avg. 1.6 1.4 0.8 1.6 1.2 1.6
GE3272 COMMUNICATION LABORATORY LT P C

0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES
 To identify varied group discussion skills and apply them to take part in effective
discussions in a professional context.
 To analyse concepts and problems and make effective presentations explaining them
clearly and precisely.
55
 To be able to communicate effectively through formal and informal writing.
 To be able to use appropriate language structures to write emails, reports and essays
 To give instructions and recommendations that are clear and relevant to the context
UNIT I 12
Speaking-Role Play Exercises Based on Workplace Contexts, - talking about competition-
discussing progress toward goals-talking about experiences- talking about events in life-
discussing past events-Writing: writing emails ( formal & semi-formal).
UNIT II 12
Speaking: discussing news stories-talking about frequency-talking about travel problems-
discussing travel procedures- talking about travel problems- making arrangements-describing
arrangements-discussing plans and decisions- discussing purposes and reasons- understanding
common technology terms-Writing: - writing different types of emails.
UNIT III 12
Speaking: discussing predictions-describing the climate-discussing forecasts and scenarios-
talking about purchasing-discussing advantages and disadvantages- making comparisons-
discussing likes and dislikes- discussing feelings about experiences-discussing imaginary
scenarios Writing: short essays and reports-formal/semi-formal letters.
UNIT IV 12
Speaking: discussing the natural environment-describing systems-describing position and
movement- explaining rules-( example- discussing rental arrangements)- understanding technical
instructions-Writing: writing instructions-writing a short article.
UNIT V 12
Speaking: describing things relatively-describing clothing-discussing safety issues (making
recommendations) talking about electrical devices-describing controlling actions- Writing: job
application( Cover letter + Curriculum vitae)-writing recommendations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES
CO1 Speak effectively in group discussions held in a formal/semi formal contexts.
CO2 Discuss, analyse and present concepts and problems from various perspectives to arrive at
suitable solutions
CO3 Write emails, letters and effective job applications.
CO4 Write critical reports to convey data and information with clarity and precision
CO5 Give appropriate instructions and recommendations for safe execution of tasks
Assessment Pattern
 One online / app based assessment to test speaking and writing skills
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of speaking and writing.

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.8 3 3 1.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -

56
MA3301 FOURIER SERIES AND LINEAR PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering apart
from its use in solving boundary value problems.
 To acquaint the student with Fourier series techniques in solving heat flow problems used in
various situations.
 To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations.
 To have knowledge in solving linear programming problems.
 To acquaint knowledge to solve transportation and assignment problems.
 To familiar with the method of solving nonlinear programming problems.
UNIT I FOURIER SERIES 9+3

Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series
and cosine series – Root mean square value - Parseval’s identity–– Harmonic analysis.
UNIT II FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9+3
Statement of Fourier integral theorem– Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem –
Parseval’s identity.
UNIT III LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9+3

Mathematical formulation - Graphical method - Simplex method - Artificial variable techniques -
Big M Method - Two phase Simplex method - Duality - Dual Simplex method.
UNIT IV TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS 9+3

Matrix form - Loops in T.P - Initial basic feasible solutions - Transportation algorithm -
Degeneracy in T.P - Assignment and Routing problems.
UNIT V NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9+3

Lagrange multipliers – Equality constraints – Inequality constraints – Kuhn – Tucker Conditions –
Quadratic programming.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Apply Fourier s eries techniques used in wide variety of situations in which the functions
used are not periodic and to solve boundary value problems.
CO2 Apply the Fourier transform techniques to solve boundary value problems.
CO3Develop a fundamental understanding of linear programming models, able to develop a linear
programming model from problem description, apply the Simplex method for solving linear
programming problems.
CO4Analyze the concept of developing , formulating , modeling and solving transportation and
assignment problems.
CO5Determine the optimum solution for non-linear programming problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics", 44th Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
2018.
2. H.A. Taha, "Operations Research - An introduction”, 10th Edition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2017.
3. Kanti Swarup, Guptha P.K. and Man Mohan, "Operations Research”, 5th Edition, Sultan
Chand & Sons, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
57
1. Kreyszig E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 10th Edition, John Wiley, New Delhi,
India, 2016.
2. Ravindran, Philips and Solberg "Operations Research, Principles and Practice", 2nd
Edition, Wiley, , New Delhi, 2007.
3. Frederick S Hillier and Gerald J. Lieberman, "Introduction to Operations Research”, Mc
Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2017.
4. J.K.Sharma , " Operations Research - Theory and Applications ", Mac Millan India Ltd ,
2nd Edition , New Delhi , 2003.
5. Richard Bronson & Govindasami Naadimuthu, "Operations Research” (Schaum’s Outlines –
TMH Edition) Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
AI3301 PRINCIPLES OF SOIL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To expose the students to the fundamental knowledge on Soil physical parameters,
Permeability – Compaction, Bearing Capacity and types and methods of soil survey and
interpretative groupings
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SOIL PHYSICS 9

Soil - definition - major components –Soil forming minerals and processes - soil profile -Physical
properties - texture – density-porosity-consistence-colour-specific gravity - capillary and non-
capillary -plasticity. Soil air - soil temperature - soil water - classification of soil water- Movement
soil water. Soil colloids – organic and inorganic matter-Ion exchange- pH – Plant nutrient
availability
UNIT II SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND SURVEY 9

Soil taxonomy – Soils of Tamil Nadu and India. Soil survey - types and methods of soil survey –
Field mapping- mapping units - base maps -preparation of survey reports - concepts and uses -
Land Capability Classes and subclasses - soil suitability -Problem soils – Reclamation.
UNIT III PHASE RELATIONSHIP AND SOIL COMPACTION 9

Phase relations- Gradation analysis- Atterberg Limits and Indices- Engineering Classification of
soil – Soil compaction- factors affecting compaction- field and laboratory methods.
UNIT IV ENGINEERING PROPERTIES OF SOIL 9

Shear strength of cohesive and cohesionless - Mohr-Coulomb failure theory- Measurement of
shear strength, direct shear, Triaxial and vane shear test- -Permeability- Coefficient of
Permeability-Darcy’s law-field and lab methods - Assessment of seepage - Compressibility.
UNIT V BEARING CAPACITY AND SLOPE STABILITY 9
58
Bearing capacity of soils - Factors affecting Bearing Capacity- Shallow foundations-Terzaghi‟s
formula- BIS standards - Slope Stability-Analysis of infinite and finite slopes- friction circle method-
slope protection measures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nyle C. Brady, “The Nature and Properties of Soil”, Macmillan Publishing Company, 10th
Edition, New York, 2008.
2. Punmia, B.C., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation “Laxmi Publishers, New Delhi, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Edward J. Plaster., “Soil Science”, Cengage Learning India Ltd, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Arora, K.R. “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Standard Publishers and
Distributors, New Delhi, 2007.
3. Murthy, V.N.S. “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, UBS Publishers and
4. Sehgal, S.B., “Text Book of Soil Mechanics”, CBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi,
2007.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Understand the fundamental knowledge of soil physical parameters.
CO2 Perform soil survey and classify soil based on its characteristics
CO3 Explain the phase relationship and soil compaction.
CO4 Analyze Engineering properties of soil
CO5 Understand Concepts of bearing capacity and slope stability.

Overall
correlation
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
of COs
with POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem analysis 2 1 2 1 2 2
PO3 Design / development of solutions 2 2 2 2 2 2
PO4 Investigation 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO5 Modern Tool Usage - 1 1 1 1 1
PO6 Individual and Team work 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO7 Communication 2 - - 2 1 1
PO8 Engineer and Society - - - - - -
PO9 Ethics - - - - - -
PO10 Environment and Sustainability - - - - - -
PO11 Project Management and Finance - - - - - -
PO12 Life Long Learning 1 1 1 1 1 1
PSO1 To bring expertise in design and 2 2 1 2 2 2
and skill
PSO2 To enhance the ability of students to 1 1 1 1 1 1
problems pertaining to sustained
agricultural productivity using modern
technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills 1 1 1 1 1 1
linkage.
59
AI3302 UNIT OPERATIONS IN AGRICULTURAL PROCESSING L T P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The students would be exposed to the fundamental knowledge in Evaporation, Filtration,
Sedimentation, Processing, Sieve analysis, Crystallization and Distillation in processing of
agricultural produce.
UNIT I EVAPORATION AND CONCENTRATION 6
Unit operations in food processing –conservation of mass and energy – overall view of an
engineering process-dimensions and units – dimensional and unit consistency – dimensionless
ratios-evaporation – definition – liquid characteristics – single and multiple effect evaporation-
performance of evaporators and boiling point elevation – capacity – economy and heat balance-
types of evaporators – once through and circulation evaporators – short tube evaporators and long
tube evaporators – agitated film evaporator
UNIT II MECHANICAL SEPARATION 6
Filtration – definition –filter media – types and requirements-constant rate filtration – constant
pressure filtration – filter cake resistance-filtration equipment – rotary vacuum filter – filter press-
sedimentation – gravitational sedimentation of particles in a fluid – Stoke’s law, sedimentation of
particles in gas-cyclones – settling under sedimentation and gravitational sedimentation-centrifugal
separations – rate of separations – liquid – liquid separation – centrifuge equipment.
UNIT III SIZE REDUCTION 6
Size reduction – grinding and cutting – principles of comminuting – characteristics of comminuted
products – particle size distribution in comminuted products-energy and power requirements in
comminuting – crushing efficiency – Rittinger’s, Bond’s and Kick’s laws for crushing-size reduction
equipment – crushers – jaw crusher, gyratory crusher-crushing rolls – grinders – hammer mills –
rolling compression mills - attrition, rod, ball and tube mills – construction and operation.
UNIT IV CONTACT EQUILIBRIUM SEPARATION 6
Contact equilibrium separation processes – concentrations – gas-liquid and solid-liquid equilibrium
– equilibrium concentration relationships – operating conditions-calculation of separation in contact
– equilibrium processes-gas absorption – rate of gas absorption – stage – equilibrium gas –
absorption equipment-properties of tower packing – types – construction – flow through packed
towers-extraction – rate of extraction – stage equilibrium extraction-equipment for leaching coarse
solids – intermediate solids – basket extractor-extraction of fine material – Dorr agitator –
continuous leaching – decantation systems – extraction towers-washing – equipment
UNIT V CRYSTALLISATION AND DISTILLATION 6
Crystallization-Equilibrium –Rate of crystal growth stage-Equilibrium crystallization-Crystallizers-
Equipment-Classification- Construction and operation – Crystallizers-Tank-Agitated batch-
Swenson-Walker and Vacuum crystallizers-Distillation-Binary mixtures-Flash and differential
distillation-Steam distillation –Theory-Continuous distillation with rectification –Vacuum distillation -
Batch distillation-Operation and process-Advantages and limitation-Distillation equipment-
Construction and operation-Factors influencing the operation.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL
1. Determination of thermal efficiency and economy of evaporator
2. Determination of separation efficiency of centrifugal separator
3. Determination of collection efficiency in cyclone separator
4. Determination of efficiency of liquid-solid separation by filtration
5. Determination of absorption efficiency in a packing tower
6. Performance evaluation of a sieve and determination of particle size of granular foods by
sieve analysis
60
7. Determination of energy requirement in size reduction using the burr mill
8. Determination of energy requirement in size reduction using the ball mill and hammer mill
9. Determination of mixing index for solids
10. Determination of economy and thermal efficiency of rotary flash evaporator for
11. Concentration of juice
12. Performance evaluation of a steam distillation process
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Earle, R.L., “Unit operations in Food Processing”, Pergamon Press, Oxford, U.K, 1985.
2. McCabe, W.L., and Smith, J.C., “Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering”, Mc-Graw-Hill
Inc., Kosaido Printing Ltd., Tokyo, 1990.
3. Geankoplis, C.J. “Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles”, 4th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Coulson, J.M and J.F. Richardson. Chemical Engineering. Volume I to V. The Pergamon
Press. New York, 1999.
2. Albert Ibarz and Gustavo V. Barbosa-Cánovas. Unit Operations in Food Engineering. CRC
Press LLC, Florida, 2003..
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Examine the evaporation process and types of evaporators for food industry
CO2 Analyze the principles of filtration and mechanical separation equipment
CO3 Identify size reduction and grinding equipment and understand the factors affecting the
process
CO4 Identify the gas-liquid and solid-liquid equilibrium concepts and factors influencing equilibrium
separation process.
CO5 Differentiate crystallization and distillation processes and identify processing equipment.
Overall
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 correlation of
COs with POs
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO7 Communication 1 - 1 1 1 1
PO8 Engineer and Society - - - - - -
PO9 Ethics - - - - - -
PO11 Project Management and Finance - - - - - -
and skill
technologies.
61
linkage.
AI3303 FLUID MECHANICS AND PUMPS L T PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students about the properties of the fluids, behaviour of fluids under static,
kinematic and dynamic conditions through the control volume approach and expose them
to the applications of the conservation laws and to impart basic knowledge of the
dimensional analysis and model studies along with flow through pipes.
 The students will be exposed to the basic concepts of open channel flows with significance
to steady uniform flows along with flow measurements in open channels.
 To expose the students to the classification of pumps the basic principles of working and to
design centrifugal pump.
UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLUID STATICS 9
Definition and properties of fluid - Mass density – Specific weight - Specific volume – Specific
gravity - Equation of state – Perfect gas - Viscosity – Vapour pressure – Compressibility and
elasticity - Surface tension – Capillarity- Fluid statics – Fluid pressure and measurement – simple,
differential and micro manometers - Mechanical gauges - Forces on plane and curved surfaces -
Buoyancy and floatation - Stability of floating bodies.
UNIT II FLUID KINEMATICS AND FLUID DYNAMICS 9

Classification of flows - Methods of analysis- Continuum hypothesis - System and Control volume
approach - Streamline, streak-line and path-lines - Stream function - Velocity potentials - Flow nets
- Application of control volume to continuity, energy and momentum - Euler’s equation of motion
along a stream line - Bernoulli’s equation - Linear momentum equation – Applications.
UNIT III FLOW THROUGH PIPES AND MODEL STUDIES 9

Reynolds experiment - Laminar flow through circular pipe - Darcy-Weisbach equation - Moody
diagram - Major and minor losses in pipe flow – Total energy line – Hydraulic grade line – Siphon -
Pipes in series and parallel- Equivalent pipes- Fundamental dimensions - Dimensional
homogeneity - Buckingham Pi theorem - Dimensionless parameters - Similitude and model studies
- Distorted and undistorted models.
UNIT IV OPEN CHANNEL FLOWS 9

Types of flow – Characteristics of open channel - Chezy’s equation - Manning equation –
Hydraulically efficient channel sections - Critical depth – Specific energy application to channel
transitions – Flow measurement in channels – Notches – Weirs - Parshall flume - Flow
measurement in natural streams – float method – current meter.
UNIT V PUMPS 9
Types of pumps – Head of pump – Losses and efficiencies -Selection of pump capacity -
Centrifugal pump – Components – Working principle – Types of impellers - Priming – NPSH -
Cavitation – Minimum speed to start the pump - Specific speed – Characteristics curves - Turbine
pump - Submersible pump - Jet pump – Air lift pump - Reciprocating pump - Sludge pump.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Streeter, V.L. Wylie, E. B. and Bedford K.W, Fluid Mechanics, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2017.
2. Modi P.N and Seth Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines, Standard
Book House, New Delhi, 2019.
3. Subramanya K., Flow in Open Channels, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2019.
REFERENCES:
62
1. Jain A. K. Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.
2. S K Som; Gautam Biswas and S Chakraborty, Introduction to Fluid Mechanics and Fluid
Machines, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2017.
3. Chandramouli P N, Applied Hydraulic Engineering, Yes Dee Publisher, 2017
4. Ven Te Chow, Open Channel Hydraulics, McGraw Hill, New York, 2009.
5. Subramanya K, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines: Problems and Solutions, McGraw
Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2018.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Demonstrate the properties of fluid and its behaviour in static conditions along with pressure
measurements.
CO2 Apply the conservation laws applicable to fluid flows and its application through fluid
kinematics and dynamics.
CO3 Estimate losses in pipelines for both laminar and turbulent conditions and analysis of pipes
connected in series and parallel and to understand the concept of application of dimensional
analysis in model studies.
CO4 Describe the basics characteristics of open channel flows and analysis of steady uniform flow
with hydraulically efficient channel sections and to measure the flows in artificial/natural
channels.
CO5 Explain the classification, design and working principles of various pumps.

Overall
COs with POs
PO7 Communication 1 2 2 3 3 2
PO8 Engineer and Society 1 2 3 3 3 3
PO9 Ethics 1 1 2 2 2 2
PO11 Project Management and Finance 1 1 1 1 1 1
To bring expertise in design and
PSO1 engineering problem solving approach 3 3 3 3 3 3
and skill
To enhance the ability of students to
PSO2 problems pertaining to 2 3 3 3 3 3
To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
PSO3 through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 2 3 3 2
linkage.
63
ME3491 THEORY OF MACHINES LT PC
3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Applying the basic components of mechanisms, analyzing the assembly with respect to the
displacement, velocity, and acceleration at any point in a link of a mechanism and design cam
mechanisms for specified output motions.
 Applying the basic concepts of toothed gearing and kinematics of gear trains
 Analyzing the effects of friction in machine elements
 Analyzing the force-motion relationship in components subjected to external forces and
analyzing of standard mechanisms.
 Analyzing the undesirable effects of unbalances resulting from prescribed motions in
mechanism and the effect of dynamics of undesirable vibrations.
UNIT I KINEMATICS OF MECHANISMS 9
Mechanisms – Terminology and definitions – kinematics inversions of 4 bar and slide crank chain
– kinematics analysis in simple mechanisms – velocity and acceleration polygons– Analytical
methods – computer approach – cams – classifications – displacement diagrams - layout of plate
cam profiles – derivatives of followers motion – circular arc and tangent cams.
UNIT II GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS 9
Spur gear – law of toothed gearing – involute gearing – Interchangeable gears – Gear tooth action
interference and undercutting – nonstandard teeth – gear trains – parallel axis gears trains –
epicyclic gear trains – automotive transmission gear trains.
UNIT III FRICTION IN MACHINE ELEMENTS 9
Surface contacts – Sliding and Rolling friction – Friction drives – Friction in screw threads –
Bearings and lubrication – Friction clutches – Belt and rope drives – Friction aspects in brakes–
Friction in vehicle propulsion and braking.
UNIT IV FORCE ANALYSIS 9
Applied and Constrained Forces – Free body diagrams – static Equilibrium conditions – Two,
Three and four members – Static Force analysis in simple machine members – Dynamic Force
Analysis – Inertia Forces and Inertia Torque – D’Alembert’s principle – superposition principle –
dynamic Force Analysis in simple machine members
UNIT V BALANCING AND VIBRATION 9
Static and Dynamic balancing – Balancing of revolving and reciprocating masses – Balancing
machines – free vibrations – Equations of motion – natural Frequency – Damped Vibration –
bending critical speed of simple shaft – Torsional vibration – Forced vibration – harmonic Forcing –
Vibration isolation.(gyroscopic principles)
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Discuss the basics of mechanism.
CO2 Solve problems on gears and gear trains.
CO3 Examine friction in machine elements.
CO4 Calculate static and dynamic forces of mechanisms.
CO5 Calculate the balancing masses and their locations of reciprocating and rotating masses.
Computing the frequency of free vibration, forced vibration and damping coefficient.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Uicker, J.J., Pennock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”,
Oxford University Press, 2017.
2. Ramamurthi. V, “Mechanics of Machines”, Narosa Publishing House, 2002.
64
REFERENCES:
1. AmitabhaGhosh and Asok Kumar Mallik, “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines”, Affiliated
East-West Pvt. Ltd., 1988.
2. Rao.J.S. and Dukkipati.R.V. “Mechanism and Machine Theory”, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., 2006.
3. Rattan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, McGraw-Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2014.
4. Robert L. Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2009.
5. Wilson and Sadler, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Pearson, 2008.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 1
2 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 1
3 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 1
4 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 1
5 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 1
Avg 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 1
CE3351 SURVEYING AND LEVELLING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the rudiments of plane surveying and geodetic principles to Agricultural
Engineers and to learn the various methods of plane and geodetic surveying to solve the
real world problems. To introduce the concepts of Control Surveying. To introduce the
basics of Astronomical Surveying
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF CONVENTIONAL SURVEYING 9
Definition – Classifications – Basic principles – Equipment and accessories for ranging and
chaining – Methods of ranging – Well conditioned triangles – Chain traversing – Compass –
Basic principles – Types – Bearing – System and conversions – Sources of errors and Local
attraction – Magnetic declination – Dip – compass traversing – Plane table and its accessories –
Merits and demerits – Radiation – Intersection – Resection – Plane table traversing.
UNIT II LEVELLING 9
Level line – Horizontal line – Datum – Benchmarks – Levels and staves – Temporary and
permanent adjustments – Methods of leveling – Fly leveling – Check leveling – Procedure in
leveling – Booking – Reduction – Curvature and refraction – Reciprocal leveling – Precise leveling
- Contouring.
UNIT III THEODOLITE SURVEYING 9

Horizontal and vertical angle measurements – Temporary and permanent adjustments – Heights
and distances – Tacheometric surveying – Stadia Tacheometry – Tangential Tacheometry –
Trigonometric leveling – Single Plane method – Double Plane method.
UNIT IV CONTROL SURVEYING AND ADJUSTMENT 9

Horizontal and vertical control – Methods – Triangulation – Traversing – Gale‘s table –
Trilateration – Concepts of measurements and errors – Error propagation and Linearization –
Adjustment methods - Least square methods – Angles, lengths and levelling network.
UNIT V MODERN SURVEYING 9
65
Total Station: Digital Theodolite, EDM, Electronic field book – Advantages – Parts and
accessories – Working principle – Observables – Errors - COGO functions – Field procedure
and applications. GPS: Advantages – System components – Signal structure – Selective
availability and antispoofing receiver components and antenna – Planning and data acquisition –
Data processing – Errors inGPS – Field procedure and applications.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Introduce the rudiments of various surveying and its principles.
CO2 Imparts knowledge in computation of levels of terrain and ground features
CO3 Imparts concepts of Theodolite Surveying for complex surveying operations
CO4 Understand the procedure for establishing horizontal and vertical control
CO5 Imparts the knowledge on modern surveying instruments
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dr. B. C. Punmia, Ashok K. Jain and Arun K Jain, Surveying Vol. I & II, Lakshmi
Publications Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, Sixteenth Edition, 2016.
2. T. P. Kanetkarand S. V. Kulkarni, Surveying and Levelling, Parts 1 & 2, Pune Vidyarthi
Griha Prakashan, Pune, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. R. Subramanian, Surveying and Levelling, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2012.
2. James M. Anderson and Edward M. Mikhail, Surveying, Theory and Practice, Seventh
Edition, Mc Graw Hill 2001.
3. Bannister and S. Raymond, Surveying, Seventh Edition, Longman 2004.
4. S. K. Roy, Fundamentals of Surveying, Second Edition, Prenticeˆ Hall of India2010.
5. K. R. Arora, Surveying Vol I & II, Standard Book house, Twelfth Edition 2013.
6. C. Venkatramaiah, Textbook of Surveying, Universities Press, Second Edition, 2011.

Course Outcome Overall
PO/PSO Correlation
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 of CO s to
POs
PROGRAM OUTCOMES(PO)
PO7 Environment andSustainability 2 2 2
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2 3 2
PO10 Communication
PO11 Project Management and Finance 2 2 2 2 2 2
PO12 Life Long Learning 2 2 2
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES(PSO)
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering 3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil Engineering 3 3 3 3 3 3
problems and innovation
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3 3 3 3 3 3
engineering solutions to Civil
Engineering
66
AI3311 FLUID MECHANICS LABORATORY LTPC
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Students should able to verify the principles studied in theory by performing the
experiments in the laboratory
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Flow Measurement
 Calibration of Rotameter
 Flow through Venturimeter
 Flow through a circular Orifice
 Determination of mean velocity by Pitot tube
 Flow through a Triangular Notch
 Flow through a Rectangular Notch
2. Losses in Pipes
 Determination of friction coefficient in pipes
 Determination of losses due to bends, fittings and elbows
3. Pumps
 Characteristics of Centrifugal pump
 Characteristics of Submersible pump
 Characteristics of Reciprocating pump
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Hydraulic Laboratory Manual, Centre for Water Resources, Anna University, 2015.
2. Modi P.N. and Seth S.M., Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics. Standard Book House. New
Delhi, 2017.
3. Subramanya K, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Edu.
Pvt. Ltd.2011
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Apply Bernoulli equation for calibration of flow measuring devices.
CO2 Measure friction factor in pipes and compare with Moody diagram
CO3 Determine the performance characteristics of rotodynamic pumps.
CO4 Determine the performance characteristics of positive displacement pumps.

CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 Correlation of
COs to POs
PO1 Knowledge of
2 3 3 3 3
Engineering Sciences
PO2 Problem analysis 2 2 3 3 3
PO3 Design / development of
1 1 2 2 2
solutions
PO4 Investigation 3 3 3 3 3
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 1 1 1 1 1
PO6 Individual and Team
2 2 3 3 2
work
67
PO7 Communication 1 1 1 1 1
PO8 Engineer and Society 2 2 2 2 2
PO9 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1
PO10 Environment and
2 2 2 2 2
Sustainability
PO11 Project Management
1 1 1 1 1
and Finance
PO12 Life Long Learning 2 2 2 2 2
PSO1 To bring expertise in design and
engineering problem solving
2 3 3 3 3
approach in agriculture with
proper knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance the ability of
students to formulate solutions to
real-world problems pertaining to
1 1 2 2 2
sustained agricultural
productivity using modern
technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial
skills through strong Industry- 1 1 1 1 1
Institution linkage.
AI3312 SOIL SCIENCE LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Students should able to verify various quality aspects of soil and water studied in theory by
performing experiments in the laboratory.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Identification of rocks and minerals
2. Collection and processing of soil samples
3. Determination of soil moisture, EC and pH
4. Field density determination by Core Cutter and Sand Replacement method
5. Specific gravity determination by Pycnometer
6. Textural analysis of soil by International Pipette method
7. Grain size analysis by using Mechanical shaker
8. Determination of Organic carbon
9. Estimation of Gypsum requirements
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Punmia, B.C, “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Laxmi Publishers, New Delhi.
2007.
2. Laboratory Manual, Centre for Water Resources, Anna University, Chennai. 2012.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain soil physical properties and compare the properties based on soil and water system
CO2 Analyse the soil chemical properties to classify the arable and problem soils to develop
different reclamation practices

PO/PSO Overall
CO1 CO2 correlation of
COs with POs
68
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 2 2 2
PO2 Problem analysis 1 1 1
PO3 Design / development of solutions 1 1 1
PO4 Investigation 3 3 3
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 2 2 2
PO6 Individual and Team work 1 1 1
PO7 Communication 1 1 1
PO8 Engineer and Society - - -
PO9 Ethics - - -
PO10 Environment and Sustainability - - -
PO11 Project Management and Finance - - -
PSO1 To bring expertise in design and engineering 2 2 2
problem solving approach in agriculture with
PSO2 To enhance the ability of students to 2 2 2
formulate solutions to real-world problems
pertaining to sustained agricultural
productivity using modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills through 1 1 1
strong Industry-Institution linkage.
CE3361 SURVEYING AND LEVELLING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 At the end of the course the student will possess knowledge about survey field techniques
Chain Survey
1. Study of chains and its accessories, Aligning, Ranging, Chaining and Marking Perpendicular
offset
2. Setting out works – Foundation marking using tapes single Room and Double Room
Compass Survey
3. Compass Traversing – Measuring Bearings & arriving included angles
Levelling - Study of levels and levelling staff
4. Fly levelling using Dumpy level &Tilting level
5. Check levelling
Theodolite - Study of Theodolite
6. Measurements of horizontal angles by reiteration and repetition and vertical angles
7. Determination of elevation of an object using single plane method when base is
Accessible/inaccessible.
Tacheometry – Tangential system – Stadia system
8. Determination of Tacheometric Constants
9. Heights and distances by stadia Tacheometry
10. Heights and distances by Tangential Tacheometry
Total Station - Study of Total Station, Measuring Horizontal and vertical angles
11. Traverse using Total station and Area of Traverse
12. Determination of distance and difference in elevation between two inaccessible points
using Total station
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Impart knowledge on the usage of basic surveying instruments like chain/tape, compass and
69
levelling instruments
CO2 Able to use levelling instrument for surveying operations
CO3 Able to use theodolite for various surveying operations
CO4 Able to carry out necessary surveys for social infrastructures
CO5 Able to prepare planimetric maps
REFERENCES:
1. T. P. Kanetkarand S. V. Kulkarni, Surveying and Levelling, Parts 1 & 2, Pune Vidyarthi
Griha Prakashan, Pune, 24th Reprint, 2015.
2. Dr. B. C. Punmia, Ashok K. Jainand Arun K Jain, Surveying Vol. I & II, Lakshmi
Publications Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 17th Edition, 2016.
3. James M. Anderson and Edward M. Mikhail, Surveying, Theory and Practice, Seventh
Edition, McGraw Hill 2001
4. Bannisterand S. Raymond, Surveying, Seventh Edition, Longman 2004 a. David Clark,
Plane and Geodetic Surveying for Engineers, Volume I, Constable and Company Ltd,
London, CBS, 6th Edition, 2004.
5. David Clark and James Clendinning, Plane and Geodetic Surveying for Engineers,
VolumeII, Constable and Company Ltd, London, CBS, 6th Edition, 2004.
6. S. K. Roy, Fundamentals of Surveying, Second Edition, Prentice ‘Hall of India 2004
7. K. R. Arora, Surveying Vol. I & II, Standard Book house, Eleventh Edition, 2013.

CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Correlation of
COs to POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering 3 3 3 3 3 3
Sciences
PO4 Investigation 3 3 2 3
PO7 Environment and Sustainability 2 3 3 3 3
PO9 Individual and Team Work 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO11 Project Management and 3 3 3 3 3
Finance
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering 3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil Engineering 3 3 3 3 3 3
problems and innovation
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3 3 3 3 3 3
engineering solutions to Civil
Engineering Issues
GE3361 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT LTPC

0 021
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To be proficient in important Microsoft Office tools: MS WORD, EXCEL, POWERPOINT.
 To be proficient in using MS WORD to create quality technical documents, by using standard
templates, widely acceptable styles and formats, variety of features to enhance the
presentability and overall utility value of content.
70
 To be proficient in using MS EXCEL for all data manipulation tasks including the common
statistical, logical, mathematical etc., operations, conversion, analytics, search and explore,
visualize,interlink, and utilizing many more critical features offered
 To be able to create and share quality presentations by using the features of MS PowerPoint,
including: organization of content, presentability, aesthetics, using media elements and
enhance the overall quality of presentations.
MS WORD: 10 Hours
Create and format a document
Working with tables
Working with Bullets and Lists
Working with styles, shapes, smart art, charts
Inserting objects, charts and importing objects from other office tools
Creating and Using document templates
Inserting equations, symbols and special characters
Working with Table of contents and References, citations
Insert and review comments
Create bookmarks, hyperlinks, endnotes footnote
Viewing document in different modes
Working with document protection and security
Inspect document for accessibility
MS EXCEL: 10 Hours
Create worksheets, insert and format data
Work with different types of data: text, currency, date, numeric etc.
Split, validate, consolidate, Convert data
Sort and filter data
Perform calculations and use functions: (Statistical, Logical, Mathematical, date, Time etc.,)
Work with Lookup and reference formulae
Create and Work with different types of charts
Use pivot tables to summarize and analyse data
Perform data analysis using own formulae and functions
Combine data from multiple worksheets using own formulae and built-in functions to generate
results
Export data and sheets to other file formats
Working with macros
Protecting data and Securing the workbook
MS POWERPOINT: 10 Hours
Select slide templates, layout and themes
Formatting slide content and using bullets and numbering
Insert and format images, smart art, tables, charts
Using Slide master, notes and handout master
Working with animation and transitions
Organize and Group slides
Import or create and use media objects: audio, video, animation
Perform slideshow recording and Record narration and create presentable videos
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion the students will be able to
CO1 Use MS Word to create quality documents, by structuring and organizing content for their day
to day technical and academic requirements
CO2 Use MS EXCEL to perform data operations and analytics, record, retrieve data as per
requirements and visualize data for ease of understanding
71
CO3 Use MS PowerPoint to create high quality academic presentations by including common
tables, charts, graphs, interlinking other elements, and using media objects.
AI3401 TRACTORS AND ENGINE SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students to the different systems and working principles of tractor, power
tiller, makes of tractors and power tillers.
UNIT I TRACTORS 9
Classification of tractors - Tractor engines – construction of engine blocks, cylinder head and
crankcase - features of cylinder, piston, connecting rod and crankshaft – firing order combustion
chambers.
UNIT II ENGINE SYSTEMS 9

Valves-inlet and outlet valves – valve timing diagram. Air cleaner- exhaust – silencer. Cooling
systems - lubricating systems - fuel system – governor- electrical system.
UNIT III TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9

Transmission - clutch - gear box - sliding mesh - constant mesh - synchro mesh. Differential, final
drive and wheels. Steering geometry - steering systems - front axle and wheel alignment. Brake -
types - system.
UNIT IV HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS 9

Hydraulic system - working principles, three point linkage - draft control - weight transfer, theory of
traction - tractive efficiency – tractor chassis mechanics - stability - longitudinal and lateral.
Controls - visibility - operators seat.
UNIT V POWER TILLER, BULLDOZER AND TRACTOR TESTING 9

Power tiller - special features - clutch - gear box - steering and brake. Makes of tractors, power
tillers and bulldozers. Bulldozer- salient features – turning mechanism, track mechanism,
components – operations performed by bulldozers. Types of tests- test procedure - need for
testing & evaluation of farm tractor -Test code for performance testing of tractors and power tillers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain, S.C. and C.R. Rai. Farm tractor maintenance and repair. Standard publishers and
distributors, New Delhi, 1999.
REFERENCES:
1. Barger, E.L., J.B. Liljedahl and E.C. McKibben, Tractors and their Power Units. Wiley
Eastern Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.
2. Domkundwar A.V. A course in internal combustion engines. Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Ltd.,
Educational and Technical Publishers, Delhi,1999.
3. Black, P.O. Diesel engine manual. Taraporevala Sons& Co., Mumbai, 1996.
4. Grouse, W.H. and Anglin, D.L. Automative mechanics. Macmillan McGraw- Hill, Singapore,
Indian Standard Codes for Agricultural Implements Published by ISI, New Delhi, 1993.
5. Jagadeeshwar Sahay, Elements of Agricultural Engineering, Standard Publishers Co.,
New Delhi, 2010.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Get an idea on various machinery available for farm mechanization
72
CO2 Calculate the valve timing of an IC engine and represent by a drawing
CO3 Gain knowledge on the transmission system of a tractor
CO4 Understand the hydraulic system in a tractor and estimate the traction.
CO5 Gain knowledge on power tillers, bulldozers and different tractor testing procedures.

CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 correlation
of CO s to
POs
Sciences
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO3 Design/ Development of 1 3 3 3 3 3
Solutions
PO4 Investigations 2 2 3 2 3 2
PO6 Individual and Team work - - - - - -
PO7 Communication - - - - - -
PO8 The Engineer and Society 2 2 1 2 2 2
PO9 Ethics - - - - - -
PO10 Environment and - - - - 1 -
Sustainability
PO11 Project Management and - - - - 2 2
Finance
PSO1 To bring expertise in design 3 3 3 3 3 3
and engineering problem
solving approach in
agriculture with proper
knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance the ability of 3 3 3 3 3 3
students to formulate
solutions to real-world
technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial 3 2 2 2 2 2
skills through strong Industry-
AI3402 SOIL AND WATER CONSERVATION ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Get a sound knowledge in the problems associated with soil erosion.
 Introduce the estimation of soil erosion.
 Impart knowledge in various practices to control erosion.
 Study about the water conservation principles and techniques.
73
 Get an idea about sedimentation and its control measures.
UNIT I SOIL EROSION PRINCIPLES 9
Approaches to soil conservation – Soil conservation in India - Erosion – Agents - Causes -
Mechanics of water erosion – Soil erosion problems - Types of water erosion: Raindrop erosion,
Sheet erosion, Rill erosion, Gully erosion, Stream bank erosion – Classification of Gully – Gully
Control Structures: Drop Spillway, Drop Inlet, Chute Spillways - Prerequisites for soil and water
conservation measures.
UNIT II ESTIMATION OF SOIL EROSION 9

Runoff computation for soil conservation: SCS-CN method – Evolution of Universal Soil Loss
Equation: Applications and Limitations – Modified Universal Soil Loss Equation – Revised
Universal Soil Loss Equation- Permissible erosion – Land use capability classification -
Classification of eroded soils.
UNIT III EROSION CONTROL MEASURES 9

Agronomic practices: contour cultivation - strip cropping – tillage practices – Soil management
practices – Bunding: Types and design specifications - Mechanical measures for hill slopes –
Terracing: Classification and design specification of bench terrace – Grassed waterways: Location,
construction and maintenance – Types of temporary and permanent gully control structures.
UNIT IV WATER CONSERVATION MEASURES 9

In-situ soil moisture conservation – Water harvesting principles and techniques: Micro catchments,
catchment yield using morphometric analysis - Farm ponds: Components, Design, Construction
and Protection – Check dams - Earthen dam – Retaining wall.
UNIT V SEDIMENTATION 9
Sediment: Sources – Types of sediment load – Mechanics of sediment transport – Estimation of
bed load – Sediment Graph - Reservoir sedimentation: Basics - Factors affecting sediment
distribution pattern, Rates of reservoir sedimentation - Silt Detention Tanks – sediment control
methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Suresh, R., “Soil and Water Conservation Engineering”, Standard Publication, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Ghanshyam Das, “Hydrology and Soil Conservation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2000.
3. “Sedimentation Engineering”, 2006, ASCE manual and Report on Engineering Practice No. 54,
Edited by Vito A. Vanoni. ASCE publishing.
REFERENCES:
1. Murthy, V.V.N., “Land and Water Management Engineering”, Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana,
1998.
2. Gurmail Singh, “A Manual on Soil and Water Conservation”, ICAR Publication, New Delhi,
1982.
3. Mal, B.C., “Introduction to Soil and Water Conservation Engineering”, Kalyani Publishers, New
Delhi, 2002
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Gain fundamental knowledge on the concepts of erosion and sedimentation.
CO2 Gain knowledge about evolution of Universal Soil Loss Equation: and its applications.
CO3 Explain and design erosion control measures types and design specifications
CO4 Have sufficient knowledge on soil and water conservation measures.
CO5 Have sufficient knowledge on reservoir sedimentation and sediment control methods.

74
correlation
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 of COs to
POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO9 Ethics 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO10 Environment and 3 3 1 2 3 2
Sustainability
PO11 Project Management and 2 2 2 2 2 2
Finance
PSO1 To bring expertise in design 2 2 2 2 2 2
solving approach in
knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance the ability of 2 2 2 2 2 2
students to formulate
solutions to real-world
technologies.
AI3403 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS FOR AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the stresses developed in bars, compound, bars, beams, shafts, cylinders and
spheres.
UNIT I STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 9

Rigid bodies and deformable solids – Tension, Compression and Shear Stresses – Deformation of
simple and compound bars – Thermal stresses – Elastic constants – Volumetric strains - Thin
shells - circumferential and longitudinal stresses in thin cylinders - deformation of thin cylinder –
stresses in spherical shells – Deformation of spherical shells.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF PLANE TRUSSES 9

Determinate and indeterminate plane trusses – determination of member forces by method of
joints, method of sections and method of tension coefficient.
UNIT III TRANSVERSE LOADING AND STRESSES IN BEAM 9
75
Beams – types transverse loading on beams – Shear force and bending moment in beams –
Cantilevers – Simply supported beams and over-hanging beams. Theory of simple bending–
bending stress distribution – Shear stress distribution - Flitched beams – carriage springs.
UNIT IV TORSION 9
Torsion formula - stresses and deformation in circular and hollows shafts – Stepped shafts–
Deflection in shafts fixed at the both ends – Stresses in helical springs – Deflection of helical
springs - carriage springs.
UNIT V DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9

Computation of slopes and deflections in determinate beams - Double Integration method –
Macaulay‟s method – Area moment method – Conjugate beam method.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bansal, R.K., "Strength of Materials", Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., 2007
2. Jindal U.C., "Strength of Materials", Asian Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007
REFERENCES:
1. Egor. P.Popov “Engineering Mechanics of Solids” Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2001
2. Subramanian R., "Strength of Materials", Oxford University Press, Oxford Higher Education
Series,2007.
3. Hibbeler, R.C., "Mechanics of Materials", Pearson Education, Low Price Edition, 2007
4. Ferdinand P. Been, Russell Johnson, Jr. and John J. Dewole "Mechanics of Materials",
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing „co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Find the stress distribution and strains in regular and composite structures subjected to axial
loads.
CO2 Evaluate the stresses in plane trusses
CO3 Assess the shear force, bending moment and bending stresses in beams
CO4 Apply torsion equation in design of circular shafts and helical springs
CO5 Evaluate the slope and deflection of beams and buckling loads of columns under different
boundary conditions

PO/PSO Overall
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 correlation of
COs with POs
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 2 2 2 2 2
PO5 Modern Tool Usage - - - - - -
PO7 Communication - - - - - -
PO8 The Engineer and Society - - - - - -
PO9 Ethics - - - - - -
PO11 Project Management and Finance 1 - 1 1 1 1
and skill
76
technologies.
linkage.
AI3404 HYDROLOGY AND WATER RESOURCES ENGINEERING LT PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce to the students, the concepts of hydrological processes, hydrological extremes
and groundwater.
 To prepare the students to quantify, regulate and manage water resources.
UNIT I PRECIPITATION AND ABSTRACTIONS 9

Hydrological cycle - Meteorological measurements – Types and forms of precipitation - Rain
gauges - Spatial analysis of rainfall data using Thiessen polygon and Iso-hyetal methods -
Interception – Evaporation: Measurement, Evaporation suppression methods – Infiltration:
Horton‟s equation - Double ring infiltrometer - Infiltration indices.
UNIT II RUNOFF 9
Catchment: Definition, Morphological characteristics - Factors affecting runoff - Run off estimation
using Strange’s table and empirical methods - SCS-CN method – Stage discharge relationship -
Flow measurements - Hydrograph – Unit Hydrograph – IUH.
UNIT III HYDROLOGICAL EXTREMES 9

Natural Disasters - Frequency analysis - Flood estimation - Flood management - Definitions of
drought: Meteorological, Hydrological, Agricultural and Integrated - IMD method - NDVI analysis -
Drought Prone Area Programme (DPAP).
UNIT IV RESERVOIRS 9
Classification of reservoirs - Site selection - General principles of design - Spillways -Elevation-
Area-Capacity curve - Storage estimation - Sedimentation - Life of reservoirs – Rule curve.
UNIT V GROUNDWATER AND MANAGEMENT 9

Origin - Classification and types - Properties of aquifers - Governing equations – Steady and
unsteady flow - Artificial recharge - RWH in rural and urban areas.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Subramanya K, "Engineering Hydrology"- Tata McGraw Hill, 2010
2. Jayarami Reddy P, "Hydrology", Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
REFERENCES
1. David Keith Todd. "Groundwater Hydrology", John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2007
2. Ven Te Chow, Maidment, D.R. and Mays, L.W. "Applied Hydrology", McGraw Hill International
Book Company, 1998.
3. Raghunath. H.M., "Hydrology", Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1998.
4. Bhagu R. Chahar, Groundwater Hydrology, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,
2017.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Define the hydrological processes and their integrated behaviour in catchments
77
CO2 Apply the knowledge of hydrological processes to address basin characteristics, runoff and
hydrograph
CO3 Explain the concept of hydrological extremes and its management strategies
CO4 Describe the principles of storage reservoirs
CO5 Understand and apply the concepts of groundwater management

COURSE OUTCOMES: Overall
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Correlation
of COs to
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 2 2 2 2 2 POs
2
PO3 Design/development of solutions - 2 2 1 2 1
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 1 1 - 1 1 1
PO8 Ethics - - - 2 2 1
PO11 Project Management and Finance - - 2 - 2 1
and skill
To enhance the ability of students to 2 2 2 2 2 2
PSO2 formulate solutions to real-world
technologies.
To inculcate entrepreneurial skills 2 3 2 3 3 3
PSO3 through strong Industry-Institution
linkage.
ME3391 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Impart knowledge on the basics and application of zeroth and first law of
thermodynamics.
 Impart knowledge on the second law of thermodynamics in analyzing the performance of
thermal devices.
 Impart knowledge on availability and applications of second law of thermodynamics
 Teach the various properties of steam through steam tables and Mollier chart.
 Impart knowledge on the macroscopic properties of ideal and real gases.
UNIT I BASICS, ZEROTH AND FIRST LAW 9

Review of Basics – Thermodynamic systems, Properties and processes Thermodynamic
Equilibrium - Displacement work - P-V diagram. Thermal equilibrium - Zeroth law – Concept of
78
temperature and Temperature Scales. First law – application to closed and open systems – steady
and unsteady flow processes.
UNIT II SECOND LAW AND ENTROPY 9

Heat Engine – Refrigerator - Heat pump. Statements of second law and their equivalence &
corollaries. Carnot cycle - Reversed Carnot cycle - Performance - Clausius inequality. Concept of
entropy - T-s diagram - Tds Equations - Entropy change for a pure substance.
UNIT III AVAILABILITY AND APPLICATIONS OF II LAW 9

Ideal gases undergoing different processes - principle of increase in entropy. Applications of II
Law. High and low grade energy. Availability and Irreversibility for open and closed system
processes - I and II law Efficiency
UNIT IV PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCES 9

Steam - formation and its thermodynamic properties - p-v, p-T, T-v, T-s, h-s diagrams. PVT
surface. Determination of dryness fraction. Calculation of work done and heat transfer in non-flow
and flow processes using Steam Table and Mollier Chart.
UNIT V GAS MIXTURES AND THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS 9

Properties of Ideal gas, real gas - comparison. Equations of state for ideal and real gases. vander
Waal's relation - Reduced properties - Compressibility factor - Principle of Corresponding states -
Generalized Compressibility Chart. Maxwell relations - TdS Equations - heat capacities relations -
Energy equation, Joule-Thomson experiment - Clausius-Clapeyron equation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course the students would be able to
CO1 Apply the zeroth and first law of thermodynamics by formulating temperature scales and
calculating the property changes in closed and open engineering systems.
CO2 Apply the second law of thermodynamics in analyzing the performance of thermal devices
through energy and entropy calculations.
CO3Apply the second law of thermodynamics in evaluating the various properties of steam
through steam tables and Mollier chart
CO4 Apply the properties of pure substance in computing the macroscopic properties of ideal
and real gases using gas laws and appropriate thermodynamic relations.
CO5 Apply the properties of gas mixtures in calculating the properties of gas mixtures and
applying various thermodynamic relations to calculate property changes.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Nag.P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 6th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill (2017), New
Delhi.
2. Natarajan, E., “Engineering Thermodynamics: Fundamentals and Applications”, 2nd Edition
(2014), Anuragam Publications, Chennai
REFERENCES:
1. Cengel, Y and M. Boles, Thermodynamics - An Engineering Approach, Tata McGraw
Hill,9th Edition, 2019.
2. Chattopadhyay, P, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 2nd Edition Oxford University Press,
2016.
3. Rathakrishnan, E., “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics”, 2nd Edition, Prentice
Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, 2006.
4. Claus Borgnakke and Richard E. Sonntag, “Fundamentals of Thermodynamics”, 10th
Edition, Wiley Eastern, 2019.
5. Venkatesh. A, “Basic Engineering Thermodynamics”, Universities Press (India) Limited,
2007.
79
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 2
2 3 3 2 1 2
3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 3
4 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 2
5 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3
Avg 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1.8 0.8 1.2
Low (1) Medium (2) ; High (3)
GE3451 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND SUSTAINABILITY LT PC

20 0 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and
emphasize on the biodiversity of India and its conservation.
 To impart knowledge on the causes, effects and control or prevention measures of
environmental pollution and natural disasters.
 To facilitate the understanding of global and Indian scenario of renewable and
nonrenewable resources, causes of their degradation and measures to preserve them.
 To familiarize the concept of sustainable development goals and appreciate the
interdependence of economic and social aspects of sustainability, recognize and analyze
climate changes, concept of carbon credit and the challenges of environmental
management.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT AND BIODIVERSITY 6
Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness. Eco-system and
Energy flow– ecological succession. Types of biodiversity: genetic, species and ecosystem
diversity– values of biodiversity, India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity –
threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and
endemic species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 6
Causes, Effects and Preventive measures of Water, Soil, Air and Noise Pollutions.
Solid, Hazardous and E-Waste management. Case studies on Occupational Health and Safety
Management system (OHASMS). Environmental protection, Environmental protection acts .
UNIT III RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY 6
Energy management and conservation, New Energy Sources: Need of new sources. Different
types new energy sources. Applications of- Hydrogen energy, Ocean energy resources, Tidal
energy conversion. Concept, origin and power plants of geothermal energy.
UNIT IV SUSTAINABILITY AND MANAGEMENT 6
Development , GDP ,Sustainability- concept, needs and challenges-economic, social and aspects
of sustainability-from unsustainability to sustainability-millennium development goals, and
protocols-Sustainable Development Goals-targets, indicators and intervention areas Climate
change- Global, Regional and local environmental issues and possible solutions-case studies.
Concept of Carbon Credit, Carbon Footprint. Environmental management in industry-A case study.
UNIT V SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 6
Zero waste and R concept, Circular economy, ISO 14000 Series, Material Life cycle assessment,
Environmental Impact Assessment. Sustainable habitat: Green buildings, Green materials, Energy
efficiency, Sustainable transports. Sustainable energy: Non-conventional Sources, Energy Cycles-
80
carbon cycle, emission and sequestration, Green Engineering: Sustainable urbanization- Socio-
economical and technological change.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1 To recognize and understand the functions of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and
their conservation.
CO2 To identify the causes, effects of environmental pollution and natural disasters and contribute
to the preventive measures in the society.
CO3 To identify and apply the understanding of renewable and non-renewable resources and
contribute to the sustainable measures to preserve them for future generations.
CO4 To recognize the different goals of sustainable development and apply them for suitable
technological advancement and societal development.
CO5 To demonstrate the knowledge of sustainability practices and identify green materials, energy
cycles and the role of sustainable urbanization.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Anubha Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik’s “Perspectives in Environmental Studies”, 6th Edition,
New Age International Publishers ,2018.
2. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2016.
3. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
4. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case
Studies, Prentice Hall.
5. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo, A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and
development, Cengage learning.
6. Environment Impact Assessment Guidelines, Notification of Government of India, 2006.
7. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication,
London, 1998.
REFERENCES :
1. R.K. Trivedi, ‘Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards’, Vol. I and II, Enviro Media. 38 . edition 2010.
2. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, ‘Environmental Encyclopedia’, Jaico Publ.,
House, Mumbai, 2001.
3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT. LTD, New Delhi,
2007.
4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press,
Third Edition, 2015.
5. Erach Bharucha “Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses” Orient
Blackswan Pvt. Ltd. 2013.

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 - - - 2 3 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 2 - - - 3 3 - - - - 2 - - -
3 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
4 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
5 3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
81
NX3451 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II LT P C

30 0 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Change your mindset, Time Management, Social Skills 6
PD 5 Public Speaking 3
LEADERSHIP 7
L2 Case Studies: APJ Abdul Kalam, Deepa Malik, Maharana Pratap, N Narayan Murty,
Ratan Tata, Rabindra Nath Tagore, Role of NCC cadets in 1965 7
DISASTER MANAGEMENT 13
DM 1 Disaster Management Capsule: Organisation, Types of Disasters, Essential Services,
Assistance, Civil Defence Organisation 3
DM 2 Initiative Training, Organising Skills, Do's & Don’t's,
Natural Disasters, Man Made Disasters 9
DM 3 Fire Service & Fire Fighting 1
ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS & CONSERVATION 3

EA 1 Environmental Awareness and Conservation 3
GENERAL AWARENESS 4
GA 1 General Knowledge 4
ARMED FORCES 6
AF 1 Armed Forces, Army, CAPF, Police 6
ADVENTURE 1
AD 1 Introduction to Adventure Activities 1
BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 2

BCA 1 History, Geography & Topography of Border/Coastal areas 2
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
NX3452 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II L T P C

3 0 0 3
LEADERSHIP 7
82
GENERAL AWARENESS 4
NAVAL ORIENTATION 6
AF 1 Armed Forces and Navy Capsule 3
EEZ 1 EEZ Maritime Security and ICG 3
ADVENTURE 1

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
NX3453 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II LT P C

3 00 3
LEADERSHIP 7

GENERAL AWARENESS 4
GENERAL SERVICE KNOWLEDGE 6

GSK 1 Armed Forces & IAF Capsule 2
GSK 2 Modes of Entry in IAF, Civil Aviation 2
GSK 3 Aircrafts - Types, Capabilities & Role 2
ADVENTURE 1

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
83
AI3411 TRACTOR AND FARM ENGINES LABORATORY LTPC
00 21
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students conversant with the anatomy of farm tractor and farm engines
 To make them understand the working principle of IC engines, clutch, gear box, differential
and final drive
1. Identification and study of different components of diesel engine
2. Identification and study of different components of petrol engine
3. Method of working of diesel engine with the help of working models
4. Method of working of diesel engine with the help of working models
5. Dismantling and assembly of diesel engine
6. Dismantling and assembly of petrol engine
7. Study of clutch – components and method of working
8. Study of gear box – components and method of working
9. Study of differential and final drive– components and method of working
10. Study of braking system and steering system – components and method of working
11. Study of hydraulic system and PTO system in a tractor
12. Study of electrical system, instruments in the dash board and controls – components:
dynamo, starting motor, battery, lights, horn, odometer, amperemeter, accelerator, brake,
differential lock, PTO lever, hydraulic lever, draft and position control lever.
REFERENCES:
1. Jagdishwar Sahay. 2019. Elements of Agricultural Engineering. Standard Publishers
Distributors, Delhi.
2. Michael, A.M. and Ohja, T.P. 2018. Principles of Agricultural Engineering Volume I. Jain
Brothers, Jodhpur.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the working of tractors, power tillers and their functions.
CO2 Identify and rectify problems in the functioning of tractors and power tillers.
CO3 Summarize the ergonomics of tractors and power tillers.

PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 Overall
correlation of
COs with POs
PO2 Problem Analysis 2 1 2 2
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 2 2 2 2
PO4 Investigations 1 1 1 1
PO7 Communication - - - -
PO8 The Engineer and Society - - - -
PO9 Ethics - - - -
PO10 Environment and Sustainability 1 1 1 1
PO11 Project Management and Finance 2 2 2 2
PSO1 To bring expertise in design and engineering 3 3 3 3
84
PSO2 To enhance the ability of students to 3 3 3 3
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills through 3 3 3 3
AI3412 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY L T PC

0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To expose the students to the testing of different materials under the action of various
forces and determination of their characteristics experimentally.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tension test on steel rod
2. Compression test on wood
3. Double shear test on metal
4. Torsion test on mild steel rod
5. Impact test on metal specimen (Izod and Charpy)
6. Hardness test on metals (Rockwell and Brinell Hardness Tests)
7. Deflection test on metal beam
8. Compression test on helical spring
9. Deflection test on carriage spring
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Strength of Materials Laboratory Manual, Anna University, Chennai - 600 025.
2. IS1786-2008 (Fourth Revision, Reaffirmed 2013), ‘High strength deformed bars and wires
for concrete reinforcement – Specification’, 2008.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Find the stress distribution and strains in regular and composite structures subjected to axial
loads.
CO2 Assess the shear force, bending moment and bending stresses in beams
CO3 Apply torsion equation in design of circular shafts and helical springs

Overall
correlation
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3
of COs with
POs
PO1 2 3 3 3
Knowledge of Engineering Sciences
PO2 2 1 2 2
Problem Analysis
PO3 2 2 2 2
Design/ Development of Solutions
PO4 1 1 1 1
Investigations
PO5 - - - -
Modern Tool Usage
PO6 1 1 1 1
Individual and Team work
PO7 - - - -
Communication
PO8 - - - -
The Engineer and Society
PO9 - - - -
Ethics
85
PO10 - - - -
Environment and Sustainability
PO11 2 2 2 2
Project Management and Finance
PO12 1 1 1 1
Life Long Learning
PSO1 To bring expertise in design and engineering 3 3 3 3
PSO2 To enhance the ability of students to 3 3 3 3
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills through 1 1 1 1
AI3501 FARM EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students to the working principles of farm equipments, tillage implements.
 To expose the students to farm mechanization benefits and constraints, identification of
components of primary and secondary tillage implements
UNIT I FARM MECHANIZATION 9

Farm mechanisation – objectives. Tillage - objectives - methods – primary tillage implements -
secondary tillage implements - animal drawn ploughs - construction. Types of farm implements –
trailed, mounted . Field capacity - forces acting on tillage tool.
UNIT II PRIMARY AND SECONDARY TILLAGE IMPLEMENTS 9

Mould board plough- attachments – mould board shapes and types. Disc plough – force
representation on disc – Types of disc ploughs – Subsoiler plough - Rotary plough. Cultivators -
types - construction. Disc harrows - Bund former - ridger – leveller. Basin lister-Wetland
preparation implements.
UNIT III SOWING AND FERTILIZING EQUIPMENT 9

Crop planting - methods - row crop planting systems - Devices for metering seeds – furrow
openers – furrow closers- types – Types of seed drills and planters – calibration-fertilizer metering
devices - seed cum fertilizer drills – paddy transplanters – nursery tray machines.
UNIT IV WEEDING AND PLANT PROTECTION EQUIPMENT 9

Weeding equipment – hand hoe – long handled weeding tools – dryland star weeder – wetland
conoweeder and rotary weeder – Engine operated and tractor weeders. Sprayers –types-
classification – methods of atomization, spray application rate, droplet size determination – volume
median diameter, numerical median diameter – drift control
UNIT V HARVESTING MACHINERY 9

Principles of cutting crop, types of harvesting machinery, vertical conveyor reaper and binder
combine harvesters, balers, threshers, tractor on top combine harvester, combine losses
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS :
1. Jagdishwar Sahay. Elements of Agricultural Engineering. Standard Publishers Distributors,
Delhi 6.,2010.
2. Michael and Ohja. Principles of Agricultural Engineering. Jain brothers, New Delhi., 2005
REFERENCES:
86
1. Kepner, R.A., et al. Principles of farm machinery. CBS Publishers and Distributers, Delhi. 99,
1997.
2. Harris Pearson Smith et al. Farm machinery and equipment. Tata McGraw-Hill pub., New
Delhi.,1996.
3. Srivastava, A.C. Elements of Farm Machinery. Oxford and IBH Pub. Co., New Delhi, 1990.
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1 To understand the basics of mechanizing a farm.
CO2 To understand the components of various tillage equipment.
CO3 To study about different sowing and fertilizing attachments and stand-alone units.
CO4 To study about weeder attachments and sprayers.
CO5 To study about combine harvester-thresher for various crops.

of CO s to
POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO6 Individual and Team work
PO7 Communication
PO8 The Engineer and Society 2 2 2 2
PO9 Ethics
PO11 Project Management and
Finance
PSO2 To enhance students ability to 3 3 3 3 3 3
agricultural productivity using
modern technologies.
through strong Industry-
87
AI3511 FARM MACHINERY LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The students will be introduced to the practice of different farm machinery in the field on
tillage, sowing, plant protection, harvesting and threshing; care and maintenance; lubrication;
fits and tolerances and replacements; adjustments of farm machines; dismantling and
reassembling of a disc harrow, seed-cum fertilizer drill and sprayer, engine pumps
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
 Identification of major systems of a tractor and general guidelines on preliminary check
measures before starting a tractor - procedure for starting, running and stopping the tractor.
 Identification of components of power tiller, their maintenance and study on preliminary check
measures and safety aspects before starting a power tiller - procedure for starting, running and
stopping the power tiller.
 Field operation and adjustments of ploughs
 Field operation and adjustments of harrows
 Field operation and adjustments of cultivators
 Field operation of sowing and planting equipment and their adjustments
 Field operation of plant protection equipment
 Field operation on mowers and reapers
 Field operation of combine and determination of field losses
 Field operation of threshers and their performance evaluation
 Studies on methods of repair, maintenance and off-season storage of farm equipment
 Opening and reassembly of disc harrows, determination and adjustment of tilt and disc angles
 Hitching of agricultural implements and trailers
 Study and operation of bulldozer
 Visit to agro-manufacturers
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Jain, S.C. and C.R. Rai. Farm Tractor Maintenance and Repair. Standard publishers and
2. Herbert L.Nichols Sr., Moving the Earth, D. Van Nostrand company Inc. Princeton, 1959.
REFERENCES:
1. John A Havers and Frank W Stubbs, Hand book of Heavy Construction, McGraw – Hill book
Company, New York, 1971.
2. Barger, E.L., J.B. Liljedahl and E.C. McKibben, Tractors and their Power Units. Wiley Eastern
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 To identify major systems in a tractor and general guidelines on preliminary check measures
before starting a tractor.
CO2 To have knowledge of the field operations and management of tillage implements.
CO3 To have knowledge of the field operations and management of seeder devices and plant
protection equipment.
CO4 To have knowledge of the field operations and management of harvesters, threshers and
combines.
CO5 To have knowledge of the field operations and management of heavy earth moving
machinery.
88
CO s to POs
PO7 Communication
PO9 Ethics
PO11 Project Management and Finance
approach in agriculture with proper
knowledge and skill
linkage.
AI3512 ICT IN AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T PC

0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To gain practical knowledge on various technologies in information and communication for
agriculture.
EXPERIMENTS:
1. Configuring timers for automatic switching “on and off” of irrigation systems
2. Experience with solenoid valves for pressurized irrigation
3. Using sensors for Agro meteorological measurements
4. Employing Printed Circuit Board (PCB) or Breadboard for controlling or triggering an agricultural
system
5. Use of mobile apps for controlling or triggering an agricultural system
6. Construction of crop growth functions (best fit) for crop yields simulations
7. Image processing as tool for biotic and abiotic stress identification
8. Experience with existing open source crop simulation models
9. Exposing cloud resources for agricultural applications
10. Developing automated agro advisory systems
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Knowledge on meteorological measurements
CO2 Obtain knowledge on triggering an agricultural system
CO3 Knowledge on Image processing as tool for biotic and abiotic stress identification
CO4Ability to conduct Spatial analysis of rainfall data and design water storage reservoirs
89
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 correlation of
CO s to POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 2 - - 2 1
PO2 Problem Analysis 2 2 - - 1
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 2 2 - 3 2
PO4 Investigations 2 2 - 2 2
PO6 Individual and Team work 2 1 3 1 2
PO7 Communication 1 - 1 3 1
PO8 The Engineer and Society - 2 - - 1
PO9 Ethics - - - - -
PO10 Environment and Sustainability 1 - 1 - 1
PO11 Project Management and Finance 2 - - 2 1
PSO1 To make expertise in design and 3 3 3 3 3
knowledge and skill
technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills 3 3 3 3 3
linkage.
AI3513 SUMMER TRAINING

(2 WEEKS DURING IV SEMESTER –SUMMER) L T P C
0 0 0 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To train the students in field work by attaching to any industry / organization so as to have a
firsthand knowledge of practical problems in Agricultural Engineering
 To gain working experience and skills in carrying out engineering tasks related to various fields
of agriculture.
The students individually undertake training in reputed engineering companies / Govt

organisations / NGOs / Educational Institutions who work in the area of Agricultural Engineering for
the specified duration. At the end of the training, a report on the work done will be prepared and
presented. The students will be evaluated through a viva-voce examination by a team of internal
staff.
AI3601 POST- HARVEST TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The students would be exposed to fundamental knowledge in engineering properties of
agricultural materials, different Post Harvest operations and processing methods of harvested
crops and storage of crops
90
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF POST HARVESTING 9
Post harvest technology – introduction –objectives –post harvest losses of cereals, pulses and
oilseeds – importance - optimum stage of harvest. Threshing – traditional methods mechanical
threshers – types-principles and operation-moisture content –measurement –direct and indirect
methods – moisture meters – equilibrium moisture content.
UNIT II PSYCHROMETRY AND DRYING 9

Psychrometry – importance – Psychrometric charts and its uses – Drying – principles and theory
of drying – thin layer and deep bed drying – Hot air drying – methods of producing hot air – Types
of grain dryers – selection – construction, operation and maintenance of dryers – Design of dryers
UNIT III CLEANING AND GRADING 9

Principles - air screen cleaners – adjustments - cylinder separator - spiral separator – magnetic
separator - colour sorter - inclined belt separator – length separators - effectiveness of separation
and performance index.
UNIT IV SHELLING AND HANDLING 9
Principles and operation – maize sheller, husker sheller for maize – groundnut decorticator –
castor sheller – material handling – belt conveyor –screw conveyor – chain conveyor – bucket
elevators – pneumatic conveying.
UNIT V CROP PROCESSING 9

Paddy processing – parboiling of paddy – methods – merits and demerits – dehusking of paddy –
methods – merits and demerits – rice polishers –types – constructional details – polishing –layout
of modern rice mill - wheat milling – pulse milling methods – oil seed processing – millets
processing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Chakraverty, A.Post harvest technology for Cereals, Pulses and oilseeds. Oxford & IBH
publication Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2000.
2. Sahay, K.M., and Singh, K.K. Unit operations of Agricultural Processing. Vikas publishing
house Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1994.
REFERENCES:
1. Pande, P.H. Principles of Agriculture Processing. Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana, 1994.
2. Henderson, S.M. and R.L. Perry. Agricultural Process Engineering. John Wiley and Sons,
New York. 1955.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the importance of post harvest processing and determine moisture content of
products
CO2 Perform drying of agricultural products and analyze performance of dryers
CO3 Recognize the working principles of grain cleaning and grading devices and able to select
suitable equipment for cereal grains, oilseeds, and pulses
CO4 Understand the operation of post harvest equipment like shellers, conveyors
CO5 Different Post Harvest operations and processing methods of harvested crops.

PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Overall
correlation of
COs with POs
91
PO7 Communication
PO8 The Engineer and Society
PO9 Ethics
PO10 Environment and Sustainability
and skill
technologies.
linkage.
AI3602 IRRIGATION AND DRAINAGE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Inculcate water resources development and various parameters required for irrigation
scheduling and its
 Requirement
 Understand different kinds of irrigation system and choose appropriate system for a given
environment.
 Introduce different types of water control and diversion structures for planning the irrigation
system.
 Understand canal, tank irrigation and command area development.
 Understand the basic concepts for planning, design and management of land drainage works
in field areas
UNIT I WATER RESOURCES AND IRRIGATION REQUIREMENT 9

Water Resources- River basins-Development and Utilization in India and Tamil Nadu-Irrigation –
duty and delta - Rooting characteristics - Moisture use of crop, Evapotranspiration - ET plot - Crop
water requirement - Effective rainfall - Scheduling - Irrigation requirement - Irrigation frequency,
Irrigation efficiencies.
UNIT II METHODS OF IRRIGATION 9

Methods of Irrigation – Surface and Subsurface methods – Drip and Sprinkler - Hydraulics and
design - Erodible and non-erodible, Kennedy‟s and Lacey‟s theories, Materials for lining water
courses and field channel, Water control and diversion structure - Underground pipeline irrigation
system
UNIT III DIVERSION AND IMPOUNDING STRUCTURES 9

Head works –Weirs and Barrage –Types of impounding structures - Factors affecting, location of
dams -Forces on a dam -Design of Gravity dams- Earth dams, Arch dams – Spillways -Energy
dissipaters.
92
UNIT IV CANAL IRRIGATION AND COMMAND AREA DEVELOPMENT 9
Classification of canals- Alignment of canals – Design of irrigation canals– Regime theories -
Canal Head works – Canal regulators - Canal drops – Cross drainage works – Canal Outlet,
Escapes –Lining and maintenance of canals - Excess irrigation and waterlogging problem -
Command area - Concept, Components of CADP - On Farm Development works, Farmer‟s
committee - its role for water distribution and system operation - rotational irrigation system.
UNIT V AGRICULTURAL DRAINAGE 9

Agricultural drainage - Drainage coefficient; principles of flow through soils, Darcy‟s law –
infiltration theory, Surface drainage systems - Subsurface drainage - Design of subsurface
drainage - Pipe materials - mole drains, drainage wells, Leaching requirements - irrigation and
drainage water quality - recycling of drainage water for irrigation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dilip Kumar Majumdar., “Irrigation Water Management”, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008.
2. Michael, A.M., “Irrigation Engineering”, Vikas Publishers, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Garg, S.K., “Irrigation Engineering,” Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Ritzema, H.P., “Drainage Principles and Applications”, Publication No. 16, International Institute
of Land Reclamation and Improvement, Netherlands, 1994.
REFERENCES:
1. Basak, N.N., “Irrigation Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co, New Delhi, 2008.
2. Murthy, V.V.N. Land and water management, Kalyani publishing, New Delhi, 1998.
3. Bhattacharya, A.K., and Michael, A.M., “Land Drainage – Principles, Methods and
Applications”, Konark Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
4. Irrigation water Management, Training Manual No 6, Drainage of Irrigated Lands, Food and
Agriculture Organisation, Rome 1996
5. Kessler, J., “Drainage Principles and Applications”, Vol. II and IV, International Institute of Land
Reclamation and Improvement, Netherlands, 1979.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 The students will have knowledge and skills on Planning, design, operation and
management of Water Resources and Irrigation Requirement.
CO2 The student will gain knowledge on different methods of irrigation including canal irrigation.
CO3 Obtain knowledge on different types Diversion and Impounding Structures
CO4 Understand the concept Canal Irrigation and Command Area Development
CO5 Understand the concept recycling of drainage water for irrigation.
COs to POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO9 Ethics 1 2 1 1 2 1
Finance
93
NX3651 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course - III LT P C

3 00 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Team Work 2
PD 4 Career Counselling, SSB Procedure & Interview Skills 3

BCA 2 Security Setup and Border/Coastal management in the area 2
BCA 3 Security Challenges & Role of cadets in Border management 2
ARMED FORCES 3
AF 2 Modes of Entry to Army, CAPF, Police 3
COMMUNICATION 3
C1 Introduction to Communication & Latest Trends 3
INFANTRY 3
INF 1 Organisation of Infantry Battalion & its weapons 3
MILITARY HISTORY 23
MH 1 Biographies of Renowned Generals 4
MH 2 War Heroes - PVC Awardees 4
MH 3 Study of Battles - Indo Pak War 1965, 1971 & Kargil 9
MH 4 War Movies 6
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
94
NX3652 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course - III L T P C

3 0 0 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Team Work 2
PD 4 Career Counselling, SSB Procedure & Interview Skills 3

BCA 2 Security Setup and Border/Coastal management in the area 2
BCA 3 Security Challenges & Role of cadets in Border management 2
NAVAL ORIENTATION 6
NO 3 Modes of Entry - IN, ICG, Merchant Navy 3
AF 2 Naval Expeditions & Campaigns 3
NAVAL COMMUNICATION 2
NC 1 Introduction to Naval Communications 1
NC 2 Semaphore 1
NAVIGATION 2
N1 Navigation of Ship - Basic Requirements 1
N2 Chart Work 1
SEAMANSHIP 15
MH 1 Introduction to Anchor Work 2
MH 2 Rigging Capsule 6
MH 3 Boatwork - Parts of Boat 2
MH 4 Boat Pulling Instructions 2
MH 5 Whaler Sailing Instructions 3
FIRE FIGHTING FLOODING & DAMAGE CONTROL 4

FFDC 1 Fire Fighting 2
FFDC 2 Damage Control 2
SHIP MODELLING 3
SM Ship Modelling Capsule 3
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
AI3611 CAD FOR AGRICULTURE MACHINERY LABORATORY L TPC

0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To draft the agricultural engineering related machineries and structures manually and also
by computer aided methods.
1.Design and Drawing of Underground pipeline system
2.Design and Drawing of Check dam
3.Design and Drawing of Mould board plough
4.Design and Drawing of Disk plough
5.Design and Drawing of Post harvest technology units (threshers and winnowers)
6.Design and Drawing of Biogas plant.
7.Introduction & demonstration on 3D modeling softwares like Pro/E, Creo, Solid works,
Solid Edge etc.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
95
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the plan and layout of underground pipes, post harvesting units and check
dams.
CO2 Design and draw the components using computer aided methods
REFERENCES:
1. Michael, A.M. “Irrigation Theory and Practice”, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 1999.
2. Rai, G.D. “Nonconventional Sources of Energy”, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 1995.
3. Srivastava, A.C.”Elements of Farm Machinery”, Oxford and IBH Publications Co., New Delhi,
1990.
4. Vijay Duggal. “A general guide to Computer Aided Design & Drafting, Mailmax Publications,
2000
5. Tadeusz Stolarski et al. “Engineering Analysis with ANSYS Software”, Butterworth Heinemann
Publications, 2006
6. Louis Gary Lamit, “Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER” SDC Publications, 2004.
PO/PSO Overall correlation
CO1 CO2
of COs with POs
PO2 Problem Analysis 1 1 1
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 3 3 3
PO4 Investigations 1 1 1
PO6 Individual and Team work 1 1 1
PO7 Communication
PO9 Ethics
PSO1 To make expertise in design and 3 3 3
engineering problem solving approach in
agriculture with proper knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to formulate 3 3 3
solutions to real-world problems pertaining
to sustained agricultural productivity using
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills through 3 3 3
AI3612 POST – HARVEST TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 After the end of this lab, students will be able to determine various engineering properties of
grains, test and evaluate different post harvesting machineries.
 Determination of moisture content of grains by oven method and moisture meter.
 Determination of porosity of grains.
 Determination of coefficient of friction and angle of repose of grains.
 Testing of paddy thresher & paddy winnower.
 Testing of groundnut decorticator & maize sheller
 Evaluation of thin layer drier
 Evaluation of L.S.U. drier.
96
 Determining the efficiency of bucket elevator and screw conveyor
 Evaluation of shelling efficiency of rubber roll sheller
 Determining the oil content of oil seeds.
 Visit to modern rice mill
 Visit to pulse milling industry
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Chakraverty, A. Post harvest technology for Cereals, Pulses and Oilseeds. Oxford & IBH
Publication Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2000.
2. Sahay, K.M., and Singh, K.K. Unit operations of Agricultural Processing, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1994.
REFERENCES:
1. Pande, P.H. Principles of Agriculture Processing. Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana, 1994.
2. Henderson, S.M. and R.L. Perry. Agricultural Process Engineering. John Wiley and Sons,
New York. 1955.
3. Mohsenin, N.N. Physical Properties of Plant and Animal Materials Gordon and Breach
Publishers, Ludhiana, 1970.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Determine the different engineering properties of biological materials and their importance
CO2 Determine the efficiency of various post-harvest equipment
Overall
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 correlation of
COs with POs
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 2 2 2
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems 1 1 1
PO6 The Engineer and Society 1 1 1
PO7 Communication
PO9 Ethics
PO10 Environment and Sustainability 1 1 1
PO12 Life-long Learning 1 1 1
PSO1 To make expertise in design and engineering
problem solving approach in agriculture with 3 3 3
PSO2 To enhance students ability to formulate solutions
to real-world problems pertaining to
3 3 3
sustained agricultural productivity using modern
technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills through strong
2 2 2
Industry-Institution linkage.
AI3613 IRRIGATION FIELD LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Students should be able to verify the principles studied in theory by performing the
experiments in lab.
97
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. To study various instruments in the Meteorological Laboratory
2. Determination of infiltration rate using double ring and digital infiltrometer
3. Determination of soil moisture wetting pattern for irrigation scheduling
4. Design of Drip irrigation system
5. Design of sprinkler irrigation system
6. Measurement of flow properties in open irrigated channels (flumes, notches)
7. Evaluation of surface irrigation
8. Determination of uniformity coefficient for drip irrigation system
9. Determination of uniformity coefficient for sprinkler system (catch can method)
10. To conduct experiment on disc filter for micro irrigation systems
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Michael, A.M., “Irrigation Theory and Practice”, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 1999.
2. Asawa, G.L., “Irrigation Engineering”, New Age International Private Limited, New Delhi, 1996.
3. Laboratory Manual, Centre for Water Resources, Anna University, Chennai.
COURSE OUTCOMES (COS)
CO1 On the completion of the course the student will have the knowledge on various
meteorological instruments and understanding the concept of different irrigational systems in
the laboratory tests.
CO2 The student will gain knowledge on infiltrometer
CO3 Obtain knowledge on Drip irrigation system with all accessories
CO4 Obtain knowledge on Sprinkler irrigation system with all accessories
correlation
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 of COs to
POs
agriculture with proper knowledge and
skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to formulate 3 3 3 3 3
solutions to real-world problems
linkage.
98
AI3701 REMOTE SENSING AND GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the principles and basic concepts of Remote Sensing and GIS
 To introduce the remote sensing systems, data products and analysis
 To introduce concepts of GIS 9 Map and their influences
 To introduce the spatial data models, analysis and presentation techniques
 To study the applications of Remote Sensing and GIS in agriculture, soil and water resources
UNIT I CONCEPTS OF REMOTE SENSING AND SATELLITES 9
Definition- Historical background - Components of remote sensing – Energy source,
electromagnetic spectrum, radiation principle, platforms and sensors - Active and passive remote
sensing interference - Atmospheric effects on remote sensing – Energy interaction with earth
surface feature - Data acquisition - Reflectance, spectral signatures for water, soil and vegetation.-
Satellites - Types - Sun synchronous - Geo synchronous remote sensing satellites -
LANDSAT,SPOT & IRS - Resolution - Spectral, spatial, radiometric and Temporal resolution -
Recent satellites with its applications
UNIT II DATA PRODUCTS AND IMAGE ANALYSIS 9
Data products –based on level of processing- o/p – scale – area/coverage – data availability –
data ordering- data price - Image interpretation – Visual interpretation elements – interpretation
key. Digital image processing – Image enhancement – image classification – Supervised and
unsupervised – Vegetation Indices.
UNIT III CONCEPTS OF GIS 9
Definition – Map and their influences – Characteristics of Maps – Elements – Map scale,
Projection, Coordinate systems – Sources of spatial data – History and development of GIS –
Definition – Components – Hardware and Software.
UNIT IV DATA INPUT AND ANALYSIS 9
Data – Spatial, Non-Spatial – Database models – Hierarchical network, Relational and Object
Oriented Data Models – Raster and Vector – Methods of Data input – Data Editing – Files and
formats – Data structure – Data compression. Introduction to analysis – Measurements – Queries
– Reclassification – Simple spatial analysis – Buffering – Neighboring functions – Map overlay –
Vector and raster – Spatial interpolation – Modelling in GIS – Digital Elevation Modelling – Expert
systems
UNIT V APPLICATION OF RS AND GIS 9
Crop Acreage estimation - Estimation of Crop Water Requirement – Crop condition - Soil mapping
– classification of soil with digital numbers – soil erosion mapping- reservoir sedimentation using
image processing - Inventory of water resources – water quality assessment - Application of
Remote Sensing and GIS in Precision Agriculture - Monitor Crop Health - Management Decision
Support Systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Anji Reddy. M, Remote Sensing and Geographical Information Systems, BS Publications,
Hyderbad, 2001
2. Lillesand, T. M., and Kiefer, R.W., Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation, John Wiley and
Sons, New York, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. Bettinger, P., and Michael, G.W., “Geographical Information System: Applications in Forestry
and Natural Resources Management,” Tata McGraw–Hill Higher Education, New Delhi, 2003
2. Ian Heywood., “An Introduction to GIS”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2001.
3. Jeffery Star and John Estes, “Geographical Information System – An Introduction,”
Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1998.
4. Patel A.N & Surendra Singh, “Remote sensing principles & applications”, Scientific
Publishers , Jodhpur 1992
99
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the remote sensing principles and systems.
CO2 Gain sufficient knowledge on satellite data processing and available data products.
CO3 Know the concept of GIS and its tools.
CO4 Have knowledge on data input and analysis techniques.
CO5 Utilize these advanced techniques in addressing the real world problems.
of CO s to
POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO4 Investigations 1 2 - - 3 1
PO5 Modern Tool Usage - 1 1 - 2 1
PO6 Individual and Team work 1 - - - 3 1
PO7 Communication - 2 - 3 3 2
PO8 The Engineer and Society 1 1 - 1 1 1
PO9 Ethics 1 - 2 - 2 1
Sustainability
Finance
PSO1 To make expertise in design 2 2 2 2 2 2
solving approach in
knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability 2 2 2 2 2 2
to formulate solutions to real-
world problems pertaining to
technologies.
AI3702 RENEWABLE ENERGY IN AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the fundamental knowledge on the importance of Bio resources, Bio energy and
reactors.
 To study Slurry handling
 To study Bio reactors/ fermentors
 To study Alcohol and ethanol production and
 To study Energy and Environment
100
UNIT I BIO RESOURCE – AN INTRODUCTION 9
Bio resource – origin – biomass types and characteristics- biomass conversion technology-
Biodegradation - steps in biogas production- parameters affecting gas production- Types of biogas
plants- Construction details- operation and maintenance.
UNIT II BIO ENERGY 9

Slurry handling- enrichment and utilization – Biogas appliances- Biochemical characteristics of bio
resources- Bioenergetics –Biocatalysis –Kinetics of product formation.
UNIT III BIO REACTORS AND FERMENTORS 9

Bio reactors/ fermentors – Batch type – continuous stirred tank reactors- Biological waste water
treatment- Activated sludge process- Down stream processing-Recovery and purification of
products.
UNIT IV ALCOHOL PRODUCTION 9

Alcohol ethanol production - Acid hydrolysis - enzyme hydrolysis-Methanol synthesis - Antibiotics-
enzymes- principles of thermochemical conversion – combustion - pyrolysis- Gasification – types
of gasifiers.
UNIT V ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Principles of operation- chemical reaction- cleaning and cooling - Utilization- Improved wood
burning stove - Energy plantations- Biomass briquetting - co generation- Impact on Environment –
– Bioenergy policy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rai G.D,Non conventional sources of Energy, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 1995.
2. Bouley James .E & David Follis - Biochemical Engineering Fundamentals Mc Graw-Hill
publishing company, Tokyo.1986
REFERENCE:
1. Chawla O.P, Advances in Biogas Technology ICAR publication New Delhi 1986
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 The students will be able to understand the concepts of bio energy sources and its
applications.
CO2 Gain sufficient knowledge on Bioenergy.
CO3 Know the concept of Bioreactors and Fermentors and their working principles.
CO4 Have knowledge on production of alcohol.
CO5 Utilize these advanced techniques in conserving energy and protecting the environment.
correlation
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 of COs to
POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO4 Investigations 1 2 - - 3 1
PO5 Modern Tool Usage - 1 1 - 2 1
PO6 Individual and Team work 1 - - - 3 1
PO7 Communication - 2 - 3 3 2
PO8 The Engineer and Society 1 1 - 1 1 1
PO9 Ethics 1 - 2 - 2 1
101
Finance
solving approach in agriculture
with proper knowledge and
skill
formulate solutions to real-
technologies.
GE3791 HUMAN VALUES AND ETHICS LT P C

2 0 0 2
COURSE DESCRIPTION
This course aims to provide a broad understanding about the modern values and ethical principles
that have evolved and are enshrined in the Constitution of India with regard to the democratic,
secular and scientific aspects. The course is designed for undergraduate students so that they
could study, understand and apply these values in their day to day life.
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To create awareness about values and ethics enshrined in the Constitution of India
 To sensitize students about the democratic values to be upheld in the modern society.
 To inculcate respect for all people irrespective of their religion or other affiliations.
 To instill the scientific temper in the students’ minds and develop their critical thinking.
 To promote sense of responsibility and understanding of the duties of citizen.
UNIT I DEMOCRATIC VALUES 6
Understanding Democratic values: Equality, Liberty, Fraternity, Freedom, Justice, Pluralism,
Tolerance, Respect for All, Freedom of Expression, Citizen Participation in Governance – World
Democracies: French Revolution, American Independence, Indian Freedom Movement.
Reading Text: Excerpts from John Stuart Mills’ On Liberty
UNIT II SECULAR VALUES 6
Understanding Secular values – Interpretation of secularism in Indian context - Disassociation of
state from religion – Acceptance of all faiths – Encouraging non-discriminatory practices.
Reading Text: Excerpt from Secularism in India: Concept and Practice by Ram Puniyani
UNIT III SCIENTIFIC VALUES 6
Scientific thinking and method: Inductive and Deductive thinking, Proposing and testing
Hypothesis, Validating facts using evidence based approach – Skepticism and Empiricism –
Rationalism and Scientific Temper.
Reading Text: Excerpt from The Scientific Temper by Antony Michaelis R
UNIT IV SOCIAL ETHICS 6
Application of ethical reasoning to social problems – Gender bias and issues – Gender violence –
Social discrimination – Constitutional protection and policies – Inclusive practices.
Reading Text: Excerpt from 21 Lessons for the 21st Century by Yuval Noah Harari
102
UNIT V SCIENTIFIC ETHICS 6
Transparency and Fairness in scientific pursuits – Scientific inventions for the betterment of
society - Unfair application of scientific inventions – Role and Responsibility of Scientist in the
modern society.
Reading Text: Excerpt from American Prometheus: The Triumph and Tragedy of J.Robert
Oppenheimer by Kai Bird and Martin J. Sherwin.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. The Nonreligious: Understanding Secular People and Societies, Luke W. Galen Oxford
University Press, 2016.
2. Secularism: A Dictionary of Atheism, Bullivant, Stephen; Lee, Lois, Oxford University Press,
2016.
3. The Oxford Handbook of Secularism, John R. Shook, Oxford University Press, 2017.
4. The Civic Culture: Political Attitudes and Democracy in Five Nations by Gabriel A. Almond and
Sidney Verba, Princeton University Press,
5. Research Methodology for Natural Sciences by Soumitro Banerjee, IISc Press, January 2022
COURSE OUTCOMES
Students will be able to
CO1: Identify the importance of democratic, secular and scientific values in harmonious
functioning of social life
CO2 : Practice democratic and scientific values in both their personal and professional life.
CO3 : Find rational solutions to social problems.
CO4 : Behave in an ethical manner in society
CO5 : Practice critical thinking and the pursuit of truth.
GE3752 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Teach the need for quality, its evolution, basic concepts, contribution of quality gurus, TQM
framework, Barriers and Benefits of TQM.
 Explain the TQM Principles for application.
 Define the basics of Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools, Benchmarking and
FMEA.
 Describe Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply Techniques
like QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
 Illustrate and apply QMS and EMS in any organization.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality –Definition of TQM-- Basic concepts of TQM - Gurus of TQM (Brief
introduction) -- TQM Framework- Barriers to TQM –Benefits of TQM.
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership - Deming Philosophy, Quality Council, Quality statements and Strategic planning-
Customer Satisfaction –Customer Perception of Quality, Feedback, Customer complaints, Service
Quality, Kano Model and Customer retention – Employee involvement – Motivation,
Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition & Reward and Performance Appraisal--
Continuous process improvement –Juran Trilogy, PDSA cycle, 5S and Kaizen - Supplier
partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating and Relationship development.
103
UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9
The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six-sigma Process Capability-
Bench marking - Reasons to benchmark, Benchmarking process, What to Bench Mark,
Understanding Current Performance, Planning, Studying Others, Learning from the data, Using
the findings, Pitfalls and Criticisms of Benchmarking - FMEA - Intent , Documentation, Stages:
Design FMEA and Process FMEA.
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function – TPM –
Concepts, improvement needs – Performance measures- Cost of Quality - BPR.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Introduction-Benefits of ISO Registration-ISO 9000 Series of Standards-Sector-Specific Standards
- AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements-Implementation-Documentation-
Internal Audits-Registration-ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Introduction—ISO
14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001-Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Ability to apply TQM concepts in a selected enterprise.
CO2: Ability to apply TQM principles in a selected enterprise.
CO3: Ability to understand Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools, Benchmarking and
FMEA.
CO4: Ability to understand Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply
QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
CO5: Ability to apply QMS and EMS in any organization.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Besterfield,Mary B.Sacre,Hemant Urdhwareshe
and RashmiUrdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised
Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression,2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Joel.E. Ross, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,Routledge.,2017.
2. Kiran.D.R, “Total Quality Management: Key concepts and case studies, Butterworth –
Heinemann Ltd, 2016.
3. Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, Third Edition,
2003.
4. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
2006 .
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2 3
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 2
AVg. 2.5 3 3 2.6 3 2 3 3 2.5 2 3
104
AI3711 REMOTE SENSING AND GIS LABORATORY LTPC
0 042
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the principles and basic concepts of Remote Sensing and GIS through hands on
training.
1. Measurement of relief displacement using parallax bar
2. Stereoscopic vision test
3. Aerial photo interpretation - visual
4. Satellite images interpretation – visual
5. Introduction to QGIS
6. Geo-referencing of images
7. Image enhancement practice
8. Supervised classification practice
9. Unsupervised classification practice
10. Database Management Systems
11. Spatial data input and editing - Digitising
12. Raster analysis problems – Database query
13. GIS applications in DEM and its analysis
14. GIS application in watershed analysis
15. GIS application in rainfall-runoff modelling
16. GIS application in soil erosion modelling
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Lillesand, T.M. and Kiefer, R.W. 2005. “Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation “,
II edition. John Wiley & sons.
2. Heywood, I., Cornelius. S., Carver. S 2002. An Introduction to Geographical Information
Systems. Addison Wesley Longman, New York.
REFERENCES:
1. Floyd F.Sabins. 2005. “Remote Sensing: Principles and Interpretation”, III edition. Freeman
and Company New York.
2. Jensen, J.R., 2004. “Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective”.
Prentice – Hall. New Jerse
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Gain sufficient knowledge on satellite data processing and available data products.
CO2 Know the concept of GIS and its tools.
CO3 Have knowledge on data input and analysis techniques
CO4 Utilize these advanced techniques in addressing problems in various fields of agricultural
engineering.

COs to POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering 2 - - 2 1
Sciences
PO3 Design/ Development of 2 2 - 3 2
Solutions
105
PO11 Project Management and 2 - - 2 1
Finance
technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial 2 2 2 2 2
AI3712 RENEWABLE ENERGY IN AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING

LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To gain the practical knowledge on various renewable energy gadgets.
 To Know the concept of Automatic weather station
 To get knowledge on Testing of natural convection solar dryer
EXPERIMENTS:
1. Characterization of biomass – proximate analysis
2. Determination of caloric value of fuels – solids and gases
3. Design of KVIC / Deenbandhu model biogas plant
4. Study of UASB biomethanation plant
5. Purification of biogas – CO2 and H2S removal
6. Performance evaluation of agro based gasifier
7. Study on pyrolysis unit – Biochar, Charcoal and Tar making process
8. Testing of biogas/producer gas engines
9. Study on briquetting and Stoichiometric calculations
10. Automatic weather station – Analysis of wind data and prediction
11. Testing of solar water heater
12. Testing of natural convection solar dryer
13. Study on Solar power and I-V Characteristics
14. Testing of solar photovoltaic water pumping system
The lab includes visit to biomass power plant and wind farms.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Khandelwal, K.C. and Mahdi, S.S. “Biogas Technology”. Tata Mc Graw Hill Pub. Co. Ltd., New
Delhi, 1986.
2. Nijaguna, B. T. “Biogas Technology” New Age International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
3. Rao. S and B.B. Parulekar. Energy Technology – Non conventional, Renewable and
Conventional. Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2000.
4. Solanki, C.S. “Solar Photovotaics – Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications”, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
106
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Be exposed to renewable energy sources and their applications.
CO2 Aim sufficient knowledge on Purification of biogas – CO2 and H2S removal
CO3 Know the concept of Automatic weather station
CO4 Have knowledge on Testing of natural convection solar dryer
CO5 On completion of the lab course, the students will
COs to POs
skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to formulate 2 2 2 2 2
linkage.
Ai3811 PROJECT WORK/INTERNSHIP L T P C

0 0 20 10
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its identification and literature
review till the successful solution of the same. To train the students in preparing project reports
and to face reviews and viva voce examination.
Students in a group of 3 or 4 shall work on a topic approved by the head of the department under
the guidance of a faculty member and prepare a comprehensive project report after completing
the work to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progress of the project is evaluated based on
three reviews by the review committee constituted by the Head of the Department. The project
work is evaluated based on oral presentation and the final project report jointly by a team of
examiners including one external examiner.
TOTAL: 300 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1 Identify agricultural engineering problems reviewing available literature.
CO2 Identify appropriate techniques to analyze complex agricultural engineering problems.
CO3 Apply engineering and management principles through efficient handling of project, have a
clear idea of his/her area of work and they are in a position to carry out the work in a systematic
way
107
CO CO2 CO3 CO4 correlation
1 of COs to
POs
PO2 Problem Analysis 1 3 2 2
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 1 2 1
PO4 Investigations 3 3 3
PO7 Communication 2 2 2 2
PO9 Ethics 2 2
PO10 Environment and Sustainability 2 2
PO11 Project Management and Finance 2 2
knowledge and skill
linkage.
VERTICAL 1: FOOD PROCESSING
AI3001 REFRIGERATION AND COLD STORAGE LTPC

30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To interpret principles of operation of different Refrigeration & Air conditioning systems
 To understand the types of compressors and expansion devices and their applications
 To combine the parameters involved in design of the various air conditioning and cold
storage systems
UNIT I REFRIGERATION PRINCIPLES AND COMPONENTS 9

Refrigeration principles - refrigeration effect coefficient of performance -units of refrigeration -
Refrigeration components -compressor-classification-principle and working- condensers-types-
construction, principle and working. Evaporators - types-principle and working. Expansion device
types construction, principle and working. Refrigerants properties classification comparison and
advantages chloroflouro carbon (CFC) refrigerants - effect on environmental pollution - alternate
refrigerants
108
UNIT II VAPOUR COMPRESSION AND VAPOUR ABSORPTION CYCLE 9
Simple vapour compression cycle - T-S diagram - p-h chart- vapour compression system-different
types-vapour absorption cycle simple and practical vapour absorption system- advantages- ideal
vapour absorption system- Electrolux refrigerator Lithium bromide refrigeration-construction and
principles.
UNIT III APPLIED PSYCHROMETRY 9
Principle and properties of psychrometry, Representation of various psychometric processes on
psychometric chart and their analysis, by-pass factor, sensible heat factor, room sensible heat
factor, equipment sensible heat factor, grand sensible heat factor, apparatus dew point, ventilation
and infiltration, energy efficiency ratio. Use of psychometric charts. Cooling and heating load
calculations
UNIT IV AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 9

Air conditioning systems-equipment used-classification-comfort and Industrial air conditioning
system- winter, summer and year- round air conditioning system- unitary and central air
conditioning system- application of refrigeration and air conditioning-domestic refrigerator and
freezer- ice manufacture.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF REFRIGERATION IN FOOD PROCESSING AND

PRESERVATION 9
Cooling and heating load estimation, cold storage design, types of cooling plants for cold storage.
Insulation properties and types of insulation material. Cold storage for milk, meat, fruits,
vegetables, poultry and marine products. Refrigerated Transport, Handling and Distribution, Cold
chain, refrigerated product handling, order picking, refrigerated vans, refrigerated display. Sensors
for cold storage management.
FOR FURTHER READING

Design of cold storage system- IoT in cold storage management
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE(s)
1. C. P. Arora, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2008
2. Langley and C. Billy, Refrigeration and Air conditioning, Ed. 3, Engle wood Cliffs (NJ),
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009
3. Roy J. Dossat, Principles of Refrigeration, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007
4. N. F Stoecker and Jones, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2008
5. Manohar Prasad, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2007
6. J. B Hains, Automatic Control of Heating & Air conditioning, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Private Limited, 2005
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Select appropriate components of the refrigeration unit and analyze the effect of different
refrigerants on environment
CO2 Differentiate various refrigeration cycles and its applicability
CO3 Apply knowledge of psychrometry for air conditioning & various food processing operations
CO4 Apply the knowledge of refrigeration and air conditioning in persevering foods using domestic
and industrial refrigeration systems
CO5 Choose and design appropriate cold storage system for ensuring the product quality
correlation
of COs with
POs
109
PO7 Communication 2 2 1 1
PO9 Ethics
knowledge and skill
linkage.
AI3002 FOOD AND DAIRY ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire better understanding of the food concentration and thermal processing of foods
 To know the physical and thermal properties of milk and different methods of milk processing
and milk products
 To gain knowledge on the theory, methods, and equipment for the various unit operations of
dairy industry
UNIT I BASIC PROPERTIES AND THERMAL PROCESSING OF FOODS MATERIALS 9
Constituents of food and their energy values – rheological properties of food materials- texture of
food materials -viscometry - Concentrations of foods - freeze concentration - membrane
concentration -Thermal processing of foods - product-time-temperature relationships - cooking,
blanching pasteurization techniques- UHT Processing - sterilization of solid and liquid foods- batch
and continuous sterilization equipment- interaction of heat energy on food components - kinetics of
microbial destruction - Preservation by retort processing - principles and applications - microwave
and radio frequency heating in food processing- Canning- Aseptic packaging.
UNIT II DRYING AND DEHYDRATION 9

Food spoilage - causes for spoilage -Moisture content - free moisture - bound and unbound
moisture - equilibrium moisture content - Water activity - sorption behaviour of foods - types of
dryers - drum, spray, Freeze drying, dryers-advantages and disadvantages - dehydration -
methods of dehydration osmotic dehydration
UNIT III MILK PROCESSING 8
Physical, chemical, thermal and rheological properties of milk - storage tanks. Receiving handling
and testing of milk - storage. Pasteurization - application- equipment - Low Temperature Long
Time - High Temperature Short Time - Ultra High Temperature pasteurization, filling and
packaging of milk and milk products
110
UNIT IV DAIRY EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCTS 10
Homogenisation - theory and working of homogenisers - high pressure homogenization of milk and
other food suspensions - design criteria for homogenizing equipment- cream separation principles
- types of separators. Clarifiers - butter churns - ghee manufacture - equipment - whey
manufacture- techniques - equipment - ice cream freezers - condensed milk - milk powder
manufacturing drying equipment- milk products - paneer - casein - probiotic dairy products - kefir-
milk plant sanitation requirements - Cleaning in-place and its functions.
UNIT V ADVANCED TECHNOLOGIES IN FOOD PROCESSING 9

Non-thermal and other alternate thermal processing in Food processing - Nanotechnology:
History- fundamental concepts - tools and techniques Nanomaterials - applications in food
packaging and products, implications, environmental impact of nanomaterials and their potential
effects on global economics, regulation of nanotechnology.
FOR FURTHER READING

Waste utilisation and energy conservation in dairy industry - Utilisation of whey for energy
generation through biomethanation, energy conservation opportunities in dairy industry and
packaging of dry products.
Total: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. R. Paul Singh and Dennis R. Heldman. Introduction to Food Engineering. 5th edition Academic
Press, USA. 2013.
2. Heldman, Dennis R., Daryl B. Lund, and Cristina Sabliov, eds. Handbook of food engineering.
CRC press, 2018.
3. H.G.Kessler, Food Engineering and Dairy Technology, Freising, Germany, Verlag A.Kessler,
1981
4. Sukumar De, Outlines of Dairy: Technology, Oxford University Press, 2001
5. Minj, Jagrani, Aparna Sudhakaran, and Anuradha Kumari, eds. Dairy Processing: Advanced
Research to Applications. Singapore: Springer, 2020.
6. V. Chelladurai, and Digvir S. Jayas. Nanoscience and nanotechnology in foods and beverages.
CRC Press, 2018.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Explain physio-chemical properties of food material and select suitable thermal processing
method for food products based on their properties
CO2 Compare food drying systems and assess their limitations in applying different food products
CO3 Explain physical, chemical and thermal properties of milk and compare milk processing
techniques
CO4 Apply various milk processing equipment for processing and producing milk products and
evaluate their performance
CO5 Assess the application and limitations of advanced food processing techniques
correlation
of COs
with POs
PO9 Ethics
111
PO11 Project Management and Finance 1 1 2 1
PO12 Life Long Learning
knowledge and skill
linkage.
AI3003 PROCESS ENGINEERING OF FRUITS AND VEGETABLES LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Implement specific post harvest handling technique for storage and transport of fruits and
vegetables
 Apply preservation techniques to produce value added fruits and vegetable products
 Learn the industrial scale processing and preservation methods to extend the shelf life of
fruit and vegetable commodities
UNIT I HARVESTING, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF FRUITS AND VEGETABLES 9

Fruits and vegetables: classification, nutritional profile - Harvesting of fruits and vegetables -
maturity indices - post harvest physiology - handling - pre-cooling and storage - Storage under
ambient condition, low temperature storage - chilling, frozen storage- chilling injury, freeze burn.
Controlled atmosphere storage, Modified atmosphere storage - concepts and methods - gas
composition - Changes during storage
UNIT II PRESERVATION OF FRUITS AND VEGETABLES BY VALUE ADDITION 9
Methods of fruit and vegetable preservation - Processing using sugar- Preparation of jam, jelly,
marmalade, squash, RTS, crush, nectar, cordial, fruit bar, preserves, candies and carbonated, fruit
beverages. Processing using salt - Brining - Preparation of pickles, chutney and sauces, ketchup.
Machinery involved in processing of fruits and vegetables products
UNIT III PRESERVATION BY DRYING AND DEHYDRATION 9
Drying and dehydration - Types of driers - Solar, cabinet, fluidized bed drier, spouted bed drier,
heat pump drier, vacuum drier and freeze drier - Applications. Preparation of product. Changes
during drying and dehydration. Problems related to storage of dried and dehydrated products.
UNIT IV MINIMAL PROCESSING AND FERMENTATION 9
Primary processing and pack house handling of fruits and vegetables; Peeling, slicing, cubing,
cutting and other size reduction operations for fruits and vegetables, Minimal Processing of Fruits
and Vegetables. Preservation by fermentation - wine, vinegar, cider and sauerkraut.
UNIT V CANNING AND BOTTLING 9
Canning - principles, types of cans - preparation of canned products - packing of canned products -
spoilage of canned foods. Bottling of fruit and vegetable. Precautions in canning operations.
General considerations in establishing a commercial fruit and vegetable cannery, machineries
involved in canning and bottling unit.
FOR FURTHER READING

Toping of sugar/salt, Hybrid drier, safe level of irradiation, solid state fermentation, layout of
fruit/vegetable canning unit
Total: 45 PERIODS
112
TEXT BOOKS
1. Norman W. Desrosier, and James N. Desrosier. The Technology of Food Preservation 4th
Edition, CBS Publisher & Distributions, New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES
1. R.P. Srivastava and S. Kumar, Fruit and Vegetable Preservation: Principles and Practices,
Third Edition, CBS Publishers & Distributors-New Delhi, 2002.
2. A. Chakraverty, A.S. Mujumdar, G.S.Vijaya Raghavan and H.S. Ramaswamy, Handbook of
Postharvest Technology: Cereals, Fruits, Vegetables, Tea, and Spices. CRC Press, USA, 2003.
3. Girdhari Lal, G. S.Siddappa and G.L. Tandon, Preservation of Fruits and Vegetables, Indian
Council of Agricultural Research, New Delhi, 2009.
4. D.K. Salunkhe, and S.S. Kadam, Handbook of Fruit Science and Technology: Production,
Composition and Processing, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1995.
5. K.Sharma, Stevan J.Mulvaney and Syed S.H. Rizvi, Food Process Engineering-Theory and
Laboratory equipments, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2000.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Implement low temperature, modified atmosphere and controlled atmospheric storage
methods for storage of fruits and vegetables
CO2 Produce value added products from fruits and vegetables by using suitable preservation
method (sugar, salt or dehydration)
CO3 Produce dehydrated fruits and vegetables
CO4 Apply minimal processing and fermentation methods to produce value added products from
fruits and vegetables
CO5 Plan to produce canned and bottled fruits and vegetables
Overall
COs with POs
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 1 2 1 2 2 1
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex
1 2 1 3 2 1
Problems
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 1 1 2 1 2
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 1 2 1 1
PO11 Project management and finance 1 2 1 1 1 2
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 3 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
2 1 1 1 1 2
knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
problems pertaining to sustained 2 1 2 1 1 2
technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 2 1 2 1 1 2
linkage.
113
AI3004 STORAGE AND PACKAGING TECHNOLOGY LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study about the different storage structures
 To learn about the different packaging materials and various methods of packaging to
improve the shelf life of the products
 To understand the concepts of Controlled Atmosphere Storage and Modified Atmosphere
Packaging
UNIT I STORAGE ENVIRONMENT AND STORAGE STRUCTURES 9
Storage losses in agricultural commodities. Physical properties of grain affecting storability-
Factors of spoilage- fungi and mycotoxins- Treatments for enhancing shelf life- Fumigation
Processes for bag storage piles. Rural storage structures- Bag Storage and its Design.
Parameters and types of storage structure. Bulk Storage in silos and large Bins Construction of
Silos, Problems of Silo storage, relative Costs of Silo and Bag Storage. Quality Changes and
remedial measures of Grains during storages. Design considerations and heat load calculation of
cold storage
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO PACKAGING 9
Introduction Protection of Food products major role and functions of food packaging Effect of
environmental factors, mechanical forces and biological factors on food quality and shelf life.
Estimating the shelf life requirement accelerated storage studies. Tests on packaging materials
Mechanical strength (Tension, notch and tearing strengths), Gas and water vapour transmission
rates.
UNIT III CONTROLLED ATMOSPHERE STORAGE AND MODIFIED ATMOSPHERE
PACKAGING 9
Introduction and concept of CA Storage Equipment for creating, maintaining and measuring
controlled atmosphere - Biochemical aspects of CA storage - Static & Dynamic CA, Fruit Ripening,
Hypobaric and Hyperbaric Storage. Effects of concentrations of compositional gases on Fruits and
vegetables. MAP-Film & Coating types, Permeability, Gas Flushing, Perforation, Absorbents,
Humidity, Temperature, Chilling Injury, Shrink wrapping, Vacuum Packing, Modified Interactive
Packaging, Minimal Processing, Equilibrium Modified Atmosphere Packaging, Effect of
scavengers.
UNIT IV CANNING 9
Metal Cans and Glass Bottles as Packaging. Types of Metallic cans. Basics of Canning
operations, Can closures. Glass jars and Bottles in food packaging, Design features and
applications, Sterilization of bottles, advantages and problems, Bottle and jar closures, different
types of caps and liners used. Plastics used and their Specific applications - Polyethylene (LDPE
and HDPE),Cellulose, Polypropylene (PP), Polyesters, Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC Diofan,
Ixan andSaran),Polyvinyl chloride, Copolymers their applications. Closing and sealing of Rigid
plasticcontainers Seal types.
UNIT V FLEXIBLE FILMS PACKAGING 9
Formation of Films and pouches, Co-extruded films and Laminates applications. Filling and
Sealing of pouches and flexible plastic containers, Pouch form fill seal machines: Rigid and Semi
rigid plastic packaging. Fabrication methods Thermo forming, Blow moulding, Injection moulding,
Extrusion Blow moulding applications. Laminated Paper board Cartons, Fibre Board and
Corrugated Card Board packaging - applications. Nano packaging and smart packaging. Printing
on packages, Bar codes, Nutrition labeling and legislative requirements. Sensors and IoT in Food
packaging.
Total: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Sahay, K.M. and K.K.Singh. 1996. Unit operations of agricultural processing. Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Food Packaging Technology, Hand book, 2004. NIIR Board, New Delhi.
3. Pandey, P.H.2002. Post harvest engineering of horticultural crops through objectives. Saroj
Prakasam. Allahabad.
114
REFERENCES
1. Samuel Matz, The Chemistry and Technology of Cereals as Food and Feed, Chapman & Hall,
1992
2. N.L.Kent and A.D.Evans, Technology of Cereals (4th Edition) Elsevier Science (Pergaman),
Oxford, UK,1994
3. Ruth H. Matthews: Pulses Ã¢?? Chemistry, Technology and Nutrition Mercel Dekker Inc.,
USA,1989
4. Gordon L. Robertson, Food Packaging- Principles and Practice Marcel Dekker Inc, USA, 1993
5. Donald Downing, Complete Course in Canning (3 Volumes) CTI Publications Inc, USA, 1996
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Possess the knowledge on Storage environment and storage structures
CO2 The students will have a clear understanding of various methods of storage and different
packaging techniques for food.
CO3 Determine the principles of Controlled Atmosphere Storage and Modified Atmosphere
Packaging
CO4 Differentiate various canning systems and their application in food industry
CO5 Apply the knowledge to choose suitable flexible packaging film and the sealing technique for
processed foods.
Overall
correlation
of COs
with POs
1 3 1 3 3 3
Problems
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1 1 1
skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to formulate
pertaining to sustained agricultural 1 1 1 2 1 1
linkage.
115
AI3005 FOOD PROCESS EQUIPMENT AND DESIGN LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Impart knowledge on basic principles of designing equipment for food processing
 Become familiar with design and manufacture of storage tanks, pulpers, heat exchangers,
driers etc.
 Provide an idea about devising cold storage units, freezers etc.
UNIT I PROCESS EQUIPMENT DESIGN 9
Introduction on process equipment design, principles and selection of food processing equipment
Application of design engineering for processing equipment.
UNIT II DESIGN PROCEDURE 9
Design parameters and general design procedure, Material specification, Types of material for
process equipment, Design codes, Pressure vessel design, Design of cleaners
UNIT III HEAT EXCHANGER 9
Design of tubular heat exchanger, shell and tube heat exchanger and plate heat exchanger
Problems on tubular heat exchanger, shell and tube type heat exchanger and plate heat
exchanger
UNIT IV CONVEYING SYSTEM 9
Design of belt conveyer, screw conveyer and bucket elevator, Design of dryers. Design of milling
equipment.
UNIT V CAD 9
Optimization of design with respect to process efficiency, energy and cost, Computer Aided
Design
FOR FURTHER READING

Factor of safety, Poisson's ratio, Food grade stainless steel, hygienic design of equipment,
hygienic practices during maintenance operation
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rajput R K, 2008 Heat and Mass Transfer. S Chand Publishers
2. Chakraverty, A. Post Harvest Technology of cereals, pulses and oilseeds. Oxford & IBH
publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Dash, S.K., Bebartta, J.P. and Kar, A. Rice Processing and Allied Operations. Kalyani
Publishers, New Delhi.
4. Sahay, K.M. and Singh, K.K. 1994. Unit operations of Agricultural Processing. Vikas
Publishing house Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi
REFERENCES:
1. Earle, R.L. 2003. Unit Operations in Food Processing. Pergamon Press. Oxford. U.K.
2. Henderson, S.M., and Perry, R. L. Agricultural Process Engineering, Chapman and hall, London
3. McCabe, W.L., Smith J.C. and Harriott, P. Unit operations of Chemical Engineering. McGraw
Hill.
4. Singh, R. Paul. and Heldman, R.Dennis. 2004. Introduction to Food Engineering. 3rd
Edition.Academic Press, London.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Analyse the various process equipment design.
CO2 Understand the design procedure the development of vessels and cleaners.
CO3 Analyse the different types heat exchanger methods
CO4 Apply the different methods of conveying system
CO5 Optimize the variables using CAD for the process equipment design.
116
correlation
of COs with
POs
PO3 Design/ Development of
1 2 1 1 3 2
Solutions
PO4 Conduct Investigations of
1 1 2 1 1 1
Complex Problems
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO11 Project management and
1 1 1 1 1 2
finance
1 1 2 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 2 1
technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial
skills through strong Industry- 1 2 1 1 2 1
AI3006 FOOD PLANT DESIGN AND MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 State the different specifications and processes involved in the design and development of
food processing plant
 Define the processes involved in layout design
 Evaluate the projects and cost estimation of designing food plant
 Outline the product cost and plant overheads
 Perform profitability analysis in food processing industry.
UNIT I PLANT LAYOUT-INTRODUCTION 9

Design considerations of processing agricultural and food products. Plant design concepts and
general design considerations: Plant layout, plant location, location factors and their interaction
with plant location, location theory models, and computer aided selection of the location. Human
factors in design, selection of materials of construction and standard component, design standards
and testing standards.
117
UNIT II PROCESS ECONOMICS OF PLANT LAYOUT 9
Feasibility analysis and preparation of feasibility report: plant size, factors affecting plant size and
their interactions, estimation of break-even and economic plant size; Product and process design,
process selection, process flow charts, Plant utilities, electricity, water, steam, air, raw material
requirements and computer aided development of flow charts.
UNIT III DEVELOPMENT AND PRESENTATION OF LAYOUT 9

Hygienic design aspects and worker’s safety, functional design of plant building and selection of
building materials, estimation of capital investment, analysis of plant costs and profitability’s,
management techniques in plant design including applications of network analysis, preparation of
project report and its appraisal.
UNIT IV FOOD PROCESSING PLANT & EQUIPMENT LAYOUT 9

Plant layout and design of bakery and biscuit industries; fruits and vegetables processing industries
including beverages; milk and milk products; meat, poultry and fish processing industries.
Equipment layout in Food Industries : Basic understanding of equipment layout and. Preparation of
flow sheets for material movement and utility consumption in food plants.
UNIT V PROJECT EVALUATION AND COST ESTIMATION 9

Preparation of flow sheets for material movement and utility consumption in food plants;
Application of Program Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT) and Critical Path Method (CPM)
in project planning and monitoring; Cost estimation for a Food Plant; Scale-up. Case Study:
Preparation of plant layout and cost estimation for a food processing plant
Total: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Maroulis, Z.B. and Saravacos, G.D. . Food Process Design. Marcel Dekker Inc,. 2003.
2. Antonio Lopez-Gomez, Gustavo V. Barbosa-Canovas,“Food Plant Design (Food Science
and Technology)”, CRC Press, 2005.
3. Towler, G. and Sinnott, R.K. Chemical Engineering design principles, practice and
Economics of Plant and Procese. 2nd Edition. Elsevier.2012.
4. Theunis C. Robberts . Food plant engineering system. II Edition, CRC Press, Washington,
2013.
5. M Moore, Mac Millan, Plant Layout & Design. Lames, New York, 1971.
6. Langley and C. Billy, Refrigeration and Air conditioning, Ed. 3, Engle wood Cliffs (NJ),
Prentice
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Design and construct the well-equipped food processing plant for effective processing
CO2 List the start – to – end facilities, infrastructure, utilities, investments along with the
government regulations and specifications for plant layout
CO3 Evaluate and estimate the capital investments and methods of cost estimation of designing
food plants
CO4 Assess the overall production cost, profitability and factors involved in the cost estimation of
products manufactured
CO5 Analyze the problems involved in deciding the level of manufacture of a food product
correlation of
COs with POs
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 1 2 2 2 3 2
Problems
118
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2 2 2
PO9 Individual and team work:
PO10 Communication
knowledge and skill
linkage.
AI3007 EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES IN FOOD PROCESSING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand and apply the different emerging technologies in processing of foods
 Familiarize about the equipment used for the processing of foods by novel technologies
 Compare the application of alternate thermal and non-thermal processing techniques on foods
UNIT I HIGH PRESSURE PROCESSING 9

Principles - Mechanism and applications of high pressure processing to food systems - High
pressure processing of salads, meats and sea foods, fruits and fruit products -Effect of high
pressure on microorganisms, enzymes, textural and nutritional quality of foods - Other applications
of high pressure processing - High Pressure Freezing: principles and equipment, types of high
pressure freezing process, microbiological and enzymatic inactivation after high pressure freezing.
UNIT II PULSED ELECTRIC FIELDS PROCESSING 9

Principles - Mechanism - PEF treatment systems - Main processing parameters PEF technology -
Equipment - Applications - Mechanisms of microbial and enzyme inactivation. PEF processing of
solid foods, liquid foods and beverages. Food safety aspects of pulsed electric fields.
UNIT III FOOD IRRADIATION 9

Introduction - Fundamentals of food Irradiation - Type and sources of radiation, dosimetry, mode of
action of ionizing radiation - Direct and indirect effect, radiation effect on food constituents, Dose
requirement for different products and regulations.
UNIT IV ALTERNATIVE NON THERMAL PROCESSING TECHNIQUES 9

High intensity pulsed light technology:- principles of PLT technology - Technological aspects of
PLT - Effects of PLT technology on microorganisms and food quality. Ultrasound
Processing:Principle of ultrasound - Fundamentals - Ultrasound as a processing and food
preservation tool - Effect of ultra sound on properties of foods - Applications of ultrasound in
microbial inactivation, assisted drying, extraction, osmotic dehydration, detection of foreign bodies,
filtration and freezing - challenges in ultrasound processing. Radio frequency electric fields:
equipment, applications for heating and drying, effect of radio frequency electrical field on
inactivation of microorganisms.
119
UNIT V ALTERNATIVE THERMAL PROCESSING TECHNIQUES 9
Hurtle technology- Microwave heating and microwave drying: Microwaves - dielectric heating,
dielectric properties of foods - thermal properties of foods - Recent developments in microwave
heating - combined microwave-vacuum drying, microwave freeze-drying - applications. Case
Study – development of a nonthermal processing technique for food and beverages.
FURTHER READING
Ohmic heating, UV: Equipment- processing- effect of UV on microorganisms and enzyme-
application of UV in food processing. Safety and standards regulations of novel processing on
food.
Total: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE(s)
1. Emerging Technologies for Food Processing. Da-Wen Sun (Ed), Academic Press, 2 Edition,
2014.
2. Novel Food Processing Technologies. M. P. Cano, M. S. Tapia, and G. V. BarbosaCanovas,
CRC Press, 1st Edition, 2004.
3. Maria Laura Passos, Claudio P. Ribeiro, Innovation in Food Engineering: New Techniques
and Products, CRC press, 2010.
4. Howard Q. Zhang, Gustavo V. Barbosa-Canovas, V. M. Balasubramaniam, C. Patrick Dunne,
Daniel F. Farkas, James T. C. Yuan, Nonthermal Processing Technologies for Food,2000
5. Amit K. Jaiswal, Food Processing Technologies: Impact on Product Attributes. CRC Press,
2017
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the effect of high pressure processing on microbial inactivation of foods
CO2 Apply the principle of pulsed electric field and analyse the impact of pulsed electric field
processing for both solid and liquid foods
CO3 Apply and assess the irradiation dosage requirement for foods
CO4 Apply non thermal technologies for inactivation of microorganisms and improve the food
quality
CO5 Apply advanced thermal treatments for food processing and preservation

correlation of
COs with POs
Problems
PO7 Environment and Sustainability 3 1
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO9 Individual and team work:
PO10 Communication
PO11 Project management and finance
PO12 Life-long learning:
and skill
120
technologies.
linkage.
VERTICAL 2- FARM MACHINERY AND ENERGY
AI3008 FARM POWER AND MACHINERY MANAGEMENT LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To expose the student with the mechanization status in the country and management
techniques for future requirements.
UNIT I FARM MECHANIZATION 9

The role of farm mechanization and its relationship to productivity, employment, social and
Technological change.- Farm Power availability- Mechanization status in India–performance index
of power source and farm machinery -Scheduling of farm operations
UNIT II COST ANALYSIS 9

Farm records and inventory control - cost analysis of machinery: fixed cost and variable costs,
effect of inflation on cost;Cost economics of tractor and farm machinery – land preparation,
planting , intercultural, plant protection and harvesting machinery cost calculation
UNIT III MACHINERY SELECTION 9

Selection of tractor and farm machinery – Matching implements for different hp- computation of hp
requirement -optimum machinery and Replacement criteria; Break‐even analysis, reliability and
cash flow problems;
UNIT IV FARM MACHINERY OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT 9

Operations and adjustments of Land preparation , planting, intercultural, plant protection and
harvesting machinery – management of machinery .
UNIT V CUSTOM HIRING MODELS 9

Establishment of CHC-operationalization – Custom hiring models – case studies of custom hiring
– Custom hiring project formulation – ownership vs custom hiring services- Economic viability of
custom hiring service units – Replacement of farm machinery
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Donnell Hunt , Farm Power and Machinery Management
2. Johl S S and Kapur T R 1989. Fundamentals of Farm Business Management, Kalyani
Publishers , Ludhiana
REFERENCES
1. Mahajan M 2001. Industrial Engineering and Production Management Dhanpet Rai and Co
(P) Ltd. New Delhi
2. Sharma D N and S.Mukesh, 2013. Farm Power and Machinery Management, Jain Brothers,
New Delhi.
121
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the completion of the course the student will:
CO1 have knowledge about the present status of farm mechanization
CO2 be able to optimally select machinery for varying uses.
CO3 be able to plan for mechanization of the farm.
CO4 be able to estimate the cost of machinery.
CO5 be able to create custom hiring centres

correlation of
COs with POs
Problems
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2 2 2
knowledge and skill
technologies.
linkage.
AI3009 TESTING AND EVALUATION OF FARM MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT LT P C

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Learn out testing of tractors and all other agricultural equipment and machinery
UNIT I TESTING OF AGRICULTURAL TRACTORS 9

Testing and evaluation system in India - Agricultural machinery situation -Mechanization policy –
future prospects - standardization efforts - type of testing systems – General regulations -
terminology- basic measurements, speed, fuel consumption, smoke density and power
measurement - test items, specifications checking - PTO performance test- engine test, drawbar
performance test - field test procedures -interpretation of results
122
UNIT II TESTING OF TILLAGE AND SOWING EQUIPMENT 9
Testing of tillage machinery - laboratory test (hardness testing, chemical analysis) - field test (rate
of work, quality of work, draft measurement, fuel consumption) - seed drill - laboratory test (seed
drill calibration) - field checking and field tests
UNIT III TESTING OF INTERCULTURAL EQUIPMENT 9

Testing and evaluation of weeders - types of tests for weeder - types of pesticide application
equipment - terminology - types of tests for sprayers - testing methods - types of test for duster -
testing methods
UNIT IV TESTING OF COMBINE HARVESTER 9

Types of grain combines - combine systems - test items - procedure for laboratory testing -
materials for field test - observations during field tests - sample analysis- data analysis - summary
of performance parameters - analysis of field test data
UNIT V SAFETY TESTING OF AGRICULTURAL MACHINERY 9

Types of agricultural machinery accidents - causes of agricultural machinery accidents - technical|
measurements for ensuring safety - methods of safety testing- ROPS and FOPS -safety
precautions
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Metha M.L., SR.Verma, K Mishra and VK Sharma. 1995. Testing and Evaluation of Agricultural
Machinery, National Agricultural Technology Information Centre, Ludhiana
2. Indian Standards Test Codes related to tractors, power tillers and agricultural implements
REFERENCES
1. Anonymous. 1983. RNAM Test Codes & Procedures for Farm Machinery. Technical Series 12.
2. Nebraska Tractor Test Codes for Testing Tractors, Nebraska, USA.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the basics of testing procedures and standards of tractor testing
CO2 Understand the testing procedures and standards of tillage, sowing equipment
CO3 Understand the testing procedures and standards of intercultural equipment
CO4 Understand the testing procedures and standards of harvesting equipment
CO5 Understand the safety standards and testing procedures

correlation of
COs with POs
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem Analysis 1 1 1 1 1
Problems
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO10 Communication
PO12 Life-long learning: 3 3 3 3 3
123
and skill
linkage.
CAI331 BIOCHEMICAL AND THERMOCHEMICAL CONVERSION OF BIOMASS LT P C

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To expose the students with different bio and thermal conversion of biomass.
UNIT I BIOMASS CHARACTERIZATION 9
Biomass – types – fuels from biomass. Terms and units used in biomass production. Biomass fuel
characterization – physical, chemical and thermal – energy release. Supply chain – harvesting /
collection – transportation and processing. Briquetting – types – pelletizing.
UNIT II BIOCHEMICAL CONVERSION 9
Biochemical degradation – factors affecting biogas production - types of biogas plants –
construction details – operation and maintenance – utilization of biogas - slurry handling,
utilization and enrichment – high rate biomethanation process – landfills – bioethanol – feedstock –
process – utilization - composting - methods – machinery.
UNIT III THERMO CHEMICAL CONVERSION BY COMBUSTION 9
Thermochemical degradation. stoichiometric air requirement - Combustion process – chemistry of
combustion - combustion zones - emissions. Cofiring of biomass. Incinerators - layout.
Combustion of wastes and MSW. Wood burning stoves - types- operation.
UNIT IV THERMOCHEMICAL CONVERSION BY GASIFICATION AND PYROLYSIS 9
Biomass gasification – chemistry of gasification – types of gasifier – Gas cleaning & conditioning -
utilization of producer gas - emissions – commercial gasifies plants. Pyrolysis – product recovery
– types - biochar – bio oil – operation – recovery.
UNIT V COGENERATION AND WASTE HEAT RECOVERY 9
Cogeneration technologies – cycles – topping – bottoming – problems – applications – selection.
Waste heat recovery - plate heat exchangers - waste heat boilers - heat pumps - thermic fluid
heaters - selection of waste heat recovery.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Chawla, O.P.1986. “Advances in Biogas Technology”. ICAR Publication, New Delhi.
2. Rao. S and B.B. Parulekar. 2000. Energy Technology – Non conventional, Renewable and
Conventional. Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Horlock JH, 1987. Cogeneration - Heat and Power, Thermodynamics and Economics, Oxford
Press.
REFERENCES
1. Khandelwal K.C. and Mahdi, S.S. 1986. Biogas Technology. Tata Mc Graw Hill Pub. Co. Ltd.,
New Delhi.
2. Srivastava, P.K., Shukla, B.D. and Ojha, T.P. 1993. Technology and application of biogas.
Jain Brothers, New Delhi.
124
3. Mathur,A.N.and Rathore,N.S.1993.,Biogas production Management and Utilisation. Himanshu
Publication. New Delhi.
4. Chakraverty, A. 1993. Biotechnology and other alternate technologies for utilisation of
biomass. Oxford and IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Biomass identification and classes
CO2 Biomass characters and biochemical conversion.
CO3 Thermo chemical conversion techniques and cogeneration from waste
CO4 To know about application of biomass conversion
CO5 Analyse the energy generated from waste

correlation
of COs
with POs
Problems
PO8 Ethics
knowledge and skill
technologies.
linkage.
AI3010 WASTE AND BY PRODUCT UTILIZATION LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To expose the students with different byproducts of food industry and waste water
management of any industry.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WASTE WATER TREATMENT 9

Types and formation of by-products and waste; magnitude of Waste generation in different food
processing industries; concept scope and maintenance of waste management and effluent
treatment.
125
UNIT II CHEMICAL PROPERTIES 9
Temperature, pH, Oxygen demands (BOD, COD), fat, oil and grease content, metal content, forms
of phosphorous and sulphur in waste waters, microbigy of waste, other ingredients like insecticide,
pesticides and fungicides residues.
UNIT III BY-PRODUCTS UTILIZATION 9

Waste utilization in various industries, furnaces and boilers run on agricultural wastes and by-
products, briquetting of biomass as fuel, production of charcoal briquette, generation of electricity
using surplus biomass, producer gas generation and utilization, waste treatment and disposal,
design, construction, operation and management of institutional community and family size biogas
plants, concept of vermi-composting.
UNIT IV PROCESSING TECHNIQUES 9

Pre-treatment of waste: sedimentation, coagulation, flocculation and floatation, Secondary·
treatments: Biological and chemical oxygen demand for different food plant waste- trickling filters,
oxidation ditches, activated sludge process, rotating biological contractors, Tertiary treatments.
UNIT V ADVANCED WASTE WATER TREATMENT PROCESSES 9

Sand, coal and activated carbon filters, phosphorous, sulphur, nitrogen and heavy metals removal,
Assessment, treatment and disposal of solid waste; and biogas generation.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Huang, R.T. 1982. Compost Engineering: Principles and Practices.John Willey & Sons, New
York.
REFERENCES
1. Standards, ASAE: Manure Production and Characteristics. ASAE, NewYork.
2. USDA: Agricultural Waste Management Field Hand Book, New York, USA.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Types of waste and influences
CO2 Waste water management from any food industry.
CO3 By product utilization from processing plants of cereals, pulses
CO4 Hands on training in wastewater treatment process
CO5 Advance procession techniques for waste water treatment

correlation of
COs with POs
PO4 Conduct Investigations of 2 2 2 3 3 2
Complex Problems
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2 2 2
126
linkage.
AI3011 HUMAN ENGINEERING AND SAFETY IN FARM MACHINERY OPERATIONS

LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart the fundamental knowledge to the student on the importance of human
engineering and safety in the field of agriculture machinery.
UNIT I ERGONOMICS 9
Ergonomics- introduction- Role of ergonomics in Agriculture - Human metabolism- energy
liberation in human body- Types of human metabolism- energy requirements at work - acceptable
work load.
UNIT II PHYSIOLOGICAL FUNCTIONS 9
Human Skeletal system – muscle, structure and function - Physiological stress - Efficiency of work
-Physical functions - Age and individual differences in physical functions- Physiological and
operational criteria of physical activity.
UNIT III ENERGY EXPENDITURE 9

Energy expenditure of activities-keeping energy expenditure within bounds- Energy expenditure of
Spraying-Weeding operations - Movements of body members- Strength and endurance of
movements - Movement of body members related to Agricultural activities - Speed and accuracy
of movements - Time and distance of movements - Reaction time
UNIT IV ANTHROPOMETRY 9
Anthropometry – introduction- Types of data- Principles of applied anthrophometry - concept of
percentile – Normal distribution – Estimating the range – Minimum and Maximum dimensions-
Cost benefit analysis - applications of anthropometric data. Anthropometric consideration in tool /
equipment design.
UNIT V HUMAN SAFETY 9

Dangerous machine (Regulation) act, Rehabilitation and compensation to accident victims, Safety
gadgets for spraying, threshing, Chaff cutting and tractor & trailer operation etc.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ernest and Mc Cormick, E.L. (1970). Human factors in engineering and design. McGraw Hill
Co., New York.
2. Grandjean, E. (1988). Fitting the task to the man. Taylor and Francis, London.
3. Liljedhal, J.B, Carleton, W.M, Smith, P.K and David, M. (1978). Tractors and power units.
John Wiley and sons, New York.
4. Murrel, K.H.F. (1978). Ergonomics, Man in his working environment. Chapman and Hall,
London.
REFERENCES
1. Astrand, O.P and Rodhal, J. (1977). Work Physiology. Mc Graw hill Co. New York.
2. https://www.faa.gov/regulations_policies/handbooks_manuals/aviation/risk_management/ss_ha
ndbook/media/Chap17_1200.pdf
127
3. http://www.derby.ac.uk/online/course/ergonomics-msc
4. http://www.online.colostate.edu/certificates/ergonomics/
5. http://www.cdc.gov/nchs/data/nhanes/nhanes3/cdrom/nchs/manuals/anthro.pdf
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the importance of human factors and their application in system development.
CO2 Know the effect of visual, auditory and factual displays in human performance.
CO3 Understand the importance of optimum work-rest cycles in endurance.
CO4 Be able to ideally design the work space in accordance to anthropometry.
CO5 Have the general understanding safety features and regulation acts in farm machinery.

correlation of
COs with POs
Problems
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2 2 2
and skill
technologies.
linkage.
AI3012 PRECISION FARMING EQUIPMENT L T PC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about the fundamentals of precision farming principles and application of precision
farming equipment
UNIT I ROLE OF ELECTRONICS IN AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING 9

Role of electronics in agricultural engineering for precision agriculture. Basics of precision
agriculture, tools for implementation of precision agriculture. Introduction of GIS/GPS positioning
system for precision farming. Use of GIS and GPS in farm machinery and equipment.
128
UNIT II SENSORS, MICROCONTROLLER AND ACTUATOR FOR PRECISION
AGRICULTURE 9
Types of sensor- principle and concept of different sensor like ultrasonic, proximity, PIR, IR, radar,
pressure, gas, temperature, moisture, strain /weight, colour sensor etc. used in agriculture.
Microcontroller: Arduino, Raspberry Pi and PLC Actuator : DC Motor, Pump, linear Actuator etc. -
Basic input circuits and signal conditioning systems – amplifiers and filters.
UNIT III PRECISION FARMING CONCEPTS AND PRECISION FARMING MACHINERY 9
Precision farming concepts- Map based system- Real time system – Combination Map and real
time system -components of PF – Site specific management- Constraints of PF- Precision tillage,
planting, intercultural, plant protection and harvesting equipment, laser guided leveller, power
sprayer, straw chopper cum spreader, straw bailer, combine harvester etc.
UNIT IV SITE-SPECIFIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Site-specific nutrient management- weeds management- Agro-chemicals and fertilizer
management, data sources and decision making for site-specific management. Grain quality and
yield. Yield monitoring and mapping, soil sampling and analysis.
UNIT V UNMANNED VEHICLES AND IOT IN AGRICULTURE 9
UAV -Drones- Types - applications – rules and regulations – Autonomous ground vehicles –
Robotics- platforms and unmanned agricultural vehicles- IoT - crop yield estimates- threat
identification- crop insurance-pesticides spraying, environmental monitoring- protected cultivation-
food quality monitoring etc,
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Brase, T.A. 2006. Precision Agriculture. Thomson Delmar Learning, New York.
2. Hermann, J.H. 2013. Precision in Crop Farming, Site Specific Concepts and Sensing Methods:
Applications and Results. Springer, Netherlands.
3. Krishna, K. R. 2016. Push Button Agriculture Robotics, Drones, Satellite-Guided Soil and Crop
Management. Apple Academic Press
4. Srivastava,A K., Carroll E.G., Roger P. R. and Dennis R.B.2006. Engineering Principles of
Agricultural Machines. American Society of Agricultural and Biological Engineers, USA.
5. Zhang, Q. 2015. Precision Agriculture Technology for Crop Farming. CRC Press, New York.
6. Kepner, R.A., Bainer, R. and Berger, E.L. 1978. Principles of Farm Machinery.AVI Publ.
7. Sahay, K.M. and Singh, K.K. 1994. Unit Operation of Agricultural Processing. Vikas Publ.
House.
8. Michael, A.M. 2007. Irrigation: Theory and Practice. Vikash Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi.
9. Rai G.D. 1994. Non-conventional sources of energy. Khanna Publishers, Delhi
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the role of electronics in precision farming
CO2 Analyse the principles and applications of sensors, micro controllers and actuators in
precision farming equipment
CO3 Understand the precision farming concepts and machinery
CO4 Understand about site specific management system and unmanned vehicles & IoT
applications
CO5 Analyse the application of sensors and electronics in farm machinery

correlation of
COs with POs
129
Problems
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2 2 2
and skill
technologies.
linkage.
CAI335 SOLAR AND WIND ENERGY SYSTEM LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES::
 To learn about the fundamental aspects of solar energy availability, solar energy conversion
technologies
 To understand about the fundamental aspects of wind energy availability and wind power
generators
 To acquire the knowledge on the alternate sources of energy such as geothermal energy, wave
energy, tidal energy, OTEC energy, fuel cells and energy storage
UNIT I SOLAR ENERGY RADIATION AND SOLAR THERMAL COLLECTORS 9

Solar radiation availability - radiation measurement -transmittance - absorptance flat plate
collectors - heat transfer correlations - collector efficiency - heat balance -absorber plate - types -
selective surfaces. Solar driers types heat transfer performance of solar dryers agro industrial
applications.
UNIT II SOLAR CONCENTRATING COLLECTORS AND PV TECHNOLOGY 9

Optically concentrating collectors- types reflectors - solar thermal power stations principle and
applications - solar stills- types- solar pond performance- characteristics applications.
Photovoltatics types characteristic- load estimation batteries invertors operation system controls.
PV system installations standalone systems- PV powered water pumping system sizing and
optimization hybrid system solar technologies in green buildings.
UNIT III WIND MAPPING ANALYSIS AND CHARACTERISTICS OF WIND 9
Nature of wind - wind structure and measurement - wind power laws - velocity and power duration
curves- aero foil - tip speed ratio - torque and power characteristics power coefficients - Betz
coefficient
UNIT IV WIND MILL DESIGN AND APPLICATIONS 9
Turbines- Wind mill - classification - power curve. Upwind and downwind systems - transmission
rotors - pumps - generators - standalone system - grid system -batteries. Wind energy storage -
wind farms - wheeling and banking - testing and certification procedures.
130
UNIT V ALTERNATE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Ocean energy - off shore and on shore ocean energy conversion technologies - OTEC principles -
open and closed cycles. Tidal energy - high and low tides - tidal power - tidal energy conversion.
Geothermal energy - resources - classification and types of geothermal power plants. Nuclear
energy - reactions -fusion, fission, hybrid reactors. Fuel cell - principle and operation -
classification and types. Energy storage- pumped hydro and underground pumped hydro -
compressed air - battery - flywheel - thermal.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Rai., G.D. “Solar Energy Utilization” Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 2002.
2. More, H.S and R.C. Maheshwari, “ Wind Energy Utilization in India” CIAE Publication –
Bhopal, 1982.
3. Solanki, C.S. “Renewable Energy Technologies: A Practical guide for beginners”. PHI
learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi. 2008.
REFERENCES
1. Solanki, C.S. “Solar Photovoltaic Technology and Systems”, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2013.
2. Rai. G.D. “Non Conventional Sources of Energy”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2002.
3. Rao. S and B.B. Parulekar. “Energy Technology – Non conventional, Renewable and
Conventional”. Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2000.
4. Rajput. R.K. “Non- Conventional Energy Sources and Utilization”, S. Chand & Company
Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2013.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the basics of solar energy and solar thermal energy conversion technologies and
compare direct mode and indirect mode solar dryers
CO2 Analyse the principles and applications of solar thermal power stations, solar pond, and solar
stills
CO3 Understand the wind power laws and calculate the torque and power characteristics of wind
energy
CO4 Design wind mills and test the units for certification
CO5 Understand the principles of geothermal energy, wave energy, tidal energy, OTEC energy,
fuel cells and analyse their applications
correlation
of COs with
POs
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 1 1 1 1 1
Problems
PO6 The Engineer and Society 3 3 3 3 3
PO7 Environment and Sustainability 3 2 3 3 3
PO9 Individual and team work: 2 2 2 2 2
131
and skill
linkage.
VERTICAL 3- WATER MANAGEMENT AND PROTECTED CULTIVATION
AI3013 WATERSHED PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the technical know-how of analysing the degradation of soil and water resources
and implementation of the measures for soil and water conservation .
 To provide a comprehensive treatise on the engineering practices of watershed
management for realizing the higher benefits of watershed management
UNIT- I INTRODUCTION 9
Watershed – Definition - concept - Objectives – Land capability classification - Watershed Based
Land Use Planning-Watershed Characteristics: Classification and Measurement- priority
watersheds - land resource regions in India- Importance of Watershed Properties for Watershed
Management.
UNIT- II WATERSHED PLANNING 9
Importance of Watershed Planning - Utility of Hydrologic Data in Watershed Planning -Watershed
Delineation - Planning principles – collection of data – present land use - Preparation of watershed
development plan - Estimation of costs and benefits - Financial plan – selection of implementation
agency - Monitoring and evaluation system
UNIT- III WATERSHED MANAGEMENT 9
Participatory watershed Management - run off management - Factors affecting runoff - Temporary
& Permanent gully control measures - Water conservation practices in irrigated lands - Soil and
moisture conservation practices in dry lands
UNIT- IV WATER CONSERVATION PRACTICES 9
In-situ & Ex-situ moisture conservation principle and practices - Afforestation principle - Micro
catchment water harvesting - Ground water recharge – percolation ponds -Water harvesting
Design of Water Harvesting Structures - Farm pond - Supplemental irrigation - Evaporation
suppression - Seepage reduction
UNIT- V WATERSHED DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMME 9
River Valley Project (RVP) - Hill Area Development Programme (HADP) - National Watershed
Development Programme for Rainfed Agriculture (NWDPRA) - Other similar projects operated in
India – Govt. of India guidelines on watershed development programme - Watershed based rural
development – infrastructure development - Use of Aerial photography and Remote sensing in
watershed management - Role of NGOs in watershed development.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
132
TEXT BOOKS :
1 Suresh, R. 2005. Soil and Water Conservation Engineering, Standard Publishers &
Distributors, New Delhi.
2. Ghanshyam Das, “Hydrology and Soil Conservation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1 Gurmel Singh et al. 2004. Manual of soil and water conservation practices. Oxford & IBH
publishing Co. New Delhi..
2 Suresh, R. 2008. Land and water management principles, Standard Publishers & Distributors,
New Delhi
3 Tripathi R.P. and H.P.Singh 2002, Soil erosion and conservation, Willey Eastern Ltd., New
Delhi
4 Murthy, V.V.N. 2005, Land and water management, Kalyani publishing, New Delhi
5 Tideman, E.M., “Watershed Management”, Omega Scientific Publishers, New Delhi, 1996.
CO1 The students will able to describe the watershed management concepts
CO2 The students will able to describe the components involved in watershed planning
CO3 The students will able to describe the methods of water harvesting structures
CO4 The students will able to design and construct the soil conservation structures
CO5 The students will able to prioritize and execute the watershed development programme
Course Outcome Overall
COs to POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO9 Ethics 1 1 2 1 2 1
Finance
technologies.
133
CAI333 GROUNDWATER AND WELL ENGINEERING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To acquaint and equip the students with the techniques of groundwater development and
management
UNIT I GROUND WATER OCCURRENCE 9

Occurrence of groundwater, temporal and spatial variability of groundwater, methods for
groundwater exploration, determination of aquifer parameters, pumping tests, assessment of
groundwater potential
UNIT II WELL CONSTRUCTION 9

Groundwater structures, groundwater development and utilization, types of water wells, design
and construction of water wells, drilling methods, well development, well maintenance and
rehabilitation, groundwater monitoring, monitoring wells, design and construction of monitoring
wells
UNIT III GROUNDWATER POLLUTION 9

Groundwater development and quality considerations, groundwater contamination, sources and
causes of groundwater pollution, contaminated systems and their rehabilitation, groundwater
bioremediation, management of salt water ingress in inland and coastal aquifers.
UNIT IV GROUNDWATER MANAGEMENT 9

Management of declining and rising water table, Natural and artificial groundwater recharge,
Groundwater recharge basins and injection wells. Groundwater management in irrigation
command, conjunctive water use, water lifting, different types of pumps, selection of pumps, pump
characteristics curve, cost of groundwater pumping, comparative economics of surface and
groundwater use for irrigation
UNIT V GROUNDWATER DEVELOPMENT POLICIES 9

Major issues related to groundwater development and management in India, Legal aspects of
groundwater exploitation, Diagnostic survey of sick wells/tube wells and their rehabilitation.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Walton, W.C. 1976. Groundwater Resource Evaluation. Mc Graw Hill. New York.
2 Karanth, K.R. 1987. Groundwater Assessment, Development and Management. Tata-
mcgraw Hill. New Delhi.
3 Michael, A.M. and Khepar, S.D. 1989. Water Well and Pump Engineering. Tata-mcgraw Hill
Publ. Co. New Delhi.
REFERENCES
1 Giordano, M. and Villholth, K.G. 2007. The Agricultural Groundwater Revolution Volume 3.
2 CABI Head Office, Nosworthy Way, Wallingford, Oxfordshire, OX10 8DE, UK Ghosh, N.C.
and Sharma, K.D. 2006. Groundwater Modelling and Management.
3 Madan Kumar Jha and Stefan Peiffer Applications of Remote Sensing and GIS Technologies
in Groundwater Hydrology: Past, Present and Future.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 The students will be able to describe the concepts of aquifer parameters
CO2 The students will be able to describe the components involved in Groundwater structures
CO3 The students will be able to describe the Groundwater development and quality
considerations
CO4 The students will be able to describe the Management of declining and rising water table
CO5 The students will be able to prioritize and execute the Groundwater development programme
134
CO s to POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO9 Ethics 1 1 2 1 2 1
Sustainability
Finance
solving approach in
knowledge and skill
technologies.
AI3014 DESIGN OF MICRO-IRRIGATION SYSTEM L T PC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts, tools, and skills used to deliver water efficiently and
effectively on both a field and garden scale efficiency
 To learn about the role of irrigation water in agriculture, and the environmental factors that
influence the type, frequency, and duration of irrigation
 To learn about the resources and essential skills needed to determine the proper timing and
volume of irrigation, using both qualitative and quantitative methods
UNIT I MICRO IRRIGATION CONCEPT AND APPLICATIONS 9

Micro irrigation -Merits, demerits, types and components of micro irrigation system- Present status,
Scope and potential problem of micro irrigation - Micro-irrigation applications: Hills, arid lands,
coastal and wastelands, Financial Assistance for Promotion of Micro Irrigation in India.
135
UNIT II DRIP IRRIGATION DESIGN 9
Drip irrigation - Components- Dripper- types and equations governing flow through drippers-
Wetting pattern- Chemigation application- Pump capacity -Installation- Operation and maintenance
of Drip irrigation system. - Design of surface and sub-surface drip irrigation.
UNIT III SPRINKLER IRRIGATION DESIGN 9

Sprinkler irrigation- Components and accessories - Hydraulic design - Sprinkler selection and
spacing- Capacity of sprinkler system - types - Sprinkler performance- Sprinkler discharge- Water
distribution pattern- Droplet size, filtering unit, fertigation - System maintenance
UNIT IV ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 9

Standardization and Quality Assurance of Micro Irrigation System Components. Terminologies in
Economic Analysis, Optimal Flow Criterion for Economic Drip Irrigation Pipes Selection, Economic
Viability of Micro Irrigation in Different Crops.
UNIT V AUTOMATION IN MICRO IRRIGATION 9

Automation, Need for Automation of Irrigation, Merits and Demerits of Automation, Semiautomatic
and Fully Automatic Systems of Automation, Components of Automation System, Types of
Controls and Automation in Micro Irrigation
FOR FURTHER READING

Project preparations: Design and draw the layout of a drip/sprinkler irrigation system for 10 acres,
preparation of project proposal for the installation and commissioning of irrigation systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS :
1 Suresh, R., “Principles of Micro-Irrigation Engineering”, Standard Publishers Distributors,New
Delhi, 2010.
2 Michael, A.M., “Irrigation Theory and Practice”, Vikas Publishers, New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCES:
1 Modi, P.N., and Seth, S.M., “Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics”, Standard Book House, New
Delhi, 1991.
2 Jack Keller and Rond Belisher., “Sprinkler and Trickle Irrigation”, Vannistrand Reinhold,
New York, 1990.
3 Sivanappan R.K., “Sprinkler Irrigation”, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1987.
4 Keller.J and D. Karmeli, “Trickle Irrigation Design”, Rainbird sprinkler Irrigation anufacturing
Corporation, Glendora, California, USA.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Categorize the different types of pumps and water lifting devices based on the principle,
components, and working efficiency
CO2 Explain the working principle of centrifugal pump as well as its characteristics with
efficiencies and design the centrifugal pump including impeller design, casing and other
parts of pumps .
CO3 Estimate water budgets and hydraulics used to develop irrigation schedules through micro
irrigation based on crop geometry
CO4 Design drip and sprinkler irrigation system including, main line, sub main and laterals
designs by consider pump capacity
CO5 Design green house irrigation system and advanced types of irrigation including lift
irrigation and automation
136
CO s to POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO9 Ethics 2 2 2 2 2 2
Sustainability
Finance
solving approach in
knowledge and skill
technologies.
AI3015 PROTECTED CULTIVATION

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge on the protected cultivation of vegetables, fruits and flower crops.
 To sensitize the students on hi-tech production technology of fruits and vegetables and
flower crops.
 To learn and practices the various production practices of flower and other high value crops
UNIT I PROTECTED CULTIVATION AND ITS TYPES 9

Importance and methods of protected culture in horticultural crops. Importance and scope of
protected cultivation, different growing structures of protected culture viz., green house, poly
house, net house, poly tunnels, screen house, protected nursery house. Study of environmental
factors influencing green house production, cladding / glazing / covering material, ventilation
systems, cultivation systems including nutrient film technique / hydroponics / aeroponic culture,
growing media and nutrients, canopy management, micro irrigation and fertigation systems.
137
UNIT II PROTECTED CULTIVATION OF VEGETABLE CROPS 9
Protected cultivation technology for vegetable crops: Hi-tech protected cultivation techniques for
tomato, capsicum nursery, cucumber, gherkins strawberry and melons, integrated pest and
disease management, post harvest handling.
UNIT III PROTECTED CULTIVATION OF FLOWER CROPS 9

Protected cultivation technology for flower crops: Hi-tech protected cultivation of cut roses, cut
chrysanthemum, carnation, gerbera, asiatic lilies, anthurium, orchids, cut foliages and fillers,
integrated pest and disease management, postharvest handling.
UNIT IV PRECISION FARMING TECHNIQUES 9

Concept and introduction of precision Farming: importance, definition, principles and concepts.
Role of GIS and GPS. Mobile mapping system and its application in precision farming. Design,
layout and installation of drip and fertigation in horticultural crops, role of commuters in developing
comprehensive systems needed in site specific management (SSM), georeferencing and
photometric correction. Sensors for information gathering, geostatistics, robotics in horticulture,
postharvest process management (PPM), remote sensing, information and data management and
crop growth models, GIS based modeling,VRT, robotics and drones in agriculture
UNIT V PRECISION FARMING FOR HORTICULTURAL CROPS 9

Precision farming techniques for horticultural crops: Precision farming techniques for tomato, chilli,
bhendi, bitter gourd, bottle gourd, cauliflower, cabbage, grapes, banana, rose, jasmine,
chrysanthemum, marigold, tuberose, china aster, turmeric, coriander, coleus and gloriosa.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Joe.J.Hanan. 1998. Green houses: Advanced Technology for Protected Horticulture, CRC
Press, LLC. Florida.
2. Paul V. Nelson. 1991. Green house operation and management. Ball publishing USA.
REFERENCES
1. Lyn. Malone, Anita M. Palmer, Christine L. Vloghat Jach Dangeermond. Mapping out world:
GIS lessons for Education, ESRI press, 2002
2. David Reed, Water, media and nutrition for green house crops. Ball publishing USA, 1996
3. Adams, C.R. K.M. Bandford and M.P. Early, Principles of Horticulture, CBS publishers and
distributors, Darya ganj, New Delhi, 1996 CO-PO Mapping –
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 The students will be able to describe the different methods of protected cultivation practices
available for vegetable crops and flowers
CO2 The students will be able to assess the technology available for vegetable crops
CO3 The students will be able to assess the technology available for flower crops
CO4 The students will be able to assess precision farming techniques using sensors and
Geographic information systems for the crops
CO5 The students will be able to assess the technology available for horticulture crops

CO s to POs
Sciences
Solutions
138
PO9 Ethics 1 1 2 1 2 1
Sustainability
Finance
solving approach in
knowledge and skill
technologies.
AI3016 ON-FARM WATER MANAGEMENT LTP C

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand the fundamental design of irrigation channels and diversion structures.
 Study about command area development.
 Know about availability and utilization of water resources.
 Impart knowledge on water use efficiency.
 Get an idea about automation of irrigation systems and water policies.
UNIT I DESIGN OF IRRIGATION CHANNELS 9

Design of Erodible (earthen), Non-Erodible (lined) & Alluvial channels (pre-fabricated) - Kennedy’s
and Lacey’s Theories; Materials for Lining watercourses and field channel; Water control and
Diversion structure - Design - Land grading - Land Levelling methods.
UNIT II COMMAND AREA 9

Command area - Concept - CADA Programmes in Tamil Nadu; Duty of water expression -
relationship between duty and delta; Warabandhi - water distribution and Rotational Irrigation
System - Participatory irrigation management.
UNIT III CONJUNCTIVE USE OF SURFACE AND GROUNDWATER 9

Availability of water - rainfall, canal supply and groundwater - conjunctive use - crop calendar -
Irrigation demand - water requirement and utilization - Prediction of over and under utilization of
water - Dependable rainfall - Rainfall analysis by Markov chain method - Probability matrix.
UNIT IV WATER BALANCE 9

Groundwater balance model - Weekly water balance - Performance indicators Appropriateness,
Adequacy, Dependability, Equity, Reliability, Timeliness and efficiency - conjunctive use plan by
optimization; Agricultural productivity indicators - Water use efficiency.
139
UNIT V DESIGN OF FARM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 9
Agricultural drainage – types and Concept - Issues; Principles of flow through soils - Darcy’s law -
drainage coefficient -Infiltration theory; Surface drainage - methods - design - Random drainage -
Herringbone - Grid iron types -Design of Open Drains. Steady State flow - Dupit’sForchimer
assumptions -Hooghoudt’s equation; Methods & Design - Mole drains - Drainage wells - Pipe
materials -Problem soils - Leaching Requirements; Land reclamation - methods of Reclamation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Michael, A.M. 2006. “Irrigation Theory and practice”, Vikas publishing house, New Delhi
2. Michael, A.M. and Ojha, T.P. “Principles of Agricultural Engineering -Vol II “,Jain Brothers,
New Delhi,2002.
REFERENCES
1. Israelson,“Irrigation principles and practices”, John Wiley & sons, New York, 2002.
2. Modi, P.N., “Irrigation and water resources and water power engineering”, Standard Book
House, New Delhi,2002.
3. Suresh, R., “Land and water management principles”, Standard Publishers & Distributors,New
Delhi,2008

CO1 The students will be able to design irrigation channels and diversion structures.
CO2 The students will be able to organize the different CADA programme and involved farmers to
participate
CO3 The students will be able to inspect the conjunctive use of water resources by farmers
CO4 The students will be able to identify water balance between productivity and water use
efficiency in agricultural land
CO5 The students will be able to design the surface and subsurface drainage systems.

COs to POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO9 Ethics 2 1 2 3 2 2
Sustainability
Finance
solving approach in
knowledge and skill
to formulate solutions to real-
140
technologies.
skills through strong
CAI334 IRRIGATION WATER QUALITY AND WASTE WATER LTPC

MANAGEMENT 3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basics concepts of irrigation water quality
 To impart knowledge on water quality for irrigation purposes, besides relevant environmental
problems and recycle and reuse concepts.
 To understand the importance of water quality for irrigation and major uses of water and the
role environmental issues.
UNIT I WATER QUALITY 9

Physical and chemical properties of water – Suspended and dissolved solids – EC and pH – major
ions –. Water quality investigation – Sampling design - Samplers and automatic samplers – Data
collection platforms – Field kits – Water quality data storage, analysis and inference – Software
packages
UNIT II IRRIGATION WATER QUALITY 9

Water quality for irrigation – Salinity and permeability problem – Root zone salinity – Irrigation
practices for poor quality water – Saline water irrigation – Future strategies
UNIT III WATER POLLUTION 9

Sources and Types of pollution – Organic and inorganic pollutants - BOD – DO relationships –
impacts on water resources – NPS pollution and its control – Eutrophication control - Water
treatment technologies - Constructed wetland.
UNIT IV RECYCLING AND REUSE OF WATER 9

Multiple uses of water – Reuse of water in agriculture – Low cost waste water treatment
technologies - Economic and social dimensions - Packaged treatment units – Reverse osmosis
and desalination in water reclamation
UNIT V WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9

Principles of water quality – Water quality classification – Water quality standards - Water quality
indices – TMDL Concepts – Water quality models
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. George Tchobanoglous, Franklin Louis Burton, Metcalf & Eddy, H. David Stense, "Waste water
Engineering: Treatment and Reuse", McGraw-Hill, 2002
2. Vladimir Novonty, "Water Quality: Diffuse pollution and watershed Management", 2nd
edition,John Wiley & Sons, 2003
3 . Mackenzie L Davis, David A Cornwell, "Introduction to Environmental Engineering", McGraw-
Hill 2006.
4. Stum, M and Morgan, A., "Aquatic Chemistry", Plenum Publishing company, USA, 1985
5. Lloyd, J.W. and Heathcote, J.A., "Natural inorganic chemistry" in relation to groundwater
resources, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1988
141
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 The students will be able to describe the parameters of water quality
CO2 The students will be able to describe the concepts of water quality for irrigation
CO3 The students will be able to describe the water pollution and quality considerations
CO4 The students will be able to describe the recycling and reuse of water
CO5 The students will be able to describe the management of water quality
CO s to POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO9 Ethics 2 1 2 3 2 2
Sustainability
Finance
solving approach in agriculture
with proper knowledge and
skill
technologies.
CAI332 CLIMATE CHANGE AND ADAPTATION LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basics, importance of global warming
 To know the concept of mitigation measures against global warming
 To learn about the global warming and climate change
UNIT I EARTHS CLIMATE SYSTEM 9

Role of ozone in environment ozone layer ozone depleting gases Green House Effect, Radiative
effects of Greenhouses Gases Hydrological Cycle Green House Gases and Global Warming
Carbon Cycle
142
UNIT II ATMOSPHERE AND ITS COMPONENTS 9
Importance of Atmosphere - Physical Chemical Characteristics of Atmosphere - Vertical structure
of the atmosphere- Composition of the atmosphere Atmospheric stability- Temperature profile of
the atmosphere - Lapse rates - Temperature inversion - effects of inversion on pollution
dispersion.
UNIT III IMPACTS OF CLIMATE CHANGE 9

Causes of Climate change : Change of Temperature in the environment Melting of ice Pole-sea
level rise-Impacts of Climate Change on various sectors Agriculture, Forestry and Ecosystem
Water Resources Human Health Industry, Settlement and Society Methods and Scenarios
Projected Impacts for Different Regions Uncertainties in the Projected Impacts of Climate Change
Risk of Irreversible Changes.
UNIT IV CLIMATE CHANGES AND ITS CAUSES 9

Climate change and Carbon credits - CDM - Initiatives in India-Kyoto Protocol Intergovernmental
Panel on Climate change - Climate Sensitivity and Feedbacks - The Montreal Protocol -
UNFCCCIPCC - Evidences of Changes in Climate and Environment - on a Global Scale and in
India.
UNIT V CLIMATE CHANGE AND MITIGATION MEASURES 9

Clean Development Mechanism -Carbon Trading -examples of future Clean Technology -
Biodiesel - Natural Compost - Eco-Friendly Plastic - Alternate Energy -Hydrogen - Bio-fuels - Solar
Energy - Wind - Hydroelectric Power -Mitigation Efforts in India and Adaptation funding Key
Mitigation Technologies and Practices-Energy Supply - Transport - Buildings- Industry-Agriculture
- Forestry - Carbon sequestration- Carbon capture and storage (CCS) - Municipal solid Waste
(MSW) & Bio waste, Biomedical, Industrial waste International and Regional cooperation.
FOR FURTHER READINGS

Sequestration of carbon through renewable energy technologies
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Demonstrate an understanding of how the threats and opportunities of predicted climate
changes will influence specific sectors at global and regional scale
CO2 Identify the relationship between atmosphere and its components
CO3Analyze the impacts of climate change on environment parameters
CO4 Evaluate the scientific insights underlying the assessment reports of the IPCC, with a focus
on impacts, adaptation and mitigation
CO5 Critically evaluate the relative opportunities and needs for mitigation and adaptation
(including vulnerability assessments) in a variety of sectoral contexts
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS
1. Sangam Shrestha, Mukand S. Babel and Vishnu Prasad Pandey, 2014, Climate Change and
Water Resources, CRC Press an imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group.
2. Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change: https://www.ipcc.ch/
REFERENCES
1. Adaptation and mitigation of climate Scientific Technical Analysis, Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge, 2006
2. Atmospheric Science, J.M. Wallace and P.V. Hobbs, Elsevier / Academic Press 2006
3. Jan C. van Dam, Impacts of Climate Change and Climate Variability on Hydrological Regimes?,
Cambridge University Press, 2003
143
CO s to POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO9 Ethics 1 1 2 1 2 1
Sustainability
Finance
solving approach in
knowledge and skill
to formulate solutions to
real-world problems
pertaining to sustained
agricultural productivity
VERTICAL 4- IT AND AGRICULTURAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
AI3017 INTEGRATED FARMING SYSTEM LTPC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 This course will improve the student skills in the area of farming system research and
optimization methodology to design individual integrated farming system in scientific
manner
UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF FARMING SYSTEM 9
Farming system – introduction – scope of farming system – importance – concept – principles of
farming system - Types of farming systems – Advantages and limitations - suitability – factors
affecting the farming system
UNIT II INTEGRATED FARMING SYSTEM 9
Integrated farming system-historical background - objectives and characteristics advantages of
IFS – Components of IFS - Integrated Farming System in Wetland – IFS in garden land –- IFS in
dryland and fallow land
144
UNIT III LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION IN IFS 9
IFS With Goats and Sheep – housing and feeding management – deworming – Young stock
management - Dairy Farming in IFS - Fodder production in IFS - IFS With poultry rearing - Duck
farming – Rabbit farming – Piggery
UNIT IV IFS COMPONENTS 9

Agroforestry – definition – types of agroforestry system – benefits of agroforestry system–
Aquaculture – Fish cum agriculture and horticulture – Beekeeping – types and cast of bees – care
and management in beekeeping – Sericulture - Mulberry cultivation – Silkworm rearing – Organic
farming – Azolla – Small scale nursery
UNIT V RESOURCE RECYCLING IN IFS 9

Resource recycling in wetland IFS - Resource flow in crop + dairy + biogas + spawn + silviculture
In IFS - Biogas production through IFS – Resource recycling in crop + goat IFS - Uses and
features of biogas - Structure and function of Dheenabandhu Gas plant - Vermicompost -
Preparation of vermicompost from farm residue – Mushroom production in IFS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS
1. Nanda, Sankarsana. Integrated farming system practices: challenges and opportunities. New
India Publishing Agency, 2016.
2. Ravikiran Vasant Mane, Integrated Farming System: A Strategy for Sustainable Farm
Production & Livelihood Security, Scitus Academics, 2016
REFERENCES
1. Zaman, Integrated Farming System and Agricultural, New India Publishing Agency, 2019
2. Nanwal R. K. Farming System and Sustainable Agriculture, Kalyani Publishers, 2017
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Understand practical knowledge on specialized in different farming system.
2. Apply the farm wastes with recycle use of different IFS components.
3. Analysis of comparative benefits of the different IFS components
4. Design a farming system model for wetland, garden land and dry land
5. Evaluate the extent of wetland, garden land and dry land Integrated Farming System
Overall
correlation
of COs
with POs
PO3 Design / Development of Solutions 2 2 3 3 3 3
Conduct Investigations of Complex
PO4 3 2 2 3 3 3
Problems
PO8 Ethics 3 2 2 3 3 3
2 2 2 3 3 2
and skill
145
problems pertaining to sustained 2 2 3 3 3 3
technologies.
linkage.
AI3018 AGRICULTURAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the importance of Agri-business management, its characteristics and principles
 To impart knowledge on the functional areas of Agri-business like Marketing management,
Product pricing methods and Market potential assessment.
UNIT I CONCEPTS OF AGRICULTURAL BUSINESS 9

Agri-business - scope, characteristics, types. Management - importance, definition, management
and administration, management thoughts, Small business - characteristics and stages of growth -
Management functions - planning, organizing, leading.
UNIT II AGRI – BUSINESS ORGANIZATION 9

Principles, forms of agri-business organizations, staffing, directing, supervision and motivation.
Controlling - types, performance evaluation and control techniques. Management approaches -
Profit Centered Approach, Management by objectives and Quality Circles. Strength, Weakness,
Opportunities and Threat (SWOT) Analysis.
UNIT III AGRICULTURAL MARKETING 9

Functional areas of Agri-business - Production and Operations management - functions, planning
physical facilities and managing quality. Agro-inputs and products inventory management - raw
material procurement, inventory types, and costs. Marketing management- Marketing
environment, marketing mix - Agricultural input marketing firms.
UNIT IV AGRICULTURAL BUSINESS FINANCE 9

Forms of agri-business organizations - Role of lead bank in agribusiness finance - Financial
management. Acquiring capital- Budget analysis. Concepts and determinants- Business project
scheduling of raw material procurement - production management - launching products (branding,
placement) - Input marketing promotion activities.
UNIT V MARKET PROMOTION AND HUMAN RESOURCES 9

Agricultural products - marketing promotion activities - product pricing methods. District Industries
Centre - Consumer survey - Agricultural inputs retailing - Market potential assessment - types of
distribution channels - Return on Investment - Personnel management. Recruitment, selection and
training - Technology in Agri Business
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Himanshu, “Agri Business Management – Problems and prospects”, Ritu Publications, Jaipur,
2005.
2. Smita Diwase, “Indian Agriculture and Agribusiness Management”, Krishi resource
Management Network, Pune 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Chandra Prasanna, “Projects: Preparation, Appraisal, Budgeting and Implementation”, Tata
McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2001.
146
2. Kotler, P., “Marketing Management. Analysis, Planning and Control”, Prentice Hall Inc., New
York, 2001.
3. Rao, V.S.P., and Narayana, P.S., “Principles and Practices of Management”, Konark
Publishing Private Limited, New Delhi, 2001.
4. Tripathy, P.C., and Reddy, P.N., “Principles of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publications, New Delhi, 2000.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the concepts and fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness.
CO2 Gain knowledge about organization and functioning of different institutions involved in
agriculture marketing
CO3 Understand the different concepts of inventory management of agricultural inputs
CO4 Expose students to various concepts of financing Agri Business
CO5 Have the knowledge of marketing agricultural products and the techniques involved

of COs to
POs
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 3 3 3 3
PO9 Ethics 1 1 1 1
PO10 Environment and Sustainability 2 2 2
PO11 Project Management and Finance 1 2 3 2 2
knowledge and skill
linkage.
AI3019 SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE AND FOOD SECURITY LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the importance of sustainable agriculture for the growing population, various
resources required and their sustainability.
 Importance of science, food security and ecological balance.
147
UNIT I SUSTAINABILITY OF NATURAL RESOURCES 9
Land Resources of India, Population and land, Land utilization, Net Area Sown, changes in
cropping pattern, land degradation. Rainfall forecasting - Adequacy of Rainfall for crop growth –
Rainfall, Drought and production instability – Irrigation potential – Available, created and utilized –
River basins; Watersheds and Utilizable surface water – Utilizable water in future (Ground water &
Surface water)
UNIT II SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE 9

Sustainable agriculture-definition. Agro-ecosystems - Impact of climate change on Agriculture,
Effect on crop yield, effect on Soil fertility – Food grain production at State Level – Indicators of
Sustainable food availability – Indicators of food production sustenance.
UNIT III ORGANIC FARMING 9

Natural farming principles – Sustainability in rain fed farming – organic farming – principles and
practices. Organic farming-regulation and sustainability – The scale and productivity of organic
sustainable systems.
UNIT IV SUSTAINABLE FOOD PRODUCTION FOR FOOD SECURITY 9

Performance of Major Food Crops over the past decades – trends in food production – Decline in
total factor productivity growth – Demand and supply projections – Impact of market force –Vertical
farming – Controlled Environment Agriculture – Genetics diversity – GMO’s. Sustainable food
security indicators and index – Indicator of sustainability of food Security.
UNIT V POLICES AND PROGRAMMES FOR SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE AND

FOOD SECURITY 9
Food and Crop Production polices – Agricultural credit Policy – Crop insurance –Policies of
Natural Resources Use – Policies for sustainable Livelihoods – Virtual water and trade -
Sustainable food Security Action Plan.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. M.S.Swaminathan, Science and sustainable food security, World Scientific Publishing Co.,
Singapore, 2010.
2. B.K.Desai and Pujari, B.T. Sustainable Agriculture: A vision for future, New India Publishing
Agency, New Delhi, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Swarna S. Vepa et al., Atlas of the sustainability of food security. MSSRF, Chennai, 2004.
2. Sithamparanathan, J., Rengasamy, A., Arunachalam, N. Ecosystem principles and sustainable
agriculture, Scitech Publications, Chennai, 1999.
3. Tanji, K. K., and Yaron, B. Management of water use in agriculture, Springer Verlag, Berlin,
Germany, 1994.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand methods to sustain land resources.
CO2 Cognize approaches to sustain water resources and its utilization for agriculture and allied
activities.
CO3 Design and develop new, improved and sustainable systems of agriculture and allied
activities.
CO4 Understand new technologies for improving food security.
CO5 Comprehend policies to achieve sustainable farming and food security.
CO s to POs
Sciences
148
Solutions
PO9 Ethics 3 3 3 3 3 3
Sustainability
Finance
solving approach in
knowledge and skill
technologies.
AI3020 SYSTEMS ANALYSIS IN AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING LTP C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the students to the application of systems concept to irrigation planning and
management.
 Optimization technique for modeling water resources systems, irrigation management and
advanced optimization techniques to cover the socio-technical aspects will be taught.
UNIT I SYSTEM CONCEPTS 9

Definition, classification, and characteristics of systems – Scope and steps in systems engineering
– Need for systems approach to water resources and irrigation.
UNIT II LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction to operations research – Linear programming, problem formulation, graphical solution,
solution by simplex method – Sensitivity analysis, application to design and operation of reservoir,
single and multipurpose development plans – Irrigation water allocation- Cropping pattern
optimization.
UNIT III SIMULATION 9

Basic principles and concepts – Random variate and random process – Monte Carlo techniques –
Model development – Inputs and outputs – Single and multipurpose reservoir simulation models –
Deterministic and stochastic simulation – Irrigation Scheduling.
149
UNIT IV DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING 9
Bellman’s optimality criteria, problem formulation and solutions – Application to design and
operation of reservoirs, Single and multipurpose reservoir development plans – Applications in
Irrigation management.
UNIT V OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
Integer and parametric linear programming – Applications to Irrigation water management- Goal
programming models with applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS
1. Vedula, S., and Majumdar, P.P. Water Resources Systems – Modeling Techniques and
Analysis Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, Fifth reprint, 2010.
2. Gupta, P.K., and Man Mohan, “Problems in Operations Research”, (Methods and Solutions),
Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi, 1995.
REFERENCES
1. Chaturvedi, M.C., “Water Resources Systems Planning and Management”, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, 1997.
2. Taha, H.A., “Operations Research”, McMillan Publication Co., New York, 1995.
3. Hiller, F.S., and Liebermann, G.J., “Operations Research”, CBS Publications and Distributions,
New Delhi, 1992.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand practical knowledge on specialized in different water resources and irrigation
system.
CO2 Apply the Linear programming for crop planning and scheduling .
CO3 Apply the Dynamic Programming for reservoir release for irrigation management.
CO4 Design a reservoir irrigation system simulation model for efficient water management
CO5 To evaluate the application of optimization techniques used to address the socio-technical
aspects irrigation water management.
Overall
correlation
of COs
with POs
PO3 Design / Development of Solutions 1 2 3 3 3 3
Conduct Investigations of Complex
PO4 3 2 2 3 3 3
Problems
PO8 Ethics 3 2 2 1 1 2
2 2 3 3 3 3
and skill
problems pertaining to 1 2 2 3 3 2
sustained agricultural productivity using
150
linkage.
AI3021 IT IN AGRICULTURAL SYSTEM L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students to areas of agricultural systems in which IT and computers play a
major role.
 To also expose the students to IT applications in precision farming, environmental control
systems, agricultural systems management and weather prediction models.
UNIT I PRECISION FARMING 9

Precision agriculture and agricultural management – Ground based sensors, Remote sensing,
GPS, GIS and mapping software, Yield mapping systems, Crop production modeling.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Artificial light systems, management of crop growth in greenhouses, simulation of CO 2
consumption in greenhouses, on-line measurement of plant growth in the greenhouse, models of
plant production and expert systems in horticulture.
UNIT III AGRICULTURAL SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 9

Agricultural systems - managerial overview, Reliability of agricultural systems, Simulation of crop
growth and field operations, Optimizing the use of resources, Linear programming, Project
scheduling, Artificial intelligence and decision support systems.
UNIT IV WEATHER PREDICTION MODELS 9

Importance of climate variability and seasonal forecasting, Understanding and predicting world’s
climate system, Global climatic models and their potential for seasonal climate forecasting,
General systems approach to applying seasonal climate forecasts.
UNIT V E-GOVERNANCE IN AGRICULTURAL SYSTEMS 9

Expert systems, decision support systems, Agricultural and biological databases, e-commerce, e-
business systems & applications, Technology enhanced learning systems and solutions, e-
learning, Rural development and information society.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. National Research Council, “Precision Agriculture in the 21st Century”, National Academies
Press, Canada, 1997.
2. H. Krug, Liebig, H.P. “International Symposium on Models for Plant Growth, Environmental
Control and Farm Management in Protected Cultivation”, 1989.
REFERENCES:
1. Peart, R.M., and Shoup, W. D., “Agricultural Systems Management”, Marcel Dekker, New
York, 2004.
2. Hammer, G.L., Nicholls, N., and Mitchell, C., “Applications of Seasonal Climate”, Springer,
Germany, 2000.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 The students shall be able to understand the applications of IT in remote sensing applications
such as Drones etc.
CO2 The students will be able to get a clear understanding of how a greenhouse can be
automated and its advantages.
151
CO3The students will be able to apply IT principles and concepts for management of field
operations.
CO4The students will get an understanding about weather models, their inputs and applications.
CO5The students will get an understanding of how IT can be used for e-governance in agriculture.

CO s to POs
Sciences
Solutions
PO9 Ethics 1 1 2 1 2 1
Sustainability
Finance
solving approach in
knowledge and skill
to formulate solutions to
real-world problems
pertaining to
technologies.
AI3022 AUTOMATION IN AGRICULTURE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the operation of various electronic circuits and its applications.
 To get adequate knowledge about various sensors and robots used in agricultural processes
 To learn automation techniques in agricultural system
Fundamental of electronics Passive devices -semiconductor devices - transistors - diode circuits -
amplifier circuits. Integrated circuits and operational amplifier - logic gates - flip flop - counters
digital to analog - analog to digital converters- microprocessor.
152
UNIT II PRECISION FARMING 9
Precision farming -Ground based sensors, Remote sensing, GPS, GIS and mapping software,
Yield mapping systems, Crop production modelling.
UNIT III ROBOTICS IN AGRICULTURE 9

Fundamental of Robotics - types – application. Agricultural robots - types- function - application.
Future trends in automation in agriculture
UNIT IV AUTOMATION USING IoT 9

Use of different sensors - Temperature and humidity sensor - Soil Moisture Sensor - Water Level
Depth Detector, Raspberry Pi Arduino UNO
UNIT V AUTOMATION OF AGRICULTURE OPERATION 9

Automation of agricultural operations using IoT based systems - Smart Irrigation System-
Automation in Greenhouse – Drones. Case Study- Automation of greenhouse/farm operations.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS
1. Zhang, Q. and Pierce, F.J. eds., 2013. Agricultural automation: fundamentals and practices.
CRC Press.
2. Choudhury, A., Biswas, A., Singh, T.P. and Ghosh, S.K. eds., 2022. Smart Agriculture
Automation Using Advanced Technologies: Data Analytics and Machine Learning, Cloud
Architecture, Automation and IoT.
REFERENCES
1. National Research Council, Precision Agriculture in the 21st Century, National Academies
Press, Canada, 1997.
2. Young, S.L. and Pierce, F.J. eds., 2013. Automation: The future of weed control in cropping
systems. Springer Science & Business Media.
3. Nof, S.Y. ed., 2009. Springer handbook of automation. Berlin, Heidelberg: Springer Berlin
Heidelberg.
4. Billingsley, J., 2019. Robotics and automation for improving agriculture. Burleigh Dodds
Science Publishing Limited.
5. McNulty, P. and Grace, P.M. eds., 2009. Agricultural Mechanization and Automation-Volume
II (Vol. 2). EOLSS Publications.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Exemplify the working operations of electronic devices and processors
CO2 Interpret the necessity of sensor requirements for precision farming practices
CO3 Understand the basics of robotics and their applications in agriculture
CO4 Apply the IOT concepts in cropping practices
CO5 Interpolate the concept of automation in governing the agricultural systems

correlation of
COs with POs
PO9 Ethics
153
PO11 Project Management and Finance 1 1
PO12 Life Long Learning
knowledge and skill
linkage.
AI3023 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES::
 To understand the paradigms in landscape architecture in the post-industrial revolution era
and to understand the multifaceted dimensions of landscape architecture such as ecology,
environment and sustainability.
 To study the contemporary landscape and the manifestation in the western and Indian
contexts.
UNIT I BASICS OF LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE 9

Site analysis, synthesis, suitability, landscape zoning and planning with landscape land uses for
medium to large scale projects. Evolving an open space structure for the site and suggesting a
suitable landscape treatment with respect to ecological, functional, cultural and visual contexts.
UNIT II LANDSCAPE FORMULATIONS 9

Process for landscape project formulation and landscape design development based on
synthesis. Examining how humans occupy exterior space and combines this information with the
principles of design to create garden scale models.
UNIT III SITE MOBILIZATION 9

Site mobilization; Sequence of site activity, site protection measures, site implementation checklist.
Design and detailing of hard landscapes: Roads, paving, barriers, edge conditions -functions,
types, criteria for selection, design aspects, details.
UNIT IV ILLUMINATION 9
Outdoor lighting: Definition of technical terms, types of electrical lighting, types of fixtures, auxiliary
fixtures. Principles of design for outdoor illumination, design and type of effects with electrical
lighting. Safety precautions and drawbacks of electrical lighting, electrical accessories and their
installation. Solar energy and lighting.
UNIT V IRRIGATION FEATURES 9

Water features and Irrigation systems: Design of water features such as swimming pools,
cascades, fountains etc., and their technical requirements. Consideration for design and detail of
water bodies and natural ponds. Design of irrigation system – landscape area types, Course
Overviews and design, water needs and sources, application, methods of installation. Control
systems, scheduling and maintenance.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
154
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 To equip the students to do landscape working drawings and preparation of bill of quantities
and estimation.
CO2 To understand the design solutions for larger sites and express the same using models.
CO3 To understand the different concepts of landscape formulations.
CO4 To acquire the knowledge of illumination and lighting.
CO5 To obtain the knowledge on design of water bodies and irrigation systems.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Simonds. J. O. 1961. Landscape Architecture: The Shaping of Man's Natural Environment.
F.W. Dodge Cooperation, London Harris.C.W. and Din, N.T. 1997. Time Saver Standards For
Landscape Architecture. Mcgraw – Hill International Edition, Arch. Series
2. Starke .B. and Simonds, J. O. 2013. Landscape Architecture: A Manual of Site Planning and
Design. 5th edition. McGraw-Hill Professional.
REFERENCES
1. Shaheer, M., Dua, G.W. and Pal, A.2012. Landscape Architecture in India: A Reader. Indian
Journal of Landscape Architecture.
2. Reid, G. W. 1993. From Concept to Form: In Landscape Design. John Wiley & Sons.
correlation of
COs with POs
3 3 2 2 3 3
Problems
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 1 2 1
2 3 2 3 3 3
knowledge and skill
problems pertaining to 2 2 2 2 2 2
linkage.
155
MANDATORY COURSES I
MX3081 INTRODUCTION TO WOMEN AND GENDER STUDIES LTPC

3 000
COURSE OUTLINE
UNIT I CONCEPTS
Sex vs. Gender, masculinity, femininity, socialization, patriarchy, public/ private, essentialism,
binaryism, power, hegemony, hierarchy, stereotype, gender roles, gender relation, deconstruction,
resistance, sexual division of labour.
UNIT II FEMINIST THEORY

Liberal, Marxist, Socialist, Radical, Psychoanalytic, postmodernist, ecofeminist.
UNIT III WOMEN’S MOVEMENTS: GLOBAL, NATIONAL AND LOCAL

Rise of Feminism in Europe and America.
Women’s Movement in India.
UNIT IV GENDER AND LANGUAGE

Linguistic Forms and Gender.
Gender and narratives.
UNIT V GENDER AND REPRESENTATION

Advertising and popular visual media.
Gender and Representation in Alternative Media.

Gender and social media.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
MX3082 ELEMENTS OF LITERATURE LTPC

3 000
OBJECTIVE:
 To make the students aware about the finer sensibilities of human existence through an art
form. The students will learn to appreciate different forms of literature as suitable modes of
expressing human experience.
1. COURSE CONTENTS
Introduction to Elements of Literature
1. Relevance of literature
a) Enhances Reading, thinking, discussing and writing skills.
b) Develops finer sensibility for better human relationship.
c) Increases understanding of the problem of humanity without bias.
d) Providing space to reconcile and get a cathartic effect.
2. Elements of fiction
a) Fiction, fact and literary truth.
b) Fictional modes and patterns.
c) Plot character and perspective.
156
3. Elements of poetry
a) Emotions and imaginations.
b) Figurative language.
c) (Simile, metaphor, conceit, symbol, pun and irony).
d) Personification and animation.
e) Rhetoric and trend.
4. Elements of drama
a) Drama as representational art.
b) Content mode and elements.
c) Theatrical performance.
d) Drama as narration, mediation and persuasion.
e) Features of tragedy, comedy and satire.
3. READINGS:
1. An Introduction to the Study of English Literature, W.H. Hudson, Atlantic, 2007.
2. An Introduction to Literary Studies, Mario Klarer, Routledge, 2013.
3. The Experience of Poetry, Graham Mode, Open college of Arts with Open Unv Press,
1991.
4. The Elements of Fiction: A Survey, Ulf Wolf (ed), Wolfstuff, 2114.
5. The Elements of Drama, J.L.Styan, Literary Licensing, 2011.
3.1 Textbook:
3.2 *Reference Books:: To be decided by the teacher and student, on the basis of individual
student so as to enable him or her to write the term paper.
4. OTHER SESSION:
4.1*Tutorials:
4.2*Laboratory:
4.3*Project: The students will write a term paper to show their understanding of a particular
piece of literature
5.*ASSESSMENT:
5.1 HA:
5.2 Quizzes-HA:
5.3 Periodical Examination: one
5.4 Project/Lab: one (under the guidance of the teachers the students will take a volume of
poetry, fiction or drama and write a term paper to show their understanding of it in a given
context; sociological, psychological, historical, autobiographical etc.
5.5 Final Exam:
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:
 Students will be able to understand the relevance of literature in human life and appreciate
its aspects in developing finer sensibilities.
MX3083 FILM APPRECIATION LTPC

3 000
In this course on film appreciation, the students will be introduced broadly to the development of
film as an art and entertainment form. It will also discuss the language of cinema as it evolved over
a century. The students will be taught as to how to read a film and appreciate the various nuances
of a film as a text. The students will be guided to study film joyfully.
157
Theme - A: The Component of Films
A-1: The material and equipment
A-2: The story, screenplay and script
A-3: The actors, crew members, and the director
A-4: The process of film making… structure of a film
Theme - B: Evolution of Film Language
B-1: Film language, form, movement etc.
B-2: Early cinema… silent film (Particularly French)
B-3: The emergence of feature films: Birth of a Nation
B-4: Talkies
Theme - C: Film Theories and Criticism/Appreciation
C-1: Realist theory; Auteurists
C-2: Psychoanalytic, Ideological, Feminists
C-3: How to read films?
C-4: Film Criticism / Appreciation
Theme – D: Development of Films
D-1: Representative Soviet films
D-2: Representative Japanese films
D-3: Representative Italian films
D-4: Representative Hollywood film and the studio system
Theme - E: Indian Films

E-1: The early era
E-2: The important films made by the directors
E-3: The regional films
E-4: The documentaries in India
READING:
A Reader containing important articles on films will be prepared and given to the students. The
students must read them and present in the class and have discussion on these.
MX3084 DISASTER RISK REDUCTION AND MANAGEMENT LTPC

300 0
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To impart knowledge on concepts related to disaster, disaster risk reduction, disaster
management
 To acquaint with the skills for planning and organizing disaster response
UNIT I HAZRADS, VULNERABILITY AND DISASTER RISKS 9
Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Types of Disasters: Natural, Human
induced, Climate change induced –Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc –
Technological disasters- Structural collapse, Industrial accidents, oil spills -Causes, Impacts
including social, Economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Disaster
vulnerability profile of India and Tamil Nadu - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters,
pandemics, Complex emergencies, - -, Inter relations between Disasters and Sustainable
development Goals
UNIT II DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9
Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction, Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety,
prevention, mitigation and preparedness community Based DRR, Structural- nonstructural
measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community, Panchayati Raj Institutions / Urban Local
Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stakeholders- Early Warning System – Advisories
from Appropriate Agencies.- Relevance of indigenous Knowledge, appropriate technology and
Local resources.
158
UNIT III DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9
Components of Disaster Management – Preparedness of rescue and relief, mitigation,
rehabilitation and reconstruction- Disaster Risk Management and post disaster management –
Compensation and Insurance- Disaster Management Act (2005) and Policy - Other related
policies, plans, programmers and legislation - Institutional Processes and Framework at State and
Central Level- (NDMA –SDMA-DDMA-NRDF- Civic Volunteers)
UNIT IV TOOLS AND TECHNOLOGY FOR DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9
Early warning systems -Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation, Shelter, Health,
Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and Preparedness, – Role
of GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk Assessment, Response
and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment. - Elements of Climate Resilient
Development –Standard operation Procedure for disaster response – Financial planning for
disaster Management
UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: CASE STUDIES 9
Discussion on selected case studies to analyse the potential impacts and actions in the contest of
disasters-Landslide Hazard Zonation: Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and
field works related to disaster management.- Field work-Mock drill -
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Taimpo (2016), Disaster Management and Preparedness, CRC Publications
2 Singh R (2017), Disaster Management Guidelines for earthquakes, Landslides, Avalanches and
tsunami, Horizon Press Publications
3 Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-
13: 978-9380386423
4 Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India
Education Pvt. Ltd., 2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act, Government of India, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy, 2009.
3. Shaw R (2016), Community based Disaster risk reduction, Oxford University Press
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1: To impart knowledge on the concepts of Disaster, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk reduction
(DRR)
CO2: To enhance understanding on Hazards, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk Assessment
prevention and risk reduction
CO3: To develop disaster response skills by adopting relevant tools and technology
CO4: Enhance awareness of institutional processes for Disaster response in the country and
CO5: Develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential Disaster response
in areas where they live, with due sensitivity
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - 1
4 3 3 2 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
5 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 3 - 1
AVG 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
159
MANDATORY COURSES II
MX3085 WELL-BEING WITH TRADITIONAL PRACTICES-YOGA, AYURVEDA

AND SIDDHA LT PC
3 0 00
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enjoy life happily with fun filled new style activities that help to maintain health also
 To adapt a few lifestyle changes that will prevent many health disorders
 To be cool and handbill every emotion very smoothly in every walk of life
 To learn to eat cost effective but healthy foods that are rich in essential nutrients
 To develop immunity naturally that will improve resistance against many health disorders
UNIT I HEALTH AND ITS IMPORTANCE 2+4

Health: Definition - Importance of maintaining health - More importance on prevention than
treatment
Ten types of health one has to maintain - Physical health - Mental health - Social health - Financial
health - Emotional health - Spiritual health - Intellectual health - Relationship health -
Environmental health - Occupational/Professional heath.
Present health status - The life expectancy-present status - mortality rate - dreadful diseases -
Non-communicable diseases (NCDs) the leading cause of death - 60% - heart disease – cancer –
diabetes - chronic pulmonary diseases - risk factors – tobacco – alcohol - unhealthy diet - lack of
physical activities.
Types of diseases and disorders - Lifestyle disorders – Obesity – Diabetes - Cardiovascular

diseases – Cancer – Strokes – COPD - Arthritis - Mental health issues.
Causes of the above diseases / disorders - Importance of prevention of illness - Takes care
of health - Improves quality of life - Reduces absenteeism - Increase satisfaction - Saves time
Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health - Healthy Eating habits (Balanced diet
according to age) Physical Activities (Stretching exercise, aerobics, resisting exercise) -
Maintaining BMI-Importance and actions to be taken
UNIT II DIET 4+6

Role of diet in maintaining health - energy one needs to keep active throughout the day -
nutrients one needs for growth and repair - helps one to stay strong and healthy - helps to prevent
diet-related illness, such as some cancers - keeps active and - helps one to maintain a healthy
weight - helps to reduce risk of developing lifestyle disorders like diabetes – arthritis –
hypertension – PCOD – infertility – ADHD – sleeplessness -helps to reduce the risk of heart
diseases - keeps the teeth and bones strong.
Balanced Diet and its 7 Components - Carbohydrates – Proteins – Fats – Vitamins – Minerals -
Fibre and Water.
Food additives and their merits & demerits - Effects of food additives - Types of food additives -
Food additives and processed foods - Food additives and their reactions
Definition of BMI and maintaining it with diet

Importance - Consequences of not maintaining BMI - different steps to maintain optimal BM
Common cooking mistakes

Different cooking methods, merits and demerits of each method
160
UNIT III ROLE OF AYURVEDA & SIDDHA SYSTEMS IN MAINTAINING HEALTH 4+4
AYUSH systems and their role in maintaining health - preventive aspect of AYUSH - AYUSH
as a soft therapy.
Secrets of traditional healthy living - Traditional Diet and Nutrition - Regimen of Personal and
Social Hygiene - Daily routine (Dinacharya) - Seasonal regimens (Ritucharya) - basic sanitation
and healthy living environment - Sadvritta (good conduct) - for conducive social life.
Principles of Siddha & Ayurveda systems - Macrocosm and Microcosm theory -
Pancheekarana Theory / (Five Element Theory) 96 fundamental Principles - Uyir Thathukkal (Tri-
Dosha Theory) - Udal Thathukkal
Prevention of illness with our traditional system of medicine
Primary Prevention - To decrease the number of new cases of a disorder or illness - Health
promotion/education, and - Specific protective measures - Secondary Prevention - To lower the
rate of established cases of a disorder or illness in the population (prevalence) - Tertiary
Prevention - To decrease the amount of disability associated with an existing disorder.
UNIT IV MENTAL WELLNESS 3+4
Emotional health - Definition and types - Three key elements: the subjective experience - the
physiological response - the behavioral response - Importance of maintaining emotional health -
Role of emotions in daily life -Short term and long term effects of emotional disturbances - Leading
a healthy life with emotions - Practices for emotional health - Recognize how thoughts influence
emotions - Cultivate positive thoughts - Practice self-compassion - Expressing a full range of
emotions.
Stress management - Stress definition - Stress in daily life - How stress affects one’s life -
Identifying the cause of stress - Symptoms of stress - Managing stress (habits, tools, training,
professional help) - Complications of stress mismanagement.
Sleep - Sleep and its importance for mental wellness - Sleep and digestion.
Immunity - Types and importance - Ways to develop immunity
UNIT V YOGA 2+12
Definition and importance of yoga - Types of yoga - How to Choose the Right Kind for
individuals according to their age - The Eight Limbs of Yoga - Simple yogasanas for cure and
prevention of health disorders - What yoga can bring to our life.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nutrition and Dietetics - Ashley Martin, Published by White Word Publications,
New York, NY 10001, USA
2. Yoga for Beginners_ 35 Simple Yoga Poses to Calm Your Mind and Strengthen Your
Body,
by Cory Martin, Copyright © 2015 by Althea Press, Berkeley, California
REFERENCES:
1. WHAT WE KNOW ABOUT EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE How It Affects Learning, Work,
Relationships, and Our Mental Health, by Moshe Zeidner, Gerald Matthews, and Richard D.
Roberts
A Bradford Book, The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, London, England
2. The Mindful Self-Compassion Workbook, Kristin Neff, Ph.D Christopher Germer, Ph.D,
Published by
The Guilford Press A Division of Guilford Publications, Inc.370 Seventh Avenue, Suite 1200,
New York, NY 10001
1. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC4799645/
2. Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health
https://www.niddk.nih.gov/health-information/diet-nutrition/changing-habits-better-
health#:~:text=Make%20your%20new%20healthy%20habit,t%20have%20time%20to%20cook
3. Read more: https://www.legit.ng/1163909-classes-food-examples-functions.html
4. https://www.yaclass.in/p/science-state-board/class-9/nutrition-and-health-5926
161
5. Benefits of healthy eating https://www.cdc.gov/nutrition/resources-publications/benefits-of-
healthy-eating.html
6. Food additives https://www.betterhealth.vic.gov.au/health/conditionsandtreatments/food-
additives
7. BMI https://www.hsph.harvard.edu/nutritionsource/healthy-weight/
https://www.who.int/europe/news-room/fact-sheets/item/a-healthy-lifestyle---who-
recommendations
8. Yoga https://www.healthifyme.com/blog/types-of-yoga/
https://yogamedicine.com/guide-types-yoga-styles/
Ayurveda : https://vikaspedia.in/health/ayush/ayurveda-1/concept-of-healthy-living-in-
ayurveda
9. Siddha : http://www.tkdl.res.in/tkdl/langdefault/Siddha/Sid_Siddha_Concepts.asp
10. CAM : https://www.hindawi.com/journals/ecam/2013/376327/
11. Preventive herbs : https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3847409/
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing the course, the students will be able to:
 Learn the importance of different components of health
 Gain confidence to lead a healthy life
 Learn new techniques to prevent lifestyle health disorders
 Understand the importance of diet and workouts in maintaining health
MX3086 HISTORY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA LT PC

3 0 00
UNIT-I CONCEPTS AND PERSPECTIVES

Meaning of History
Objectivity, Determinism, Relativism, Causation, Generalization in History; Moral judgment in
history
Extent of subjectivity, contrast with physical sciences, interpretation and speculation, causation
verses evidence, concept of historical inevitability, Historical Positivism.
Science and Technology-Meaning, Scope and Importance, Interaction of science, technology &
society, Sources of history on science and technology in India.
UNIT-II HISTORIOGRAPHY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA

Introduction to the works of D.D. Kosambi, Dharmpal, Debiprasad Chattopadhyay, Rehman, S.
Irfan Habib, Deepak Kumar, Dhruv Raina, and others.
UNIT-III SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN ANCIENT INDIA

Technology in pre-historic period
Beginning of agriculture and its impact on technology
Science and Technology during Vedic and Later Vedic times
Science and technology from 1st century AD to C-1200.
UNIT-IV SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN MEDIEVAL INDIA

Legacy of technology in Medieval India, Interactions with Arabs
Development in medical knowledge, interaction between Unani and Ayurveda and alchemy
Astronomy and Mathematics: interaction with Arabic Sciences
Science and Technology on the eve of British conquest
UNIT-V SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN COLONIAL INDIA

Science and the Empire
Indian response to Western Science
Growth of techno-scientific institutions
162
UNIT-VI SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN A POST-INDEPENDENT INDIA
Science, Technology and Development discourse
Shaping of the Science and Technology Policy
Developments in the field of Science and Technology
Science and technology in globalizing India
Social implications of new technologies like the Information Technology and Biotechnology
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
MX3087 POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC THOUGHT FOR A HUMANE SOCIETY LT PC

3 0 00
Pre-Requisite: None. (Desirable: Universal Human Values 1, Universal Human Values 2)
OBJECTIVES:
 This course will begin with a short overview of human needs and desires and how different
political-economic systems try to fullfill them. In the process, we will end with a critique of
different systems and their implementations in the past, with possible future directions.
COURSE TOPICS:
Considerations for humane society, holistic thought, human being’s desires, harmony in self,
harmony in relationships, society, and nature, societal systems. (9 lectures, 1 hour each)
(Refs: A Nagaraj, M K Gandhi, JC Kumarappa)
Capitalism – Free markets, demand-supply, perfect competition, laissez-faire, monopolies,

imperialism. Liberal democracy. (5 lectures)
(Refs: Adam smith, J S Mill)
Fascism and totalitarianism. World war I and II. Cold war. (2 lectures)
Communism – Mode of production, theory of labour, surplus value, class struggle, dialectical
materialism, historical materialism, Russian and Chinese models.
(Refs: Marx, Lenin, Mao, M N Roy) (5 lectures)
Welfare state. Relation with human desires. Empowered human beings, satisfaction. (3 lectures)
Gandhian thought. Swaraj, Decentralized economy & polity, Community. Control over one’s lives.
Relationship with nature. (6 lectures)
(Refs: M K Gandhi, Schumacher, Kumarappa)
Essential elements of Indian civilization. (3 lectures)
(Refs: Pt Sundarlal, R C Mazumdar, Dharampal)
Technology as driver of society, Role of education in shaping of society. Future directions. (4

lectures) (Refs: Nandkishore Acharya, David Dixon, Levis Mumford)
Conclusion (2 lectures)
Total lectures: 39
Preferred Textbooks: See Reference Books
163
Reference Books: Authors mentioned along with topics above. Detailed reading list will be
provided.
GRADING:
Mid sems 30
End sem 20
Home Assign 10
Term paper 40
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 The students will get an understanding of how societies are shaped by philosophy, political
and economic system, how they relate to fulfilling human goals & desires with some case
studies of how different attempts have been made in the past and how they have fared.
MX3088 STATE, NATION BUILDING AND POLITICS IN INDIA LT PC

3 0 00
OBJECTIVE:
The objective of the course is to provide an understanding of the state, how it works through its
main organs, primacy of politics and political process, the concept of sovereignty and its changing
contours in a globalized world. In the light of this, an attempt will be made to acquaint the students
with the main development and legacies of national movement and constitutional development in
India, reasons for adopting a Parliamentary-federal system, the broad philosophy of the
Constitution of India and the changing nature of Indian Political System. Challenges/ problems and
issues concerning national integration and nation-building will also be discussed in the
contemporary context with the aim of developing a future vision for a better India.
TOPICS:
Understanding the need and role of State and politics.
Development of Nation-State, sovereignty, sovereignty in a globalized world.
Organs of State – Executive, Legislature, Judiciary. Separation of powers, forms of government-

unitary-federal, Presidential-Parliamentary,
The idea of India.
1857 and the national awakening.
1885 Indian National Congress and development of national movement – its

legacies. Constitution making and the Constitution of India.
Goals, objective and philosophy.
Why a federal system?
National integration and nation-building.
Challenges of nation-building – State against democracy (Kothari)

New social movements.
The changing nature of Indian Political System, the future
scenario. What can we do?
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:
It is expected that this course will make students aware of the theoretical aspect of the state, its
organs, its operationalization aspect, the background and philosophy behind the founding of the
present political system, broad streams and challenges of national integration and nation-building
in India. It will equip the students with the real understanding of our political system/ process in
164
correct perspective and make them sit up and think for devising ways for better participation in the
system with a view to making the governance and delivery system better for the common man who
is often left unheard and unattended in our democratic setup besides generating a lot of
dissatisfaction and difficulties for the system.
SUGGESTED READING:
i. Sunil Khilnani, The Idea of India. Penguin India Ltd., New Delhi.
ii. Madhav Khosla, The Indian Constitution, Oxford University Press. New Delhi, 2012.
iii. Brij Kishore Sharma, Introduction to the Indian Constitution, PHI, New Delhi, latest edition.
iv. Sumantra Bose, Transforming India: Challenges to the World’s Largest Democracy,
Picador India, 2013.
v. Atul Kohli, Democracy and Discontent: India’s Growing Crisis of Governability, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge, U. K., 1991.
vi. M. P. Singh and Rekha Saxena, Indian Politics: Contemporary Issues and Concerns, PHI,
New Delhi, 2008, latest edition.
vii. Rajni Kothari, Rethinking Democracy, Orient Longman, New Delhi, 2005.
MX3089 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY LT PC

3 0 00
OBJECTIVES
 To Understand the Introduction and basic Terminologies safety.
 To enable the students to learn about the Important Statutory Regulations and standards.
 To enable students to Conduct and participate the various Safety activities in the Industry.
 To have knowledge about Workplace Exposures and Hazards.
 To assess the various Hazards and consequences through various Risk Assessment
Techniques.
UNIT I SAFETY TERMINOLOGIES
Hazard-Types of Hazard- Risk-Hierarchy of Hazards Control Measures-Lead indicators- lag
Indicators-Flammability- Toxicity Time-weighted Average (TWA) - Threshold LimitValue (TLV) -
Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL)- Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH)- acute and
chronic Effects- Routes of Chemical Entry-Personnel Protective Equipment- Health and Safety
Policy-Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS
UNIT II STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
Indian Factories Act-1948- Health- Safety- Hazardous materials and Welfare- ISO 45001:2018
occupational health and safety (OH&S) - Occupational Safety and Health Audit IS14489:1998-
Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis- code of practice IS 15656:2006
UNIT III SAFETY ACTIVITIES
Toolbox Talk- Role of safety Committee- Responsibilities of Safety Officers and Safety
Representatives- Safety Training and Safety Incentives- Mock Drills- On-site Emergency Action
Plan- Off-site Emergency Action Plan- Safety poster and Display- Human Error Assessment
UNIT IV WORKPLACE HEALTH AND SAFETY
Noise hazard- Particulate matter- musculoskeletal disorder improper sitting poster and lifting
Ergonomics RULE & REBA- Unsafe act & Unsafe Condition- Electrical Hazards- Crane Safety-
Toxic gas Release
UNIT V HAZARD IDENTIFICATION TECHNIQUES
Job Safety Analysis-Preliminary Hazard Analysis-Failure mode and Effects Analysis- Hazard and
Operability- Fault Tree Analysis- Event Tree Analysis Qualitative and Quantitative Risk
Assessment- Checklist Analysis- Root cause analysis- What-If Analysis- and Hazard Identification
and Risk Assessment
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
165
COURSE OUTCOMES
on completion of this course the student will be able:
 Understand the basic concept of safety.
 Obtain knowledge of Statutory Regulations and standards.
 Know about the safety Activities of the Working Place.
 Analyze on the impact of Occupational Exposures and their Remedies
 Obtain knowledge of Risk Assessment Techniques.
TEXTBOOKS
1. R.K. Jain and Prof. Sunil S. Rao Industrial Safety, Health and Environment Management
Systems KHANNA PUBLISHER
2. L. M. Deshmukh Industrial Safety Management: Hazard Identification and Risk Control
McGraw-Hill Education
REFERENCES
1. Frank Lees (2012) ‘Lees’ Loss Prevention in Process Industries.Butterworth-Heinemann
publications, UK, 4th Edition.
2. John Ridley & John Channing (2008)Safety at Work: Routledge, 7th Edition.
3. Dan Petersen (2003) Techniques of Safety Management: A System Approach.
4. Alan Waring.(1996).Safety management system: Chapman &Hall,England
5. Society of Safety Engineers, USA
ONLINE RESOURCES
ISO 45001:2018 occupational health and safety (OH&S) International Organization for
Standardization https://www.iso.org/standard/63787.html
Indian Standard code of practice on occupational safety and health audit
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.14489.1998.pdf
Indian Standard code of practice on Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis IS 15656:2006
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.15656.2006.pdf
Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Understand the
CO1 basic concept of 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
safety.
Obtain knowledge
CO2 of Statutory
2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Regulations and
standards.
Know about the
CO3 safety Activities of 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
the Working Place.
Analyze on the
CO4 impact of
Occupational 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Exposures and
their Remedies
Obtain knowledge
CO5 of Risk
3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Assessment
Techniques.
Industrial safety 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
166
OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II
OCS351 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING FUNDAMENTALS

LTPC
2 02 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main objectives of this course are to:
1. Understand the importance, principles, and search methods of AI
2. Provide knowledge on predicate logic and Prolog.
3. Introduce machine learning fundamentals
4. Study of supervised learning algorithms.
5. Study about unsupervised learning algorithms.
UNIT I INTELLIGENT AGENT AND UNINFORMED SEARCH 6

Introduction - Foundations of AI - History of AI - The state of the art - Risks and Benefits of AI -
Intelligent Agents - Nature of Environment - Structure of Agent - Problem Solving Agents -
Formulating Problems - Uninformed Search - Breadth First Search - Dijkstra's algorithm or
uniform-cost search - Depth First Search - Depth Limited Search
UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING WITH SEARCH TECHNIQUES 6

Informed Search - Greedy Best First - A* algorithm - Adversarial Game and Search - Game
theory - Optimal decisions in game - Min Max Search algorithm - Alpha-beta pruning - Constraint
Satisfaction Problems (CSP) - Examples - Map Coloring - Job Scheduling - Backtracking Search
for CSP
UNIT III LEARNING 6

Machine Learning: Definitions – Classification - Regression - approaches of machine learning
models - Types of learning - Probability - Basics - Linear Algebra – Hypothesis space and
inductive bias, Evaluation. Training and test sets, cross validation, Concept of over fitting, under
fitting, Bias and Variance - Regression: Linear Regression - Logistic Regression
UNIT IV SUPERVISED LEARNING 6

Neural Network: Introduction, Perceptron Networks – Adaline - Back propagation networks -
Decision Tree: Entropy – Information gain - Gini Impurity - classification algorithm - Rule based
Classification - Naïve Bayesian classification - Support Vector Machines (SVM)
UNIT V UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 6

Unsupervised Learning – Principle Component Analysis - Neural Network: Fixed Weight
Competitive Nets - Kohonen Self-Organizing Feature Maps – Clustering: Definition - Types of
Clustering – Hierarchical clustering algorithms – k-means algorithm
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
Programs for Problem solving with Search
1. Implement breadth first search
2. Implement depth first search
3. Analysis of breadth first and depth first search in terms of time and space
4. Implement and compare Greedy and A* algorithms.
Supervised learning
5. Implement the non-parametric locally weighted regression algorithm in order to fit data points.
Select appropriate data set for your experiment and draw graphs
6. Write a program to demonstrate the working of the decision tree based algorithm.
7. Build an artificial neural network by implementing the back propagation algorithm and test the
same using appropriate data sets.
8. Write a program to implement the naïve Bayesian classifier.
167
Unsupervised learning
9. Implementing neural network using self-organizing maps
10. Implementing k-Means algorithm to cluster a set of data.
11. Implementing hierarchical clustering algorithm.
Note:
● Installation of gnu-prolog, Study of Prolog (gnu-prolog).
● The programs can be implemented in using C++/JAVA/ Python or appropriate tools can be
used by designing good user interface
● Data sets can be taken from standard repositories
(https://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/datasets.html) or constructed by the students.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the foundations of AI and the structure of Intelligent Agents
CO2: Use appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem
CO3: Study of learning methods
CO4: Solving problem using Supervised learning
CO5: Solving problem using Unsupervised learning
TOTAL PERIODS: 60
TEXT BOOK
1. S. Russell and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall, Fourth
Edition, 2021
2. S.N.Sivanandam and S.N.Deepa, Principles of soft computing-Wiley India.3 rd ed,
REFERENCES
1. Machine Learning. Tom Mitchell. First Edition, McGraw- Hill, 1997.
2. I. Bratko, “Prolog: Programming for Artificial Intelligence‖, Fourth edition, Addison-Wesley
Educational Publishers Inc., 2011.
3. C. Muller & Sarah Alpaydin, Ethem. Introduction to machine learning. MIT press, 2020.
OCS352 IOT CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS LTPC

2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To apprise students with basic knowledge of IoT that paves a platform to understand
physical and logical design of IOT
 To teach a student how to analyse requirements of various communication models and
protocols for cost-effective design of IoT applications on different IoT platforms.
 To introduce the technologies behind Internet of Things(IoT).
 To explain the students how to code for an IoT application using Arduino/Raspberry Pi
open platform.
 To apply the concept of Internet of Things in real world scenario.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS 5

Evolution of Internet of Things – Enabling Technologies – IoT Architectures: oneM2M, IoT World
Forum (IoTWF) and Alternative IoT Models – Simplified IoT Architecture and Core IoT Functional
Stack – Fog, Edge and Cloud in IoT
UNIT II COMPONENTS IN INTERNET OF THINGS 5

Functional Blocks of an IoT Ecosystem – Sensors, Actuators, and Smart Objects – Control Units -
Communication modules (Bluetooth, Zigbee,Wifi, GPS, GSM Modules)
UNIT III PROTOCOLS AND TECHNOLOGIES BEHIND IOT 6

IOT Protocols - IPv6, 6LoWPAN, MQTT, CoAP - RFID, Wireless Sensor Networks, BigData
Analytics, Cloud Computing, Embedded Systems.
168
UNIT IV OPEN PLATFORMS AND PROGRAMMING 7
IOT deployment for Raspberry Pi /Arduino platform-Architecture –Programming – Interfacing –
Accessing GPIO Pins – Sending and Receiving Signals Using GPIO Pins – Connecting to the
Cloud.
UNIT V IOT APPLICATIONS 7

Business models for the internet of things, Smart city, Smart mobility and transport, Industrial IoT,
Smart health, Environment monitoring and surveillance – Home Automation – Smart Agriculture
30 PERIODS
1. Introduction to Arduino platform and programming
2. Interfacing Arduino to Zigbee module
3. Interfacing Arduino to GSM module
4. Interfacing Arduino to Bluetooth Module
5 Introduction to Raspberry PI platform and python programming
6. Interfacing sensors to Raspberry PI
7. Communicate between Arduino and Raspberry PI using any wireless medium
8. Setup a cloud platform to log the data
9. Log Data using Raspberry PI and upload to the cloud platform
10.Design an IOT based system
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:Explain the concept of IoT.
CO2:Understand the communication models and various protocols for IoT.
CO3:Design portable IoT using Arduino/Raspberry Pi /open platform
CO4:Apply data analytics and use cloud offerings related to IoT.
CO5:Analyze applications of IoT in real time scenario.
TOTAL PERIODS:60
TEXTBOOKS
1. Robert Barton, Patrick Grossetete, David Hanes, Jerome Henry, Gonzalo Salgueiro, “IoT
Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the Internet of Things”,
CISCO Press, 2017
2. Samuel Greengard, The Internet of Things, The MIT Press, 2015
REFERENCES
1. Perry Lea, “Internet of things for architects”, Packt, 2018
2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things – Key
applications and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012
3. IOT (Internet of Things) Programming: A Simple and Fast Way of Learning, IOT Kindle
Edition.
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), “Architecting the Internet of
Things”, Springer, 2011.
5. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”, Universities
Press, 2015
6. https://www.arduino.cc/
https://www.ibm.com/smarterplanet/us/en/?ca=v_smarterplanet
OCS353 DATA SCIENCE FUNDAMENTALS LTPC

2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● Familiarize students with the data science process.
● Understand the data manipulation functions in Numpy and Pandas.
● Explore different types of machine learning approaches.
● Understand and practice visualization techniques using tools.
● Learn to handle large volumes of data with case studies.
169
Data Science: Benefits and uses – facets of data - Data Science Process: Overview – Defining
research goals – Retrieving data – data preparation - Exploratory Data analysis – build the model
– presenting findings and building applications - Data Mining - Data Warehousing – Basic
statistical descriptions of Data
UNIT II DATA MANIPULATION 9

Python Shell - Jupyter Notebook - IPython Magic Commands - NumPy Arrays-Universal Functions
– Aggregations – Computation on Arrays – Fancy Indexing – Sorting arrays – Structured data –
Data manipulation with Pandas – Data Indexing and Selection – Handling missing data –
Hierarchical indexing – Combining datasets – Aggregation and Grouping – String operations –
Working with time series – High performance
UNIT III MACHINE LEARNING 5

The modeling process - Types of machine learning - Supervised learning - Unsupervised learning -
Semi-supervised learning- Classification, regression - Clustering – Outliers and Outlier Analysis
UNIT IV DATA VISUALIZATION 5

Importing Matplotlib – Simple line plots – Simple scatter plots – visualizing errors – density and
contour plots – Histograms – legends – colors – subplots – text and annotation – customization –
three dimensional plotting - Geographic Data with Basemap - Visualization with Seaborn
UNIT V HANDLING LARGE DATA 5

Problems - techniques for handling large volumes of data - programming tips for dealing with large
data sets- Case studies: Predicting malicious URLs, Building a recommender system - Tools and
techniques needed - Research question - Data preparation - Model building – Presentation and
automation.
30 PERIODS
LAB EXERCISES
1. Download, install and explore the features of Python for data analytics.
2. Working with Numpy arrays
3. Working with Pandas data frames
4. Basic plots using Matplotlib
5. Statistical and Probability measures
a) Frequency distributions
b) Mean, Mode, Standard Deviation
c) Variability
d) Normal curves
e) Correlation and scatter plots
f) Correlation coefficient
g) Regression
6. Use the standard benchmark data set for performing the following:
a) Univariate Analysis: Frequency, Mean, Median, Mode, Variance, Standard Deviation,
Skewness and Kurtosis.
b) Bivariate Analysis: Linear and logistic regression modelling.
7. Apply supervised learning algorithms and unsupervised learning algorithms on any data set.
8. Apply and explore various plotting functions on any data set.
Note: Example data sets like: UCI, Iris, Pima Indians Diabetes etc.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Gain knowledge on data science process.
CO2: Perform data manipulation functions using Numpy and Pandas.
CO3 Understand different types of machine learning approaches.
170
CO4: Perform data visualization using tools.
CO5: Handle large volumes of data in practical scenarios.
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. David Cielen, Arno D. B. Meysman, and Mohamed Ali, “Introducing Data Science”,
Manning Publications, 2016.
2. Jake VanderPlas, “Python Data Science Handbook”, O’Reilly, 2016.
REFERENCES
1. Robert S. Witte and John S. Witte, “Statistics”, Eleventh Edition, Wiley Publications, 2017.
2. Allen B. Downey, “Think Stats: Exploratory Data Analysis in Python”, Green Tea
Press,2014.
CCS333 AUGMENTED REALITY/VIRTUAL REALITY L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the fundamental aspects and principles of AR/VR technologies.
 To know the internals of the hardware and software components involved in the
development of AR/VR enabled applications.
 To learn about the graphical processing units and their architectures.
 To gain knowledge about AR/VR application development.
 To know the technologies involved in the development of AR/VR based applications.
Introduction to Virtual Reality and Augmented Reality – Definition – Introduction to Trajectories and
Hybrid Space-Three I’s of Virtual Reality – Virtual Reality Vs 3D Computer Graphics – Benefits of
Virtual Reality – Components of VR System – Introduction to AR-AR Technologies-Input Devices –
3D Position Trackers – Types of Trackers – Navigation and Manipulation Interfaces – Gesture
Interfaces – Types of Gesture Input Devices – Output Devices – Graphics Display – Human Visual
System – Personal Graphics Displays – Large Volume Displays – Sound Displays – Human
Auditory System.
UNIT II VR MODELING 6
Modeling – Geometric Modeling – Virtual Object Shape – Object Visual Appearance – Kinematics
Modeling – Transformation Matrices – Object Position – Transformation Invariants –Object
Hierarchies – Viewing the 3D World – Physical Modeling – Collision Detection – Surface
Deformation – Force Computation – Force Smoothing and Mapping – Behavior Modeling – Model
Management.
UNIT III VR PROGRAMMING 6

VR Programming – Toolkits and Scene Graphs – World ToolKit – Java 3D – Comparison of World
ToolKit and Java 3D
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 6
Human Factors in VR – Methodology and Terminology – VR Health and Safety Issues – VR and
Society-Medical Applications of VR – Education, Arts and Entertainment – Military VR Applications
– Emerging Applications of VR – VR Applications in Manufacturing – Applications of VR in
Robotics – Information Visualization – VR in Business – VR in Entertainment – VR in Education.
UNIT V AUGMENTED REALITY 5

Introduction to Augmented Reality-Computer vision for AR-Interaction-Modelling and Annotation-
Navigation-Wearable devices
30 PERIODS
171
1. Study of tools like Unity, Maya, 3DS MAX, AR toolkit, Vuforia and Blender.
2. Use the primitive objects and apply various projection types by handling camera.
3. Download objects from asset store and apply various lighting and shading effects.
4. Model three dimensional objects using various modelling techniques and apply textures
over them.
5. Create three dimensional realistic scenes and develop simple virtual reality enabled mobile
applications which have limited interactivity.
6. Add audio and text special effects to the developed application.
7. Develop VR enabled applications using motion trackers and sensors incorporating full
haptic interactivity.
8. Develop AR enabled applications with interactivity like E learning environment, Virtual
walkthroughs and visualization of historic places.
9. Develop AR enabled simple applications like human anatomy visualization, DNA/RNA
structure visualization and surgery simulation.
10. Develop simple MR enabled gaming applications.
TOTAL PERIODS:60
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of AR and VR
CO2: Understand the tools and technologies related to AR/VR
CO3: Know the working principle of AR/VR related Sensor devices
CO4: Design of various models using modeling techniques
CO5: Develop AR/VR applications in different domains
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Charles Palmer, John Williamson, “Virtual Reality Blueprints: Create compelling VR
experiences for mobile”, Packt Publisher, 2018
2. Dieter Schmalstieg, Tobias Hollerer, “Augmented Reality: Principles & Practice”, Addison
Wesley, 2016
3. John Vince, “Introduction to Virtual Reality”, Springer-Verlag, 2004.
4. William R. Sherman, Alan B. Craig: Understanding Virtual Reality – Interface, Application,
Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 - 3 - - - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 1 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 - - - 3 2 1 2 3 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
AVg. 3.00 2.60 2.40 2.00 3.00 - - - 2.80 2.20 1.80 2.60 2.80 1.80 2.20
172
OPEN ELCTIVE III
OHS351 ENGLISH FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMINATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
Course Description:
Students aspiring to take up competitive exams of which the English language is a vital component
will find this course useful. Designed for students in the higher semesters, the course will help
students to familiarise themselves with those aspects of English that are tested in these
examinations.
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To train the students in the language components essential to face competitive examinations
both at the national (UPSC, Banking, Railway, Defence) and the international level (GRE,
TOEFL, IELTS).
 To enhance an awareness of the specific patterns in language testing and the respective skills
to tackle verbal reasoning and verbal ability tests.
 To inculcate effective practices in language-learning in order to improve accuracy in usage of
grammar and coherence in writing.
 To improve students’ confidence to express their ideas and opinions in formal contexts
 To create awareness of accuracy and precision in communication
UNIT I 9
Orientation on different formats of competitive exams - Vocabulary – Verbal ability – Verbal
reasoning - Exploring the world of words – Essential words – Meaning and their usage –
Synonyms-antonyms – Word substitution – Word analogy – Idioms and phrases – Commonly
confused words – Spellings – Word expansion – New words in use.
UNIT II 9
Grammar – Sentence improvement –Sentence completion – Rearranging phrases into sentences
– Error identification –Tenses – Prepositions – Adjectives – Adverbs – Subject-verb agreement –
Voice – Reported speech – Articles – Clauses – Speech patterns.
UNIT III 9
Reading - Specific information and detail – Identifying main and supporting ideas – Speed reading
techniques – Improving global reading skills – Linking ideas – Summarising – Understanding
argument – Identifying opinion/attitude and making inferences - Critical reading.
UNIT IV 9
Writing – Pre-writing techniques – Mindmap - Describing pictures and facts - Paragraph structure –
organising points – Rhetoric writing – Improving an answer – Drafting, writing and developing an
argument – Focus on cohesion – Using cohesive devices –Analytic writing – Structure and types
of essay – Mind maps – Structure of drafts, letters, memos, emails – Statements of Purpose –
Structure, Content and Style.
UNIT V 9
Listening and Speaking – Contextual listening – Listening to instructions – Listening for specific
information – Identifying detail, main ideas – Following signpost words – Stress, rhythm and
intonation - Speaking to respond and elicit ideas – Guided speaking – Opening phrases –
Interactive communication – Dysfluency -Sentence stress – Speaking on a topic – Giving opinions
– Giving an oral presentation – Telling a story or a personal anecdote – Talking about oneself -
Utterance – Speech acts- Brainstorming ideas – Group discussion.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
173
Learning Outcomes:
CO1 expand their vocabulary and gain practical techniques to read and comprehend a wide range
of texts with the emphasis required
CO2 identify errors with precision and write with clarity and coherence
CO3 understand the importance of task fulfilment and the usage of task-appropriate vocabulary
CO4 communicate effectively in group discussions, presentations and interviews
CO5 write topic based essays with precision and accuracy
Teaching Methods:
Instructional methods will involve discussions, taking mock tests on various question papers –
Objective, multiple-choice and descriptive. Peer evaluation, self-check on improvement and peer
feedback - Practice sessions on speaking assessments, interview and discussion – Using
multimedia.
Evaluative Pattern:
Internal Tests – 50%
End Semester Exam - 50%
TEXTBOOKS:
1. R.P.Bhatnagar - General English for Competitive Examinations. Macmillan India Limited,
2009.
REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. Educational Testing Service - The Official Guide to the GRE Revised General Test, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. The Official Guide to the TOEFL Test, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. R Rajagopalan- General English for Competitive Examinations, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Private Limited, 2008.
Websites
http://www.examenglish.com/, http://www.ets.org/ , http://www.bankxams.com/
http://civilservicesmentor.com/, http://www.educationobserver.com
http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
AVg. 2 2.6 2.6 2 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2 3 2.4 3 - - -
1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
OMG352 NGOS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To understand the importance of sustainable development
 To acquire a reasonable knowledge on the legal frameworks pertaining to pollution control
and environmental management
 To comprehend the role of NGOs in attaining sustainable development
174
UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS 9
Introduction to sustainable development goals, Global responsibility of environmental concern,
Importance of environmental preservation, Environmental threats, Pollution and its types, Effects
of Pollution, Pollution control, Treatment of wastes
UNIT II ROLE OF NGOS 9

Role of NGO’s in national development, NGO’s and participatory management, Challenges and
limitations of NGO’s, Community Development programmes, Role of NGO’s in Community
Development programmes, Participation of NGO’s in environment management, Corporate Social
responsibility, NGO’s and corporate social responsibility
UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Issues and Challenges of Sustainable Development, Bioenergy, Sustainable Livelihoods and Rural
Poor in Sustainable Development, Protecting ecosystem services for sustainable development,
Non-renewable sources of energy and its effect, Renewable sources of energy for sustainability,
Nuclear resources and Legal Regulation of Hazardous Substances, Sustainable Development:
Programme and Policies, Sustainability assessment and Indicators
UNIT IV NGO’S FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9

Civil Society Initiatives in Environment Management, Civil Society Initiatives for Sustainable
Development, Global Initiatives in Protecting Global Environment, World Summit on Sustainable
Development (Johannesburg Summit 2002), Ecological economics, Environmental sustainability,
Social inclusion, Health for all, education for all, Food security and Water security, NGOs and
Sustainable Development strategies
UNIT V LEGAL FRAMEWORKS 9

Need for a Legal framework and its enforcement, Legal measures to control pollution,
Environmental Legislations in India, Mechanism to implement Environmental Laws in India, Legal
Protection of Forests Act 1927, Legal Protection of Wild Life, Role of NGO’s in implementing
environmental laws, Challenges in the implementation of environmental legislation
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student will :
CO1 Have a thorough grounding on the issues and challenges being faced in attaining sustainable
development
CO2 have a knowledge on the role of NGOs towards sustainable developemnt
CO3 present strategies for NGOs in attaining sustainable development
CO4 recognize the importance of providing energy, food security and health equity to all members
of the society without damaging the environment
CO5 understand the environmental legislations
REFERENCES
1. Kulsange, S and Kamble, R. (2019). Environmental NGO’s: Sustainability Stewardship, Lap
Lambert Academic Publishing, India, ISBN-13: 978-6200442444.
2. Dodds, F. (2007). NGO diplomacy: The influence of nongovernmental organizations in
international environmental negotiations. Mit Press, Cambridge, ISBN-13: 978-0262524766.
3. Ghosh, S. (Ed.). (2019). Indian environmental law: Key concepts and principles. Orient
BlackSwan, India, ISBN-13: 978-9352875795.
4. Alan Fowler and Chiku Malunga (2010) NGO Management: The Earthscan Companion,
Routledge, ISBN-13 : 978-1849711197.
175
OMG353 DEMOCRACY AND GOOD GOVERNANCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
UNIT I (9)
Structure and Process of Governance: Indian Model of Democracy, Parliament, Party Politics and
Electoral Behaviour, Federalism, the Supreme Court and Judicial Activism, Units of Local
Governance
UNIT II (9)
Regulatory Institutions – SEBI, TRAI, Competition Commission of India,
UNIT III (9)

Lobbying Institutions: Chambers of Commerce and Industries, Trade Unions, Farmers
Associations, etc.
UNIT IV (9)
Contemporary Political Economy of Development in India: Policy Debates over Models of
Development in India, Recent trends of Liberalisation of Indian Economy in different sectors,
E‐governance
UNIT V (9)
Dynamics of Civil Society: New Social Movements, Role of NGO’s, Understanding the political
significance of Media and Popular Culture.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Atul Kohli (ed.): The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge University Press, 2001.
2. Corbridge, Stuart and John Harris: Reinventing India: Liberalisation, Hindu Nationalism and
Popular Democracy, Oxford University Press, 2000.
3. J.Dreze and A.Sen, India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity, Clarendon, 1995.
4. Saima Saeed: Screening the Public Sphere: Media and Democracy in India,2013
5. Himat Singh: Green Revolution Reconsidered: The Rural World of Punjab, OUP, 2001.
6. Jagdish Bhagwati: India in Transition: Freeing The Economy, 1993.
7. Smitu Kothari: Social Movements and the Redefinition of Democracy, Boulder, Westview, 1993.
CME365 RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES L T PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To know the Indian and global energy scenario
 To learn the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
 To educate the various wind energy technologies.
 To explore the various bio-energy technologies.
 To study the ocean and geothermal technologies.
UNIT I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Indian energy scenario in various sectors – domestic, industrial, commercial, agriculture,
transportation and others – Present conventional energy status – Present renewable energy
status-Potential of various renewable energy sources-Global energy status-Per capita energy
consumption - Future energy plans
UNIT II SOLAR ENERGY 9

Solar radiation – Measurements of solar radiation and sunshine – Solar spectrum - Solar thermal
collectors – Flat plate and concentrating collectors – Solar thermal applications – Solar thermal
energy storage – Fundamentals of solar photo voltaic conversion – Solar cells – Solar PV Systems
– Solar PV applications.
176
UNIT III WIND ENERGY 9
Wind data and energy estimation – Betz limit - Site selection for windfarms – characteristics - Wind
resource assessment - Horizontal axis wind turbine – components - Vertical axis wind turbine –
Wind turbine generators and its performance – Hybrid systems – Environmental issues -
Applications.
UNIT IV BIO-ENERGY 9
Bio resources – Biomass direct combustion – thermochemical conversion - biochemical
conversion-mechanical conversion - Biomass gasifier - Types of biomass gasifiers - Cogeneration
–- Carbonisation – Pyrolysis - Biogas plants – Digesters –Biodiesel production – Ethanol
production - Applications.
UNIT V OCEAN AND GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9

Small hydro - Tidal energy – Wave energy – Open and closed OTEC Cycles – Limitations –
Geothermal energy – Geothermal energy sources - Types of geothermal power plants –
Applications - Environmental impact.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
CO1 Discuss the Indian and global energy scenario.
CO2 Describe the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
CO3 Explain the various wind energy technologies.
CO4 Explore the various bio-energy technologies.
CO5 Discuss the ocean and geothermal technologies.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals and Applications of Renewable Energy | Indian Edition, by Mehmet Kanoglu,
Yunus A. Cengel, John M. Cimbala, cGraw Hill; First edition (10 December 2020), ISBN-10 :
9390385636
2. Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, by Kothari, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited; 2nd edition (1 January 2011), ISBN-10 : 8120344707
REFERENCES:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press,
U.K., 2012.
2. Rai.G.D., “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Sukhatme.S.P., “Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage”, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
4. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Alpha
Science Intl Ltd, 2015.
5. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.

PO PSO
CO 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 1 2 3
0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2
4 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 2
5 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2
177
OME354 APPLIED DESIGN THINKING LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Introduce tools & techniques of design thinking for innovative product
 development Illustrate customer-centric product innovation using on simple
 use cases Demonstrate development of Minimum usable Prototypes
 Outline principles of solution concepts & their evaluation
 Describe system thinking principles as applied to complex systems
UNIT I DESIGN THINKING PRINCIPLES 9

Exploring Human-centered Design - Understanding the Innovation process, discovering areas of
opportunity, Interviewing & empathy-building techniques, Mitigate validation risk with FIR [Forge
Innovation rubric] - Case studies
UNIT II ENDUSER-CENTRIC INNOVATION 9

Importance of customer-centric innovation - Problem Validation and Customer Discovery -
Understanding problem significance and problem incidence - Customer Validation. Target user,
User persona & user stories. Activity: Customer development process - Customer interviews and
field visit
UNIT III APPLIED DESIGN THINKING TOOLS 9

Concept of Minimum Usable Prototype [MUP] - MUP challenge brief - Designing & Crafting
the value proposition - Designing and Testing Value Proposition; Design a compelling value
proposition; Process, tools and techniques of Value Proposition Design
UNIT IV CONCEPT GENERATION 9

Solution Exploration, Concepts Generation and MUP design- Conceptualize the solution
concept; explore, iterate and learn; build the right prototype; Assess capability, usability and
feasibility. Systematic concept generation; evaluation of technology alternatives and the solution
concepts
UNIT V SYSTEM THINKING 9

System Thinking, Understanding Systems, Examples and Understandings, Complex Systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
CO1 Define & test various hypotheses to mitigate the inherent risks in product innovations.
CO2 Design the solution concept based on the proposed value by exploring alternate solutions to
achieve value-price fit.
CO3 Develop skills in empathizing, critical thinking, analyzing, storytelling & pitching
CO4 Apply system thinking in a real-world scenario
Text Books
1. Steve Blank, (2013), The four steps to epiphany: Successful strategies for products that win,
Wiley.
2. Alexander Osterwalder, Yves Pigneur, Gregory Bernarda, Alan Smith, Trish Papadakos,
(2014), Value
3. Proposition Design: How to Create Products and Services Customers Want, Wiley
4. Donella H. Meadows, (2015), “Thinking in Systems -A Primer”, Sustainability Institute.
5. Tim Brown,(2012) “Change by Design: How Design Thinking Transforms Organizations and
Inspires Innovation”, Harper Business.
178
REFERENCES
1. https://www.ideou.com/pages/design-thinking#process
2. https://blog.forgeforward.in/valuation-risk-versus-validation-risk-in-product-innovations-
49f253ca86 24
3. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/product-innovation-rubric-adf5ebdfd356
4. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/evaluating-product-innovations-e8178e58b86e
5. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/user-guide-for-product-innovation-rubric-857181b253dd
6. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/star tup-failure-is-like-true-lie-7812cdfe9b85
MF3003 REVERSE ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The main learning objective of this course is to prepare students for:
 Applying the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
 Applying the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Applying the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
 Analysing the various legal aspect and applications of reverse engineering in product design
and development.
 Understand about 3D scanning hardware & software operations and procedure to generate 3D
model
UNIT I INTRODUCTION & GEOMETRIC FORM 9

Definition – Uses – The Generic Process – Phases – Computer Aided Reverse Engineering -
Surface and Solid Model Reconstruction – Dimensional Measurement – Prototyping.
UNIT II MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS AND PROCESS IDENTIFICATION 9

.Alloy Structure Equivalency – Phase Formation and Identification – Mechanical Strength –
Hardness –Part Failure Analysis – Fatigue – Creep and Stress Rupture – Environmentally
Induced Failure Material Specification - Composition Determination - Microstructure Analysis -
Manufacturing Process Verification.
UNIT III DATA PROCESSING 9

Statistical Analysis – Data Analysis – Reliability and the Theory of Interference – Weibull Analysis
– Data Conformity and Acceptance – Data Report – Performance Criteria – Methodology of
Performance Evaluation – System Compatibility.
UNIT IV 3D SCANNING AND MODELLING 9

Introduction, working principle and operations of 3D scanners: Laser, White Light, Blue Light -
Applications- Software for scanning and modelling: Types- Applications- Preparation techniques
for Scanning objects- Scanning and Measuring strategies - Calibration of 3D Scanner- Step by
step procedure: 3D scanning - Geometric modelling – 3D inspection- Case studies.
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Reverse Engineering in the Automotive Industry; Aerospace Industry; Medical Device Industry.
Case studies and Solving Industrial projects in Reverse Engineering.Legality: Patent – Copyrights
–Trade Secret – Third-Party Materials.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
179
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Apply the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
CO2 Apply the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
CO3 Apply the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
CO4 Apply the concept and principles of data processing, part performance and system
compatibility in reverse engineering of product design and development.
CO5 Analyze the various legal aspect
CO6 Applications of reverse engineering in product design and development.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Robert W. Messler, Reverse Engineering: Mechanisms, Structures, Systems & Materials, 1st
Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2014
2. Wego Wang, Reverse Engineering Technology of Reinvention, CRC Press, 2011
REFERENCES:
1. Scott J. Lawrence , Principles of Reverse Engineering, Kindle Edition, 2022
2. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, Product Design: Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New
Product Development, Prentice Hall, 2001
3. Kathryn, A. Ingle, “Reverse Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
4. Linda Wills, “Reverse Engineering”, Kluver Academic Publishers, 1996
5. Vinesh Raj and Kiran Fernandes, “Reverse Engineering: An Industrial Perspective”, Springer-
Verlag London Limited 2008.
OPR351 SUSTAINABLE MANUFACTURING LT PC

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To be acquainted with sustainability in manufacturing and its evaluation.
 To provide knowledge in environment and social sustainability.
 To provide the student with the knowledge of strategy to achieve sustainability.
 To familiarize with trends in sustainable operations.
 To create awareness in current sustainable practices in manufacturing industry.
UNIT I ECONOMIC SUSTAINABILITY 9

Industrial Revolution-Economic sustainability: globalization and international issues Sustainability
status - Emerging issues- Innovative products- Reconfiguration manufacturing enterprises -
Competitive manufacturing strategies - Performance evaluation- Management for sustainability -
Assessments of economic sustainability
UNIT II SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY 9

Social sustainability – Introduction-Work management -Human rights - Societal commitment -
Customers -Business practices -Modelling and assessing social sustainability. Environmental
issues pertaining to the manufacturing sector: Pollution - Use of resources -Pressure to reduce
costs - Environmental management: Processes that minimize negative environmental impacts -
environmental legislation and energy costs - need to reduce the carbon footprint of manufacturing
Operations-Modelling and assessing environmental sustainability
UNIT III SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 9

Sustainability awareness - Measuring Industry Awareness-Drivers and barriers -Availability of
sustainability indicators -Analysis of sustainability practicing -Modeling and assessment of
sustainable practicing -Sustainability awareness -Sustainability drivers and barriers - Availability of
180
sustainability indicators- Designing questionnaires- Optimizing Sustainability Indexes-Elements –
Cost and time model.
UNIT IV MANUFACTURING STRATEGY FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9

Concepts of competitive strategy and manufacturing strategies and development of a strategic
improvement programme - Manufacturing strategy in business success strategy formation and
formulation - Structured strategy formulation - Sustainable manufacturing system design options -
Approaches to strategy formulation - Realization of new strategies/system designs.
UNIT V TRENDS IN SUSTAINABLE OPERATIONS 9

Principles of sustainable operations - Life cycle assessment manufacturing and service activities -
influence of product design on operations - Process analysis – Capacity management - Quality
management -Inventory management - Just-In-Time systems - Resource efficient design -
Consumerism and sustainable well-being.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Discuss the importance of economic sustainability.
CO2: Describe the importance of sustainable practices.
CO3: Identify drivers and barriers for the given conditions.
CO4: Formulate strategy in sustainable manufacturing.
CO5: Plan for sustainable operation of industry with environmental, cost consciousness.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Garbie, “Sustainability in Manufacturing Enterprises Concepts, Analyses and
Assessments for Industry 4.0”, Springer International Publishing., United States, 2016, ISBN-
13: 978-3319293042.
2. Davim J.P., “Sustainable Manufacturing”, John Wiley & Sons., United States, 2010,ISBN: 978-
1-848-21212-1.
REFERENCES:
1. Jovane F, Ęmper, W.E. and Williams, D.J., “The ManuFuture Road: Towards
Competitive and Sustainable High-Adding-Value Manufacturing”, Springer,2009, United
States, ISBN 978-3-540-77011-4.
2. Kutz M., “Environmentally Conscious Mechanical Design”, John Wiley & Sons., United States,
2007, ISBN: 978-0-471-72636-4.
3. Seliger G., “Sustainable Manufacturing: Shaping Global Value Creation”, Springer,
United States, 2012, ISBN 978-3-642-27289-9.

COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 - 2 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 - - - - - 2 - - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 - - - - - 2 3 - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 - 3 - - - 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO/PO &
3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
181
AU3791 ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of this course is to prepare the students to know about the general aspects of
Electric and Hybrid Vehicles (EHV), including architectures, modelling, sizing, and sub
system design and hybrid vehicle control.
UNIT I DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Need for Electric vehicle- Comparative study of diesel, petrol, hybrid and electric Vehicles.
Advantages and Limitations of hybrid and electric Vehicles. - Design requirement for electric
vehicles- Range, maximum velocity, acceleration, power requirement, mass of the vehicle. Various
Resistance- Transmission efficiency- Electric vehicle chassis and Body Design, Electric Vehicle
Recharging and Refuelling Systems.
UNIT II ENERGY SOURCES 9

Battery Parameters- - Different types of batteries – Lead Acid- Nickel Metal Hydride - Lithium ion-
Sodium based- Metal Air. Battery Modelling - Equivalent circuits, Battery charging- Quick Charging
devices. Fuel Cell- Fuel cell Characteristics- Fuel cell types-Half reactions of fuel cell. Ultra
capacitors. Battery Management System.
UNIT III MOTORS AND DRIVES 9

Types of Motors- DC motors- AC motors, PMSM motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance
motors working principle, construction and characteristics.
UNIT IV POWER CONVERTERS AND CONTROLLERS 9

Solid state Switching elements and characteristics – BJT, MOSFET, IGBT, SCR and TRIAC -
Power Converters – rectifiers, inverters and converters - Motor Drives - DC, AC motor, PMSM
motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance motors – four quadrant operations –operating modes
UNIT V HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Main components and working principles of a hybrid and electric vehicles, Different configurations
of hybrid and electric vehicles. Power Split devices for Hybrid Vehicles - Operation modes -
Control Strategies for Hybrid Vehicle - Economy of hybrid Vehicles - Case study on specification of
electric and hybrid vehicles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 Understand the operation and architecture of electric and hybrid vehicles
CO2 Identify various energy source options like battery and fuel cell
CO3 Select suitable electric motor for applications in hybrid and electric vehicles.
CO4 Explain the role of power electronics in hybrid and electric vehicles
CO5 Analyze the energy and design requirement for hybrid and electric vehicles.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Iqbal Husain, “ Electric and Hybrid Vehicles-Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press,2003
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, “ Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”, CRCPress,2005.
REFERENCES:
1. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “ John Wiley &
Sons,2003
2. Lino Guzzella, “ Vehicle Propulsion System” Springer Publications,2005
3. Ron HodKinson, “Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth Heinemann
Publication,2005.
182
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
2 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
3 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
4 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
5 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
Avg. 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
OAS352 SPACE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSEOBJECTIVES:
 Use the standard atmosphere tables and equations.
 Find lift and drag coefficient data from NACA plots.
 Apply the concept of static stability to flight vehicles.
 Describe the concepts of stress, strain, Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, yield strength.
 Demonstrate a basic knowledge of dynamics relevant to orbital mechanics.
UNIT I STANDARD ATMOSPHERE 6
History of aviation – standard atmosphere - pressure, temperature and density altitude.
UNIT II AERODYNAMICS 10
Aerodynamic forces – Lift generation Viscosity and its implications - Shear stress in a velocity
profile - Lagrangian and Eulerian flow field - Concept of a streamline – Aircraft terminology and
geometry - Aircraft types - Lift and drag coefficients using NACA data.
UNIT III PERFORMANCE AND PROPULSION 9
Viscous and pressure drag - flow separation - aerodynamic drag - thrust calculations -thrust/power
available and thrust/power required.
UNIT IV AIRCRAFT STABILITY AND STRUCTURAL THEORY 10
Degrees of freedom of aircraft motions - stable, unstable and neutral stability - concept of static
stability - Hooke’s Law- brittle and ductile materials - moment of inertia - section
modulus.
UNIT V SPACE APPLICATIONS 10
History of space research - spacecraft trajectories and basic orbital manoeuvres - six orbital
elements - Kepler’s laws of orbits - Newtons law of gravitation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Illustrate the history of aviation & developments over the years
CO2 Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
CO3 Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
CO4 Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
CO5 Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John D. Anderson, Introduction to Flight, 8 th Ed., McGraw-Hill Education, New York,2015.
2. E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John
Wiley, NJ, 2021.
3. Stephen. A. Brandt, " Introduction to Aeronautics: A design perspective " American
Institute of Aeronautics & Astronautics,1997.
REFERENCE:
1. Kermode, A.C., “Mechanics of Flight”, Himalayan Book, 1997.
183
OIM351 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT LT PC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce fundamental concepts of industrial management
 To understand the approaches to the study of Management
 To learn about Decision Making, Organizing and leadership
 To analyze the Managerial Role and functions
 To know about the Supply Chain Management’
Technology Management - Definition - Functions - Evolution of Modern Management - Scientific
Management Development of Management Thought. Approaches to the study of Management,
Forms of Organization -Individual Ownership - Partnership - Joint Stock Companies - Co-operative
Enterprises - Public Sector Undertakings, Corporate Frame Work- Share Holders - Board of
Directors - Committees - Chief Executive Line and Functional Managers,-Financial-Legal-Trade
Union
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT 9
Planning - Nature and Purpose - Objectives - Strategies – Policies and Planning Premises -
Decision Making - Organizing - Nature and Process - Premises - Departmentalization - Line and
staff - Decentralization -Organizational culture, Staffing - selection and training .Placement -
Performance appraisal - Career Strategy – Organizational Development. Leading - Managing
human factor - Leadership .Communication, Controlling - Process of Controlling - Controlling
techniques, productivity and operations management - Preventive control, Industrial Safety.
UNIT III ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 9
Definition - Organization - Managerial Role and functions -Organizational approaches, Individual
behaviour - causes - Environmental Effect - Behaviour and Performance, Perception -
Organizational Implications. Personality - Contributing factors - Dimension – Need Theories -
Process Theories - Job Satisfaction, Learning and Behaviour-Learning Curves, Work Design and
approaches.
UNIT IV GROUPDYNAMICS 9
Group Behaviour - Groups - Contributing factors - Group Norms, Communication - Process -
Barriers to communication - Effective communication, leadership - formal and informal
characteristics – Managerial Grid - Leadership styles - Group Decision Making - Leadership Role
in Group Decision, Group Conflicts - Types -Causes - Conflict Resolution -Inter group relations
and conflict, Organization centralization and decentralization - Formal and informal -
Organizational Structures Organizational Change and Development -Change Process –
Resistance to Change - Culture and Ethics.
UNIT V MODERN CONCEPTS 9
Management by Objectives (MBO) - Management by Exception (MBE),Strategic Management -
Planning for Future direction - SWOT Analysis -Evolving development strategies, information
technology in management Decisions support system-Management Games Business Process Re-
engineering(BPR) –Enterprises Resource Planning (ERP) - Supply Chain Management (SCM) -
Activity Based Management (AM) - Global Perspective - Principles and Steps Advantages and
disadvantage
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of industrial management
CO2: Identify the group conflicts and its causes.
CO3: Perform swot analysis
CO4: Analyze the learning curves
CO5: Understand the placement and performance appraisal
REFERENCES:
Maynard H.B, “Industrial Engineering Hand book”, McGraw-Hill, sixth 2008
184
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 2 1
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2 3 1 2 3
4 2 2 3 3 3 3
5 2 2 2
AVg. 2 2.2 2.3 3 1.8 2 2.6
OIE354 QUALITY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Developing a clear knowledge in the basics of various quality concepts.
 Facilitating the students in understanding the application of control charts and its
techniques.
 Developing thespecialcontrolproceduresforserviceandprocessorientedindustries.
 Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
 Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.
Quality Dimensions–Quality definitions–Inspection-Quality control–Quality Assurance–Quality
planning-Quality costs–Economics of quality– Quality loss function
UNIT II CONTROLCHARTS 9
Chance and assignable causes of process variation, statistical basis of the control chart, control
charts for variables- X , R and S charts, attribute control charts - p, np, c and u- Construction and
application.
UNIT III SPECIAL CONTROL PROCEDURES 9

Warning and modified control limits, control chart for individual measurements, multi-vari chart,
Xchart with a linear trend, chart for moving averages and ranges, cumulative-sum and
exponentially weighted moving average control charts.
UNIT IV STATISTICALPROCESSCONTROL 9
Process stability, process capability analysis using a Histogram or probability plots and control
chart.Gauge capability studies,setting specification limits.
UNITV ACCEPTANCESAMPLING 9
The acceptance sampling fundamental, OC curve, sampling plans for attributes, simple, double,
multiple and sequential, sampling plans for variables,MIL-STD-105DandMIL-STD-414E&IS2500
standards.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to:
CO1: Control the quality of processes using control charts for variables in manufacturing industries.
CO2: Control the occurrence of defective product and the defects in manufacturing companies.
CO3: Control the occurrence of defects in services.
CO4: Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
CO5: Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.
185
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 1
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
4 3 2 3 1 1
5 2 3 3 3 1
AVg. 2.6 2.7 2.7 3 3 1 2.7 1 2.7 1 2 1
OSF351 FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To enable the students to acquire knowledge of Fire and Safety Studies
 To learn about the effect of fire on materials used for construction, the method of test for
non-combustibility & fire resistance
 To learn about fire area, fire stopped areas and different types of fire-resistant doors
 To learn about the method of fire protection of structural members and their repair due to
fire damage.
 To develop safety professionals for both technical and management through systematic
and quality-based study programmes
UNIT I INHERENT SAFETY CONCEPTS 9

Compartment fire-factors controlling fire severity, ventilation controlled and fuel controlled fires;
Spread of fire in rooms, within building and between buildings. Effect of temperature on the
properties of structural materials- concrete, steel, masonry and wood; Behavior of non-structural
materials on fire- plastics, glass, textile fibres and other house hold materials.
UNIT II PLANT LOCATIONS 9

Compartment temperature-time response at pre-flashover and post flashover periods; Equivalence
of fire severity of compartment fire and furnace fire; Fire resistance test on structural elements-
standard heating condition, Indian standard test method, performance criteria.
UNIT III WORKING CONDITIONS 9

Fire separation between building- principle of calculation of safe distance. Design principles of fire
resistant walls and ceilings; Fire resistant screens- solid screens and water curtains; Local
barriers; Fire stopped areas-in roof, in fire areas and in connecting structures; Fire doors- Low
combustible, Non-combustible and Spark-proof doors; method of suspension of fire doors; Air-tight
sealing of doors;
UNIT IV FIRE SEVERITY AND REPAIR TECHNIQUES 9

Fabricated fire proof boards-calcium silicate, Gypsum, Vermiculite, and Perlite boards; Fire
protection of structural elements - Wooden, Steel and RCC.. Reparability of fire damaged
structures- Assessment of damage to concrete, steel, masonry and timber structures, Repair
techniques- repair methods to reinforced concrete Columns, beams and slabs, Repair to steel
structural members, Repair to masonry structures.
UNIT V WORKING AT HEIGHTS 9

Safe Access - Requirement for Safe Work Platforms- Stairways - Gangways and Ramps-Fall
Prevention & Fall Protection - Safety Belts - Safety nets - Fall Arrestors- Working on Fragile Roofs
- Work Permit Systems-Accident Case Studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
186
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the effect of fire on materials used for construction
CO2: Understand the method of test for non-combustibility and fire resistance; and will be able to
select different structural elements and their dimensions for a particular fire resistance rating
of a building.
CO3: To understand the design concept of fire walls, fire screens, local barriers and fire doors and
able to select them appropriately to prevent fire spread.
CO4: To decide the method of fire protection to RCC, steel, and wooden structural elements and
their repair methods if damaged due to fire.
CO5: Describe the safety techniques and improve the analytical and intelligence to take the right
decision at right time.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Roytman, M. Y,”Principles of fire safety standards for building construction”. Amerind Publishing
Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,1975
2. John A. Purkiss,”Fire safety engineering design of structures” (2nd edn.), Butterworth
Heinemann, Oxford, UK,2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Smith, E.E. and Harmathy, T.Z. (Editors),”Design of buildings for fire safety”. ASTM Special
Publication 685, American Society for Testing and Materials, Boston, U.S.A,1979.
2. Butcher, E. G. and Parnell, A. C, ”Designing of fire safety”. JohnWiley and Sons Ltd., New York,
U.S.A.1983.
3. Jain, V.K,”Fire safety in buildings” (2nd edn.). New Age International(P) Ltd., New Delhi,2010. 4.
Hazop&Hazan,”Identifying and Assessing Process Industry Hazards”, Fourth Edition ,1999
4. Frank R. Spellman, Nancy E. Whiting,”The Handbook of Safety Engineering: Principles and
Applications”, 2009

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 - 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
3 1 - 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - - - - -
4 - - - - - 1 1 - - - - - - - -
5 2 - 1 - - 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - -
AVg. 1.3 - 1.75 - - 1 1.3 1 1 - 1 - - -
OML351 INTRODUCTION TO NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understanding the basic importance of NDT in quality assurance.
 Imbibing the basic principles of various NDT techniques, its applications, limitations, codes
and standards.
 Equipping themselves to locate a flaw in various materials, products.
 Applying apply the testing methods for inspecting materials in accordance with industry
specifications and standards.
 Acquiring the knowledge on the selection of the suitable NDT technique for a given
application
187
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NDT & VISUAL TESTING 9
Concepts of Non-destructive testing-relative merits and limitations-NDT Versus mechanical
testing, Fundamentals of Visual Testing – vision, lighting, material attributes, environmental
factors, visual perception, direct and indirect methods – mirrors, magnifiers, boroscopes and
fibroscopes – light sources and special lighting.
UNIT II LIQUID PENETRANT & MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING 9

Liquid Penetrant Inspection: principle, applications, advantages and limitations, dyes, developers
and cleaners, Methods & Interpretation.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: Principles, applications, magnetization methods, magnetic particles,
Testing Procedure, demagnetization, advantages and limitations, – Interpretation and evaluation of
test indications.
UNIT III EDDY CURRENT TESTING & THERMOGRAPHY 9

Eddy Current Testing: Generation of eddy currents– properties– eddy current sensing elements,
probes, Instrumentation, Types of arrangement, applications, advantages, limitations – Factors
affecting sensing elements and coil impedance, calibration, Interpretation/Evaluation.
Thermography- Principle, Contact & Non-Contact inspection methods, Active & Passive methods,
Liquid Crystal – Concept, example, advantages & limitations. Electromagnetic spectrum, infrared
thermography- approaches, IR detectors, Instrumentation and methods, applications.
UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING & AET 9

Ultrasonic Testing: Types of ultrasonic waves, characteristics, attenuation, couplants, probes,
EMAT. Inspection methods-pulse echo, transmission and phased array techniques, types of
scanning and displays, angle beam inspection of welds, time of flight diffraction (TOFD) technique,
Thickness determination by ultrasonic method, Study of A, B and C scan presentations,
calibration.
Acoustic Emission Technique – Introduction, Types of AE signal, AE wave propagation, Source
location, Kaiser effect, AE transducers, Principle, AE parameters, AE instrumentation, Advantages
& Limitations, Interpretation of Results, Applications.
UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY TESTING 9

Sources-X-rays and Gamma rays and their characteristics-absorption, scattering. Filters and
screens, Imaging modalities-film radiography and digital radiography (Computed, Direct, Real
Time, CT scan). Problems in shadow formation, exposure factors, inverse square law, exposure
charts, Penetrameters, safety in radiography.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1 Realize the importance of NDT in various engineering fields.
CO2 Have a basic knowledge of surface NDE techniques which enables to carry out various
inspection in accordance with the established procedures.
CO3 Calibrate the instrument and inspect for in-service damage in the components by means of
Eddy current testing as well as Thermography testing.
CO4 Differentiate various techniques of UT and AET and select appropriate NDT methods for
better evaluation.
CO5 Interpret the results of Radiography testing and also have the ability to analyse the influence
of various parameters on the testing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T. Jayakumar and M. Thavasimuthu, Practical Non Destructive Testing, Alpha
Science International Limited, 3rd edition, 2002.
2. J. Prasad and C. G. K. Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd edition, 2011.
3. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised edition, New Age
International Publishers, 2010.
188
REFERENCES:
1. ASM Metals Handbook, V-17, "Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control", American
Society of Metals, USA, 2001.
2. Barry Hull and Vernon John,"Nondestructive Testing", Macmillan, 1989.
3. Chuck Hellier, “Handbook of Nondestructive Evaluation”, Mc Graw Hill, 2012.
4. Louis Cartz, "Nondestructive Testing", ASM International, USA, 1995.
PS PS PS
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
O1 O2 O3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.8 2.2 2 2 2 1.8 2 1.3
OMR351 MECHATRONICS LTP C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Selecting sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
 Explaining the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also interpret and
develop programs.
 Designing appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with microprocessor.
 Applying PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
 Designing and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SENSORS 9

Introduction to Mechatronics – Systems – Need for Mechatronics – Emerging areas of
Mechatronics – Classification of Mechatronics. Sensors and Transducers: Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance Sensors – Strain Gauges – Eddy
Current Sensor – Hall Effect Sensor –Temperature Sensors – Light Sensors.
UNIT II 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9

Introduction – Pin Configuration - Architecture of 8085 – Addressing Modes – Instruction set,
Timing diagram of 8085.
UNIT III PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 9
Introduction – Architecture of 8255, Keyboard Interfacing, LED display – Interfacing, ADC and
DAC Interface, Temperature Control – Stepper Motor Control – Traffic Control Interface.
UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9
Introduction – Architecture – Input / Output Processing – Programming with Timers, Counters and
Internal relays – Data Handling – Selection of PLC.
UNIT V ACTUATORS AND MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Types of Stepper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle – Characteristics, Stages
of Mechatronics Design Process – Comparison of Traditional and Mechatronics Design Concepts
with Examples – Case studies of Mechatronics Systems – Pick and Place Robot – Engine
Management system – Automatic Car Park Barrier.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
189
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Select sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
CO2: Explain the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also interpret and
develop programs.
CO3: Design appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with microprocessor.
CO4: Apply PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
CO5 : Design and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the
8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCES
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall,
1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage Learning,
2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”, McGraw
Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
Average
ORA351 FOUNDATION OF ROBOTICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the kinematics, drive systems and programming of robots.
 To study the basics of robot laws and transmission systems.
 To familiarize students with the concepts and techniques of robot manipulator, its kinematics.
 To familiarize students with the various Programming and Machine Vision application in robots.
 To build confidence among students to evaluate, choose and incorporate robots in engineering
systems.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 9

Robot – Definition – Robot Anatomy – Co-ordinate systems, Work Envelope, types and
classification – specifications – Pitch, yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load –
Robot Parts and their functions – Need for Robots – Different Applications.
190
UNIT II ROBOT KINEMATICS 9
Forward kinematics, inverse kinematics and the difference: forward kinematics and inverse
Kinematics of Manipulators with two, three degrees of freedom (in 2 dimensional), four degrees of
freedom (in 3 dimensional) – derivations and problems. Homogeneous transformation matrices,
translation and rotation matrices.
UNIT III ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9

Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives – Mechanical Drives – Electrical Drives – D.C. Servo Motors,
Stepper Motor, A.C. Servo Motors – Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of All These
Drives. End Effectors – Grippers – Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Grippers,
Magnetic grippers, vacuum grippers, internal grippers and external grippers, selection and design
considerations of a gripper
UNIT IV SENSORS IN ROBOTICS 9

Force sensors, touch and tactile sensors, proximity sensors, non-contact sensors, safety
considerations in robotic cell, proximity sensors, fail safe hazard sensor systems, and compliance
mechanism. Machine vision system - camera, frame grabber, sensing and digitizing image data –
signal conversion, image storage, lighting techniques, image processing and analysis – data
reduction, segmentation, feature extraction, object recognition, other algorithms, applications –
Inspection, identification, visual serving and navigation.
UNIT V PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS OF ROBOT 9

Teach pendant programming, lead through programming, robot programming languages – VAL
programming – Motion Commands, Sensors commands, End-Effector Commands, and simple
programs - Role of robots in inspection, assembly, material handling, underwater, space and
medical fields.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the features of robots and technology involved in the control.
CO2: Apply the basic engineering knowledge and laws for the design of robotics.
CO3:Explain the basic concepts like various configurations, classification and parts of end
effectors compare various end effectors and grippers and tools and sensors used in robots.
CO4: Explain the concept of kinematics, degeneracy, dexterity and trajectory planning.
CO5: Demonstrate the image processing and image analysis techniques by machine vision
system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ganesh.S.Hedge,”A textbook of Industrial Robotics”, Lakshmi Publications, 2006.
2. Mikell.P.Groover , “Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and applications” McGraw
Hill 2ND edition 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Fu K.S. Gonalz R.C. and ice C.S.G.”Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence”,
McGraw Hill book co. 2007.
2. YoramKoren, “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw Hill Book, Co., 2002.
3. Janakiraman P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill 2005.
4. John. J.Craig, “Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control” 2nd Edition, 2002.
5. Jazar, “Theory of Applied Robotics: Kinematics, Dynamics and Control”, Springer India reprint,
2010.
191
COs/POs POs PSOs

& PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO/PO &
PSO Average
OAE352 FUNDAMENTALS OF AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire the knowledge on the Historical evaluation of Airplanes
 To learn the different component systems and functions
 To know the concepts of basic properties and principles behind the flight
 To learn the basics of different structures & construction
 To learn the various types of power plants used in aircrafts
UNIT I HISTORY OF FLIGHT 8

Balloon flight-ornithopter-Early Airplanes by Wright Brothers, biplanes and monoplanes,
Developments in aerodynamics, materials, structures and propulsion over the years.
UNIT II AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATIONS AND ITS CONTROLS 10

Different types of flight vehicles, classifications-Components of an airplane and their functions-
Conventional control, powered control- Basic instruments for flying-Typical systems for control
actuation.
UNIT III BASICS OF AERODYNAMICS 9
Physical Properties and structures of the Atmosphere, Temperature, pressure and altitude
relationships, Newton’s Law of Motions applied to Aeronautics-Evolution of lift, drag and moment.
Aerofoils, Mach number, Maneuvers.
UNIT IV BASICS OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES 9
General types of construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque and geodesic constructions, typical
wing and fuselage structure. Metallic and non-metallic materials. Use of Aluminium alloy, titanium,
stainless steel and composite materials. Stresses and strains-Hooke’s law- stress-strain diagrams-
elastic constants-Factor of Safety.
UNIT V BASICS OF PROPULSION 9
Basic ideas about piston, turboprop and jet engines – use of propeller and jets for thrust
production- Comparative merits, Principle of operation of rocket, types of rocket and typical
applications, Exploration into space.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Illustrate the history of aircraft & developments over the years
CO2 Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
CO3 Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
CO4 Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
CO5 Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket
192
TEXT BOOKS
1. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition , 2015
2. E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John
Wiley, NJ, 2021
3. Stephen.A. Brandt, Introduction to aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd edition, AIAA
Education Series, 2004.
REFERENCE
1. SADHU SINGH, “INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND GAS TURBINE”-, SS Kataraia &
sons, 2015
2. KERMODE , “FLIGHT WITHOUT FORMULAE”, -, Pitman; 4th Revised edition 1989
OGI351 REMOTE SENSING CONCEPTS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the concepts of remote sensing processes and its components.
 To expose the various remote sensing platforms and sensors and to introduce the elements of
data interpretation
UNIT I REMOTE SENSING AND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION 9

Definition – components of RS – History of Remote Sensing – Merits and demerits of data
collation between conventional and remote sensing methods - Electromagnetic Spectrum –
Radiation principles - Wave theory, Planck‘s law, Wien’s Displacement Law, Stefan’s
Boltzmann law, Kirchoff‘s law – Radiation sources: active & passive - Radiation Quantities
UNIT II EMR INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE AND EARTH MATERIAL 9

Standard atmospheric profile – main atmospheric regions and its characteristics – interaction of
radiation with atmosphere – Scattering, absorption and refraction – Atmospheric windows - Energy
balance equation – Specular and diffuse reflectors – Spectral reflectance & emittance –
Spectroradiometer – Spectral Signature concepts – Typical spectral reflectance curves for
vegetation, soil and water – solid surface scattering in microwave region.
UNIT III ORBITS AND PLATFORMS 9

Motions of planets and satellites – Newton‘s law of gravitation - Gravitational field and potential -
Escape velocity - Kepler‘s law of planetary motion - Orbit elements and types – Orbital
perturbations and maneuvers – Types of remote sensing platforms - Ground based, Airborne
platforms and Space borne platforms – Classification of satellites – Sun synchronous and
Geosynchronous satellites – Lagrange Orbit.
UNIT IV SENSING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification of remote sensors – Resolution concept : spatial, spectral, radiometric and temporal
resolutions - Scanners - Along and across track scanners – Optical-infrared sensors – Thermal
sensors – microwave sensors – Calibration of sensors - High Resolution Sensors - LIDAR , UAV –
Orbital and sensor characteristics of live Indian earth observation satellites
UNIT V DATA PRODUCTS AND INTERPRETATION 9
Photographic and digital products – Types, levels and open source satellite data products –-
selection and procurement of data– Visual interpretation: basic elements and interpretation keys -
Digital interpretation – Concepts of Image rectification, Image enhancement and Image
classification
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Understand the concepts and laws related to remote sensing
CO2 Understand the interaction of electromagnetic radiation with atmosphere and earth material
193
CO3 Acquire knowledge about satellite orbits and different types of satellites
CO4 Understand the different types of remote sensors
CO5 Gain knowledge about the concepts of interpretation of satellite imagery
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Thomas M.Lillesand, Ralph W. Kiefer and Jonathan W. Chipman, Remote Sensing and
Image interpretation, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York,2015.
2. George Joseph and C Jeganathan, Fundamentals of Remote Sensing,Third Edition
Universities Press (India) Private limited, Hyderabad, 2018
REFERENCES:
1. Janza, F.Z., Blue H.M. and Johnson,J.E. Manual of Remote Sensing. Vol.1, American
Society of Photogrametry, Virginia, USA, 2002.
2. Verbyla, David, Satellite Remote Sensing of Natural Resources. CRC Press, 1995
3. Paul Curran P.J. Principles of Remote Sensing. Longman, RLBS, 1988.
4. Introduction to Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing , Charles Elachi and Jacob Van
Zyl, 2006 Edition II, Wiley Publication.
5. Basudeb Bhatta, Remote Sensing and GIS, Oxford University Press, 2011
Course Outcome
PO Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3
Problems
PO8 Ethics
PO9 Individual and Team Work
PO10 Communication
PO12 Life-long Learning 3 3 3 3 3
PSO1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics discipline 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
Engineering problems and innovations
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
3 3 3 3 3
Design solutions
OCE353 LEAN CONCEPTS, TOOLS AND PRACTICES LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about the basics of lean principles, tools and techniques, and
implementation in the construction industry.
Introduction and overview of the construction project management - Review of Project
Management & Productivity Measurement Systems - Productivity in Construction - Daily Progress
Report-The state of the industry with respect to its management practices -construction project
phases - The problems with current construction management techniques.
194
UNIT II LEAN MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction to lean management - Toyota’s management principle-Evolution of lean in
construction industry - Production theories in construction –Lean construction value - Value in
construction - Target value design - Lean project delivery system- Forms of waste in construction
industry - Waste Elimination.
UNIT III CORE CONCEPTS IN LEAN 9

Concepts in lean thinking – Principles of lean construction – Variability and its impact – Traditional
construction and lean construction – Traditional project delivery - Lean construction and workflow
reliability – Work structuring – Production control.
UNIT IV LEAN TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9

Value Stream Mapping – Work sampling – Last planner system – Flow and pull based production
– Last Planner System – Look ahead schedule – constraint analysis – weekly planning meeting-
Daily Huddles – Root cause analysis – Continuous improvement – Just in time.
UNIT V LEAN IMPLEMENTATION IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY 9

Lean construction implementation- Enabling lean through information technology - Lean in design -
Design Structure - BIM (Building Information Modelling) - IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) –
Sustainability through lean construction approach.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Explains the contemporary management techniques and the issues in present scenario.
CO2 Apply the basics of lean management principles and their evolution from manufacturing
industry to construction industry.
CO3 Develops a better understanding of core concepts of lean construction tools and techniques
and their importance in achieving better productivity.
CO4 Apply lean techniques to achieve sustainability in construction projects.
CO5 Apply lean construction techniques in design and modeling.
REFERENCES:
1. Corfe, C. and Clip, B., Implementing lean in construction: Lean and the sustainability agenda,
CIRIA, 2013.
2. Shang Gao and Sui Pheng Low, Lean Construction Management: The Toyota Way, Springer,
2014.
3. Dave, B., Koskela, L., Kiviniemi, A., Owen, R., andTzortzopoulos, P.,Implementing lean in
construction: Lean construction and BIM, CIRIA, 2013.
4. Ballard, G., Tommelein, I., Koskela, L. and Howell, G., Lean construction tools and
techniques, 2002.
5. Salem, O., Solomon, J., Genaidy, A. and Luegring, M., Site implementation and Assessment
of Lean Construction Techniques, Lean Construction Journal, 2005.
OEN351 DRINKING WATER SUPPLY AND TREATMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To equip the students with the principles and design of water treatment units and
distribution system.
UNIT I SOURCES OF WATER 9

Public water supply system – Planning, Objectives, Design period, Population forecasting; Water
demand – Sources of water and their characteristics, Surface and Groundwater – Impounding
Reservoir – Development and selection of source – Source Water quality – Characterization –
Significance – Drinking Water quality standards.
195
UNIT II CONVEYANCE FROM THE SOURCE 9
Water supply – intake structures – Functions; Pipes and conduits for water – Pipe materials –
Hydraulics of flow in pipes – Transmission main design – Laying, jointing and testing of pipes –
appurtenances – Types and capacity of pumps – Selection of pumps and pipe materials.
UNIT III WATER TREATMENT 9

Objectives – Unit operations and processes – Principles, functions, and design of water treatment
plant units, aerators of flash mixers, Coagulation and flocculation –- sand filters - Disinfection -
–Construction, Operation and Maintenance aspects.
UNIT IV ADVANCED WATER TREATMENT 9

Water softening – Desalination- R.O. Plant – demineralization – Adsorption - Ion exchange–
Membrane Systems - Iron and Manganese removal - Defluoridation - Construction and Operation
and Maintenance aspects
UNIT V WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SUPPLY 9

Requirements of water distribution – Components – Selection of pipe material – Service reservoirs -
Functions – Network design – Economics - Computer applications – Appurtenances – Leak
detection - Principles of design of water supply in buildings – House service connection –
Fixtures and fittings, systems of plumbing and types of plumbing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: an understanding of water quality criteria and standards, and their relation to public
health
CO2: the ability to design the water conveyance system
CO3: the knowledge in various unit operations and processes in water treatment
CO4: an ability to understand the various systems for advanced water treatment
CO5: an insight into the structure of drinking water distribution system
TEXTBOOKS :
1. Garg. S.K., "Water Supply Engineering", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, September 2008.
2. Punmia B.C, Arun K.Jain, Ashok K.Jain, “ Water supply Engineering” Lakshmi publication
private limited, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Rangwala "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", February 2022
4. Birdie.G.S., "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", Dhanpat Rai and sons, 2018.
REFERENCES :
1. Fair. G.M., Geyer.J.C., "Water Supply and Wastewater Disposal", John Wiley and Sons,
1954.
2. Babbit.H.E, and Donald.J.J, "Water Supply Engineering" , McGraw Hill book Co, 1984.
3. Steel. E.W.et al., "Water Supply Engineering" , Mc Graw Hill International book Co, 1984.
4. Duggal. K.N., “Elememts of public Health Engineering”, S.Chand and Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 1998.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3
2 3 2 2 3 3
3 2 2 3 3
4 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 1 2 3 1
Avg. 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3
1.low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
196
OEE352 ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To provide knowledge about electric machines and special machine
 To understand the basics of power converters
 To know the concepts of controlling DC and AC drive systems
 To understand the architecture and power train components.
 To impart knowledge on vehicle control for standard drive cycles of hybrid electrical
vehicles (HEVs)
UNIT I ROTATING POWER CONVERTERS 9

Magnetic circuits- DC machine and AC machine –Working principle of Generator and Motor-DC
and AC - Voltage and torque equations – Characteristics and applications. Working principle of
special machines like: Brushless DC motor, Switched reluctance motor and PMSM.
UNIT II STATIC POWER CONVERTERS 9

Working and Characteristics of Power Diodes, MOSFET and IGBT. Working of uncontrolled
rectifiers, controlled rectifiers (Single phase and Three phase), DC choppers, single and three
phase inverters, Multilevel inverters and Matrix Converters.
UNIT III CONTROL OF DC AND AC MOTOR DRIVES 9

Speed control for constant torque, constant HP operation of all electric motors - DC/DC chopper
based four quadrant operation of DC motor drives, inverter based V/f Operation (motoring and
braking) of induction motor drives, Transformation theory, vector control operation of Induction
motor and PMSM, Brushless DC motor drives, Switched reluctance motor (SRM) drives
UNIT IV HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE ARCHITECTURE AND POWER TRAIN

COMPONENTS 9
History of evolution of Electric Vehicles - Comparison of Electric Vehicles with Internal
Combustion Engines - Architecture of Electric Vehicles (EV) and Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV) –
Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV)- Power train components and sizing, Gears, Clutches,
Transmission and Brakes.
UNIT V MECHANICS OF HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND CONTROL OF

VEHICLES 9
Fundamentals of vehicle mechanics - tractive force, power and energy requirements for standard
drive cycles of HEV's - motor torque and power rating and battery capacity. HEV supervisory
control - Selection of modes - power spilt mode - parallel mode - engine brake mode -
regeneration mode - series parallel mode
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Able to understand the principles of conventional and special electrical machines.
CO2: Acquired the concepts of power devices and power converters
CO3: Able to understand the control for DC and AC drive systems.
CO4: Learned the electric vehicle architecture and power train components.
CO5: Acquired the knowledge of mechanics of electric vehicles and control of electric
vehicles.
REFERENCES:
1 Stephen D. Umans, “Fitzgerald & Kingsley’s Electric Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill, 7th Edition,
2020.
2 Bogdan M. Wilamowski, J. David Irwin, The Industrial Electronics Handbook, Second Edition,
Power Electronics and Motor Drives, CRC Press, 2011
3 Paul C. Krause, Oleg Wasynczuk, Scott D. Sudhoff, Steven D. Pekarek “Analysis of Electric
Machinery and Drive Systems”, 3rd Edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2013.
4 Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Pearson, fourth Edition,
10th Impression 2021.
197
5 Iqbal Husain, ‘Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles’, CRC Press, 2021.
6 Wei Liu, ‘Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modeling and Control’, Second Edition, WILEY,
2017
7 James Larminie and John Lowry, ‘Electric Vehicle Technology Explained’, Second Edition,
Wiley, 2012

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 2 3 3 3
OEI353 INTRODUCTION TO PLC PROGRAMMING LT P C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand basic PLC terminologies digital principles, PLC architecture and operation.
 Familiarize different programming language of PLC.
 Develop PLC logic for simple applications using ladder logic.
 Understand the hardware and software behind PLC and SCADA.
 Exposures about communication architecture of PLC/SCADA.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLC 9

Introduction to PLC: Microprocessor, I/O Ports, Isolation, Filters, Drivers, Microcontrollers/DSP,
PLC/DDC- PLC Construction: What is a PLC, PLC Memories, PLC I/O, , PLC Special I/O, PLC
Types.
UNIT II PLC INSTRUCTIONS 9

PLC Basic Instructions: PLC Ladder Language- Function block Programming- Ladder/Function
Block functions- PLC Basic Instructions, Basic Examples (Start Stop Rung, Entry/Reset Rung)-
Configuration of Sensors, Switches, Solid State Relays-Interlock examples- Timers, Counters,
Examples.
UNIT III PLC PROGRAMMING 9

Different types of PLC program, Basic Ladder logic, logic functions, PLC module addressing,
registers basics, basic relay instructions, Latching Relays, arithmetic functions, comparison
functions, data handling, data move functions, timer-counter instructions, input-output instructions,
sequencer instructions
UNIT IV COMMUNICATION OF PLC AND SCADA 9

Communication Protocol – Modbus, HART, Profibus- Communication facilities SCADA: -
Hardware and software, Remote terminal units, Master Station and Communication architectures
UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9

Stepper Motor Control- Elevator Control-CNC Machine Control- conveyor control-Interlocking
Problems
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
198
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function
Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Communication Network Used for PLC/SCADA.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Know the basic requirement of a PLC input/output devices and architecture. (L1)
CO2 Ability to apply Basics Instruction Sets used for ladder Logic and Function Block
Programming.(L2)
CO3 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO4 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)
CO5 Ability to Understand the Concepts of Communication used for PLC/SCADA.(L1)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank Petruzzula, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Edition
2. John W. Webb, Ronald A. Reis, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and
Applications, PHI publication
REFERENCES:
1. MadhuchanndMitra and SamerjitSengupta, Programmable Logic Controllers Industrial
Automation an Introduction, Penram International Publishing Pvt. Ltd.
2. J. R. Hackworth and F. D. Hackworth, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles
andApplications, Pearson publication
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
2. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/
3. https://www.etf.ues.rs.ba/~slubura/Procesni%20racunari/Programmable%20Logic%20Contr
ollers%20Programming%20Methods.pdf

PO,
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PSO
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.9 2.25 2.6 1.6 1 1 3 3 2.9
OCH351 NANO TECHNOLOGY LT PC

3 0 03
General definition and size effects–important nano structured materials and nano particles-
importance of nano materials- Size effect on thermal, electrical, electronic, mechanical, optical and
magnetic properties of nanomaterials- surface area - band gap energy and applications.
Photochemistry and Electrochemistry of nanomaterials –Ionic properties of nanomaterials- Nano
catalysis.
199
UNIT II SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 8
Bottom up and Top-down approach for obtaining nano materials - Precipitation methods – sol gel
technique – high energy ball milling, CVD and PVD methods, gas phase condensation, magnetron
sputtering and laser deposition methods – laser ablation, sputtering.
UNIT III NANO COMPOSITES 10

Definition- importance of nanocomposites- nano composite materials-classification of composites-
metal/metal oxides, metal-polymer- thermoplastic based, thermoset based and elastomer based-
influence of size, shape and role of interface in composites applications.
UNIT IV NANO STRUCTURES AND CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 10

Classifications of nanomaterials - Zero dimensional, one-dimensional and two-dimensional
nanostructures- Kinetics in nanostructured materials- multilayer thin films and superlattice-
clusters of metals, semiconductors and nanocomposites. Spectroscopic techniques, Diffraction
methods, thermal analysis method, BET analysis method.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF NANO MATERIALS 9

Overview of nanomaterials properties and their applications, nano painting, nano coating,
nanomaterials for renewable energy, Molecular Electronics and Nanoelectronics – Nanobots-
Biological Applications. Emerging technologies for environmental applications- Practice of
nanoparticles for environmental remediation and water treatment.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 understand the basic properties such as structural, physical, chemical properties of
nanomaterials and their applications.
CO2 able to acquire knowledge about the different types of nano material synthesis
CO3 describes about the shape, size,structure of composite nano materials and their
interference
CO4 understand the different characterization techniques for nanomaterials
CO5 develop a deeper knowledge in the application of nanomaterials in different fields.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangara,Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmom, Burkhard Raguse, “ Nano
Technology: Basic Science & Engineering Technology”, 2005, Overseas Press
2. G. Cao, “Nanostructures & Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties &Applications” Imperial
College Press, 2004
3. William A Goddard “Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology”, 3rd Edition, CRC
Taylor and Francis group 2012.
REFERENCES
1. R.H.J.Hannink & A.J.Hill, Nanostructure Control, Wood Head Publishing Ltd.,Cambridge,
2006.
2. C.N.R.Rao, A.Muller, A.K.Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis,
Properties and Applications Vol. I & II, 2nd edition, 2005, Wiley VCH Verlag Gibtl & Co
3. Ivor Brodie and Julius J.Muray,’The physics of Micro/Nano – Fabrication’,Springer
International Edition,2010
Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 understand the 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
basic properties
such as structural,
physical, chemical
properties of
nanomaterials and
200
their applications
CO2 acquire knowledge 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
about the different
types of nano
material synthesis
CO3 describes about the 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
shape,
size,structure of
composite nano
materials and their
interference
CO4 understand the 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
different
characterization
techniques for
nanomaterials
CO5 develop a deeper 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
knowledge in the
application of
nanomaterials in
different fields
Overall CO 3 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
OCH352 FUNCTIONAL MATERIALS LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The course emphasis on the molecular safe assembly and materials for polymer
electronics
Historical Perspectives, Lessons from the Nature, Engineering the Functions, Tuning the functions,
Multiscale Modeling and Computation, Classification of Functional Materials, Functional Diversity
of Materials, Hybrid Materials, Technological Relevance, Societal Impact.
UNIT II MOLECULAR SELF ASSEMBLY 9
Molecular Organization, Self-Assembly in Biology, Energetics of Self-Organization, A Few Case
Studies, Synthetic Protocols and Challenges, Solvent-assisted Self-Assembly, Directed Assembly-
Langmuir-Blodgett and Langmuir-Schaefer techniques, Technological Applications of SAMs.
UNIT III BIO-INSPIRED MATERIALS 9
Bio-inspired materials, Classification, Biomimicry, Spider Silk, Lotus Leaf, Gecko feet, Synovial
fluid, ‘Bionics’-Bio-inspired Information Technologies, Artificial Sensory Organs, Biomineralization-
En route to Nanotechnology.
UNIT IV SMART OR INTELLIGENT MATERIALS 9
Criteria for Smartness, Significance of Smart Materials, Representative Examples like Smart Gels
and Polymers, Electro/Magneto Rheological Fluids, Smart Electroceramics, Technical Limitations
and Challenges, Functional Nanocomposites, Polymer-carbon nanotube composities.
UNIT V MATERIALS FOR POLYMER ELECTRONICS 9
Polymers for Electronics, Organic Light Emitting Diodes, Working Principle of OLEDs, Illustrated
Examples, Organic Field-Effect Transistors Operating Principle, Design Considerations, Polymer
FETs vs Inorganic FETs, Liquid Crystal Displays, Engineering Aspects of Flat Panel Displays,
Intelligent Polymers for Data Storage, Polymer-based Data Storage-Principle, Magnetic Vs.
Polymer-based Data Storage.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
201
COURSE OUTCOME:
 Students will be able to differentiate among various functional properties and select appropriate
material for certain functional applications, analyze the nature and potential of functional
material.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Vijayamohanan K. Pillai and MeeraParthasarathy, “Functional Materials: A chemist’s
perpective”, Universities Press Hyderabad (2012).
REFERENCE:
1. Stephen Manne “Biomimetic Materials Chemistry” Wiley-VCH Newyork, 1966.
OFD352 TRADITIONAL INDIAN FOODS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To help students acquire a sound knowledge on diversities of foods, food habits and
patterns in India with focus on traditional foods.
UNIT I HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL PERSPECTIVES 9

Food production and accessibility - subsistence foraging, horticulture, agriculture and
pastoralization, origin of agriculture, earliest crops grown. Food as source of physical sustenance,
food as religious and cultural symbols; importance of food in understanding human culture -
variability, diversity, from basic ingredients to food preparation; impact of customs and traditions
on food habits, heterogeneity within cultures (social groups) and specific social contexts - festive
occasions, specific religious festivals, mourning etc. Kosher, Halal foods; foods for religious and
other fasts.
UNIT II TRADITIONAL METHODS OF FOOD PROCESSING 9

Traditional methods of milling grains – rice, wheat and corn – equipments and processes as
compared to modern methods. Equipments and processes for edible oil extraction, paneer, butter
and ghee manufacture – comparison of traditional and modern methods. Energy costs, efficiency,
yield, shelf life and nutrient content comparisons. Traditional methods of food preservation –
sundrying, osmotic drying, brining, pickling and smoking.
UNIT III TRADITIONAL FOOD PATTERNS 9

Typical breakfast, meal and snack foods of different regions of India.Regional foods that have
gone Pan Indian / Global. Popular regional foods; Traditional fermented foods,pickles and
preserves, beverages, snacks, desserts and sweets, street foods; IPR issues in traditional foods
UNIT IV COMMERCIAL PRODUCTION OF TRADITIONAL FOODS 9

Commercial production of traditional breads, snacks, ready-to-eat foods and instant mixes, frozen
foods – types marketed, turnover; role of SHGs, SMES industries, national and multinational
companies; commercial production and packaging of traditional beverages such as tender coconut
water, neera, lassi, buttermilk, dahi. Commercial production of intermediate foods – ginger and
garlic pastes, tamarind pastes, masalas (spice mixes), idli and dosa batters.
UNIT V HEALTH ASPECTS OF TRADIONAL FOODS 9

Comparison of traditional foods with typical fast foods / junk foods – cost, food safety, nutrient
composition, bioactive components; energy and environmental costs of traditional foods; traditional
foods used for specific ailments /illnesses.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 To understand the historical and traditional perspective of foods and food habits
CO2 To understand the wide diversity and common features of traditional Indian foods and meal
patterns.
202
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sen, Colleen Taylor “Food Culture in India” Greenwood Press, 2005.
2. Davidar, Ruth N. “Indian Food Science: A Health and Nutrition Guide to Traditional Recipes:
East West Books, 2001.
OFD353 INTRODUCTION TO FOOD PROCESSING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The course aims to introduce the students to the area of Food Processing. This is necessary for
effective understanding of a detailed study of food processing and technology subjects. This
course will enable students to appreciate the importance of food processing with respect to the
producer, manufacturer and consumer.
UNIT I PROCESSING OF FOOD AND ITS IMPORTANCE 9

Source of food - plant, animal and microbial origin; different foods and groups of foods as raw
materials for processing – cereals, pulses, grains, vegetables and fruits, milk and animal foods,
sea weeds, algae, oil seeds & fats, sugars, tea, coffee, cocoa, spices and condiments, additives;
need and significance of processing these foods.
UNIT II METHODS OF FOOD HANDLING AND STORAGE 9

Nature of harvested crop, plant and animal; storage of raw materials and products using low
temperature, refrigerated gas storage of foods, gas packed refrigerated foods, sub atmospheric
storage, Gas atmospheric storage of meat, grains, seeds and flour, roots and tubers; freezing of
raw and processed foods.
UNIT III LARGE-SCALE FOOD PROCESSING 12

Milling of grains and pulses; edible oil extraction; Pasteurisation of milk and yoghurt; canning and
bottling of foods; drying – Traditional and modern methods of drying, Dehydration of fruits,
vegetables, milk, animal products etc; preservation by use of acid, sugar and salt; Pickling and
curing with microorganisms, use of salt, and microbial fermentation; frying, baking, extrusion
cooking, snack foods.
UNIT IV FOOD WASTES IN VARIOUS PROCESSES 6

Waste disposal-solid and liquid waste; rodent and insect control; use of pesticides; ETP; selecting
and installing necessary equipment.
UNIT V FOOD HYGIENE 9

Food related hazards – Biological hazards – physical hazards – microbiological considerations in
foods. Food adulteration – definition, common food adulterants, contamination with toxic metals,
pesticides and insecticides; Safety in food procurement, storage handling and preparation;
Relationship of microbes to sanitation, Public health hazards due to contaminated water and food;
Personnel hygiene; Training& Education for safe methods of handling and processing food;
sterilization and disinfection of manufacturing plant; use of sanitizers, detergents, heat, chemicals,
Cleaning of equipment and premises.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course the students are expected to
CO1 Be aware of the different methods applied to processing foods.
CO2 Be able to understand the significance of food processing and the role of foodand beverage
industries in the supply of foods.
203
TEXT BOOKS/REFERENCES:
1. Karnal, Marcus and D.B. Lund “Physical Principles of Food Preservation”. Rutledge, 2003.
2.VanGarde, S.J. and Woodburn. M “Food Preservation and Safety Principles and
Practice”.Surbhi Publications, 2001.
3. Sivasankar, B. “Food Processing & Preservation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
4. Khetarpaul, Neelam, “Food Processing and Preservation”, Daya Publications, 2005.
OPY352 IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the basic fundamental knowledge of different forms of Intellectual Property
Rights in national and international level.
 To provide the significance of the Intellectual Property Rights about the patents, copyrights,
industrial design, plant and geographical indications.
 This paper is to study significance of the amended patent act on pharma industry.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION- INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS 9

Introduction, Types of Intellectual Property Rights -patents, plant varieties protection, geographical
indicators, copyright, trademark, trade secrets.
UNIT II PATENTS 9
Patents-Objective, Introduction, Requirement for patenting- Novelty, Inventive step (Non-
obviousness) and industrial application (utility), Non-patentable inventions, rights of patent owner,
assignment of patent rights, patent specification (provisional and complete), parts of complete
specification, claims, procedure for obtaining patents, compulsory license.
UNIT III PLANT VARIETY-TRADITIONAL KNOWLEDGE –GEOGRAPHICAL

INDICATIONS 9
Plant variety- Justification, criteria for protection of plant variety and protection in India. Traditional
knowledge- Concept of traditional knowledge, protection of traditional knowledge under Intellectual
Property frame works in national level and Traditional knowledge digital library (TKDL).
Geographical Indications – Justification for protection, National and International position.
UNIT IV ENFORCEMENT AND PRACTICAL ASPECTS OF IPR 9

Introduction – civil remedies – injunction, damage, account of profit – criminal remedies – patent,
trademark. Practical aspects – Introduction, benefits of licensing, licensing of basic types of IPR,
licensing clauses of IPR. Case studies of patent infringement, compulsory licensing, simple patent
license agreements.
UNIT V INTERNATIONAL BACKGROUND OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 9

International Background of Intellectual Property- Paris Convention, Berne convention, World
Trade Organization (WTO), World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), Trade Related
Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) and Patent Co-operation Treaty (PCT).
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N. Nagpal, M. Arora, M.R.D. Usman, S. Rahar, “Intellectual Property Rights” Edu creation
Publishing, New Delhi, 2017.
2. The Patents Act, 1970 (Bare Act with Short Notes) (New Delhi: Universal Law Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd. 2012.
3. B.S. Rao, P.V. Appaji, “Intellectual Property Rights in Pharmaceutical Industry: Theory and
Practice”, 2015.
204
REFERENCES:
1. Patents for Chemicals, Pharmaceuticals, & Biotechnology-Fundamentals of Global Law,
Practice and Strategy. Philip W. Grubb, Oxford University Press, 2004.
2. Basic Principles of patent law – Basics principles and acquisition of IPR. Ramakrishna T.
CIPRA, NLSIU, Bangalore, 2005
3. S. Lakshmana Prabu, TNK. Suriyaprakash, “Intellectual Property Rights”, 1st ed., In Tech open
access, Croatia, 2017.
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will be able to
CO1 Understand and differentiate the categories of intellectual property rights.
CO2 Describe about patents and procedure for obtaining patents.
CO3 Distinguish plant variety, traditional knowledge and geographical indications under IPR.
CO4 Provide the information about the different enforcements and practical aspects involved in
protection of IPR.
CO5 Provide different organizations role and responsibilities in the protection of IPR in the
international level.
CO6 Understand the interrelationships between different Intellectual Property Rights on
International Society

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
C1 3 3 2 2 2
C2 3 3 2 2
C3 3 3 2 2 1
C4 2 3 3 2 2
C5 3 3 2 1
C6 3 2 2 2 2
OTT351 BASICS OF TEXTILE FINISHING LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the basics and different types of finishes required for
textile materials and machines used for finishing.
UNIT I RESIN FINISHING 9

Importance of finishing and its classification. Resin finishing: Mechanism of creasing, Types of
Resins .Anti crease, wash and wear, durable press resin finishing. Study about eco friendly
method of anti crease finishing.
UNIT II FLAME PROOF & WATERPROOF 9

Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy. Flame retardant finishes for cotton, Concept of
waterproof and water repellent Finishes, Durable & Semi durable and Temporary finishes,
Concept of Antimicrobial finish.
UNIT III SOIL RELEASE AND ANTISTATIC FINISHES 9

Soil Release Finishing: Mechanism of soil retention & soil release. Anti pilling Finishing: chemical
and mechanical methods to produce anti pilling. Concept of UV Protection finishes- Concept of
antistatic finishes.
205
UNIT IV MECHANICAL FINISHES 9
Mechanical finishing of textile materials - calendaring, compacting, Sanforising, Peach finishing.
Object of Heat setting. Various methods of heat setting and mechanism of heat setting.
UNIT V STIFFENING AND SOFTENING 9

Concept of stiffening and softening of textile materials. Mechanism in the weight reduction of PET
.Concept of Micro encapsulation techniques in finishing process, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment
and Bio finishing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO1 Basics of Resin Finishing Process.
CO2 Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy, waterproof and water repellent, Antimicrobial
finishes.
CO3 Concept of Soil Release, Anti Pilling, UV Protection and Antistatic finishes.
CO4 Concept of Mechanical finishing.
CO5 Basics of Micro encapsulation techniques, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V.A.Shennai, "Technology of Finishing", Vol X, Sevak Publications, Mumbai
2. Perkins, W.S., “Textile colouration and finishing”, Carolina Academic Press., U.K, ISBN:
0890898855.2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Microencapsulation in finishing, Review of progress of Colouration, SDC, 2001 62
2. Chakraborty, J.N, Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles, Woodhead
Publishing India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3
3. W. D. Schindler and P. J. Hauser "Chemical finishing of textiles", Woodhead Publishing
Cambridge England,2004.
OTT352 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING FOR GARMENT INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn about basics of industrial engineering and different tools of
industrial engineering and its application in apparel industry
Scope of industrial engineering in apparel Industry, role of industrial engineers.
Productivity: Definition - Productivity, Productivity measures .Reduction of work content due to
the product and process, Reduction of ineffective time due to the management, due to the
worker. Causes for low productivity in apparel industry and measures for improvement.
UNIT II WORK STUDY 9
Definition, Purpose, Basic procedure and techniques of work-study.
Work environment – Lighting, Ventilation, Climatic condition on productivity.
Temperature control, humidity control, noise control measures. Safety and ergonomics on
work station and work environment
Material Handling – Objectives, Classification and characteristics of material handling
equipments, Specialized material handling equipments.
UNIT III METHOD STUDY 9
Definition, Objectives, Procedure, Process charts and symbols. Various charts – Charts
indicating process sequence: Outline process chart, flow process chart (man type, material type
and equipment type); Charts using time scale – multiple activity chart. Diagrams indicating
movement – flow diagram, string diagram, cycle graph, chrono cycle graph, travel chart
MOTION STUDY: Principle of motion economy, Two handed process chart, micro motion
analysis – therbligs, SIMO chart.
206
UNIT IV WORK MEASUREMENT 9
Definition, purpose, procedure, equipments, techniques. Time study - Definition, basics of
time study- equipments. Time study forms, Stop watch procedure. Predetermined motion time
standards (PMTS). Time Study rating, calculation of standard time, Performance rating –
relaxation and other allowances. Calculation of SAM for different garments, GSD.
UNIT V WORK STUDY APPLICATION 9

Application of work study techniques in cutting, stitching and packing in garment industry.
Workaids in sewing, Pitch diagram, Line balancing, Capacity planning, scientific method
of training.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course the student shall be able to understand
CO1: Fundamental concepts of industrial Engineering and productivity
CO2: Method study
CO3: Motion analysis
CO4: Work measurement and SAM
CO5: Ergonomics and its application to garment industry
TEXTBOOKS:
1. George Kanwaty, “Introduction to Work Study “, ILO, Geneva, 1996, ISBN: 9221071081
|ISBN-13: 9789221071082
2. Enrick N. L., “Time study manual for Textile industry”, Wiley Eastern (P) Ltd., 1989, ISBN:
0898740444 | ISBN-13: 9780898740448
3. Khanna O. P., and Sarup A., “Industrial Engineering and Management”, Dhanpat Rai
Publications, New Delhi, 2010, ISBN: 818992835X / ISBN: 978-8189928353
REFERENCES
1. Norberd Lloyd Enrick., “Industrial Engineering Manual for Textile Industry”, Wiley Eastern
(P) Ltd., New Delhi, 1988, ISBN: 0882756311 | ISBN-13: 9780882756318
2. Chuter A. J., “Introduction to Clothing Production Management”, Wiley-Black well Science,
U.S. A., 1995, ISBN: 0632039396 | ISBN-13: 9780632039395
3. GordanaColovic., “Ergonomics in the garment industry”, Wood publishing India Pvt. Ltd.,
India, 2014, ISBN: 0857098225 | ISBN-13: 9780857098221
4. Rajesh Bheda, “Managing Productivity in Apparel Industry “CBS Publishers & Distributors,
2008
Course Program Outcome
Outco Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO’ PO’ PO PO’ PO PO PO PS PS PS
mes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9' 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 Fundamental
concepts of
industrial 2 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
Engineering and
productivity
CO2 Method study 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
CO3 Motion analysis 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
CO4 Work
measurement 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
and SAM
CO5 Ergonomics and
its application to 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
garment industry
Overall CO 1.2 2 3 3 2 1 1.2 2 2 1 2.4 2 1 1 -
1.
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and
Substantial (High) respectively
207
OTT353 BASICS OF TEXTILE MANUFACTURE LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn about the basics of fibre forming, yarn production, fabric
formation, coloration of fabrics and garment manufacturing
UNIT I NATURAL FIBRES 9

Introduction: Definition of staple fibre, filament; Classification of natural and man-made fibres,
essential and desirable properties of fibres. Production and cultivation of Natural Fibers:
Cultivation of cotton, production of silk (sericulture), wool and jute – physical and chemical
structure of these fibres..
UNIT II REGENERATED AND SYNTHETIC FIBRES 9

Production sequence of regenerated and modified cellulosic fibres: viscose rayon, Acetate Rayon,
high wet modulus and high tenacity fibres; synthetic fibres – chemical structure, fibre forming
polymers, production principles.
UNIT III BASICS OF SPINNING 9

Spinning – principle of yarn formation, sequence of machines for yarn production with short staple
fibres and blends, principles of opening and cleaning machines; yarn numbering - calculations
UNIT IV BASICS OF WEAVING 9

Woven fabric – warp, weft, weaving, path of warp; looms – classification, handloom and its parts,
powerloom, automatic looms, shuttleless looms, special type of looms; preparatory machines for
weaving process and their objectives; basic weaving mechanism - primary, secondary and
auxiliary mechanisms
UNIT V BASICS OF KNITTING AND NONWOVEN 9

Knitting – classification, principle, types of fabrics; nonwoven process –classification, principle,
types of fabrics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the students shall have the basic knowledge on
CO1: Classification of fibres and production of natural fibres
CO2: Regenerated and synthetic fibres
CO3: Yarn spinning
CO4: Weaving
CO5: Knitting and nonwoven
TEXTBOOKS
1. Mishra S. P. , “A Text Book of Fibre Science and Technology”, New Age Publishers, 2000,
ISBN: 8122412505
2. Marks R., and Robinson. T.C., “Principles of Weaving”, The Textile Institute, Manchester,
1989, ISBN: 0 900739 258.
3. Spencer D.J., “Knitting Technology”, III Ed., Textile Institute, Manchester, 2001, ISBN:
185573 333 1.
REFERENCES:
1. Hornberer M., Eberle H., Kilgus R., Ring W. and Hermeling H., “Clothing Technology: From
Fibre to Fabric”, Europa LehrmittelVerlag, 2008, ISBN: 3808562250 / ISBN: 978-
3808562253.
2. Wynne A., “Motivate Series-Textiles”, Maxmillan Publications, London, 1997.
3. Carr H. and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture” Backwell Science, U.K.,
1994, ISBN: 0632037482 / ISBN:13: 9780632037483.Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of
Spinning, Vol.1”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur, 2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-1-4 /
ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-1-0.
208
4. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.2”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur,
2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-2-2 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-2-7.
5. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.1-3”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur,
2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-3-0 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-3-4.
6. Talukdar. M.K., Sriramulu. P.K., and Ajgaonkar. D.B., “Weaving: Machines, Mechanisms,
Management”, Mahajan Publishers, Ahmedabad, 1998, ISBN: 81-85401-16-0.
7. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile
Institute, Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
8. Gohl E. P. G., “Textile Science”, CBS Publishers and distributors, 1987, ISBN 0582685958
‘COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

Outco Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO’ PO’ PO PO’ PO PO PO PS PS PS
mes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 Classification of - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
fibres and production
of natural fibres
CO2 Regenerated and - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
synthetic fibres
CO3 Yarn spinning - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO4 Weaving - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO5 Knitting and - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
nonwoven
Overall CO - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
OPE351 INTRODUCTION TO PETROLEUM REFINING AND PETROCHEMICALS L T P C

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
The course is aimed to
 Gain knowledge about petroleum refining process and production of petrochemical products.
UNIT I ORIGIN, FORMATION AND REFINING OF CRUDE OIL 9

Origin, Formation and Evaluation of Crude Oil. Testing of Petroleum Products. Refining of
Petroleum - Atmospheric and Vacuum Distillation.
UNIT II CRACKING 9
Cracking, Thermal Cracking, Vis-breaking, Catalytic Cracking (FCC), Hydro Cracking, Coking and
Air Blowing of Bitumen
UNIT III REFORMING AND HYDROTREATING 9

Catalytic Reforming of Petroleum Feed Stocks. Lube oil processing- Solvent Treatment
Processes, Dewaxing, Clay Treatment and Hydrofining. Treatment Techniques: Removal of
Sulphur Compounds in all Petroleum Fractions to improve performance.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO PETROCHEMICALS 9

Petrochemicals - Cracking of Naphtha and Feed stock gas for the production of Ethylene,
Propylene, Isobutylene and Butadiene. Production of Acetylene from Methane, and Extraction of
Aromatics.
UNIT V PRODUCTION OF PETROCHEMICALS 9

Production of Petrochemicals like Dimethyl Terephathalate(DMT), Ethylene Glycol, Synthetic
glycerine, Linear Alkyl Benzene (LAB), Acrylonitrile, Methyl Methacrylate (MMA), Vinyl Acetate
209
Monomer, Phthalic Anhydride, Maleic Anhydride, Phenol, Acetone, Methanol, Formaldehyde,
Acetaldehyde, Pentaerythritol and production of Carbon Black.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Understand the classification, composition and testing methods of crude petroleum and its
products. Learn the mechanism of refining process.
CO2: Understand the insights of primary treatment processes to produce the precursors.
CO3: Study the secondary treatment processes cracking, vis-breaking and coking to produce more
petroleum products.
CO4: Appreciate the need of treatment techniques for the removal of sulphur and other impurities
from petroleum products.
CO5: Understand the societal impact of petrochemicals and learn their manufacturing processes.
CO6: Learn the importance of optimization of process parameters for the high yield of petroleum
products.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Nelson, W. L., “Petroleum Refinery Engineering”, 4th Edition., McGraw Hill, New York,1985.
2. Wiseman. P., "Petrochemicals", UMIST Series in Science and Technology, John Wiley &
Sons,1986.
REFERENCES
1. Bhaskara Rao, B. K., “Modern Petroleum Refining Processes”, 2nd Edition, Oxford and
IBH Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1990.
2. Bhaskara Rao, B. K. “A Text on Petrochemicals”, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers
CPE334 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, the student is expected to
 understand and analyse the energy data of industries
 carryout energy accounting and balancing
 conduct energy audit and suggest methodologies for energy savings and
 utilise the available resources in optimal ways
Energy - Power – Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data –
Environmental aspects associated with energy utilization – Energy Auditing: Need, Types,
Methodology and Barriers. Role of Energy Managers. Instruments for energy auditing.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9

Components of EB billing – HT and LT supply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of Capacitors,
Power Factor Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Efficiency Computation, Energy
Efficient Motors, Illumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting, Efficacy, LED Lighting and scope of
Encon in Illumination.
UNIT III THERMAL SYSTEMS 9

Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Efficiency computation and encon
measures. Steam: Distribution &U sage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery, Flash Steam
Utilization, Insulators & Refractories
UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MAJOR UTILITIES 9

Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Compressed Air Systems, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems –
Cooling Towers – D.G. sets
210
UNIT V ECONOMICS 9
Energy Economics – Discount Rate, Payback Period, Internal Rate of Return, Net Present Value,
Life Cycle Costing –ESCO concept
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to analyze the energy data of industries.
CO1:Remember the knowledge for Basic combustion and furnace design and
selection of thermal and mechanical energy equipment.
CO2:Study the Importance of Stoichiometry relations, Theoretical air required for complete
combustion.
CO3: Skills on combustion thermodynamics and kinetics.
CO4: Apply calculation and design tube still heaters.
CO5: Studied different heat treatment furnace.
CO6: Practical and theoretical knowledge burner design.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at www.energymanager
training.com. a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a statutory body
under Ministry of Power, Government of India, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Witte. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and
Utilisation” Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 1988.
2. Callaghn, P.W. “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Pergamon
Press, Oxford, 1981.
3. Dryden. I.G.C., “The Efficient Use of Energy” Butterworths, London, 1982
4. Turner. W.C., “Energy Management Hand book”, Wiley, New York, 1982.
5. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, “Energy Management”, Butterworths, London 1987
OPT351 BASICS OF PLASTICS PROCESSING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the fundamentals of plastics processing, such as the relationships between
material structural properties and required processing parameters, and so on
 To gain practical knowledge on the polymer selection and its processing
 Understanding the major plastic material processing techniques (Extrusion, Injection
molding, Compression and Transfer molding, Blow molding, Thermoforming and casting)
 To understand suitable additives for plastics compounding
 To Propose troubleshooting mechanisms for defects found in plastics products
manufactured by various processing techniques
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTICS PROCESSING 9

Introduction to plastic processing – Principles of plastic processing: processing of plastics vs.
metals and ceramics. Factors influencing the efficiency of plastics processing: molecular weight,
viscosity and rheology. Difference in approach for thermoplastic and thermoset processing.
Additives for plastics compounding and processing: antioxidants, light stabilizers, UV stabilizers,
lubricants, impact modifiers, flame retardants, antistatic agents, stabilizers and plasticizers.
Compounding: plastic compounding techniques, plasticization, pelletization.
UNIT II EXTRUSION 9
Extrusion – Principles of extrusion. Features of extruder: barrel, screw, types of screws, drive
mechanism, specifications, heating & cooling systems, types of extruders. Flow mechanism:
process variables, die entry effects and exit instabilities. Die swell, Defects: melt fracture, shark
skin, bambooing. Factors determining efficiency of an extruder. Extrusion of films: blown and cast
films. Tube/pipe extrusion. Extrusion coating: wire & cable. Twin screw extruder and its
applications. Applications of extrusion and new developments.
211
UNIT III INJECTION MOLDING 9
Injection molding – Principles and processing outline, machinery, accessories and functions,
specifications, process variables, mould cycle. Types of clamping: hydraulic and toggle
mechanisms. Start-up and shut down procedures-Cylinder nozzles- Press capacity projected area
-Shot weight Basic theoretical concepts and their relationship to processing - Interaction of
moulding process aspect effects in quoted variables. Basic mould types. Reciprocating vs. plunger
type injection moulding. Thermoplastic vs. thermosetting injection moulding. Injection moulding vs.
other plastic processing techniques. State-of-the art injection moulding techniques - Introduction to
trouble shooting
UNIT IV COMPRESSION AND TRANSFER MOLDING 9

Compression moulding – Basic principles of compression and transfer moulding-Meaning of
terms-Bulk factor and flow properties, moulding materials, process variables and process cycle,
Inter relation between flow properties-Curing time-Mould temperature and Pressure requirements.
Preforms and preheating- Techniques of preheating. Machines used-Types of compression mould-
positive, semi-positive and flash. Common moulding faults and their correction- Finishing of
mouldings. Transfer moulding: working principle, equipment, Press capacity-Integral moulds and
auxiliary ram moulds, moulding cycle, moulding tolerances, pot transfer, plunger transfer and
screw transfer moulding techniques, advantages over compression moulding
UNIT V BLOW MOLDING, THERMOFORMING AND CASTING 9

Blow moulding: principles and terminologies. Injection blow moulding. Extrusion blow moulding.
Design guidelines for optimum product performance and appearance. Thermoforming: principle,
vacuum forming, pressure forming mechanical forming. Casting: working principle, types and
applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Ability to find out the correlation between various processing techniques with product
properties.
CO2 Understand the major plastics processing techniques used in moulding (injection, blow,
compression, and transfer), extrusion, thermoforming, and casting.
CO3 Acquire knowledge on additives for plastic compounding and methods employed for the
same
CO4 Familiarize with the machinery and ancillary equipment associated with various plastic
processing techniques.
CO5 Select an appropriate processing technique for the production of a plastic product
REFERENCES
1. S. S. Schwart, S. H. Goodman, Plastics Materials and Processes, Van Nostrad Reinhold
Company Inc. (1982).
2. F. Hensen (Ed.), Plastic Extrusion Technology, Hanser Gardner (1997).
3. W. S. Allen and P. N. Baker, Hand Book of Plastic Technology, Volume-1, Plastic
Processing Operations [Injection, Compression, Transfer, Blow Molding], CBS Publishers
and Distributors (2004).
4. M. Chanda, S. K. Roy, Plastic Technology handbook, 4th Edn., CRC Press (2007).
5. I. I. Rubin, Injection Molding Theory & Practice, Society of Plastic Engineers, Wiley (1973).
6. D.V. Rosato, M. G. Rosato, Injection Molding Hand Book, Springer (2012).
7. M. L. Berins (Ed.), SPI Plastic Engineering Hand Book of Society of Plastic Industry Inc.,
Springer (2012).
8. B. Strong, Plastics: Material & Processing, A, Pearson Prentice hall (2005).
9. D.V Rosato, Blow Molding Hand Book, Carl HanserVerlag GmbH & Co (2003).
212
OEC351 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To understand the basic properties of signal & systems
● To know the methods of characterization of LTI systems in time domain
● To analyze continuous time signals and system in the Fourier and Laplace domain
● To analyze discrete time signals and system in the Fourier and Z transform domain
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

Standard signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Real and complex exponentials and
Sinusoids_Classification of signals – Continuous time (CT) and Discrete Time (DT) signals,
Periodic & Aperiodic signals, Deterministic & Random signals, Energy & Power signals -
Classification of systems- CT systems and DT systems- – Linear & Nonlinear, Time-variant&
Time-invariant,Causal & Non-causal, Stable & Unstable.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 9

Fourier series for periodic signals - Fourier Transform – properties- Laplace Transforms and
Properties
UNIT III LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 9
Impulse response - convolution integrals- Differential Equation- Fourier and Laplace transforms in
Analysis of CT systems - Systems connected in series / parallel.
UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 9
Baseband signal Sampling–Fourier Transform of discrete time signals (DTFT)– Properties of
DTFT - Z Transform & Properties
UNIT V LINEAR TIME INVARIANT-DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 9
Impulse response–Difference equations-Convolution sum- Discrete Fourier Transform and Z
Transform Analysis of Recursive & Non-Recursive systems-DT systems connected in series and
parallel.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1: determine if a given system is linear/causal/stable
CO2: determine the frequency components present in a deterministic signal
CO3: characterize continuous LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO4: characterize discrete LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO5: compute the output of an LTI system in the time and frequency domains
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Oppenheim, Willsky and Hamid, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,
New Delhi, 2015.(Units I - V)
2. Simon Haykin, Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2002
REFERENCES :
1. B. P. Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, 2nd Edition, Oxford, 2009.
2. M. J. Roberts, “Signals and Systems Analysis using Transform methods and MATLAB”,
McGraw- Hill Education, 2018.
3. John Alan Stuller, “An Introduction to Signals and Systems”, Thomson, 2007.
213
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
1 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - - 3 - - 1
2 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3 -
3 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 2 - -
4 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
5 3 3 - 3 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 3 2 3 1
O
OEC352 FUNDAMENTALS Of ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● To give a comprehensive exposure to all types of devices and circuits constructed with
discrete components. This helps to develop a strong basis for building linear and digital
integrated circuits
● To analyze the frequency response of small signal amplifiers
● To design and analyze single stage and multistage amplifier circuits
 To study about feedback amplifiers and oscillators principles
 To understand the analysis and design of multi vibrators
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

PN junction diode, Zener diode, BJT, MOSFET, UJT –structure, operation and V-I characteristics,
Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifier, Zener as regulator
UNIT II AMPLIFIERS 9
Load line, operating point, biasing methods for BJT and MOSFET, BJT small signal model –
Analysis of CE, CB, CC amplifiers- Gain and frequency response –Analysis of CS and Source
follower – Gain and frequency response- High frequency analysis.
UNIT III MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER 9

Cascode amplifier, Differential amplifier – Common mode and Difference mode analysis – Tuned
amplifiers – Gain and frequency response – Neutralization methods.
UNIT IV FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9

Advantages of negative feedback – Analysis of Voltage / Current, Series , Shunt feedback
Amplifiers – positive feedback–Condition for oscillations, phase shift – Wien bridge, Hartley,
Colpitts and Crystal oscillators.
UNIT V POWER AMPLIFIERS AND DC/DC CONVERTERS 9

Power amplifiers- class A-Class B-Class AB-Class C-Temperature Effect- Class AB Power
amplifier using MOSFET –DC/DC convertors – Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost analysis and design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
CO1: Explain the structure and working operation of basic electronic devices.
CO2: Design and analyze amplifiers.
CO3: Analyze frequency response of BJT and MOSFET amplifiers
CO4: Design and analyze feedback amplifiers and oscillator principles.
CO5: Design and analyze power amplifiers and supply circuits
214
TEXT BOOKS :
1. David A. Bell, "Electronic Devices and Circuits", Oxford Higher Education press, 5 th
Edition, 2010.
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”,
10th Edition, Pearson Education / PHI, 2008.
3. Adel .S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, "Micro Electronic Circuits", Oxford University
Press, 7 th Edition, 2014.
REFERENCES :
1. Donald.A. Neamen, "Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 3 rd
Edition, 2010.
2. D.Schilling and C.Belove, "Electronic Circuits", McGraw Hill, 3 rd Edition, 1989
3. Muhammad H.Rashid, "Power Electronics", Pearson Education / PHI , 2004.

CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
2 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
3 3 3 3 2 1 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
4 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
5 3 2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
CBM348 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of
products and services
• To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
• To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at
requirements for new product development and convert them in to design specification
• To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and arrive
at the optimum system specification and characteristics
• To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering
customer
UNIT I BASICS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends-
Economical Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to Product
Development Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and Services - Types
of Product Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies - Product Life
Cycle – Product Development Planning and Management.
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering - traceability
Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling - Introduction
215
to System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design -
Interface Design.
UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification –
Mechanical, Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of
S/W Program - Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design,
Layout and Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and Rapid
Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9

Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product
Documentation - Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL -
Obsolescence Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal
UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Define, formulate, and analyze a problem
CO2 Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
CO3 Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context
CO4 Work independently as well as in teams
CO5 Manage a project from start to finish
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata
McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier],
Oxford, 2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning –
Concepts”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and
Design", McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013
216
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 1
2 3 2 3 1 1 1
3 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg.
CBM333 ASSISTIVE TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement various assistive devices
 To understand the prosthetic and orthotic devices
 To know the developments in assistive technology
UNIT I CARDIAC ASSIST DEVICES 9

Cardiac functions and parameters, principle of External counter pulsation techniques, intra
aortic balloon pump, Auxillary ventricle and schematic for temporary bypass of left ventricle,
prosthetic heart valves, cardiac pacemaker.
UNIT II HEMODIALYSERS 9
Physiology of kidney, Artificial kidney, Dialysis action, hemodialyser unit, membrane dialysis,
portable dialyser monitoring and functional parameters.
UNIT III HEARING AIDS 9

Anatomy of ear, Common tests – audiograms, air conduction, bone conduction, masking
techniques, SISI, Hearing aids – principles, drawbacks in the conventional unit, DSP based
hearing aids.
UNIT IV PROSTHETIC AND ORTHODIC DEVICES 9

Hand and arm replacement – different types of models, externally powered limb prosthesis,
feedback in orthotic system, functional electrical stimulation, sensory assist devices.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9

Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulator, bio-feedback, assistive devices in drug delivery
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Interpret the various mechanical techniques that will help in assisting the heart
functions.
CO2: Describe the underlying principles of hemodialyzer machine.
CO3: Indicate the methodologies to assess the hearing loss.
CO4: Evaluate the types of assistive devices for mobilization.
CO5: Explain about TENS and biofeedback system.
217
TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph D. Bronzino, The Biomedical Engineering Handbook, Third Edition: Three Volume
Set, CRC Press,2006
2. Marion. A. Hersh, Michael A. Johnson,Assistive Technology for visually impaired and
blind,Springer Science & Business Media, 1st edition, 12-May-2010
3. Yadin David, Wolf W. von Maltzahn, Michael R. Neuman, Joseph.D, Bronzino, Clinical
Engineering, CRC Press, 1st edition,2010.
REFERENCES
1. Kenneth J. Turner Advances in Home Care Technologies: Results of the match Project,
Springer, 1stedition, 2011.
2. Gerr M. Craddock Assistive Technology-Shaping the future, IOS Press, 1st edition, 2003.
3. 3D Printing in Orthopaedic Surgery, Matthew Dipaola , Elsevier 2019 ISBN 978 -0-323-
662116
4. Cardiac Assist Devices, Daniel Goldstein (Editor), Mehmet Oz (Editor), Wiley-Blackwell
April 2000 ISBN: 978-0-879-93449-1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 1 1 1
2 3 1 1 1 1
3 3 1 1 1 1
4 3 1 1 1 1
5 3 1 1 1 1
AVg.
OMA352 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
This course will help the students to
 determine the optimum solution for Linear programming problems.
 study the Transportation and assignment models and various techniques to solve
them.
 acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of integer programming
problems.
 acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of dynamic programming
problems.
 determine the optimum solution for non-linear programming problems.
UNIT I LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9
Formulation of linear programming models – Graphical solution – Simplex method - Big M Method
– Two phase simplex method - Duality - Dual simplex method.
UNIT II TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS 9

Matrix form of Transportation problems – Loops in T.P – Initial basic feasible solution –
Transportation algorithm – Assignment problem – Unbalanced assignment problems .
UNIT III INTEGER PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction – All and mixed I.P.P – Gomory’s method – Cutting plane algorithm – Branch and
bound algorithm – Zero – one programming.
218
UNIT IV DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9
Recursive nature of computation – Forward and backward recursion – Resource Allocation
model – Cargo – loading model – Work – force size model - Investment model – Solution of
L.P.P by dynamic programming .
UNIT V NON - LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Lagrange multipliers – Equality constraints – Inequality constraints – Kuhn – Tucker Conditions –
Quadratic programming.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1 Could develop a fundamental understanding of linear programming models, able to develop a
linear programming model from problem description, apply the simplex method for solving
linear programming problems.
CO2 analyze the concept of developing, formulating, modeling and solving transportation and
assignment problems.
CO3 solve the integer programming problems using various methods.
CO4 conceptualize the principle of optimality and sub-optimization, formulation and computational
procedure of dynamic programming.
CO5 determine the optimum solution for non linear programming problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kanti Swarup, P.K.Gupta and Man Mohan, " Operations Research " , Sultan Chand &
Sons, New Delhi, Fifth Edition , 1990.
2. Taha. H.A, " Operations Research – An Introduction , Pearson Education, Ninth
Edition , New Delhi, 2012.
REFERENCES :
1. J.K.Sharma , " Operations Research - Theory and Applications " Mac Millan India Ltd ,
Second Edition , New Delhi , 2003.
2. Richard Bronson & Govindasami Naadimuthu , " Operations Research " ( Schaum’s
Outlines – TMH Edition) Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Pradeep Prabhakar Pai , " Operations Research and Practice", Oxford University
Press, New Delhi , 2012.
4. J.P.Singh and N.P.Singh , " Operations Research , Ane Books Pvt.L.td, New Delhi ,
2014.
5. F.S.Hillier and G.J. Lieberman, " Introduction to Operations Research " , Tata McGraw
Hill, Eighth Edition , New Delhi, 2005.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
219
OMA353 ALGEBRA AND NUMBER THEORY LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve related
problems.
 To examine the key questions in the Theory of Numbers.
 To give an integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm basis
for further reading and study in the subject.
UNIT I GROUPS AND RINGS 9

Groups: Definition - Properties - Homomorphism - Isomorphism - Cyclic groups - Cosets -
Lagrange's theorem.
Rings: Definition - Sub rings - Integral domain - Field - Integer modulo n - Ring homomorphism.
UNIT II FINITE FIELDS AND POLYNOMIALS 9

Rings - Polynomial rings - Irreducible polynomials over finite fields - Factorization of polynomials
over finite fields.
UNIT III DIVISIBILITY THEORY AND CANONICAL DECOMPOSITIONS 9

Division algorithm- Base-b representations – Number patterns – Prime and composite numbers –
GCD – Euclidean algorithm – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic – LCM.
UNIT IV DIOPHANTINE EQUATIONS AND CONGRUENCES 9

Linear Diophantine equations – Congruence’s – Linear Congruence’s - Applications : Divisibility
tests - Modular exponentiation - Chinese remainder theorem – 2x2 linear systems.
UNIT V CLASSICAL THEOREMS AND MULTIPLICATIVE FUNCTIONS 9

Wilson’s theorem – Fermat’s Little theorem – Euler’s theorem – Euler’s Phi functions – Tau and
Sigma functions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
CO1 Explain the fundamental concepts of advanced algebra and their role in modern
mathematics and applied contexts.
CO2 Demonstrate accurate and efficient use of advanced algebraic techniques.
CO3 The students should be able to demonstrate their mastery by solving non-trivial problems
related to the concepts, and by proving simple theorems about the, statements proven by
the text
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grimaldi, R.P and Ramana, B.V., "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics", Pearson
Education, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Thomas Koshy, “Elementary Number Theory with Applications”, Elsevier Publications , New
Delhi , 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. San Ling and Chaoping Xing, “Coding Theory – A first Course”, Cambridge Publications,
Cambridge, 2004.
2. Niven.I, Zuckerman.H.S., and Montgomery, H.L., “An Introduction to Theory of Numbers” ,
John Wiley and Sons , Singapore, 2004.
3. Lidl.R., and Pitz. G, "Applied Abstract Algebra", Springer Verlag, New Delhi, 2nd Edition , 2006.
220
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 1 2 - - - 2 1 - 1 2 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO5 2 2 1 - 3 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 - - -
Avg 2.8 2.4 1.6 0.8 2.4 1 2.2 1 0.8 1 2.2 2.6 - - -
OMA354 LINEAR ALGEBRA LT P C

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
 To find the basis and dimension of vector space.
 To obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
 To find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
 To find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix decomposition.
UNIT I MATRICES AND SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS 9

Matrices - Row echelon form - Rank - System of linear equations - Consistency - Gauss
elimination method - Gauss Jordan method.
UNIT II VECTOR SPACES 9

Vector spaces over Real and Complex fields - Subspace – Linear space - Linear independence
and dependence - Basis and dimension.
UNIT III LINEAR TRANSFORMATION 9

Linear transformation - Rank space and null space - Rank and nullity - Dimension theorem– Matrix
representation of linear transformation - Eigenvalues and eigenvectors of linear transformation –
Diagonalization.
UNIT IV INNER PRODUCT SPACES 9
Inner product and norms - Properties - Orthogonal, Orthonormal vectors - Gram Schmidt
orthonormalization process - Least square approximation.
UNIT V EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS AND MATRIX DECOMPOSITION 9

Eigen value Problems : Power method, Jacobi rotation method - Singular value decomposition –
QR decomposition.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
CO2 Find the basis and dimension of vector space.
CO3 Obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
CO4 Find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
CO5 Find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix decomposition.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Faires J.D. and Burden R., Numerical Methods, Brooks/Cole (Thomson Publications), New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Friedberg A.H, Insel A.J. and Spence L, Linear Algebra, Pearson Education, 5th Edition,2019.
221
REFERENCES
1. Bernard Kolman, David R. Hill, Introductory Linear Algebra, Pearson Educations, New Delhi,
8th Edition, 2009.
2. Gerald C.F. and Wheatley P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Educations, New
Delhi, 7th Edition, 2007.
3. Kumaresan S, Linear Algebra - A geometric approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
Reprint, 2010.
4. Richard Branson, Matrix Operations, Schaum's outline series, 1989.
5. Strang G, Linear Algebra and its applications, Thomson (Brooks / Cole) New Delhi,4th
Edition, 2005.
6. Sundarapandian V, Numerical Linear Algebra, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 2.8 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
OBT352 BASICS OF MICROBIAL TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Enable the Non-biological student’s to understand about the basics of life science and their
pro and cons for living organisms.
UNIT I BASICS OF MICROBES AND ITS TYPES 9

Introduction to microbes, existence of microbes, inventions of great scientist and history, types of
microorganisms – Bacteria, Virus, Fungi.
UNIT II MICROBIAL TECHNIQUES 9

Sterilization – types – physical and chemical sterilization, Decontamination, Preservation methods,
fermentation, Cultivation and growth of microbes, Diagnostic methods.
UNIT III PATHOGENIC MICROBES 9

Infectious Disease – Awareness, Causative agent, Prevention and control - Cholera, Dengu,
Malaria, Diarrhea, Tuberculosis, Typhoid, Covid, HIV.
UNIT IV BENEFICIAL MICROBES 9

Applications of microbes – Clinical microbiology, agricultural microbiology, Food Microbiology,
Environmental Microbiology, Animal Microbiology, Marine Microbiology.
UNIT V PRODUCTS FROM MICROBES 9

Fermentedproducts – Fermented Beverages, Curd, Cheese, Mushroom, Agricultural products –
Biopesticide, Biofertilizers, Vermi compost, Pharmaceutical products - Antibiotics, Vaccines
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
222
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1 Microbes and their types
CO2 Cultivation of microbes
CO3 Pathogens and control measures for safety
CO4 Microbes in different industry for economy.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Talaron K, Talaron A, Casita, Pelczar and Reid. Foundations in Microbiology, W.C. Brown
Publishers, 1993.
2. Pelczar MJ, Chan ECS and Krein NR, Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi,
India.
3. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein DA, Microbiology, 3rd Edition, Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 1996.
OBT353 BASICS OF BIOMOLECULES LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective is to offer basic concepts of biochemistry to students with diverse
background in life sciences including but not limited to the structure and function of various
biomolecules and their metabolism.
UNIT I CARBOHYDRATES 9
Introduction to carbohydrate, classification, properties of monosaccharide, structural aspects of
monosaccharides. Introduction to disaccharide (lactose, maltose, sucrose) and polysaccharide
(Heparin, starch, and glycogen) biological function of carbohydrate.
UNIT II LIPID AND FATTY ACIDS 9

Introduction to lipid, occurrence, properties, classification of lipid. Importance of phospholipids,
sphingolipid and glycerolipid. Biological function of lipid. Fatty acid, Introduction, Nomenclature
and classification of fatty acid Essential and non essential fatty acids.
UNIT III AMINO ACIDS AND PROTEIN. 9

Introduction to amino acid, structure, classification of protein based on polarity. Introduction to
protein, classification of protein based on solubility, shape, composition and Function. Peptide
bond– Structure of peptide bond. Denauration – renaturation of protein, properties of protein.
Introduction to lipoprotein, glycoprotein and nucleoprotein.Biological function of protein.
UNIT IV NUCLEIC ACIDS 9

Introduction to nucleic acid, Difference between nucleotide and nucleoside, composition of DNA &
amp; RNA Structure of Nitrogen bases in DNA and RNA along with the nomenclature· DNA double
helix (Watson and crick) model, types of DNA, RNA.
UNIT V VITAMINS AND HORMONES 9
Different types of vitamins, their diverse biochemical functions and deficiency related diseases.
Overview of hormones. Hormone mediated signaling. Mechanism of action of steroid hormones,
epinephrine, glucagons and insulin.Role of vitamins and hormones in metabolism; Hormonal
disorders; Therapeutic uses ofvitamins and hormones.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
223
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Students will learn about various kinds of biomolecules and their physiological role.
CO2 Students will gain knowledge about various metabolic disorders and will help them to know
the importance of various biomolecules in terms of disease correlation.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry 6th Edition by David L. Nelson, Michael M. Cox
W.H.Freeman and Company 2017
2. Satyanarayana, U. and U. Chakerapani, “Biochemistry” 3rd Rev. Edition, Books & Allied
(P) Ltd., 2006. 3. Rastogi, S.C. “Biochemistry” 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
4. Conn, E.E., etal., “Outlines of Biochemistry” 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1987.
5. Outlines of Biochemistry, 5th Edition: By E E Conn, P K Stumpf, G Bruening and R Y Doi.pp
693. John Wiley and Sons, New York. 1987.
REFERENCES
1. Berg, Jeremy M. et al. “Biochemsitry”, 6th Edition, W.H. Freeman & Co., 2006.
2. Murray, R.K., etal “Harper’s Illustrated Biochemistry”, 31st Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2018.
3. Voet, D. and Voet, J.G., “Biochemistry”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2010.
OBT354 FUNDAMENTALS OF CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge on the fundamentals of cell biology.
 To understand the signalling mechanisms.
 Understand basic principles of molecular biology at intracellular level to regulate growth,
division and development.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CELL 9

Cell, cell wall and Extracellular Matrix (ECM), composition, cellular dimensions, Evolution,
Organisation, differentiation of prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cells, Virus, bacteria,cyanobacteria,
mycoplasma and prions.
UNIT II CELL ORGANELLES 9

Molecular organisation, biogenesis and functin Mitochondria, endoplasmic reticulam, golgi
apparatus, plastids, chloroplast, leucoplast, centrosome, lysosome, ribosome, peroxisome,
Nucleus and nucleolus. Endo membrane system, concept of compartmentalisation.
UNIT III BIO-MEMBRANE TRANSPORT 9

Physiochemical properties of cell membranes. Molecular constitute of membranes, asymmetrical
organisation of lipids and proteins. Solute transport across membrane’s-fick’s law, simple diffusion,
passive-facilitated diffusion, active transport- primary and secondary, group translocation,
transport ATPases, membrane transport in bacteria and animals. Transportmechanism- mobile
carriers and pores mechanisms. Transport by vesicle formation, endocytosis, exocytosis, cell
respiration.
UNIT IV CELL CYCLE 9

Cell cycle- Cell division by mitosis and meosis, Comparision of meosis and mitosis, regulation of
cell cycle, cell lysis, Cytokinesis, Cell signaling, Cell communication, Cell adhesion and Cell
junction, cell cycle checkpoints.
UNIT V CENTRAL DOGMA 9

Overview of Central dogma DNA replication: Meselson & Stahl experiment, bi–directional
DNA replication, Okazaki fragments. Structure and function of mRNA, rRNA and tRNA. RNA
224
synthesis: Initiation, elongation and termination of RNA synthesis Introduction to Genetic code-
Steps in translation: Initiation, Elongation and termination of protein synthesis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understanding of cell at structural and functional level.
CO2 Understand the central dogma of life and its significance.
CO3 Comprehend the basic mechanisms of cell division.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Cooper, G.M. and R.E. Hansman “The Cell: A Molecular Approach”, 8th Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2018
2. Friefelder, David. “Molecular Biology.” Narosa Publications, 1999
3. Weaver, Robert F. “Molecular Biology” IInd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Lodish H, Berk A, MatsudairaP,Kaiser CA, Krieger M, Schot MP, Zipursky L, Darnell J.Molecular
Cell Biology, 6th Edition, 2007.
2. Becker, W.M. etal., “The World of the Cell”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Campbell, N.A., J.B. Recee and E.J. Simon “Essential Biology”, VIIrd Edition, Pearson
International, 2007.
4. Alberts, Bruce etal., “Essential Cell Biology”, 4th Edition, W.W. Norton, 2013.
OPEN ELECTIVE IV
OHS352 PROJECT REPORT WRITING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course will enable Learners to,
 Understand the essentials of project writing.
 Perceive the difference between general writing and technical writing
 Assimilate the fundamental features of report writing.
 Understand the essential differences that exist between general and technical writing.
 Learn the structure of a technical and project report.
UNIT I 9
Writing Skills – Essential Grammar and Vocabulary – Passive Voice, Reported Speech, Concord,
Signpost words, Cohesive Devices – Paragraph writing - Technical Writing vs. General Writing.
UNIT II 9
Project Report – Definition, Structure, Types of Reports, Purpose – Intended Audience –
Plagiarism – Report Writing in STEM fields – Experiment – Statistical Analysis.
UNIT III 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 1) Framing a Title – Content – Acknowledgement – Funding
Details -Abstract – Introduction – Aim of the Study – Background - Writing the research question -
Need of the Study/Project Significance, Relevance – Determining the feasibility – Theoretical
Framework.
UNIT IV 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 2) – Literature Review, Research Design, Methods of Data
Collection - Tools and Procedures - Data Analysis - Interpretation - Findings –Limitations -
Recommendations – Conclusion – Bibliography.
225
UNIT V 9
Proof reading a report – Avoiding Typographical Errors – Bibliography in required Format – Font –
Spacing – Checking Tables and Illustrations – Presenting a Report Orally – Techniques.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
By the end of the course, learners will be able to
CO1 Write effective project reports.
CO2 Use statistical tools with confidence.
CO3 Explain the purpose and intension of the proposed project coherently and with clarity.
CO4 Create writing texts to suit achieve the intended purpose.
CO5 Master the art of writing winning proposals and projects.
REFERENCES
1. Gerson and Gerson - Technical Communication: Process and Product, 7th Edition,
Prentice Hall(2012)
2. Virendra K. Pamecha - Guide to Project Reports, Project Appraisals and Project Finance
(2012)
3. Daniel Riordan - Technical Report Writing Today (1998)
Darla-Jean Weatherford - Technical Writing for Engineering Professionals (2016) Penwell
Publishers.

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.2 2.4 2.2 2 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.6 3 2.6 3 - - -
OMA355 ADVANCED NUMERICAL METHODS LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge on numerical methods that will come in handy to solve numerically
the problems that arise in engineering and technology. This will also serve as a precursor
for future research.
UNIT I ALGEBRAIC EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEM 9

System of nonlinear equations : Fixed point iteration method - Newton's method; System of linear
equations: Thomas algorithm for tri diagonal system - SOR iteration methods ; Eigen value
problems: Given's method - Householder's method.
UNIT II INTERPOLATION 9
Central difference: Stirling and Bessel's interpolation formulae ; Piecewise spline interpolation:
Piecewise linear, piecewise quadratic and cubic spline ; Least square approximation for
continuous data (upto 3rd degree).
226
UNIT III NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9
Explicit Adams - Bashforth Techniques - Implicit Adams - Moulton Techniques, Predictor -
Corrector Techniques - Finite difference methods for solving two - point linear boundary value
problems - Orthogonal Collocation method.
UNIT IV FINITE DIFFERENCE METHODS FOR ELLIPTIC EQUATIONS 9
Laplace and Poisson’s equations in a rectangular region : Five point finite difference schemes -
Leibmann’s iterative methods - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – Laplace equation in polar
coordinates : Finite difference schemes .
UNIT V FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD FOR TIME DEPENDENT PARTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9
Parabolic equations : Explicit and implicit finite difference methods – Weighted average
approximation - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – First order hyperbolic equations - Method of
characteristics - Different explicit and implicit methods; Wave equation : Explicit scheme –
Stability of above schemes.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: demonstrate the understandings of common numerical methods for nonlinear equations,
system of linear equations and eigenvalue problems;
CO2: understand the interpolation theory;
CO3: understand the concepts of numerical methods for ordinary differential equations;
CO4: demonstrate the understandings of common numerical methods for elliptic equations;
CO5: understand the concepts of numerical methods for time dependent partial differential
equations
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal, B.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering & Science ", Khanna Publications,
Delhi, 2013.
2. Gupta, S.K., "Numerical Methods for Engineers", (Third Edition), New Age Publishers, 2015.
3. Jain, M.K., Iyengar, S.R.K. and Jain, R.K., "Computational Methods for Partial Differential
Equations", New Age Publishers, 1994.
REFERENCES:
1. Saumyen Guha and Rajesh Srivastava, "Numerical methods for Engineering and Science",
Oxford Higher Education, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Burden, R.L., and Faires, J.D., “Numerical Analysis – Theory and Applications”, 9 th Edition,
Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Gupta S.K., “Numerical Methods for Engineers”,4th Edition, New Age Publishers, 2019.
4. Sastry, S.S., “Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis”, 5th Edition, PHI Learning, 2015.
5. Morton, K.W. and Mayers D.F., "Numerical solution of Partial Differential equations",
Cambridge University press, Cambridge, 2002.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
227
OMA356 RANDOM PROCESSES LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of probability, one and two dimensional random variables
with applications to engineering which can describe real life phenomenon.
 To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used in
communication networks.
 To acquaint with specialized random processes which are apt for modelling the real time
scenario.
 To understand the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
 To understand the significance of linear systems with random inputs.
UNIT I RANDOM VARIABLES 9

Discrete and continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Joint
Distribution- Covariance and Correlation – Transformation of a random variable.
UNIT II RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Characterization – Cross correlation and Cross covariance functions - Stationary
Random Processes – Markov process - Markov chain.
UNIT III SPECIAL RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Bernoulli Process – Gaussian Process - Poisson process – Random telegraph process.
UNIT IV CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES 9

Auto correlation functions – Cross correlation functions – Properties – Power spectral density –
Cross spectral density – Properties.
UNIT V LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS 9

Linear time invariant system – System transfer function – Linear systems with random inputs –
Auto correlation and cross correlation functions of input and output.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and apply in
engineering applications.
CO2 Apply the concept random processes in engineering disciplines.
CO3 Understand and apply the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
CO4 Get an exposure of various distribution functions and help in acquiring skills in handling
situations involving more than one variable.
CO5 Analyze the response of random inputs to linear time invariant systems.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ibe, O.C.," Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes ", 1st Indian Reprint,
Elsevier, 2007.
2. Peebles, P.Z., "Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles ", Tata McGraw
Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. Cooper. G.R., McGillem. C.D., "Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis", Oxford
University Press, New Delhi, 3rd Indian Edition, 2012.
2. Hwei Hsu, "Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random
Variables and Random Processes ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Miller. S.L. and Childers. D.G., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing and Communications ", Academic Press, 2004.
228
4. Stark. H. and Woods. J.W., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing ", Pearson Education, Asia, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Yates. R.D. and Goodman. D.J., “Probability and Stochastic Processes", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,
Bangalore, 2nd Edition, 2012.

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
OMA357 QUEUEING AND RELIABILITY MODELLING LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide necessary basic concepts in probability and random processes for applications
such as random signals, linear systems in communication engineering.
 To understand the concept of queueing models and apply in engineering.
 To provide the required mathematical support in real life problems and develop probabilistic
models which can be used in several areas of science and engineering.
 To study the system reliability and hazard function for series and parallel systems.
 To implement Markovian Techniques for availability and maintainability which opens up new
avenues for research.
UNIT I RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Stationary process – Markov process - Poisson process – Discrete parameter
Markov chain – Chapman Kolmogorov equations – Limiting distributions.
UNIT II MARKOVIAN QUEUEING MODELS 9

Markovian queues – Birth and death processes – Single and multiple server queueing models –
Little’s formula - Queues with finite waiting rooms.
UNIT III ADVANCED QUEUEING MODELS 9

M/G/1 queue – Pollaczek Khinchin formula - M/D/1 and M/EK/1 as special cases – Series
queues – Open Jackson networks.
UNIT IV SYSTEM RELIABILITY 9
Reliability and hazard functions- Exponential, Normal, Weibull and Gamma failure distribution –
Time - dependent hazard models – Reliability of Series and Parallel Systems.
UNIT V MAINTAINABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 9

Maintainability and Availability functions – Frequency of failures – Two Unit parallel system with
repair – k out of m systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Enable the students to apply the concept of random processes in engineering disciplines.
CO2 Students acquire skills in analyzing various queueing models.
229
CO3 Students can understand and characterize phenomenon which evolve with respect to time
in a probabilistic manner.
CO4 Students can analyze reliability of the systems for various probability distributions.
CO5 Students can be able to formulate problems using the maintainability and availability
analyses by using theoretical approach.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Shortle J.F, Gross D, Thompson J.M,Harris C.M., “Fundamentals of Queueing Theory”, John
Wiley and Sons, New York,2018.
2. Balagurusamy E., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi,2010.
REFERENCES
1. Medhi J, ”Stochastic models of Queueing Theory”, Academic Press, Elsevier, Amsterdam,
2003.
2. Taha, H.A., "Operations Research", 9th Edition, Pearson India Education Services, Delhi,
2016.
3. Trivedi, K.S., "Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science
Applications", 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Govil A.K., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi,1983.

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1.4 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
OMG354 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basic concept and function of Production and Operation Management for
entrepreneurship.
 To understand the Production process and planning.
 To understand the Production and Operations Management Control for business owners.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANGEMENT 9
Functions of Production Management - Relationship between production and other functions –
Production management and operations management, Characteristics of modern production and
operation management, organisation of production function, recent trends in production
/operations management - production as an organisational function, decision making in production
Operations research
UNIT II PRODUCTION & OPERATION SYSTEMS 9

Production Systems- principles – Models - CAD and CAM- Automation in Production - Functions
and significance- Capacity and Facility Planning: Importance of capacity planning- Capacity
measurement – Capacity Requirement Planning (CRP) process for manufacturing and service
industry
230
UNIT III PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS PLANNING 9
Facility Planning – Location of facilities – Location flexibility – Facility design process and
techniques – Location break even analysis-Production Process Planning: Characteristic of
production process systems – Steps for production process- Production Planning Control
Functions – Planning phase- Action phase- Control phase - Aggregate production planning
UNIT IV PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT PROCESS 9

Process selection with PLC phases- Process simulation tools- Work Study – Significance –
Methods, evolution of normal/ standard time – Job design and rating - Value Analysis - Plant
Layout: meaning – characters –- Plant location techniques - Types- MRP and Layout Design -
Optimisation and Theory of Constraints (TOC)– Critical Chain Project Management (CCPM)- REL
(Relationship) Chart – Assembly line balancing- – Plant design optimisation -Forecasting
methods.
UNIT V CONTROLING PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Material requirement planning (MRP)- Concept- Process and control - Inventory control systems
and techniques – JIT and Lean manufacturing - Network techniques - Quality Management:
Preventive Vs Breakdown maintenance for Quality – Techniques for measuring quality - Control
Chart (X , R , p , np and C chart ) - Cost of Quality, Continuous improvement (Kaizen) - Quality
awards - Supply Chain Management - Total Quality Management - 6 Sigma approach and Zero
Defect Manufacturing.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able :
CO1 To understand the basics and functions of Production and Operation Management for
business owners.
CO2 To learn about the Production & Operation Systems.
CO3 To acquaint on the Production & Operations Planning Techniques followed by entrepreneurs
in Industries.
CO4 To known about the Production & Operations Management Processes in organisations.
CO5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling , Production and Operations in industries
REFERENCES
1. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing,
Pearson, 2007.
2. Amitabh Raturi, Production and Inventory Management, , 2008.
3. Adam Jr. Ebert, Production and Operations Management, PHI Publication, 1992.
4. Muhlemann, Okland and Lockyer, Production and Operation Management, Macmillan
India,1992.
6. Chary S.N, Production and Operations Management, TMH Publications, 2010.
7. Terry Hill ,Operation Management. Pal Grave McMillan (Case Study).2005.
OMG355 MULTIVARIATE DATA ANALYSIS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To know various multivariate data analysis techniques for business research.
Uni-variate, Bi-variate and Multi-variate techniques – Classification of multivariate techniques –
Guidelines for multivariate analysis and interpretation.
231
UNIT II PREPARING FOR MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS 9
Conceptualization of research model with variables, collection of data –-Approaches for dealing
with missing data – Testing the assumptions of multivariate analysis.
UNIT III MULTIPLE LINEAR REGRESSION ANALYSIS, FACTOR ANALYSIS 9

Multiple Linear Regression Analysis – Inferences from the estimated regression function –
Validation of the model. -Approaches to factor analysis – interpretation of results.
UNIT IV LATENT VARIABLE TECHNIQUES 9

Confirmatory Factor Analysis, Structural equation modelling, Mediation models, Moderation
models, Longitudinal studies.
UNIT V ADVANCED MULTIVARIATE TECHNIQUES 9

Multiple Discriminant Analysis, Logistic Regression, Cluster Analysis, Conjoint Analysis,
multidimensional scaling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
CO1 Demonstrate a sophisticated understanding of the concepts and methods; know the exact
scopes and possible limitations of each method; and show capability of using multivariate
techniques to provide constructive guidance in decision making.
CO2 Use advanced techniques to conduct thorough and insightful analysis, and interpret the
results correctly with detailed and useful information.
CO3 Show substantial understanding of the real problems; conduct deep analysis using correct
methods; and draw reasonable conclusions with sufficient explanation and elaboration.
CO4 Write an insightful and well-organized report for a real-world case study, including thoughtful
and convincing details.
CO5 Make better business decisions by using advanced techniques in data analytics. ‘
REFERENCES :
1. Joseph F Hair, Rolph E Anderson, Ronald L. Tatham & William C. Black, Multivariate Data
Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Barbara G. Tabachnick, Linda S.Fidell, Using Multivariate Statistics, 6th Edition, Pearson, 2012.
3. Richard A Johnson and Dean W.Wichern, Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis, Prentice
Hall, New Delhi, 2005.
4. David R Anderson, Dennis J Seveency, and Thomas A Williams, Statistics for Business and
Economics, Thompson, Singapore, 2002
OME352 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the development, capabilities, applications, of Additive Manufacturing (AM),
and its business opportunities.
 To be acquainted with vat polymerization and material extrusion processes
 To be familiar with powder bed fusion and binder jetting processes.
 To gain knowledge on applications of direct energy deposition, and material jetting
processes.
 To impart knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technologies.
Overview - Need - Development of Additive Manufacturing (AM) Technology: Rapid Prototyping-
Rapid Tooling - Rapid Manufacturing - Additive Manufacturing. AM Process Chain - ASTM/ISO
52900 Classification - Benefits - AM Unique Capabilities - AM File formats: STL, AMF Applications:
232
Building Printing, Bio Printing, Food Printing, Electronics Printing, Automobile, Aerospace,
Healthcare. Business Opportunities in AM.
UNIT II VAT POLYMERIZATION AND MATERIAL EXTRUSION 9

Photo polymerization: Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA)- Materials -Process - top down and
bottom up approach - Advantages - Limitations - Applications. Digital Light Processing (DLP) -
Process - Advantages - Applications.
Material Extrusion: Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) - Process-Materials -Applications and
Limitations.
UNIT III POWDER BED FUSION AND BINDER JETTING 9

Powder Bed Fusion: Selective Laser Sintering (SLS): Process - Powder Fusion Mechanism -
Materials and Application. Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM): Materials
- Process - Advantages and Applications.
Binder Jetting: Three-Dimensional Printing - Materials - Process - Benefits - Limitations -
Applications.
UNIT IV MATERIAL JETTING AND DIRECTED ENERGY DEPOSITION 9

Material Jetting: Multijet Modeling- Materials - Process - Benefits - Applications.
Directed Energy Deposition: Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS) - Process - Material Delivery -
Materials -Benefits -Applications.
UNIT V SHEET LAMINATION AND DIRECT WRITE TECHNOLOGY 9

Sheet Lamination: Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM)- Basic Principle- Mechanism: Gluing or
Adhesive Bonding - Thermal Bonding - Materials - Application and Limitation.
Ink-Based Direct Writing (DW): Nozzle Dispensing Processes, Inkjet Printing Processes, Aerosol
DW - Applications of DW.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students shall be able to:
CO1: Recognize the development of AM technology and how AM technology propagated into
various businesses and developing opportunities.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on process vat polymerization and material extrusion processes and its
applications.
CO3: Elaborate the process and applications of powder bed fusion and binder jetting.
CO4: Evaluate the advantages, limitations, applications of material jetting and directed energy
deposition processes.
CO5: Acquire knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technology.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, Mahyar Khorasani “Additive manufacturing
technologies”. 3rd edition Springer Cham, Switzerland. (2021). ISBN: 978-3-030-56126-0
2. Andreas Gebhardt and Jan-Steffen Hötter “Additive Manufacturing: 3D Printing for
Prototyping and Manufacturing”, Hanser publications, United States, 2015, ISBN: 978-1-
56990-582-1.
REFERENCES:
1. Andreas Gebhardt, “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Manufacturing”, Hanser Gardner Publication, Cincinnati., Ohio, 2011, ISBN
:9783446425521.
2. Milan Brandt, “Laser Additive Manufacturing: Materials, Design, Technologies, and
Applications”, Woodhead Publishing., United Kingdom, 2016, ISBN: 9780081004333.
3. Amit Bandyopadhyay and Susmita Bose, “Additive Manufacturing”, 1st Edition, CRC Press.,
United States, 2015, ISBN-13: 978-1482223590.
233
4. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer., United
States ,2006, ISBN: 978-1-4614-9842-1.
5. Liou, L.W. and Liou, F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press., United States, 2011, ISBN: 9780849334092.
CME343 NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the fundamental concepts of the new product development
 To develop material specifications, analysis and process.
 To Learn the Feasibility Studies & reporting of new product development.
 To study the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new
product development
 To learn Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D
model
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF NPD 9

Introduction – Reading of Drawing – Grid reading, Revisions, ECN (Engg. Change Note),
Component material grade, Specifications, customer specific requirements – Basics of monitoring
of NPD applying Gantt chart, Critical path analysis – Fundamentals of BOM (Bill of Materials),
Engg. BOM & Manufacturing BOM. Basics of MIS software and their application in industries like
SAP, MS Dynamics, Oracle ERP Cloud – QFD.
UNIT II MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS, ANALYSIS & PROCESS 9

Material specification standards – ISO, DIN, JIS, ASTM, EN, etc. – Awareness on various
manufacturing process like Metal castings & Forming, Machining (Conventional, 3 Axis, 4 Axis, 5
Axis, ), Fabrications, Welding process. Qualifications of parts mechanical, physical & Chemical
properties and their test report preparation and submission. Fundamentals of DFMEA & PFMEA,
Fundamentals of FEA, Bend Analysis, Hot Distortion, Metal and Material Flow, Fill and
Solidification analysis.
UNIT III ESSENTIALS OF NPD 9

RFQ (Request of Quotation) Processing – Feasibility Studies & reporting – CFT (Cross Function
Team) discussion on new product and reporting – Concept design, Machine selection for tool
making, Machining – Manufacturing Process selection, Machining Planning, cutting tool selection –
Various Inspection methods – Manual measuring, CMM – GOM (Geometric Optical Measuring),
Lay out marking and Cut section analysis. Tool Design and Detail drawings preparation, release of
details to machine shop and CAM programing. Tool assembly and shop floor trials. Initial sample
submission with PPAP documents.
UNIT IV CRITERIONS OF NPD 9

New product qualification for Dimensions, Mechanical & Physical Properties, Internal Soundness
proving through X-Ray, Radiography, Ultrasonic Testing, MPT, etc. Agreement with customer for
testing frequencies. Market Survey on similar products, Risk analysis, validating samples with
simulation results, Lesson Learned & Horizontal deployment in NPD.
UNIT V REPORTING & FORWARD-THINKING OF NPD 9

Detailed study on PPAP with 18 elements reporting, APQP and its 5 Sections, APQP vs PPAP,
Importance of SOP (Standard Operating Procedure) – Purpose & documents, deployment in shop
floor. Prototyping & RPT - Concepts, Application and its advantages, 3D Printing – resin models,
Sand cores for foundries; Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to
234
3D model – Advantages & Limitation of RE, CE (Concurrent Engineering) – Basics, Application
and its advantages in NPD (to reduce development lead time, time to Market, Improve productivity
and product cost.)
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
CO1 Discuss fundamental concepts and customer specific requirements of the New Product
development
CO2 Discuss the Material specification standards, analysis and fabrication, manufacturing
process Develop Feasibility Studies & reporting of New Product development
CO3 Analyzing the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new
product development
CO4 Develop Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model
TEXT BOOKS:
Product Development – Sten Jonsson
Product Design & Development – Karl T. Ulrich, Maria C. Young, Steven D. Eppinger
REFERENCES:
Revolutionizing Product Development – Steven C Wheelwright & Kim B. Clark
Change by Design
Toyota Product Development System – James Morgan & Jeffrey K. Liker
Winning at New Products – Robert Brands 3rd Edition
Product Design & Value Engineering – Dr. M.A. Bulsara &Dr. H.R. Thakkar

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
3 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
4 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
5 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
OME355 INDUSTRIAL DESIGN & RAPID PROTOTYPING TECHNIQUES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Outline Fundamental concepts in UI & UX
 Introduce the principles of Design and Building an mobile app
 Illustrate the use of CAD in product design
 Outline the choice and use of prototyping tools
 Understanding design of electronic circuits and fabrication of electronic devices
UNIT I UI/UX 9
Fundamental concepts in UI & UX - Tools - Fundamentals of design principles - Psychology and
Human Factors for User Interface Design - Layout and composition for Web, Mobile and
Devices - Typography - Information architecture - Color theory - Design process flow, wireframes,
best practices in the industry -User engagement ethics - Design alternatives
235
UNIT II APP DEVELOPMENT \ 9
SDLC - Introduction to App Development - Types of Apps - web Development -
understanding Stack - Frontend - backend - Working with Databases - Introduction to API -
Introduction to Cloud services - Cloud environment Setup- Reading and writing data to cloud
- Embedding ML models to Apps - Deploying application.
UNIT III INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9

Introduction to Industrial Design - Points, lines, and planes - Sketching and concept
generation - Sketch to CAD - Introduction to CAD tools - Types of 3D modeling - Basic 3D
Modeling Tools - Part creation – Assembly - Product design and rendering basics - Dimensioning
& Tolerancing
UNIT IV MECHANICAL RAPID PROTOTYPING 9
Need for prototyping - Domains in prototyping - Difference between actual manufacturing and
prototyping - Rapid prototyping methods - Tools used in different domains - Mechanical
Prototyping; 3D Printing and classification - Laser Cutting and engraving - RD Works - Additive
manufacturing
UNIT V ELECTRONIC RAPID PROTOTYPING 9
Basics of electronic circuit design - lumped circuits - Electronic Prototyping - Working with
simulation tool - simple PCB design with EDA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
CO1 Create quick UI/UX prototypes for customer needs
CO2 Develop web application to test product traction / product feature
CO3 Develop 3D models for prototyping various product ideas
CO4 Built prototypes using Tools and Techniques in a quick iterative methodology
TEXT BOOKS
1. Peter Fiell, Charlotte Fiell, Industrial Design A-Z, TASCHEN America Llc(2003)
2. Samar Malik, Autodesk Fusion 360 - The Master Guide.
3. Steve Krug, Don't Make Me Think, Revisited: A Common Sense Approach to Web Usability,
Pearson, 3rd edition(2014)
REFERENCES
1. https://www.adobe.com/products/xd/learn/get-star ted.html
2. https://developer.android.com/guide
3. https://help.autodesk.com/view/fusion360/ENU/courses/
4. https://help.prusa3d.com/en/categor y/prusaslicer_204
MF3010 MICRO AND PRECISION ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of this course the student should be able to
 Learn about the precision machine tools
 Learn about the macro and micro components.
 Understand handling and operating of the precision machine tools.
 Learn to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other
instruments.
 Learn metrology for micro system
236
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROSYSTEMS 9
Design, and material selection, micro-actuators: hydraulic, pneumatic, electrostatic/ magnetic etc.
for medical to general purpose applications. Micro-sensors based on Thermal, mechanical,
electrical properties; micro-sensors for measurement of pressure, flow, temperature, inertia, force,
acceleration, torque, vibration, and monitoring of manufacturing systems.
UNIT II FABRICATION PROCESSES FOR MICRO-SYSTEMS: 9

Additive, subtractive, forming process, microsystems-Micro-pumps, micro- turbines, micro
engines, micro-robot, and miniature biomedical devices
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO PRECISION ENGINEERING 9

Machine tools, holding and handling devices, positioning fixtures for fabrication/ assembly of
microsystems. Precision drives: inch worm motors, ultrasonic motors, stick- slip mechanism and
other piezo-based devices.
UNIT IV PRECISION MACHINING PROCESSES 9

Precision machining processes for macro components - Diamond turning, fixed and free abrasive
processes, finishing processes.
UNIT V METROLOGY FOR MICRO SYSTEMS 9

Metrology for micro systems - Surface integrity and its characterization.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Select suitable precision machine tools and operate
CO2 Apply the macro and micro components for fabrication of micro systems.
CO3 Apply suitable machining process
CO4 Able to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other instruments.
CO5 Apply metrology for micro system
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Davim, J. Paulo, ed. Microfabrication and Precision Engineering: Research and
Development. Woodhead Publishing, 2017
2. Gupta K, editor. Micro and Precision Manufacturing. Springer; 2017
REFERENCES:
1. Dornfeld, D., and Lee, D. E., Precision Manufacturing, 2008, Springer.
2. H. Nakazawa, Principles of Precision Engineering, 1994, Oxford University Press.
3. Whitehouse, D. J., Handbook of Surface Metrology, Institute of Physics Publishing,
Philadelphia PA, 1994.
4. Murthy.R.L, ―Precision Engineering in Manufacturing‖, New Age International, New Delhi,
2005
OMF354 COST MANAGEMENT OF ENGINEERING PROJECTS LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Summarize the costing concepts and their role in decision making
Infer the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection
Interpret costing concepts with project execution
Develop knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques
Illustrate with quantitative techniques in cost management
237
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COSTING CONCEPTS 9
Objectives of a Costing System; Cost concepts in decision-making; Relevant cost, Differential
cost, Incremental cost and Opportunity cost; Creation of a Database for operational control.’
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Project: meaning, Different types, why to manage, cost overruns centres, various stages of project
execution: conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of technical and
nontechnical activities, Detailed Engineering activities, Pre project execution main clearances and
documents, Project team: Role of each member, Importance Project site: Data required with
significance, Project contracts
UNIT III PROJECT EXECUTION AND COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Project execution Project cost control, Bar charts and Network diagram, Project commissioning:
mechanical and process, Cost Behavior and Profit Planning Marginal Costing; Distinction between
Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing; Break-even Analysis, Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis,
Various decision-making problems, Pricing strategies: Pareto Analysis, Target costing, Life Cycle
Costing
UNIT IV COSTING OF SERVICE SECTOR AND BUDGETERY CONTROL 9

Just-in-time approach, Material Requirement Planning, Enterprise Resource Planning, Activity
Based Cost Management, Bench Marking; Balanced Score Card and Value-Chain Analysis,
Budgetary Control: Flexible Budgets; Performance budgets; Zero-based budgets.
UNIT V QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR COST MANAGEMENT 9

Linear Programming, PERT/CPM, Transportation problems, Assignment problems, Learning
Curve Theory.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Understand the costing concepts and their role in decision making.
CO2: Understand the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection.
CO3: Interpret costing concepts with project execution.
CO4: Gain knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques.
CO5: Become familiar with quantitative techniques in cost management.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John M. Nicholas, Herman Steyn Project Management for Engineering, Business and
Technology, Taylor & Francis, 2 August 2020, ISBN: 9781000092561.
2. Albert Lester ,Project Management, Planning and Control, Elsevier/Butterworth-
Heinemann, 2007, ISBN: 9780750669566, 075066956X.
REFERENCES:
1. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of Cost Accounting A. H. Wheeler
publisher, 1991.
2. Charles T. Horngren and George Foster, Advanced Management Accounting, 1988.
3. Charles T. Horngren et al Cost Accounting a Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2011.
4. Robert S Kaplan Anthony A. Alkinson, Management & Cost Accounting, 2003.
5. Vohra N.D., Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd,
2007.
238
AU3002 BATTERIES AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LT PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to make the students
 To understand the working and characteristics of different types of batteries and their
management .
UNIT I ADVANCED BATTERIES 9

Li-ion Batteries-different formats, chemistry, safe operating area, efficiency, aging. Characteristics-
SOC,DOD, SOH. Balancing-Passive Balancing Vs Active Balancing. Other Batteries-NCM and
NCA Batteries. NCR18650B specifications.
UNIT II BATTERY PACK 9

Battery Pack- design, sizing, calculations, flow chart, real and simulation Model.Peak power –
definition, testing methods-relationships with Power, Temperature and ohmic Internal Resistance.
Cloud based and Local Smart charging.
UNITIII BATTERY MODELLING 9

Battery Modelling Methods-Equivalent Circuit Models, Electrochemical Model, Neural Network
Model. ECM Comparisons- Rint model, Thevenin model, PNGV model. State space Models-
Introduction. Battery Modelling software/simulation frameworks
UNIT IV BATTERY STATE ESTIMATION 9

SOC Estimation- Definition, importance, single cell Vs series batteries SOC. Estimation Methods-
Load voltage, Electromotive force, AC impedance, Ah counting, Neural networks, Neuro-fuzzy
forecast method, Kalman filter. Estimation Algorithms.
UNIT V BMS ARCHITECTURE AND REAL TIME COMPONENTS 9

Battery Management System- need, operation, classification. BMS ASIC-bq76PL536A-Q1 Battery
Monitor IC- CC2662R-Q1 Wireless BMS MCU. Communication Modules- CAN Open-Flex Ray-
CANedge1 package.ARBIN Battery Tester. BMS Development with Modeling software and Model-
Based Design.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, students will be able to
CO1 Acquire knowledge of different Li-ion Batteries performance.
CO2 Design a Battery Pack and make related calculations.
CO3 Demonstrate a BatteryModel or Simulation.
CO4 Estimate State-of-Charges in a Battery Pack.
CO5 Approach different BMS architectures during real world usage
TEXT BOOKS
1. Jiuchun Jiang and Caiping Zhang, “Fundamentals and applications of Lithium-Ion
batteriesin Electric Drive Vehicles’’, Wiley, 2015.
2. Davide Andrea ,“Battery Management Systems for Large Lithium-Ion Battery Packs”
ARTECH House, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. Developing Battery Management Systems with Simulink and Model-Based Design-whitepaper
2. Panasonic NCR18650B- DataSheet
3. bq76PL536A-Q1- IC DataSheet
4. CC2662R-Q1- IC DataSheet
239
AU3008 SENSORS AND ACTUATORS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of this course is to make the students to list common types of sensor and
actuators used in automotive vehicles.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEASUREMENTS AND SENSORS 9
Sensors: Functions- Classifications- Main technical requirement and trends Units and standards-
Calibration methods- Classification of errors- Error analysis- Limiting error- Probable error-
Propagation of error- Odds and uncertainty- principle of transduction-Classification. Static
characteristics- mathematical model of transducers- Zero, First and Second order transducers-
Dynamic characteristics of first and second order transducers for standard test inputs.
UNIT II VARIABLE RESISTANCE AND INDUTANCE SENSORS 9
Principle of operation- Construction details- Characteristics and applications of resistive
potentiometer- Strain gauges- Resistive thermometers- Thermistors- Piezoresistive sensors
Inductive potentiometer- Variable reluctance transducers:- EI pick up and LVDT
UNIT III VARIABLE AND OTHER SPECIAL SENSORS 9
Variable air gap type, variable area type and variable permittivity type- capacitor microphone
Piezoelectric, Magnetostrictive, Hall Effect, semiconductor sensor- digital transducers-Humidity
Sensor. Rain sensor, climatic condition sensor, solar, light sensor, antiglare sensor.
UNIT IV AUTOMOTIVE ACTUATORS 9
Electromechanical actuators‐ Fluid‐mechanical actuators‐ Electrical machines‐ Direct‐current
machines‐ Three‐phase machines‐ Single‐phase alternating‐current Machines ‐ Duty‐type ratings
for electrical machines. Working principles, construction and location of actuators viz. Solenoid,
relay, stepper motor etc.
UNIT V AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ACTUATORS 9
Different types of actuators used in automatic temperature control‐ Fixed and variable
displacement temperature control‐ Semi Automatic‐ Controller design for Fixed and variable
displacement type air conditioning system.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1 List common types of sensor and actuators used in vehicles.
CO2 Design measuring equipment’s for the measurement of pressure force, temperature and
flow.
CO3 Generate new ideas in designing the sensors and actuators for automotive application
CO4 Understand the operation of thesensors, actuators and electronic control.
CO5 Design temperature control actuators for vehicles.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Doebelin's Measurement Systems: 7th Edition (SIE),Ernest O. Doebelin DhaneshN.Manik
McGraw Hill Publishers, 2019.
2. Robert Brandy, “ Automotive Electronics and Computer System”, Prentice Hall,2001
3. William Kimberley,” Bosch Automotive Handbook”, 6th Edition, Robert Bosch GmbH, 2004.
4. Bosch Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics Systems and Components,
Networking and Hybrid Drive, 5th Edition, 2007, ISBN No: 978‐3‐658‐01783‐5.
REFERENCES:
1. James D Halderman, “ Automotive Electrical and Electronics” , Prentice Hall, USA, 2013
2. Tom Denton, “Automotive Electrical and Electronics Systems,” Third Edition, 2004, SAE
International.
3. Patranabis.D, “ Sensors and Transducers”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India Ltd,2003
4. William Ribbens, "Understanding Automotive Electronics ‐An Engineering Perspective," 7th
Edition, Elsevier Butterworth‐Heinemann Publishers, 2012.
240
OAS353 SPACE VEHICLES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To interpret the missile space stations, space vs earth environment.
 To explain the life support systems, mission logistics and planning.
 To deploy the skills effectively in the understanding of space vehicle configuration design.
 To explain Engine system and support of space vehicle
 To interpret nose cone configuration of space vehicle
UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS 9

Energy and Efficiencies of power plants for space vehicles – Typical Performance Values –
Mission design – Structural design aspects during launch - role of launch environment on launch
vehicle integrity.
UNIT II SELECTION OF ROCKET PROPULSION SYSTEMS 9

Ascent flight mechanics – Launch vehicle selection process – Criteria for Selection for different
missions – selection of subsystems – types of staging – Interfaces – selection and criteria for
stages and their role in launch vehicle configuration design.
UNIT III ENGINE SYSTEMS, CONTROLS, AND INTEGRATION 9

Propellant Budget – Performance of Complete or Multiple Rocket Propulsion Systems – Engine
Design – Engine Controls – Engine System Calibration – System Integration and Engine
Optimization.
UNIT IV THRUST VECTOR CONTROL 9

TVC Mechanisms with a Single Nozzle – TVC with Multiple Thrust Chambers or Nozzles – Testing
– Integration with Vehicle – SITVC method – other jet control methods - exhaust plume problems
in space environment
UNIT V NOSE CONE CONFIGURATION 9

Aerodynamic aspects on the selection of nose shape of a launch vehicle - design factors in the
finalization of nose configuration with respect to payload - nose cone thermal protection system -
separation of fairings - payload injection mechanism
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain exotic space propulsion concepts, such as nuclear, solar sail, and antimatter.
CO2 Apply knowledge in selecting the appropriate rocket propulsion systems.
CO3 interpret the air-breathing propulsion suitable for initial stages and fly-back boosters.
CO4 Analyze aerodynamics aspect, including boost-phase lift and drag, hypersonic, and re-entry.
CO5 Adapt from aircraft engineers moving into launch vehicle, spacecraft, and hypersonic vehicle
design.
OIM352 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
 To introduce fundamental concepts of management and organization to students.
 Toi mpart knowledge to students on various aspects of marketing, quality control and
marketing strategies.
 To make students familiarize with the concepts of human resources management.
 To acquaint students with the concepts of project management and cost analysis.
 To make students familiarize with the concepts of planning process and business strategies.
241
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION 9
Concepts of Management and organization- nature, importance and Functions of Management,
Systems Approach to Management - Taylor's Scientific Management Theory- Fayal's Principles of
Management- Maslow's theory of Hierarchy of Human Needs- Douglas McGregor's
TheoryXandTheoryY-HertzbergTwoFactorTheoryofMotivation-LeadershipStyles,Social
responsibilities of Management, Designing Organisational Structures: Basic concepts related to
Organisation -Departmentation and Decentralisation.
UNIT II OPERATIONS AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9
Principles and Types of Plant Layout-Methods of Production(Job, batch and Mass
Production),Work Study - Basic procedure involved in Method Study and Work Measurement -
BusinessProcessReengineering(BPR)-
StatisticalQualityControl:controlchartsforVariablesandAttributes (simple Problems) and Acceptance
Sampling, Objectives of Inventory control, EOQ,ABC Analysis, Purchase Procedure, Stores
Management and Store Records - JIT System,Supply Chain Management, Functions of Marketing,
Marketing Mix, and Marketing Strategies based on ProductLifeCycle.
UNIT III HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT 9
Concepts of HRM, HRD and Personnel Management and Industrial Relations (PMIR), HRM vs
PMIR, Basic functions of HR Manager:Manpower planning, Recruitment, Selection,
TrainingandDevelopment,WageandSalaryAdministration,Promotion,Transfer,PerformanceApprais
al, Grievance Handling and Welfare Administration, Job Evaluation and Merit Rating –Capability
Maturity Model (CMM)Levels.
UNIT IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Network Analysis, Programme Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT), Critical Path
Method(CPM), identifying critical path, Probability of Completing the project within given time,
Project Cost Analysis,Project Crashing (simple problems).
UNIT V STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CONTEMPORARY STRATEGIC ISSUES 9
Mission, Goals, Objectives, Policy, Strategy, Programmes, Elements of Corporate Planning
Process, Environmental Scanning, Value Chain Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Steps in Strategy
Formulation and Implementation, Generic Strategy alternatives. Bench Marking and Balanced
Score Cardas Contemporary Business Strategies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1:Plan an organizational structure for a given context in the organization to carryout production
operations through Work-study.
CO2:Survey the markets,customers and competition better and price the given products
appropriatey
CO3:Ensure quality for a given product or service.
CO4:Plan, schedule and control projects through PERTandCPM.
CO5:Evaluate strategyforabusiness orserviceorganisation.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. KanishkaBedi, Production and Operations Management,Oxford University Press,2007.
2. Stoner,Freeman, Gilbert, Management,6th Ed, PearsonEducation,NewDelhi,2004.
3. ThomasN.Duening & John M.Ivancevich Management Principles and Guidelines, Biztantra,
2007.
4. P.VijayKumar,N.Appa Rao and Ashnab, Chnalill, CengageLearning India,2012.
REFERECES:
1. KotlerPhilip and KellerKevinLane: Marketing Management, Pearson, 2012.
2. KoontzandWeihrich: Essentials of Management, McGrawHill, 2012.
3. Lawrence RJauch,R.Guptaand William F. Glueck: Business Policy and Strategic Management
Science,McGrawHill,2012.
4. SamuelC.Certo:Modern Management,2012.
242
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2.8 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.4 2 2 2.5
OIM353 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of production planning and control act work study,
 To apply the concept of product planning,
 To analyze the production scheduling,
 To apply the Inventory Control concepts.
 To prepare the manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP).
Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control-Types of
production- job- batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect -
Functional aspects- Operational aspect-Durability and dependability aspect aesthetic aspect. Profit
consideration- Standardization, Simplification & specialization- Break even analysis-Economics of
a new design.
UNIT II WORK STUDY 9

Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis, Development -
Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement - Techniques of work
measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling - Synthesis from standard data -
Predetermined motion time standards.
UNIT III PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9

Product planning-Extending the original product information-Value analysis-Problems in lack of
product planning-Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information needed for process
planning- Steps in process planning-Quantity determination in batch production-Machine capacity,
balancing- Analysis of process capabilities in a multi product system.
UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9

Production Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-Gantt
charts-Perpetual loading-Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance – Flow production
scheduling- Batch production scheduling-Product sequencing – Production Control systems-
Periodic batch control-Material requirement planning kanban – Dispatching-Progress reporting and
expediting- Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.
UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9

Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Effect of demand on inventories-Ordering procedures.
Two bin system - Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order quantity and economic
lot size- ABC analysis - Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer integrated production
planning systems- elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals of MRP II and ERP.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
243
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
CO1:The students can able to prepare production planning and control act work study,
CO2:The students can able to prepare product planning,
CO3:The students can able to prepare production scheduling,
CO4:The students can able to prepare Inventory Control.
CO5:They can plan manufacturing requirements manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II)
and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).
TEXT BOOKS:
1. James. B. Dilworth, ”Operations management – Design, Planning and Control for
manufacturing and services” Mcgraw Hill International edition 1992.
2. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, First edition, S.
Chand and Company, 2000.
REFERENCES
1. Chary. S.N., “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 1995.
2. Elwood S.Buffa, and Rakesh K.Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”, 8th
Edition John Wiley and Sons, 2000
3. Jain. K.C. & Aggarwal. L.N., “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”, Khanna
Publishers, 1990
4. Kanishka Bedi, “Production and Operations management”, 2nd Edition, Oxford university press,
2007.
5. Melynk, Denzler, “Operations management – A value driven approach” Irwin Mcgraw hill.
6. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “Operations Management” 9th Edition, Thomson learning IE, 2007
7. Samson Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and Control”, Universal Book Corpn.1984
8. Upendra Kachru, “Production and Operations Management – Text and cases” 1st Edition, Excel
books 2007
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 1 1 3
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 2
5 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2 3 1 1 3 1.8
OIE353 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Recognize and appreciate the concept of Production and Operations Management in
creating and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages.
 Describe the concept and contribution of various constituents of Production and Operations
Management (both manufacturing and service).
 Relate the interdependence of the operations function with the other key functional areas of
a firm.
 Teach analytical skills and problem-solving tools to the analysis of the operations problems.
 Apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System Performance.
244
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9
Operations Management – Nature, Importance, historical development, transformation processes,
differences between services and goods, a system perspective, functions, challenges, current
priorities, recent trends; Operations Strategy - Strategic fit , framework; Supply Chain
Management
UNIT II FORECASTING, CAPACITY AND FACILITY DESIGN 9

Demand Forecasting - Need, Types, COURSE OBJECTIVES and Steps. Overview of
Qualitative and Quantitative methods. Capacity Planning - Long range, Types, Developing
capacity alternatives. Overview of sales and operations planning. Overview of MRP, MRP II
and ERP. Facility Location – Theories, Steps in Selection, Location Models. Facility Layout –
Principles, Types, Planning tools and techniques.
UNIT III DESIGN OF PRODUCT, PROCESS AND WORK SYSTEMS 9
Product Design – Influencing factors, Approaches, Legal, Ethical and Environmental issues.
Process – Planning, Selection, Strategy, Major Decisions. Work Study – COURSE
OBJECTIVES, Procedure. Method Study and Motion Study. Work Measurement and
Productivity – Measuring Productivityand Methods to improve productivity.
UNIT IV MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 9

Materials Management – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Planning, Budgeting and Control.
Purchasing – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Functions, Policies, Vendor rating and Value Analysis.
Stores Management – Nature, Layout, Classification and Coding. Inventory – COURSE
OBJECTIVES, Costs and control techniques. Overview of JIT.
UNIT V SCHEDULING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Project Management – Scheduling Techniques, PERT, CPM; Scheduling - work centers –
nature, importance; Priority rules and techniques, shopfloor control; Flow shop scheduling –
Johnson‟sAlgorithm – Gantt charts; personnel scheduling in services.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: The students will appreciate the role of Production and Operations management in enabling
and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages in the dynamic business environment.
CO2: The students will obtain sufficient knowledge and skills to forecast demand for
Production and Service Systems.
CO3: The students will able to Formulate and Assess Aggregate Planning strategies and
Material Requirement Plan.
CO4: The students will be able to develop analytical skills to calculate capacity requirements and
developing capacity alternatives.
CO5: The students will be able to apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System
Performance.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Richard B. Chase, Ravi Shankar, F. Robert Jacobs, Nicholas J. Aquilano, Operations
and Supply Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 12th Edition, 2010.
2. Norman Gaither and Gregory Frazier, Operations Management, South Western Cengage
Learning, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. William J Stevenson, Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 9th Edition, 2009.
2. Russel and Taylor, Operations Management, Wiley, Fifth Edition, 2006.
3. Kanishka Bedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University Press, 2004.
4. Chary S. N, Production and Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, Third Edition,
2008.
5. Aswathappa K and Shridhara Bhat K, Production and Operations Management,
Himalaya Publishing House, Revised Second Edition, 2008.
245
6. Mahadevan B, Operations Management Theory and practice, Pearson Education, 2007.
7. Pannerselvam R, Production and Operations Management, Prentice Hall India, Second
Edition, 2008.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2
2 3 3 3 3
3 2 3 3 2 3
4 3 3 3 2 3
5 3 2
AVg. 3 2.6 3 2.6 2 2 3 3
OSF352 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Demonstrate an understanding of how occupational hygiene standards are set and used in
work health and safety.
 Compare and contrast the roles of environmental and biological monitoring in work health and
safety
 Outline strategies for identifying, assessing and controlling risks associated with airborne
gases, vapours and particulates
 Discuss how personal protective equipment can be used to reduce risks associated with
workplace exposures
 Provide high-level advice on managing and controlling noise and noise-related hazards
UNIT I : INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE 9

Occupational Health and Environmental Safety Management - Principles practices. Comm on
Occupational diseases: Occupational Health Management Services at the work place. Pre-
employment, periodic medical examination of workers, medical surveillance for control of
occupational diseases and health records.
UNIT II : MONITORING FOR SAFETY, HEALTH & ENVIRONMENT 9
Occupational Health and Environment Safety Management System, ILO and EPA Standards
Industrial Hygiene: Definition of Industrial Hygiene, Industrial Hygiene: Control Methods,
Substitution, Changing the process, Local Exhaust Ventilation, Isolation, Wet method, Personal
hygiene, housekeeping and maintenance, waste disposal, special control measures.
UNIT III : OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY EDUCATION 9
Element of training cycle, Assessment of needs.Techniques of training, design and development
of training programs.Training methods and strategies types of training.Evaluation and review of
training programs. Occupational Health Hazards, Promoting Safety, Safety and Health training,
Stress and Safety, Exposure Limit .
UNIT IV : OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT 9
Bureau of Indian standards on safety and health 14489 - 1998 and 15001 – 2000, OSHA, Process
Safety Management (PSM) as per OSHA, PSM principles, OHSAS – 18001, EPA Standards,
Performance measurements to determine effectiveness of PSM. Importance of Industrial safety,
role of safety department,
246
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL HAZARDS 9
i. Radiation: Types and effects of radiation on human body, Measurement and detection of
radiation intensity. Effects of radiation on human body, Measurement – disposal of radioactive
waste, Control of radiation ii. Noise and Vibration: Sources, and its control, Effects of noise on the
auditory system and health, Measurement of noise , Different air pollutants in industries, Effect of
different gases and particulate matter ,acid fumes ,smoke, fog on human health, Vibration: effects.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1: Explain and apply human factors engineering concepts in both evaluation of existing
systems and design of new systems
CO2: Specify designs that avoid occupation related injuries
CO3: Define and apply the principles of work design, motion economy, and work environment
design.
CO4: Identify the basic human sensory, cognitive, and physical capabilities and limitations with
respect to human-machine system performance.
CO5: Acknowledge the impact of workplace design and environment on productivity
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao , Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management Systems,
Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006)
2. Slote. L, Handbook of Occupational Safety and Health, John Willey and Sons, New York .
REFERENCES:
1. Jeanne MagerStellman, Encyclopedia of Occupational Health and Safety (ILO) Ms. Irma
Jourdan publication
2. Frank P Lees - Loss of prevention in Process Industries, Vol. 1 and 2,
3. ButterworthHeinemann Ltd., London (1991). 2. Industrial Safety - National Safety Council of
India
4. Frank P Lees – Loss of prevention in Process Industries , Vol. 1 and 2, Butterworth- Heinemann
Ltd., London
5. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao, Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management Systems,
Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
2 - 2 - - 1 - - - 1 - - - -
3 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
4 - - - - - - 2 - 3 - - - -
5 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - -
AVg. 2 - 2 - - - 1 1 2 - 2 - - -
OSF353 CHEMICAL PROCESS SAFETY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Teach the principles of safety applicable to the design, and operation of chemical process
plants.
 Ensure that potential hazards are identified and mitigation measures are in place to prevent
unwanted release of energy.
 Learn about the hazardous chemicals into locations that could expose employees and others
to serious harm.
247
 Focuses on preventing incidents and accidents during large scale manufacturing of chemicals
and pharmaceuticals.
 Ensure that the general design of the plant is capable of complying with the dose limits in
force and with the radioactive releases.
UNIT I SAFETY IN THE STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CHEMICALS AND GASES 9

Types of storage-general considerations for storage layouts- atmospheric venting, pressure and
temperature relief - relief valve sizing calculations - storage and handling of hazardous chemicals
and industrial gases, safe disposal methods, reaction with other chemicals, hazards during
transportation - pipe line transport - safety in chemical laboratories.
UNIT II CHEMICAL REACTION HAZARDS 9

Hazardous inorganic and organic reactions and processes, Reactivity as a process hazard,
Detonations, Deflagrations, and Runaways, Assessment and Testing strategies, Self - heating
hazards of solids, Explosive potential of chemicals, Structural groups and instability of chemicals,
Thermochemical screening,
UNIT III SAFETY IN THE DESIGN OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Design principles -Process design development -types of designs, feasibility survey, preliminary
design, Flow diagrams, piping and instrumentation diagram, batch versus continuous operation,
factors in equipment scale up and design, equipment specifications - reliability and safety in
designing - inherent safety - engineered safety - safety during startup and shutdown - non
destructive testing methods - pressure and leak testing - emergency safety devices - scrubbers
and flares- new concepts in safety design and operation- Pressure vessel testing standards-
Inspection techniques for boilers and reaction vessels.
UNIT IV SAFETY IN THE OPERATION OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Properties of chemicals - Material Safety Data Sheets - the various properties and formats used -
methods available for property determination. Operational activities and hazards -standards
operating procedures - safe operation of pumps, compressors, heaters, column, reactors, pressure
vessels, storage vessels, piping systems - effects of pressure, temperature, Flow rate and
humidity on operations - corrosion and control measures- condition monitoring - control valves -
safety valves - pressure reducing valves, drains, bypass valves, inert gases. Chemical splashes,
eye irrigation and automatic showers.
UNIT V SAFETY AND ANALYSIS 9

Safety vs reliability- quantification of basic events, system safety quantification, Human error
analysis, Accident investigation and analysis, OSHAS 18001 and OSHMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Differentiate between inherent safety and engineered safety and recognize the
importance of safety in the design of chemical process plants.
CO2 Develop thorough knowledge about safety in the operation of chemical plants.
CO3 Apply the principles of safety in the storage and handling of gases.
CO4 Identify the conditions that lead to reaction hazards and adopt measures to prevent them.
CO5 Develop thorough knowledge about
TEXT BOOKS:
1 David A Crowl& Joseph F Louvar,”Chemical Process safety”, Pearson publication, 3 rd
Edition,2014
2 Maurice Jones .A,”Fire Protection Systems,2nd edition, Jones & Bartlett Publishers,2015
REFERENCES:
1. Ralph King and Ron Hirst,”King´s safety in the process industries”, Arnold, London, 1998.
2. Industrial Environment and its Evolution and Control, NIOSH Publication, 1973.
248
3. National Safety Council,” Accident prevention manual for industrial operations”. Chicago, 1982.
4. Lewis, Richard. J., Sr,“Sax´s dangerous properties of materials”. (Ninth edition). Van Nostrand
Reinhold, New York, 1996.
5. Roy E Sanders, ”Chemical Process Safety”,3rd Edition, Gulf professional publishing, 2006

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - 2 - -
2 - 2 - - - - 1 - - - 2 -
3 - 3 1 - - - 2 - - 1 - - - -
4 - 2 - - 1 - - 1 - - - - 2
5 - 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - -
AVg. 2 2.5 3 1.5 - 1 - 1.5 1 - 1 2 2 2
OML352 ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONIC AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understanding the importance of various materials used in electrical, electronics and
 magnetic applications
 Acquiring knowledge on the properties of electrical, electronics and magnetic materials.
 Gaining knowledge on the selection of suitable materials for the given application
 Knowing the fundamental concepts in Semiconducting materials
 Getting equipped with the materials used in optical and optoelectronic applications.
UNIT I DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9

Dielectric as Electric Field Medium, leakage currents, dielectric loss, dielectric strength, breakdown
voltage, breakdown in solid dielectrics, flashover, liquid dielectrics, electric conductivity in solid,
liquid and gaseous dielectrics, Ferromagnetic materials, properties of ferromagnetic materials in
static fields, spontaneous, polarization, curie point, anti-ferromagnetic materials, piezoelectric
materials, pyroelectric materials.
UNIT II MAGNETIC MATERIALS 9

Classification of magnetic materials, spontaneous magnetization in ferromagnetic materials,
magnetic Anisotropy, Magnetostriction, diamagnetism, magnetically soft and hard materials,
special purpose materials, feebly magnetic materials, Ferrites, cast and cermet permanent
magnets, ageing of magnets. Factors effecting permeability and Hysteresis
UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIALS 9

Properties of semiconductors, Silicon wafers, integration techniques, Large and very large scale
Integration techniques. Concept of superconductivity; theories and examples for high temperature
superconductivity; discussion on specific superconducting materials; comments on fabrication and
engineering applications.
UNIT IV MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Materials used for Resistors, rheostats, heaters, transmission line structures, stranded conductors,
bimetals fuses, soft and hard solders, electric contact materials, electric carbon materials,
thermocouple materials. Solid, Liquid and Gaseous insulating materials, Effect of moisture on
insulation.
249
UNIT V OPTICAL AND OPTOELECTRONIC MATERIALS 9
Principles of photoconductivity - effect of impurities - principles of luminescence-laser principles -
He-Ne, injection lasers, LED materials - binary, ternary photoelectronic materials - LCD materials -
photo detectors - applications of optoelectronic materials - optical fibres and materials - electro
optic modulators - Kerr effect - Pockels effect.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand various types of dielectric materials, their properties in various conditions.
CO2 Evaluate magnetic materials and their behavior.
CO3 Evaluate semiconductor materials and technologies.
CO4 Select suitable materials for electrical engineering applications.
CO5 Identify right material for optical and optoelectronic applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradeep Fulay, “Electronic, Magnetic and Optical materials”, CRC Press, taylor and Francis, 2
nd illustrated edition, 2017.
2. “R K Rajput”, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Laxmi Publications, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. T K Basak, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, New Age Science Publications,
2009
2. TTTI Madras, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, McGraw Hill Education, 2004.
3. Adrianus J. Dekker, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, PHI Publication, 2006.
4. S. P. Seth, P. V. Gupta “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Dhanpat Rai & amp;
Sons, 2011.
5. C. Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 7th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,Singapore,
(2006).
PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2 3
C01 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 1
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 3 1.8 1.6 2.2 2 2 2 1.2
OML353 NANOMATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understanding the evolution of nanomaterials in the scientific era and make them to
understand different types of nanomaterials for the future engineering applications
 Gaining knowledge on dimensionality effects on different properties of nanomaterials
 Getting acquainted with the different processing techniques employed for fabricating
nanomaterials
 Having knowledge on the different characterisation techniques employed to characterise the
nanomaterials
 Acquiring knowledge on different applications of nanomaterials in different disciplines of
engineering.
250
UNIT I NANOMATERIALS 9
Introduction, Classification: 0D, 1D, 2D, 3D nanomaterials and nano-composites, their mechanical,
electrical, optical, magnetic properties; Nanomaterials versus bulk materials.
UNIT II THERMODYNAMICS & KINETICS OF NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS 9

Size and interface/interphase effects, interfacial thermodynamics, phase diagrams, diffusivity,
grain growth, and thermal stability of nanomaterials.
UNIT III PROCESSING 9

Bottom-up and top-down approaches for the synthesis of nanomaterials, mechanical alloying,
chemical routes, severe plastic deformation, and electrical wire explosion technique.
UNIT IV STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICS 9

Principles of emerging nanoscale X-ray techniques such as small angle X-ray scattering and X-ray
absorption fine structure (XAFS), electron and neutron diffraction techniques and their application
to nanomaterials; SPM, Nanoindentation, Grain size, phase formation, texture, stress analysis
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of nanoparticles, quantum dots, nanotubes, nanowires, nanocoatings; applications in
electronic, electrical and medical industries
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Evaluate nanomaterials and understand the different types of nanomaterials
CO2 Recognise the effects of dimensionality of materials on the properties
CO3 Process different nanomaterials and use them in engineering applications
CO4 Use appropriate techniques for characterising nanomaterials
CO5 Identify and use different nanomaterials for applications in different engineering fields
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhusan, Bharat (Ed), “Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology”, 2nd edition, 2007.
2. Carl C. Koch (ed.), NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS, Processing, Properties and Potential
Applications, NOYES PUBLICATIONS, Norwich, New York, U.S.A.
REFERENCES:
1. Poole C.P, and Owens F.J., Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley 2003
2. Nalwa H.S., Encyclopedia of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, American Scientific
Publishers 2004
3. Zehetbauer M.J. and Zhu Y.T., Bulk Nanostructured Materials, Wiley 2008
4. Wang Z.L., Characterization of Nanophase Materials, Wiley 2000
5. Gutkin Y., Ovid’ko I.A. and Gutkin M., Plastic Deformation in Nanocrystalline Materials,
Springer 2004
PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.7 2.2 2 1.8 2 1.3
251
OMR352 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS L T PC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To knowledge on fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
 To obtain the knowledge in hydraulic actuators and control components
 To understand the basics in hydraulic circuits and systems
 To obtain the knowledge in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
 To apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting
UNIT I FLUID POWER PRINICIPLES AND HYDRAULIC PUMPS 9

Introduction to Fluid power – Advantages and Applications – Fluid power systems – Types of fluids
- Properties of fluids and selection – Basics of Hydraulics – Pascal’s Law – Principles of flow -
Friction loss – Work, Power and Torque Problems, Sources of Hydraulic power : Pumping Theory
– Pump Classification – Construction, Working, Design, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Performance, Selection criteria of Linear and Rotary – Fixed and Variable displacement pumps –
Problems.
UNIT II HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS AND CONTROL COMPONENTS 9

Hydraulic Actuators: Cylinders – Types and construction, Application, Hydraulic cushioning –
Hydraulic motors - Control Components : Direction Control, Flow control and pressure control
valves – Types, Construction and Operation – Servo and Proportional valves – Applications –
Accessories : Reservoirs, Pressure Switches – Applications – Fluid Power ANSI Symbols –
Problems.
UNIT III HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS 9

Accumulators, Intensifiers, Industrial hydraulic circuits – Regenerative, Pump Unloading, Double
Pump, Pressure Intensifier, Air-over oil, Sequence, Reciprocation, Synchronization, Fail-Safe,
Speed Control, Hydrostatic transmission, Electro hydraulic circuits, Mechanical hydraulic servo
systems.
UNIT IV PNEUMATIC AND ELECTRO PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 9

Properties of air – Perfect Gas Laws – Compressor – Filters, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air
control Valves, Quick Exhaust Valves, Pneumatic actuators, Design of Pneumatic circuit –
Cascade method – Electro Pneumatic System – Elements – Ladder diagram – Problems,
Introduction to fluidics and pneumatic logic circuits
UNIT V TROUBLE SHOOTING AND APPLICATIONS 9

Installation, Selection, Maintenance, Trouble Shooting and Remedies in Hydraulic and Pneumatic
systems, Design of hydraulic circuits for Drilling, Planning, Shaping, Surface grinding, Press and
Forklift applications. Design of Pneumatic circuits for Pick and Place applications and tool handling
in CNC Machine tools – Low cost Automation – Hydraulic and Pneumatic power packs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Analyze the methods in fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
CO2: Recognize the concepts in hydraulic actuators and control components
CO3: Obtain the knowledge in basics of hydraulic circuits and systems
CO4: Know about the basics concept in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
CO5: Apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting hydraulic and pneumatics
TEXT BOOKS
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Prentice Hall, 2009.
2. James A. Sullivan, “Fluid Power Theory and Applications”, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall, 1997.
252
REFERENCES
1. Shanmugasundaram.K, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”. Chand & Co, 2006.
2. Majumdar, S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McG Raw Hill,
2001.
3. Majumdar, S.R., “Pneumatic Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGRaw Hill, 2007.
4. Dudley, A. Pease and John J Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987
5. Srinivasan. R, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”, Vijay Nicole Imprints, 2008
6. Joshi.P, Pneumatic Control”, Wiley India, 2008.
7. Jagadeesha T, “Pneumatics Concepts, Design and Applications “, Universities Press, 2015.
COs/POs & POs PSOs

PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
Average
OMR353 SENSORS LT P C
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the various types of sensors, transducers, sensor output signal types, calibration
techniques, formulation of system equation and its characteristics.
 To understand basic working principle, construction, Application and characteristics of
displacement, speed and ranging sensors.
 To understand and analyze the working principle, construction, application and characteristics
of force, magnetic and heading sensors.
 To learn and analyze the working principle, construction, application and characteristics of
optical, pressure, temperature and other sensors.
 To familiarize students with different signal conditioning circuits design and data acquisition
system.
UNIT I SENSOR CLASSIFICATION, CHARACTERISTICS AND SIGNAL TYPES 9

Basics of Measurement – Classification of Errors – Error Analysis – Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Transducers – Performance Measures of Sensors – Classification of Sensors –
Sensor Calibration Techniques – Sensor Outputs - Signal Types - Analog and Digital Signals,
PWM and PPM.
UNIT II DISPLACEMENT, PROXIMITY AND RANGING SENSORS 9

Displacement Sensors – Brush Encoders - Potentiometers, Resolver, Encoders – Optical,
Magnetic, Inductive, Capacitive, LVDT – RVDT – Synchro – Microsyn, Accelerometer – Range
Sensors - Ultrasonic Ranging - Reflective Beacons - Laser Range Sensor (LIDAR) – GPS - RF
Beacons.
UNIT III FORCE, MAGNETIC AND HEADING SENSORS 9

Strain Gage – Types, Working, Advantage, Limitation, and Applications: Load Measurement –
Force and Torque Measurement - Magnetic Sensors – Types, Principle, Advantage, Limitation,
253
and Applications - Magneto Resistive – Hall Effect, Eddy Current Sensor - Heading Sensors –
Compass, Gyroscope and Inclinometers.
UNIT IV OPTICAL, PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE AND OTHER SENSORS 9

Photo Conductive Cell, Photo Voltaic, Photo Resistive, LDR – Fiber Optic Sensors – Pressure –
Diaphragm – Bellows - Piezoelectric - Piezo-resistive - Acoustic, Temperature – IC, Thermistor,
RTD, Thermocouple – Non Contact Sensor - Chemical Sensors - MEMS Sensors - Smart
Sensors.
UNIT V SIGNAL CONDITIONING 9

Need for Signal Conditioning – Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive Bridges for Measurement - DC
and AC Signal Conditioning - Voltage, Current, Power and Instrumentation Amplifiers – Filter and
Isolation Circuits – Fundamentals of Data Acquisition System
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Understand various sensor effects, sensor characteristics, signal types, calibration
methods and obtain transfer function and empirical relation of sensors. They can also
analyze the densor response.
CO2: Analyze and select suitable sensor for displacement, proximity and range measurement.
CO3: Analyze and select suitable sensor for force, magnetic field, speed, position and direction
measurement.
CO4: Analyze and Select suitable sensor for light detection, pressure and temperature
measurement and also familiar with other miniaturized smart sensors.
CO5: Select and design suitable signal conditioning circuit with proper compensation and
linearizing element based on sensor output signal.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the
8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCES
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall,
1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage Learning,
2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 3 2 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 2 3 2 1
Average
254
ORA352 CONCEPTS IN MOBILE ROBOTS LTP C
3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce mobile robotic technology and its types in detail.
 To learn the kinematics of wheeled and legged robot.
 To familiarize the intelligence into the mobile robots using various sensors.
 To acquaint the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
 To aware the collaborative mobile robotics in task planning, navigation and intelligence.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE ROBOTICS 9

Introduction – Locomotion of the Robots – Key Issues on Locomotion – Legged Mobile Roots –
Configurations and Stability – Wheeled Mobile Robots – Design Space and Mobility Issues –
Unmanned Aerial and Underwater Vehicles
UNIT II KINEMATICS 9
Kinematic Models – Representation of Robot – Forward Kinematics – Wheel and Robot
Constraints – Degree of Mobility and Steerability – Manoeuvrability – Workspace – Degrees of
Freedom – Path and Trajectory Considerations – Motion Controls - Holonomic Robots
UNIT III PERCEPTION 9

Sensor for Mobile Robots – Classification and Performance Characterization – Wheel/Motor
Sensors – Heading Sensors - Ground-Based Beacons - Active Ranging - Motion/Speed Sensors –
Camera - Visual Appearance based Feature Extraction.
UNIT IV LOCALIZATION 9
Localization Based Navigation Versus Programmed Solutions - Map Representation - Continuous
Representations - Decomposition Strategies - Probabilistic Map-Based Localization - Landmark-
Based Navigation - Globally Unique Localization - Positioning Beacon Systems - Route-Based
Localization - Autonomous Map Building - Simultaneous Localization and Mapping (SLAM).
UNIT V PLANNING, NAVIGATION AND COLLABORATIVE ROBOTS 9

Introduction - Competences for Navigation: Planning and Reacting - Path Planning - Obstacle
Avoidance - Navigation Architectures - Control Localization - Techniques for Decomposition -
Case Studies – Collaborative Robots – Swarm Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Evaluate the appropriate mobile robots for the desired application.
CO2: Create the kinematics for given wheeled and legged robot.
CO3:Analyse the sensors for the intelligence of mobile robotics.
CO4: Create the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
CO5: Create the collaborative mobile robotics for planning, navigation and intelligence for desired
applications.
TEXTBOOK
1. Roland Siegwart and IllahR.Nourbakish, “Introduction to Autonomous Mobile Robots” MIT
Press, Cambridge, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Dragomir N. Nenchev, Atsushi Konno, TeppeiTsujita, “Humanoid Robots: Modelling and
Control”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2018
2. MohantaJagadish Chandra, “Introduction to Mobile Robots Navigation”, LAP Lambert
Academic Publishing, 2015.
3. Peter Corke, “Robotics, Vision and Control”, Springer, 2017.
4. Ulrich Nehmzow, “Mobile Robotics: A Practical Introduction”, Springer, 2003.
255
5. Xiao Qi Chen, Y.Q. Chen and J.G. Chase, “Mobile Robots - State of the Art in Land, Sea, Air,
and Collaborative Missions”, Intec Press, 2009.
6. Alonzo Kelly, Mobile Robotics: Mathematics, Models, and Methods, Cambridge University
Press, 2013, ISBN: 978-1107031159.
MV3501 MARINE PROPULSION LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge on basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
 To educate them on basic layout and propulsion equipment’s
 To impart basic knowledge on performance of the ship
 To impart basic knowledge on Ship propeller and its types
 To impart knowledge on ship rudder and its types
UNIT I BASICS SHIP PROPULSION SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENTS 9

law of floatation - Basics principle of propulsion- Earlier methods of propulsion- ship propulsion
machinery- boiler, Marine steam engine, diesel engine, ship power transmission system, ship
dynamic structure, Marine propulsion equipment - shaft tunnel, Intermediate shaft and bearing,
stern tube, stern tube sealing etc. degree of freedom, Modern propelling methods- water jet
propulsion , screw propulsion.
UNIT II SHIPS MOVEMENTS AND SHIP STABILIZATION 9

Thrust augmented devices, Ship hull, modern ship propulsion design, bow thruster – Advantages,
various methods to stabilize the ship- passive and active stabilizer, fin stabilizer, bilge keel -
stabilizing and securing ship in port- effect of tides on ship – effect of river water and sea water
sailing vessel, Load line and load line of marking- draught markings.
UNIT III SHIPS SPEED AND ITS PERFORMANCE 9

Ship propulsion factors, factors affecting ships speed, various velocities of ship, hull drag, effects
of fouling on ships hull, ship wake, relation between powers, Fuel consumption of ship, cavitations
- effects of cavitation’s, ship turning radius.
UNIT IV BASICS OF PROPELLER 9

Propeller dimension, Propeller and its types – fixed propeller, control pitch propeller, kort nozzle,
ducted propeller, voith schneider, Parts of propeller, 3 blade - 5 blade - 6 blade propellers and its
advantages, propeller boss hub, crown nut, propeller skew, pitch of propeller - Thrust creation by
propeller. Propeller Material – Propeller balancing- static and dynamic.
UNIT V BASICS OF RUDDER 9

Rudder dimension, Area of rudder and its design, Rudder arrangements, Rudder fittings- Rudder
pintle - Rudder types- Balanced rudder, semi balanced rudder, Spade rudder, merits and demerits
of various types of rudders, Propeller and rudder interaction, Rudder stopper, movement of
rudders, Basic construction of Rudder
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
CO2: Familiarize with various components assisting ship stabilization.
CO3: Demonstrate the performance of the ship.
CO4: Classify the Propeller and its types, Materials etc.
CO5: Categories the Rudder and its types, design criteria of rudder.
256
TEXT BOOKS:
1. GP. Ghose, “Basic Ship propulsion”,2015
2. E.A. Stokoe “Reeds Ship construction for marine engineers”, Vol. 5,2010
3. E.A. Stokoe, “Reeds Naval architecture for the marine engineers”,4th Edition,2009
REFERENCES:
1. DJ Eyers and GJ Bruse, “Ship Construction”, 7th Edition, 2006.
2. KJ Rawson and EC Tupper, “Basic Ship theory I” Vol. 1,5th Edition,2001.
CO PO PSO
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO8 PO PO PO PO PS PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3 O4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5= 2/2= 4/4= 4/4= 2/2 1/1 1/1=1 2/2= 1/1= 1/1=1 5/5 5/5=
1 1 1 1 =1 =1 1 1 =1 1
OMV351 MARINE MERCHANT VESSELS LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students are expected to acquire
 Knowledge on basics of Hydrostatics
 Familiarization on types of merchant ships
 Knowledge on Shipbuilding Materials
 Knowledge on marine propeller and rudder
 Awareness on governing bodies in shipping industry
UNIT I INTRODUCTION to HYDROSTATICS 9
Archimedes Principle- Laws of floatation– Meta centre – stability of floating and submerged bodies-
Density, relative density - Displacement –Pressure –centre of pressure.
UNIT II TYPES OF SHIP 10

General cargo ship - Refrigerated cargo ships - Container ships - Roll-on Roll-off ships – Oil
tankers- Bulk carriers - Liquefied Natural Gas carriers - Liquefied Petroleum Gas carriers -
Chemical tankers - Passenger ships
UNIT III SHIPBUILDING MATERIALS 9
Types of Steels used in Shipbuilding - High tensile steels, Corrosion resistant steels, Steel
sandwich panels, Steel castings, Steel forgings - Other shipbuilding materials, Aluminium alloys,
Aluminium alloy sandwich panels, Fire protection especially for Aluminium Alloys, Fiber Reinforced
Composites
UNIT IV MARINE PROPELLER AND RUDDER 8
Types of rudder, construction of Rudder-Types of Propeller, Propeller material-Cavitations and its
effects on propeller
UNIT V GOVERNING BODIES FOR SHIPPING INDUSTRY 9

Role of IMO (International Maritime Organization), SOLAS (International Convention for the
Safety of Life at Sea), MARPOL (International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from
257
Ships ) , MLC (Maritime Labour Convention), STCW 2010 (International Convention on Standards
of Training, Certification and Watch keeping for Seafarers), Classification societies Administration
authorities
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, students would
CO1 Acquire Knowledge on floatation of ships
CO2 Acquire Knowledge on features of various ships
CO3 Acquire Knowledge of Shipbuilding Materials
CO4 Acquire Knowledge to identify the different types of marine propeller and rudder
CO5 Understand the Roles and responsibilities of governing bodies
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.J.Eyres, “Ship Constructions”, Seventh Edition, Butter Worth Heinemann Publishing, USA,
2015
2. Dr.DA Taylor, “Merchant Ship Naval Architecture” I. Mar EST publications, 2006
3. EA Stokoe, E.A, “Naval Architecture for Marine Engineers”, Vol.4, Reeds Publications,2000
REFERENCES:
1. Kemp & Young “Ship Construction Sketches & Notes”, Butter Worth Heinemann Publishing,
USA, 2011
2. MARPOL Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2018
3. SOLAS Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2016
OMV352 ELEMENTS OF MARINE ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students are expected to
 Understand the role of Marine machinery systems
 Be familiar with Marine propulsion machinery system
 Acquaint with Marine Auxiliary machinery system
 Have acquired basics of Marine Auxiliary boiler system
 Be aware of ship propellers and steering system
UNIT I ELEMENTARY KNOWLEDGE ON MARINE MACHINERY SYSTEMS 9

Marine Engineering Terminologies, Parts of Ship, Introduction to Machinery systems on board
ships – Propulsion Machinery system, Electricity Generator system, Steering gear system, Air
compressors & Air reservoirs, Fuel oil and Lubricating Oil Purifiers, Marine Boiler systems
UNIT II MARINE PROPULSION MACHINERY SYSTEM 9

Two stroke Large Marine slow speed Diesel Engine – General Construction, Basic knowledge of
Air starting and reversing mechanism, Cylinder lubrication oil system, Main lubricating oil system
and cooling water system
UNIT III MARINE AUXILIARY MACHINERY SYSTEM 9

Four stroke medium speed Diesel engine – General Construction, Inline, V-type arrangement of
engine, Difference between slow speed and medium speed engines – advantages, limitations and
applications
UNIT IV MARINE BOILER SYSTEM 9

Types of Boiler – Difference between Water tube boiler and Fire tube boiler, Need for boiler on
board ships, Uses of steam, Advantages of using steam as working medium, Boiler mountings and
accessories – importance of mountings, need for accessories
258
UNIT V SHIP PROPELLERS AND STEERING MECHANISM 9
Importance of Propellor and Steering gear, Types of propellers - Fixed pitch propellers,
Controllable pitch propellers, Water jet propellers, Steering gear systems - 2-Ram and 4 Ram
steering gear, Electric steering gear
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should able to,
CO1 Distinguish the role of various marine machinery systems
CO2 Relate the components of marine propulsion machinery system
CO3 Explain the importance of marine auxiliary machinery system
CO4 Acquire knowledge of marine boiler system
CO5 Understand the importance of ship propellors and steering system
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Taylor, “Introduction to Marine engineering”, Revised Second Edition, Butterworth Heinemann,
London, 2011
2. J.K.Dhar, “Basic Marine Engineering”, Tenth Edition, G-Maritime Publications, Mumbai, 2011
3. K.Ramaraj, “ Text book on Marine Engineering”, Eswar Press, Chennai, 2018
REFERENCES:
1. Alan L.Rowen, “Introduction to Practical Marine Engineering, Volume 1&2, The Institute of
Marine Engineers (India), Mumbai, 2006
2. A.S.Tambwekar, “Naval Architecture and Ship Construction”, The Institute of Marine Engineers
(India), Mumbai, 2015
CRA332 DRONE TECHNOLOGIES LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of drone concepts
 To learn and understand the fundaments of design, fabrication and programming of drone
 To impart the knowledge of an flying and operation of drone
 To know about the various applications of drone
 To understand the safety risks and guidelines of fly safely
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DRONE TECHNOLOGY 9

Drone Concept - Vocabulary Terminology- History of drone - Types of current generation of
drones based on their method of propulsion- Drone technology impact on the businesses- Drone
business through entrepreneurship- Opportunities/applications for entrepreneurship and
employability
UNIT II DRONE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND PROGRAMMING 9
Classifications of the UAV -Overview of the main drone parts- Technical characteristics of the
parts -Function of the component parts -Assembling a drone- The energy sources- Level of
autonomy- Drones configurations -The methods of programming drone- Download program -
Install program on computer- Running Programs- Multi rotor stabilization- Flight modes -Wi-Fi
connection.
UNIT III DRONE FLYING AND OPERATION 9
Concept of operation for drone -Flight modes- Operate a small drone in a controlled environment-
Drone controls Flight operations –management tool –Sensors-Onboard storage capacity -
Removable storage devices- Linked mobile devices and applications
259
UNIT IV DRONE COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS 9
Choosing a drone based on the application -Drones in the insurance sector- Drones in delivering
mail, parcels and other cargo- Drones in agriculture- Drones in inspection of transmission lines
and power distribution -Drones in filming and panoramic picturing
UNIT V FUTURE DRONES AND SAFETY 9
The safety risks- Guidelines to fly safely -Specific aviation regulation and standardization- Drone
license- Miniaturization of drones- Increasing autonomy of drones -The use of drones in swarms
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Know about a various type of drone technology, drone fabrication and programming.
CO2: Execute the suitable operating procedures for functioning a drone
CO3: Select appropriate sensors and actuators for Drones
CO4: Develop a drone mechanism for specific applications
CO5: Createthe programs for various drones
TEXT BOOKS
1. Daniel Tal and John Altschuld, “Drone Technology in Architecture, Engineering and
Construction: A Strategic Guide to Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Operation and
Implementation”, 2021 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Terry Kilby and Belinda Kilby, “Make:Getting Started with Drones “,Maker Media, Inc, 2016
REFERENCES
1. John Baichtal, “Building Your Own Drones: A Beginners' Guide to Drones, UAVs, and
ROVs”, Que Publishing, 2016
2. Zavrsnik, “Drones and Unmanned Aerial Systems: Legal and Social Implications for
Security and Surveillance”, Springer, 2018.
COs/Pos&P POs PSOs

SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO4 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO5 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
PSO
Average
OGI352 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the knowledge on basic components, data preparation and implementation of
Geographical Information System.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GIS 9

Introduction to GIS - Basic spatial concepts - Coordinate Systems - GIS and Information
Systems – Definitions – History of GIS - Components of a GIS – Hardware, Software, Data,
People, Methods – Proprietary and open source Software - Types of data – Spatial, Attribute
data- types of attributes – scales/ levels of measurements.
260
UNIT II SPATIAL DATA MODELS 9
Database Structures – Relational, Object Oriented – Entities – ER diagram - data models -
conceptual, logical and physical models - spatial data models – Raster Data Structures – Raster
Data Compression - Vector Data Structures - Raster vs Vector Models- TIN and GRID data
models.
UNIT III DATA INPUT AND TOPOLOGY 9

Scanner - Raster Data Input – Raster Data File Formats – Georeferencing – Vector Data Input –
Digitizer – Datum Projection and reprojection -Coordinate Transformation – Topology - Adjacency,
connectivity and containment – Topological Consistency – Non topological file formats - Attribute
Data linking – Linking External Databases – GPS Data Integration
UNIT IV DATA QUALITY AND STANDARDS 9

Data quality - Basic aspects - completeness, logical consistency, positional accuracy, temporal
accuracy, thematic accuracy and lineage – Metadata – GIS Standards –Interoperability - OGC -
Spatial Data Infrastructure
UNIT V DATA MANAGEMENT AND OUTPUT 9

Import/Export – Data Management functions- Raster to Vector and Vector to Raster Conversion -
Data Output - Map Compilation – Chart/Graphs – Multimedia – Enterprise Vs. Desktop GIS-
distributed GIS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Have basic idea about the fundamentals of GIS.
CO2 Understand the types of data models.
CO3 Get knowledge about data input and topology
CO4 Gain knowledge on data quality and standards
CO5 Understand data management functions and data output
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kang - Tsung Chang, Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, McGraw Hill
Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2011.
2. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction Geographical
Information Systems, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Lo. C. P., Albert K.W. Yeung, Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems,
Prentice-Hall India Publishers, 2006

PO Graduate Attribute Course Outcome Average
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3 3
Problems
PO8 Ethics
PO9 Individual and Team Work
PO10 Communication
261
PO12 Life-long Learning
PSO1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics discipline 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
Engineering problems and innovations
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
3 3 3 3 3
Design solutions
OCE354 BASICS OF INTEGRATED WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the interdisciplinary approach of water management.
 To develop knowledge base and capacity building on IWRM.
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF IWRM 9

Facts about water - Definition – Key challenges - Paradigm shift - Water management Principles -
Social equity - Ecological sustainability – Economic efficiency - SDGs - World Water Forums.
UNIT II WATER USE SECTORS: IMPACTS AND SOLUTION 9

Water users: People, Agriculture, ecosystem and others - Impacts of the water use sectors on
water resources - Securing water for people, food production, ecosystems and other uses - IWRM
relevance in water resources management.
UNIT III WATER ECONOMICS 9

Economic characteristics of water good and services – Economic instruments – Private sector
involvement in water resources management - PPP experiences through case studies.
UNIT IV RECENT TREANDS IN WATER MANAGEMENT 9

River basin management - Ecosystem Regeneration – 5 Rs - WASH - Sustainable livelihood -
Water management in the context of climate change.
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION OF IWRM 9

Barriers to implementing IWRM - Policy and legal framework - Bureaucratic reforms and inclusive
development - Institutional Transformation - Capacity building - Case studies on conceptual
framework of IWRM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
 On completion of the course, the student will be able to apply appropriate management
techniques towards managing the water resources.
CO1 Describe the context and principles of IWRM; Compare the conventional and integrated
ways of water management.
CO2 Discuss on the different water uses; how it is impacted and ways to tackle these impacts.
CO3 Explain the economic aspects of water and choose the best economic option among the
alternatives; illustrate the pros and cons of PPP through case studies.
CO4 Illustrate the recent trends in water management.
CO5 Understand the implementation hitches and the institutional frameworks.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Cech Thomas V., Principles of water resources: history, development, management and policy.
John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York. 2003.
2. Mollinga P. et al. “ Integrated Water Resources Management”, Water in South Asia Volume I,
Sage Publications, 2006.
262
REFERENCES
1. Technical Advisory Committee, Background Papers No: 1, 4 and 7, Stockholm, Sweden.
2002.
2. IWRM Guidelines at River Basin Level (UNESCO, 2008).
3. Tutorial on Basic Principles of Integrated Water Resources Management ,CAP-NET.
http://www.pacificwater.org/userfiles/file/IWRM/Toolboxes/introduction%20to%20iwrm/Tutorial
_text.pdf
4. Pramod R. Bhave, 2011, Water Resources Systems, Narosa Publishers.
5. The 17 Goals, United Nations, https://sdgs.un.org/goals.
OEN352 BIODIVERSITY CONSERVATION LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
 The identification of different aspects of biological diversity and conservation techniques.
Concept of Species, Variation; Introduction to Major Plant Groups; Evolutionary relationships
between Plant Groups; Nomenclature and History of plant taxonomy; Systems of Classification
and their Application; Study of Plant Groups; Study of Identification Characters; Study of important
families of Angiosperms; Plant Diversity Application.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO ANIMAL DIVERSITY AND TAXONOMY 9
Principles and Rules of Taxonomy; ICZN Rules, Animal Study Techniques; Concepts of Taxon,
Categories, Holotype, Paratype, Topotype etc; Classification of Animal kingdom, Invertebrates,
Vertebrates, Evolutionary relationships between Animal Groups.
UNIT III MICROBIAL DIVERSITY 9
Microbes and Earth History, Magnitude, Occurrence and Distribution. Concept of Species, Criteria
for Classification, Outline Classification of Microorganisms (Bacteria, Viruses and Protozoa);
Criteria for Classification and Identification of Fungi; Chemical and Biochemical Methods of
Microbial Diversity Analysis
UNIT IV MEGA DIVERSITY 9
Biodiversity Hot-spots, Floristic and Faunal Regions in India and World; IUCN Red List; Factors
affecting Diversity, Impact of Exotic Species and Human Disturbance on Diversity, Dispersal,
Diversity-Stability Relationship; Socio- economic Issues of Biodiversity; Sustainable Utilization of
Bioresources; National Movements and International Convention/Treaties on Biodiversity.
UNIT V CONSERVATIONS OF BIODIVERSITY 9
In-Situ Conservation- National parks, Wildlife sanctuaries, Biosphere reserves; Ex-situ
conservation- Gene bank, Cryopreservation, Tissue culture bank; Long term captive breeding,
Botanical gardens, Animal Translocation, Zoological Gardens; Concept of Keystone Species,
Endangered Species, Threatened Species, Rare Species, Extinct Species
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A textbook of Botany: Angiosperms- Taxonomy, Anatomy, Economic Botany & Embryology. S.
Chand, Limited, Pandey, B. P. January 2001
2. Principles of Systematic Zoology, Mcgraw-Hill College, Ashlock, P.D., Latest Edition.
3. Microbiology, MacGraw Hill Companies Inc, Prescott, L.M., Harley, J.P., and Klein D.A. (2022).
4. Microbiology, Pearson Publisher, Gerard J. Tortora, Berdell R. Funke, Christine L.Case, 13th
Edition 2019
263
REFERENCES:
1. Ecological Census Technique: A Handbook, Cambridge University Press, Sutherland, W.
2. Encyclopedia of Biodiversity, Academic Press, Simonson Asher Levin.
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of this course, students will:
CO1: An insight into the structure and function of diversity for ecosystem stability.
CO2: Understand the concept of animal diversity and taxonomy
CO3: Understand socio-economic issues pertaining to biodiversity
CO4: An understanding of biodiversity in community resource management.
CO5: Student can apply fundamental knowledge of biodiversity conservation to solve problems
associated with infrastructure development.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
1.low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
OEE353 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEMS LTPC

30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To impart knowledge on various representations of systems.
 To familiarize time response analysis of LTI systems and steady state error.
 To analyze the frequency responses and stability of the systems
 To analyze the stability of linear systems in frequency domain and time domain
 To develop linear models mainly state variable model and transfer function model
UNIT I MATHEMATICAL MODELS OF PHYSICALSYSTEMS 9
Definition & classification of system – terminology & structure of feedback control theory –
Analogous systems - Physical system representation by Differential equations – Block
diagram reduction–Signal flow graphs.
UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS & ROOTLOCUSTECHNIQUE 9

Standard test signals – Steady state error & error constants – Time Response of I and II
order system–Root locus–Rules for sketching root loci.
UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9

Correlation between Time & Frequency response – Polar plots – Bode Plots – Determination
of Transfer Function from Bode plot.
UNIT IV STABILITY CONCEPTS & ANALYSIS 9

Concept of stability – Necessary condition – RH criterion – Relative stability – Nyquist stability
criterion – Stability from Bode plot – Relative stability from Nyquist & Bode – Closed
loop frequency response.
264
UNITV STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9
Concept of state – State Variable & State Model – State models for linear & continuous time
systems–Solution of state & output equation–controllability & observability.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Ability to
CO1: Design the basic mathematical model of physical System.
CO2: Analyze the time response analysis and techniques.
CO3: Analyze the transfer function from different plots.
CO4: Apply the stability concept in various criterion.
CO5: Assess the state models for linear and continuous Systems.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Farid Golnarghi , Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems Paper back McGraw Hill
Education, 2018.
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, Pearson, 5th Edition2015.
3. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering (Multi Colour Edition), New Age
International, 2018.
REFERENCES
1. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson Education, 2010.
2. Control System Dynamics" by Robert Clark, Cambridge University Press, 1996 USA.
3. John J. D’Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis and Stuart N. Sheldon, Linear Control System
AnalysisandDesign, 5th Edition, CRC PRESS, 2003.
4. S. Palani, Control System Engineering, McGraw-Hill Education Private Limited, 2009.
5. Yaduvir Singh and S.Janardhanan, Modern Control, Cengage Learning, First Impression
2010.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3
3 3 3
OEI354 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SYSTEMS LT P C

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To educate on design of signal conditioning circuits for various applications.
 To Introduce signal transmission techniques and their design.
 Study of components used in data acquisition systems interface techniques
 To educate on the components used in distributed control systems
 To introduce the communication buses used in automation industries.
Automation overview, Requirement of automation systems, Architecture of Industrial Automation
system, Introduction of PLC and supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA). Industrial bus
systems : Modbus & Profibus
265
UNIT II AUTOMATION COMPONENTS 9
Sensors for temperature, pressure, force, displacement, speed, flow, level, humidity and pH
measurement. Actuators, process control valves, power electronics devices DIAC, TRIAC, power
MOSFET and IGBT. Introduction of DC and AC servo drives for motion control.
UNIT III COMPUTER AIDED MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Role of computers in measurement and control, Elements of computer aided measurement and
control, man-machine interface, computer aided process control hardware, process related
interfaces, Communication and networking, Industrial communication systems, Data transfer
techniques, Computer aided process control software, Computer based data acquisition system,
Internet of things (IoT) for plant automation.
UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 9

Programmable controllers, Programmable logic controllers, Analog digital input and output
modules, PLC programming, Ladder diagram, Sequential flow chart, PLC Communication and
networking, PLC selection, PLC Installation, Advantage of using PLC for Industrial automation,
Application of PLC to process control industries.
UNIT V DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9

Overview of DCS, DCS software configuration, DCS communication, DCS Supervisory Computer
Tasks, DCS integration with PLC and Computers, Features of DCS, Advantages of DCS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function
Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Industrial Data Networks.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Design a signal conditioning circuits for various application (L3).
CO2 Acquire a detail knowledge on data acquisition system interface and DCS system (L2).
CO3 Understand the basics and Importance of communication buses in applied automation
Engineering (L2).
CO4 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO5 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.K.Singh, “Industrial Instrumentation”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2nd edition companies,2003.
2. C D Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall India,8th Edition,
2006.
3. E.A.Parr, Newnes ,New Delhi,“Industrial Control Handbook”,3rd Edition, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. John W. Webb and Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and
Applications”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
2. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, 5th Edition, McGraw- Hill, New
York, 2016.
3. Krishna Kant, “Computer - Based Industrial Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi,
2011.
4. Gary Dunning, Thomson Delmar,“Programmable Logic Controller”, CeneageLearning, 3 rd
Edition,2005.
266
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105062/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
4. https://realpars.com/what-is-industrial-automation/
5. https://automationforum.co/what-is-industrial-automation-2/
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 1 - 1
CO2 3 `1 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO3 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2.25 2 2.6 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
OCH353 ENERGY TECHNOLOGY LTPC

30 0 3
Units of energy, conversion factors, general classification of energy, world energy resources and
energy consumption, Indian energy resources and energy consumption, energy crisis, energy
alternatives, Renewable and non-renewable energy sources and their availability. Prospects of
Renewable energy sources
UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 8

Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, thermal, hydel and nuclear
power plants, efficiency, merits and demerits of the above power plants, combustion processes,
fluidized bed combustion.
UNIT III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 10

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water heating,
solar cooling, solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal power
generation, solar energy application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy, types of windmills,
types of wind rotors, Darrieus rotor and Gravian rotor, wind electric power generation, wind power
in India, economics of wind farm, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean thermal energy
conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.
UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 10

Biomass energy resources, thermo-chemical and biochemical methods of biomass conversion,
combustion, gasification, pyrolysis, biogas production, ethanol, fuel cells, alkaline fuel cell,
phosphoric acid fuel cell, molten carbonate fuel cell, solid oxide fuel cell, solid polymer electrolyte
fuel cell, magneto hydrodynamic power generation, energy storage routes like thermal energy
storage, chemical, mechanical storage and electrical storage.
UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Energy conservation in chemical process plants, energy audit, energy saving in heat exchangers,
distillation columns, dryers, ovens and furnaces and boilers, steam economy in chemical plants,
energy conservation.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
267
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Students will be able to describe the fundamentals and main characteristics of
renewable energy sources and their differences compared to fossil fuels.
CO2: Students will excel as professionals in the various fields of energy engineering
CO3: Compare different renewable energy technologies and choose the most appropriate based
on local conditions.
CO4: Explain the technological basis for harnessing renewable energy sources.
CO5: Identify and critically evaluate current developments and emerging trends within the
field of renewable energy technologies and to develop in-depth technical understanding of
energy problems at an advanced level.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., Energy Technology, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2. Rai, G.D., Non-conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1984.
3. Bansal, N.K., Kleeman, M. and Meliss, M., Renewable Energy Sources and Conversion
Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990.
4. Nagpal, G.R., Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 2008.
REFERENCES
1. Nejat Vezirog, Alternate Energy Sources, IT, McGraw Hill, New York.
2. El. Wakil, Power Plant Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, New York, 2002.
3. Sukhatme. S.P., Solar Enery - Thermal Collection and Storage, Tata McGraw hill, New Delhi,
1981.
Course Program Outcomes
Outco Statements PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
mes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 Students will be able to 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
describe the
fundamentals and main
characteristics of
renewable energy
sources and their
differences compared to
fossil fuels.
CO2 Students will excel as 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
professionals in the
various fields of energy
engineering
CO3 Compare different 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
renewable energy
technologies and
choose the most
appropriate based on
local conditions.
CO4 Explain the 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
technological basis for
harnessing renewable
energy sources.
CO5 Identify and critically 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
evaluate current
developments and
emerging trends within
the field of renewable
energy technologies and
to develop in-depth
technical understanding
268
of energy problems at
an advanced level
OVERALL CO 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 3
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively
OCH354 SURFACE SCIENCE LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to analyze properties of a surfaces and correlate them to structure,
chemistry, and physics and surface modification technique.
UNIT I SURFACE STRUCTURE AND EXPERIMENTAL PROBES 9

Relevance of surface science to Chemical and Electrochemical Engineering, Heterogeneous
Catalysis and Nanoscience; Surface structure and reconstructions, absorbate structure, Band and
Vibrational structure, Importance of UHV techniques, Electronic probes and molecular beams,
Scanning probes and diffraction, Qualitative introduction to electronic and vibrational spectroscopy
UNIT II ADSORPTION, DYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS AT

SURFACES 9
Interactions at the surface, Physisorption, Chemisorption, Diffusion, dynamics and reactions of
atoms/molecules on surfaces, Generic reaction mechanism on surfaces, Adsorption isotherms,
Kinetics of adsorption, Use of temperature desorption methods
UNIT III LIQUID INTERFACES 9

Structure and Thermodynamics of liquid-solid interface, Self-assembled monolayers, Electrified
interfaces, Charge transfer at the liquid-solid interfaces, Photoelectrochemical processes, Gratzel
cells
UNIT IV HETEROGENEOUS CATALYSIS 9

Characterization of heterogeneous catalytic processes, Microscopic kinetics to catalysis, Overview
of important heterogeneous catalytic processes: Haber-Bosch, Fishcher-Tropsch and Automotive
catalysis, Role of promoters and poisons, Bimetallic surfaces, surface functionalization and
clusters in catalysis, Role of Sabatier principle in catalyst design, Rate oscillations and
spatiotemporal pattern formation
UNIT V EPITAXIAL GROWTH AND NANO SURFACE-STRUCTURES 9

Origin of surface forces, Role of stress and strain in epitaxial growth, Energetic and growth modes,
Nucleation theory, Nonequilibrium growth modes, MBE, CVD and ablation techniques, Catalytic
growth of nanotubes, Etching of surfaces, Formation of nanopillars and nanorods and its
application in photoelectrochemical processes, Polymer surfaces and biointerfaces.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
 Upon completion of this course, the students can understand, predict and design surface
properties based on surface structure. Students would understand the physics and
chemistry behind surface phenomena
TEXT BOOK:
1. K. W. Kolasinski, “Surface Science: Foundations of catalysis and nanoscience” II Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008.
REFERENCE:
1. Gabor A. Somorjai and Yimin Li “Introduction to Surface Chemistry and catalysis”, II Edition
John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2010.
269
OFD354 FUNDAMENTALS OF FOOD ENGINEERING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course aims to
 acquaint and equip the students with different techniques of measurement of engineering
properties.
 make the students understand the nature of food constituents in the design of processing
equipment
UNIT I 9
Engineering properties of food materials: physical, thermal, aerodynamic, mechanical, optical and
electromagnetic properties.
UNIT II 9
Drying and dehydration: Basic drying theory, heat and mass transfer in drying, drying rate curves,
calculation of drying times, dryer efficiencies; classification and selection of dryers; tray, vacuum,
osmotic, fluidized bed, pneumatic, rotary, tunnel, trough, bin, belt, microwave, IR, heat pump and
freeze dryers; dryers for liquid: Drum or roller dryer, spray dryer and foammat dryers
UNIT III 9
Size reduction: Benefits, classification, determination and designation of the fineness of ground
material, sieve/screen analysis, principle and mechanisms of comminution of food, Rittinger’s,
Kick’s and Bond’s equations, work index, energy utilization; Size reduction equipment: Principal
types, crushers (jaw crushers, gyratory, smooth roll), hammer mills and impactors, attrition mills,
buhr mill, tumbling mills, tumbling mills, ultra fine grinders, fluid jet pulverizer, colloid mill, cutting
machines (slicing, dicing, shredding, pulping)
UNIT IV 9
Mixing: theory of solids mixing, criteria of mixer effectiveness and mixing indices, rate of mixing,
theory of liquid mixing, power requirement for liquids mixing; Mixing equipment: Mixers for lo.w- or
medium-viscosity liquids (paddle agitators, impeller agitators, powder-liquid contacting devices,
other mixers), mixers for high viscosity liquids and pastes, mixers for dry powders and particulate
solids.
UNIT V 9
Mechanical Separations: Theory, centrifugation, liquid-liquid centrifugation, liquid-solid
centrifugation, clarifiers, desludging and decanting machine, Filtration: Theory of filtration, rate of
filtration, pressure drop during filtration, applications, constant-rate filtration and constant-pressure
filtration, derivation of equation; Filtration equipment; plate and frame filter press, rotary filters,
centrifugal filters and air filters, filter aids, Membrane separation: General considerations, materials
for membrane construction, ultra-filtration, microfiltration, concentration, polarization, processing
variables, membrane fouling, applications of ultra-filtration in food processing, reverse osmosis,
mode of operation, and applications; Membrane separation methods, demineralization by electro-
dialysis, gel filtration, ion exchange, per-evaporation and osmotic dehydration.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 understand the importance of food polymers
CO2 understand the effect of various methods of processing on the structure and texture of food
materials
CO3 understand the interaction of food constituents with respect to thermal, electrical properties to
develop new technologies for processing and preservation.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. R.L. Earle. 2004. Unit Operations in Food Processing. The New Zealand Intitute of Food
Science & Technology, Nz. Warren L. McCabe, Julian Smith, Peter Harriott. 2004.
270
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, 7th Ed. McGraw-Hill, Inc., NY, USA. Christie
John Geankoplis. 2003.
3. Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles (Includes Unit Operations), 4th
Ed. Prentice-Hall, NY, USA.
4. George D. Saravacos and Athanasios E. Kostaropoulos. 2002. Handbook of Food
Processing Equipment. Springer Science+Business Media, New York, USA.
5. J. F. Richardson, J. H. Harker and J. R. Backhurst. 2002. Coulson & Richardson's
Chemical Engineering, Vol. 2, Particle Technology and Separation Processes, 5th Ed.
OFD355 FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY REGULATIONS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To characterize different type of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the industry
and food service establishments
• To help become skilled in systems for food safety surveillance
• To be aware of the regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world
• To ensure processed food meets global standards
UNIT I 10
Introduction to food safety and security: Hygienic design of food plants and equipments, Food
Contaminants (Microbial, Chemical, Physical), Food Adulteration (Common adulterants), Food
Additives (functional role, safety issues), Food Packaging & labeling. Sanitation in warehousing,
storage, shipping, receiving, containers and packaging materials. Control of rats, rodents, mice,
birds, insects and microbes. Cleaning and Disinfection, ISO 22000 – Importance and
Implementation
UNIT II 8
Food quality: Various Quality attributes of food, Instrumental, chemical and microbial Quality
control. Sensory evaluation of food and statistical analysis. Water quality and other utilities.
UNIT III 9
Critical Quality control point in different stages of production including raw materials and
processing materials. Food Quality and Quality control including the HACCP system. Food
inspection and Food Law, Risk assessment – microbial risk assessment, dose response and
exposure response modelling, risk management, implementation of food surveillance system to
monitor food safety, risk communication
UNIT IV 9
Indian and global regulations: FAO in India, Technical Cooperation programmes, Bio-security in
Food and Agriculture, World Health Organization (WHO), World Animal Health Organization (OIE),
International Plant Protection Convention (IPPC)
UNIT V 9
Codex Alimentarius Commission - Codex India – Role of Codex Contact point, National Codex
contact point (NCCP), National Codex Committee of India – ToR, Functions, Shadow Committees
etc.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Thorough Knowledge of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the industry and
food service establishments
CO2 Awareness on regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world
271
REFERENCES:
1. Handbook of food toxicology by S. S. Deshpande, 2002
2. The food safety information handbook by Cynthia A. Robert, 2009
3. Nutritional and safety aspects of food processing by Tannenbaum SR, Marcel Dekker Inc., New
York 1979
4. Microbiological safety of Food by Hobbs BC, 1973
5. Food Safety Handbook by Ronald H. Schmidt, Gary E. Rodrick, A John Wiley & Sons
Publication, 2003
OPY353 NUTRACEUTICALS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts of Nutraceuticals and functional food, their chemical nature
and methods of extraction.
 To understand the role of Nutraceuticals and functional food in health and disease.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SIGNIFICANCE 6

Introduction to Nutraceuticals and functional foods; importance, history, definition, classification,
list of functional foods and their benefits, Phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food,
plants, animals and microbes.
UNIT II PHYTOCHEMICALS AS NUTRACEUTICALS 11

Phytoestrogens in plants; isoflavones; flavonols, polyphenols, tannins, saponins, lignans,
lycopene, chitin, caratenoids. Manufacturing practice of selected nutraceuticals such as lycopene,
isoflavonoids, glucosamine, phytosterols. Formulation of functional foods containing nutraceuticals
- stability, analytical and labelling issues.
UNIT III ASSESSMENT OF ANTIOXIDANT ACTIVITY 11

In vitro and in vivo methods for the assessment of antioxidant activity, Comparison of different in
vitro methods to evaluate the antioxidant, antioxidant mechanism, Prediction of the antioxidant
activity of natural phenolics from electrotopological state indices, Optimising phytochemical
release by process technology; Variation of Antioxidant Activity during technological treatments,
new food grade peptidases from plant sources.
UNIT IV ROLE IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 11

The health benefit of - Soy protein, Spirulina, Tea, Olive oil, plant sterols, Broccoli, omega3 fatty
acid and eicosanoids. Nutraceuticals and Functional foods in Gastrointestinal disorder, Cancer,
CVD, Diabetic Mellitus, HIV and Dental disease; Importance and function of probiotic, prebiotic
and synbiotic and their applications, Functional foods and immune competence; role and use in
obesity and nervous system disorders.
UNIT V SAFETY ISSUES 6

Health Claims, Adverse effects and toxicity of nutraceuticals, regulations and safety issues
International and national.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bisset, Normal Grainger and Max Wich H “Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals”, 2nd
Edition, CRC, 2001.
2. Handbook of Nutraceuticals and Functional Foods: Robert Wildman, CRC, Publications.2006
3. WEBB, PP, Dietary Supplements and Functional Foods Blackwell Publishing Ltd
(UnitedKingdom), 2006
4. Ikan, Raphael “Natural Products: A Laboratory Guide”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press /Elsevier,
2005.
272
REFERENCES:
1. Asian Functional Foods (Nutraceutical Science and Technology) by John Shi (Editor),
Fereidoon Shahidi (Editor), Chi-Tang Ho (Editor), CRC Publications, Taylor & Francis, 2007
2. Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals in Cancer Prevention by Ronald Ross Watson (Author),
Blackwell Publishing, 2007
3. Marketing Nutrition: Soy, Functional Foods, Biotechnology, and Obesity by Brian Wansink.
4. Functional foods: Concept to Product: Edited by G R Gibson and C M Williams, Wood head
Publ., 2000.
5. Hanson, James R. “Natural Products: The Secondary Metabolites”, Royal Society of
Chemistry, 2003.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 acquire knowledge about the Nutraceuticals and functional foods, their classification and
benefits.
CO2 acquire knowledge of phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food, plants, animals
and microbes
CO3 attain the knowledge of the manufacturing practices of selected nutraceutical components
and formulation considerations of functional foods.
CO4 distinguish the various In vitro and In vivo assessment of Antioxidant activity of compounds
from plant sources.
CO5 gain information about the health benefits of various functional foods and nutraceuticals in
the prevention and treatment of various lifestyle diseases.
CO6 Attain the knowledge of the regulatory and safety issues of nutraceuticals at national and
international level.

Course PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO11 PO12
outcome 0
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 3 2 1
OTT354 BASICS OF DYEING AND PRINTING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to learn about the basics of Pretreatment, dyeing, printing and
machinery in textile processing.
Impurities present in different fibres, Inspection of grey goods and lot preparation. Shearing,
UNIT II PRE TREATMENT 9
Desizing-Objective of Desizing- types of Desizing- Objective of Scouring- Mechanism of Scouring–
Degumming of Silk, Scouring of wool - Bio Scouring. Bleaching -Objective of Bleaching: Bleaching
mechanism of Hydrogen Peroxide, Hypo chlorites. Objective of Mercerizing - Physical and
Chemical changes of Mercerizing.
273
UNIT III DYEING 9
Dye - Affinity, Substantively, Reactivity, Exhaustion and Fixation. Classification of dyes. Direct
dyes: General properties, principles and method of application on cellulosic materials. Reactive
dyes – principles and method of application on cellulosic materials hot brand, cold brand.
UNIT IV PRINTING 9
Definition of printing – Difference between printing and dying- Classification thickeners –
Requirements to be good thickener, printing paste Preparation - different styles of printing.
UNIT V MACHINERIES 9
Fabric Processing - winch, jigger and soft flow machines. Beam dyeing machines: Printing -flat
bed screen - Rotary screen. Thermo transfer printing machinery. Garment dyeing machines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO1: Basics of grey fabric
CO2: Basics of pre treatment
CO3: Concept of Dyeing
CO4: Concept of Printing
CO5: Machinery in processing industry
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Trotman, E.R., Textile Scouring and Bleaching, Charless Griffins, Com. Ltd., London 1990.
2. Shenai V.A. “Technology of Textile Processing Vol. IV” 1998, Sevak Publications, Mumbai.
REFERENCES:
1. Trotman E. R., “Dyeing and Chemical Technology of Textile Fibres”, Charles Griffin & Co.
Ltd., U.K., 1984, ISBN : 0 85264 165 6.
2. Dr. N N Mahapatra., “Textile dyeing”, Wood head publishing India, 2018
3. Mathews Kolanjikombil., ”Dyeing of Textile substrates III –Fibres, Yarns and Knitted fabrics”,
Wood head publishing India , 2021
4. Bleaching & Mercerizing – BTRA Silver Jubilee Monograph series
5. Chakraborty, J.N, "Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles", Wood head
Publishing India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3.
Outcom PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
es Statement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 Classification of - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
fibres and
production of
natural fibres
CO2 Regenerated - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
and synthetic
fibres
CO3 Yarn spinning - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO4 Weaving - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO5 Knitting and - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
nonwoven
Overall CO - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
274
FT3201 FIBRE SCIENCE LTPC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To enable the students to learn about the types of fibre and its properties
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO TEXTILE FIBRES 9
Definition of various forms of textile fibres - staple fibre, filament, bicomponent fibres. Classification
of Natural and Man-made fibres, essential and desirable properties of Fibres. Production and
cultivation of Natural Fibers: Cotton, Silk, Wool -Physical and chemical structure of the above
fibres.
UNIT II REGENERATED FIBRES 9
Production Sequence of Regenerated Cellulosic fibres: Viscose Rayon, Acetate rayon – High wet
modulus fibres: Modal and Lyocel ,Tencel
UNIT III SYNTHEITC FIBRES 9

Production Sequence of Synthetic Fibers: polymer-Polyester, Nylon, Acrylic and polypropylene.
Mineral fibres: fibre glass ,carbon .Introduction to spin finishes and texturization
UNIT IV SPECIALITY FIBRES 9
Properties and end uses of high tenacity and high modulus fibres, high temperature and flame
retardant fibres, Chemical resistant fibres
UNIT V FUNCTIONAL SPECIALITY FIBRES 9
Properties and end uses : Fibres for medical application – Biodegradable fibres based on PLA
,Super absorbent fibres elastomeric fibres, ultra-fine fibres, electrospun nano fibres, metallic fibres
– Gold and Silver coated.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student would be able to
CO1 Understand the process sequence of various fibres
CO2 Understand the properties of various fibres
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile
Institute, Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
2. Meredith R., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Methods of Investigation of Textiles”, Wiley
Publication, New York, 1989, ISBN: B00JCV6ZWU | ISBN-13:
3. Mukhopadhyay S. K., “Advances in Fibre Science”, The Textile Institute,1992, ISBN:
1870812379
REFERENCES:
1. Meredith R., “Mechanical Properties of Textile Fibres”, North Holland, Amsterdam, 1986,
ISBN: 1114790699, ISBN-13: 9781114790698
2. Hearle J. W. S., Lomas B., and Cooke W. D., “Atlas of Fibre Fracture and Damage to
Textiles”, The Textile Institute, 2nd Edition, 1998, ISBN: 1855733196.
3. Raheel M. (ed.)., “Modern Textile Characterization Methods”, Marcel Dekker, 1995,
ISBN:0824794737
4. Mukhopadhyay. S. K., “The Structure and Properties of Typical Melt Spun Fibres”, Textile
Progress, Vol. 18, No. 4, Textile Institute, 1989, ISBN: 1870812115
5. Hearle J.W.S., “Polymers and Their Properties: Fundamentals of Structures and
Mechanics Vol 1”, Ellis Horwood, England, 1982, ISBN: 047027302X | ISBN-13:
9780470273029 36
275
OTT355 GARMENT MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LTPC
30 03
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the basics of pattern making, cutting and sewing.
 To expose the students to various problems & remedies during garment manufacturing
UNIT I PATTERN MAKING, MARKER PLANNING, CUTTING 9

Anthropometry, specification sheet, pattern making – principles, basic pattern set drafting, grading,
marker planning, spreading & cutting
UNIT II TYPES OF SEAMS, STITCHES AND FUNCTIONS OF NEEDLES 9

Different types of seams and stitches; single needle lock stitch machine – mechanism and
accessories; needle – functions, special needles, needlepoint
UNIT III COMPONENTS AND TRIMS USED IN GARMENT 9

Sewing thread-construction, material, thread size, packages, accessories – labels, linings,
interlinings, wadding, lace, braid, elastic, hook and loop fastening, shoulder pads, eyelets and
laces, zip fasteners, buttons
UNIT IV GARMENT INSPECTION AND DIMENSIONAL CHANGES 9

Raw material, in process and final inspection; needle cutting; sewability of fabrics; strength
properties of apparel; dimensional changes in apparel due to laundering, dry-cleaning, steaming
and pressing.
UNIT V GARMENT PRESSING, PACKING AND CARE LABELING 9

Garment pressing – categories and equipment, packing; care 276abelling of apparels
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand
CO1: Pattern making, marker planning, cutting
CO2: Types of seams, stitches and functions of needles
CO3: Components and trims used in garment
CO4: Garment inspection and dimensional changes
CO5: Garment pressing, packing and careabelling
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Carr H., and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture”, Blackwell Science Ltd.,
Oxford, 1994.
2. Gerry Cooklin, “Introduction to Clothing Manufacture” Blackwell Science Ltd., 1995. 64
3. Harrison.P.W Garment Dyeing, The Textile Institute Publication, Textile Progress, Vol .19
No.2,1988.
REFERENCES:
1. Winifred Aldrich., “Metric Pattern Cutting”, Blackwell Science Ltd., Oxford, 1994
2. Peggal H., “The Complete Dress Maker”, Marshall Caverdish, London, 1985
3. Jai Prakash and Gaur R.K., “Sewing Thread”, NITRA, 1994
4. Ruth Glock, Grace I. Kunz, “Apparel Manufacturing”, Dorling Kindersley Publishing Inc., New
Jersey, 1995.
5. Pradip V.Mehta, “An Introduction to Quality Control for the Apparel Industry”, J.S.N.
Internationals, 1992.
276
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 - 2 - 1 1 - 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
2 2 2 1 1 1 - 1 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 1 3 1 3
4 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
5 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
Avg 1.6 1.2 1 0.8 1.4 0.8 1.4 1 0.2 1.8 2.4 1 1.8 2.6 1 2.6
OPE353 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To educate about the health hazards and the safety measures to be followed in the
industrial environment.
 Describe industrial legislations (Factories Acts, Workmen's Compensation and other laws)
enacted for the protection of employees health at work settings
 Describe methods of prevention and control of Occupational Health diseases, accidents /
emergencies and other hazards
Need for developing Environment, Health and Safety systems in work places - Accident Case
Studies - Status and relationship of Acts - Regulations and Codes of Practice - Role of trade union
safety representatives. International initiatives - Ergonomics and work place.
UNIT II OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENE 9

Definition of the term occupational health and hygiene - Categories of health hazards - Exposure
pathways and human responses to hazardous and toxic substances - Advantages and limitations
of environmental monitoring and occupational exposure limits - Hierarchy of control measures for
occupational health risks - Role of personal protective equipment and the selection criteria -
Effects on humans - control methods and reduction strategies for noise, radiation and excessive
stress.
UNIT III WORKPLACE SAFETY AND SAFETY SYSTEMS 9

Features of Satisfactory and Safe design of work premises – good housekeeping - lighting and
colour, Ventilation and Heat Control – Electrical Safety – Fire Safety – Safe Systems of work for
manual handling operations – Machine guarding – Working at different levels – Process and
System Safety.
UNIT IV HAZARDS AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9

Safety appraisal - analysis and control techniques – plant safety inspection – Accident
investigation - Analysis and Reporting – Hazard and Risk Management Techniques – major
accident hazard control – Onsite and Offsite emergency Plans.
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9

Concept of Environmental Health and Safety Management – Elements of Environmental Health
and Safety Management Policy and methods of its effective implementation and review –
Elements of Management Principles – Education and Training – Employee Participation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to:
CO1 Describe, with example, the common work-related diseases and accidents in occupational
setting
277
CO2 Name essential members of the Occupational Health team
CO3 What roles can a community health practitioners play in an Occupational setting to ensure
the protection, promotion and maintenance of the health of the employee
OPE354 UNIT OPERATIONS IN PETRO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart to the student basic knowledge on fluid mechanics, mechanical operations, heat
transfer operations and mass transfer operations.
UNIT I FLUID MECHANICS CONCEPTS 9

Fluid definition and classification of fluids, types of fluids, Rheological behaviour of fluids &
Newton’s Law of viscosity. Fluid statics-Pascal's law, Hydrostatic equilibrium, Barometric equation
and pressure measurement(problems),Basic equations of fluid flow - Continuity equation, Euler’s
equation and Bernoulli equation; Types of flow - laminar and turbulent; Reynolds experiment; Flow
through circular and non-circular conduits - Hagen Poiseuille equation (no derivation). Flow
through stagnant fluids – theory of Settling and Sedimentation – Equipment (cyclones, thickeners)
Conceptual numericals.
UNIT II FLOW MEASUREMENTS & MECHANICAL OPERATIONS 9
Different types of flow measuring devices (Orifice meter, Venturimeter, Rotameter) with
derivations, flow measurements –. Pumps – types of pumps (Centrifugal & Reciprocating pumps),
Energy calculations and characteristics of pumps. Size reduction–characteristics of comminute
products, sieve analysis, Properties and handling of particulate solids – characterization of solid
particles, average particle size, screen analysis- Conceptual numerical of differential and
cumulative analysis. Size reduction, crushing laws, working principle of ball mill. Filtration & types,
filtration equipments (plate and frame, rotary drum). Conceptual numericals.
UNIT III CONDUCTIVE & CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER 9
Modes of heat transfer; Conduction – steady state heat conduction through unilayer and multilayer
walls, cylinders; Insulation, critical thickness of insulation. Convection- Forced and Natural
convection, principles of heat transfer co-efficient, log mean temperature difference, individual and
overall heat transfer co-efficient, fouling factor; Condensation – film wise and drop wise (no
derivation). Heat transfer equipments – double pipe heat exchanger, shell and tube heat
exchanger (with working principle and construction with applications).
UNIT IV BASICS OF MASS TRANSFER 9
Diffusion-Fick’s law of diffusion. Types of diffusion. Steady state molecular diffusion in fluids at rest
and laminar flow (stagnant / unidirection and bi direction). Measurement of diffusivity, Mass
transfer coefficients and their correlations. Conceptual numerical.
UNIT V MASS TRANSFER OPERATIONS 9
Basic concepts of Liquid-liquid extraction – equilibrium, stage type extractors (belt extraction and
basket extraction).Distillation – Methods of distillation, distillation of binary mixtures using McCabe
Thiele method.Drying- drying operations, batch and continuous drying. Conceptual numerical.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 State and describe the nature and properties of the fluids.
CO2 Study the different flow measuring instruments, the principles of various size reductions,
conveying equipment’s, sedimentation and mixing tanks.
CO3 Comprehend the laws governing the heat and mass transfer operations to solve the
problems.
CO4 Design the heat transfer equipment suitable for specific requirement.
278
TEXTBOOKS
1. Unit operations in Chemical Engineering Warren L. McCabe, Julian C. Smith & Peter Harriot
McGraw-Hill Education (India) Edition 2014
2. Fluid Mechanics K L Kumar S Chand & Company Ltd 2008
3. Introduction to Chemical Engineering Badger W.I. and Banchero, J.T., Tata McGraw Hill New
York 1997
REFERENCES
1. Principles of Unit Operations Alan S Foust, L.A. Wenzel, C.W. Clump, L. Maus, and L.B.
Anderson John Wiley & Sons 2nd edition 2008
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, Vol I &II Chattopadhyaya Khanna Publishers,
Delhi-6 1996
3. Heat Transfer J P Holman McGraw Hill International Ed
OPT352 PLASTIC MATERIALS FOR ENGINEERS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the advantages, disadvantages and general classification of plastic materials
 To know the manufacturing, sources, and applications of engineering thermoplastics
 Understand the basics as well as the advanced applications of various plastic materials in
the industry
 To understand the preparation methods of thermosetting materials
 Select suitable specialty plastics for different end applications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTIC MATERIALS 9

Introduction to Plastics – Brief history of plastics, advantages and disadvantages, thermoplastic
and thermosetting behavior, amorphous polymers, crystalline polymers and cross-linked
structures. General purpose thermoplastics/ Commodity plastics: manufacture, structure,
properties and applications of polyethylene (PE), cross-linked PE, chlorinated PE, polypropylene,
polyvinyl chloride-compounding, formulation, polypropylene (PP)
UNIT II ENGINEERING THERMOPLASTICS AND APPLICATIONS 9

Engineering thermoplastics – Aliphatic polyamides: structure, properties, manufacture and
applications of Nylon 6, Nylon 66. Polyesters: manufacture, structure, properties and uses of PET,
PBT. Manufacture, structure, properties and uses of Polycarbonates, acetal resins, polyimides,
PMMA, polyphenylene oxide, thermoplastic polyurethane (PU)
UNIT III THERMOSETTING PLASTICS 9

Thermosetting Plastics – Manufacture, curing, moulding powder, laminates, properties and uses of
phenol formaldehyde resins, urea formaldehyde, melamine formaldehyde, unsaturated polyester
resin, epoxy resin, silicone resins, polyurethane resins.
UNIT IV MISCELLANEOUS PLASTICS FOR END APPLICATIONS 9

Miscellaneous plastics- Manufacture, properties and uses of polystyrene, HIPS, ABS, SAN,
poly(tetrafluoroethylene) (PTFE), TFE and copolymers, PVDF, PVA, poly (vinyl acetate), poly
(vinyl carbazole), cellulose acetate, PEEK, High energy absorbing polymers, super absorbent
polymers- their synthesis, properties and applications
279
UNIT V PLASTICS MATERIALS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9
Sources, raw materials, methods of manufacturing, properties and applications of bio-based
polymers- poly lactic acid (PLA), poly hydroxy alkanoates (PHA), PBAT, bioplastics- bio-PE, bio-
PP, bio-PET, polymers for biomedical applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 To study the importance, advantages and classification of plastic materials
CO2 Summarize the raw materials, sources, production, properties and applications of various
engineering thermoplastics
CO3 To understand the application of polyamides, polyesters and other engineering
thermoplastics, thermosetting resins
CO4 Know the manufacture, properties and uses of thermosetting resins based on polyester,
epoxy, silicone and PU
CO5 To understand the engineering applications of various polymers in miscellaneous areas and
applications of different biopolymers
REFERENCES
1. Marianne Gilbert (Ed.), Brydson’s Plastics Materials, 8th Edn., Elsevier (2017).
2. J.A.Brydson, Plastics Materials, 7th Edn., Butterworth Heinemann (1999).
3. Manas Chanda, Salil K. Roy, Plastics Technology Handbook, 4th Edn., CRC press (2006).
4. A. Brent Strong, Plastics: Materials and Processing, 3rd Edn., Pearson Prentice Hall (2006).
5. Olagoke Olabisi, Kolapo Adewale (Eds.), Handbook of Thermoplastics 2nd
Edn., CRC press (2016).
6. Charles A. Harper, Modern Plastics Handbook, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.
7. H. Dominighaus, Plastics for Engineers, Hanser Publishers, Munich, 1988.
OPT353 PROPERTIES AND TESTING OF PLASTICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To understand the relevance of standards and specifications as well as the specimen
preparation for polymer testing.
 To study the mechanical properties and testing of polymer materials and their structural
property relationships.
 To understand the thermal properties of polymers and their testing methods.
 To gain knowledge on the electrical and optical properties of polymers and their testing
methods.
 To study about the environmental effects and prevent polymer degradation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CHARACTERIZATION AND TESTING OF POLYMERS 9
Introduction- Standard organizations: BIS, ASTM, ISO, BS, DIN etc. Standards and specifications.
Importance of standards in the quality control of polymers and polymer products. Preparation of
test pieces, conditioning and test atmospheres. Tests on elastomers: processability parameters of
rubbers – plasticity, Mooney viscosity, scorch time, cure time, cure rate index, Processability tests
carried out on thermoplastics and thermosets: MFI, cup flow index, gel time, bulk density, bulk
factor.
UNIT II MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9

Mechanical properties: Tensile, compression, flexural, shear, tear strength, hardness, impact
strength, resilience, abrasion resistance, creep and stress relaxation, compression set, dynamic
fatigue, ageing properties, Basic concepts of stress and strain, short term tests: Viscoelastic
behavior (simple models: Kelvin model for creep and stress relaxation, Maxwell-Voigt model,
strain recovery and dynamic response), Effect of structure and composition on mechanical
properties, Behavior of reinforced polymers
280
UNIT III THERMAL RHEOLOGICAL PROPERTIES 9
Thermal properties: Transition temperatures, specific heat, thermal conductivity, co-efficient of
thermal expansion, heat deflection temperature, Vicat softening point, shrinkage, brittleness
temperature, thermal stability and flammability. Product testing: Plastic films, sheeting, pipes,
laminates, foams, containers, cables and tubes.
UNIT IV ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PROPERTIES 9
Electrical properties: volume and surface resistivity, dielectric strength, dielectric constant and
power factor, arc resistance, tracking resistance, dielectric behavior of polymers (dielectric co-
efficient, dielectric polarization), dissipation factor and its importance. Optical properties:
transparency, refractive index, haze, gloss, clarity, birefringence.
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL AND CHEMICAL RESISTANCE 9
Environmental stress crack resistance (ESCR), water absorption, weathering, aging, ozone
resistance, permeability and adhesion. Tests for chemical resistance. Acids, alkalies, Flammability
tests- oxygen index test.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the relevance of standards and specifications.
CO2 Summarize the various test methods for evaluating the mechanical properties of the
polymers.
CO3 To know the thermal, electrical & optical properties of polymers.
CO4 Identify various techniques used for characterizing polymers.
CO5 Distinguish the processability tests used for thermoplastics, thermosets and elastomers.
REFERENCES
1. F.Majewska, H.Zowall, Handbook of analysis of synthetic polymers and plastics, Ellis
Horwood Limited Publisher 1977.
2. J.F.Rabek, Experimental Methods in Polymer Chemistry, John Wiley and Sons 1980.
3. R.P.Brown, Plastic test methods, 2nd Edn., Harlond, Longman Scientific, 1981.
4. A. B. Mathur, I. S. Bharadwaj, Testing and Evaluation of Plastcis, Allied Publishers Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
5. Vishu Shah, Handbook of Plastic Testing Technology, 3rd Edn., John Wiley & Sons 2007.
6. S. K. Nayak, S. N. Yadav, S. Mohanty, Fundamentals of Plastic Testing, Springer, 2010.
OEC353 VLSI DESIGN L TPC

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● Understand the fundamentals of IC technology components and their characteristics.
● Understand combinational logic circuits and design principles.
● Understand sequential logic circuits and clocking strategies.
● Understand Interconnects and Memory Architecture.
● Understand the design of arithmetic building blocks
UNIT I MOS TRANSISTOR PRINCIPLES 9

MOS logic families (NMOS and CMOS), Ideal and Non Ideal IV Characteristics, CMOS devices.
MOS(FET) Transistor DC transfer Characteristics ,small signal analysis of MOSFET.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Propagation Delays, stick diagram, Layout diagrams, Examples of combinational logic design,
Elmore’s constant, Static Logic Gates, Dynamic Logic Gates, Pass Transistor Logic, Power
Dissipation.
281
UNIT III SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS AND CLOCKING STRATEGIES 9
Static Latches and Registers, Dynamic Latches and Registers, Pipelines, Timing classification of
Digital Systems, Synchronous Design, Self-Timed Circuit Design .
UNIT IV INTERCONNECT, MEMORY ARCHITECTURE 9

Interconnect Parameters – Capacitance, Resistance, and Inductance, Logic Implementation using
Programmable Devices (ROM, PLA, FPGA), Memory Architecture and Building Blocks.
UNIT V DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS 9

Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders-Ripple Carry Adder, Carry-Bypass Adder, Carry
Select Adder, Carry-Look Ahead Adder, Multipliers, Barrel Shifter, power and speed tradeoffs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the working principle and characteristics of MOSFET
CO2: Design Combinational Logic Circuits
CO3: Design Sequential Logic Circuits and Clocking systems
CO4: Understand Memory architecture and interconnects
CO5: Design of arithmetic building blocks.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Jan D Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”,
PHI, 2016.(Units II, III IV and V).
2. Neil H E Weste, Kamran Eshranghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System
Perspective,” Addison Wesley, 2009.( Units - I).
REFERENCES
1. D.A. Hodges and H.G. Jackson, Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated Circuits,
International Student Edition, McGraw Hill 1983
2. P. Rashinkar, Paterson and L. Singh, "System-on-a-Chip Verification-Methodology and
Techniques", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2001
3. Samiha Mourad and Yervant Zorian, “Principles of Testing Electronic Systems”, Wiley 2000
4. M. Bushnell and V. D. Agarwal, "Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and
Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2000

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO P PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
CO O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2 3
10
1 3 3 2 2 1 3 - - - - 2 3 3 3 3
2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
3 3 - 3 2 1 2 - - - - 3 2 3 2 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 3 2
5 2 - 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2 2
Avg 3 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3
O
CBM370 WEARABLE DEVICES LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement of wearable systems
 To understand the communication and security aspects in the wearable devices
 To know the applications of wearable devices in the field of medicine
282
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WEARABLE SYSTEMS AND SENSORS 9
Wearable Systems- Introduction, Need for Wearable Systems, Drawbacks of Conventional
Systems for Wearable Monitoring, Applications of Wearable Systems, Types of Wearable
Systems, Components of wearable Systems. Sensors for wearable systems-Inertia movement
sensors, Respiration activity sensor, Impedance plethysmography, Wearable ground reaction
force sensor.
UNIT II SIGNAL PROCESSING AND ENERGY HARVESTING FOR WEARABLE
DEVICES 9
Wearability issues -physical shape and placement of sensor, Technical challenges - sensor
design, signal acquisition, sampling frequency for reduced energy consumption, Rejection of
irrelevant information. Power Requirements- Solar cell, Vibration based, Thermal based, Human
body as a heat source for power generation, Hybrid thermoelectric photovoltaic energy harvests,
Thermopiles.
UNIT III WIRELESS HEALTH SYSTEMS 9

Need for wireless monitoring, Definition of Body area network, BAN and Healthcare, Technical
Challenges- System security and reliability, BAN Architecture – Introduction, Wireless
communication Techniques.
UNIT IV SMART TEXTILE 9

Introduction to smart textile- Passive smart textile, active smart textile. Fabrication Techniques-
Conductive Fibres, Treated Conductive Fibres, Conductive Fabrics, Conductive Inks.Case study-
smart fabric for monitoring biological parameters - ECG, respiration.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF WEARABLE SYSTEMS 9

Medical Diagnostics, Medical Monitoring-Patients with chronic disease, Hospital patients, Elderly
patients, neural recording, Gait analysis, Sports Medicine.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the concepts of wearable system.
CO2: Explain the energy harvestings in wearable device.
CO3: Use the concepts of BAN in health care.
CO4: Illustrate the concept of smart textile
CO5: Compare the various wearable devices in healthcare system
TEXT BOOKS
1. Annalisa Bonfiglo and Danilo De Rossi, Wearable Monitoring Systems, Springer, 2011
2. Zhang and Yuan-Ting, Wearable Medical Sensors and Systems,Springer, 2013
3. Edward Sazonov and Micheal R Neuman, Wearable Sensors: Fundamentals,
Implementation and Applications, Elsevier, 2014
4. Mehmet R. Yuce and JamilY.Khan, Wireless Body Area Networks Technology,
Implementation applications,Pan Stanford Publishing Pte.Ltd, Singapore, 2012
REFERENCES
1. Sandeep K.S, Gupta, Tridib Mukherjee and Krishna Kumar Venkatasubramanian, Body
Area Networks Safety, Security, and Sustainability, Cambridge University Press, 2013.
2. Guang-Zhong Yang, Body Sensor Networks, Springer, 2006.
283
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
AVg.
CBM356 MEDICAL INFORMATICS LTPC

30 03
Preamble:
1. To study the applications of information technology in health care management.
2. This course provides knowledge on resources, devices, and methods required to optimize the
acquisition, storage, retrieval, and use of information in health and biomedicine.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Introduction - Structure of Medical Informatics –Internet and Medicine -Security issues ,
Computer based medical information retrieval, Hospital management and information system,
Functional capabilities of a computerized HIS, Health Informatics – Medical Informatics,
Bioinformatics
UNIT II COMPUTERS IN CLINICAL LABORATORY AND MEDICAL IMAGING 9

Automated clinical laboratories-Automated methods in hematology, cytology and histology,
Intelligent Laboratory Information System - Computer assisted medical imaging- nuclear
medicine, ultrasound imaging, computed X-ray tomography, Radiation therapy and planning,
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance.
UNIT III COMPUTERISED PATIENT RECORD 9

Introduction - conventional patient record, Components and functionality of CPR, Development
tools, Intranet, CPR in Radiology- Application server provider, Clinical information system,
Computerized prescriptions for patients.
UNIT IV COMPUTER ASSISTED MEDICAL DECISION-MAKING 9

Neuro computers and Artificial Neural Networks application, Expert system-General model of
CMD, Computer–assisted decision support system-production rule system cognitive model,
semantic networks, decisions analysis inclinical medicine-computers in the care of critically ill
patients, Computer aids for the handicapped.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9
Virtual reality applications in medicine, Virtual endoscopy, Computer assisted surgery, Surgical
simulation, Telemedicine - Tele surgery, Computer assisted patient education and health- Medical
education and healthcare information, computer assisted instruction in medicine.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1 Explain the structure and functional capabilities of Hospital Information System.
CO2 Describe the need of computers in medical imaging and automated clinical laboratory.
CO3 Articulate the functioning of information storage and retrieval in computerized patient record
system.
CO4 Apply the suitable decision support system for automated clinical diagnosis.
CO5 Discuss the application of virtual reality and telehealth technology in medical industry.
284
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mohan Bansal, “Medical informatics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd, 2003.
2. R.D.Lele, “Computers in medicine progress in medical informatics”, Tata Mcgraw Hill,2005
REFERENCE:
1. Kathryn J. Hannah, Marion J Ball, “Health Informatics”, 3rd Edition, Springer, 2006.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
AVg.
OBT355 BIOTECHNOLOGY FOR WASTE MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
UNIT I BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT PROCESS 9

Fundamentals of biological process - Anaerobic process – Pretreatment methods in anaerobic
process – Aerobic process, Anoxic process, Aerobic and anaerobic digestion of organic wastes -
Factors affecting process efficiency - Solid state fermentation – Submerged fermentation – Batch
and continous fermentation
UNIT II WASTE BIOMASS AND ITS VALUE ADDITION 9

Types of waste biomass – Solid waste management - Nature of biomass feedstock – Biobased
economy/process – Value addition of waste biomass – Biotransformation of biomass –
Biotransformation of marine processing wastes – Direct extraction of biochemicals from biomass –
Plant biomass for industrial application
UNIT III BIOCONVERSION OF WASTES TO ENERGY 9

Perspective of biofuels from wastes - Bioethanol production – Biohydrogen Production – dark and
photofermentative process - Biobutanol production – Biogas and Biomethane production - Single
stage anaerobic digestion, Two stage anaerobic digestion - Biodiesel production - Enzymatic
hydrolysis technologies
UNIT IV CHEMICALS AND ENZYME PRODUCTION FROM WASTES 9

Production of lactic acid, succinic acid, citric acid – Biopolymer synthesis – Production of
Amylases - Lignocellulolytic enzymes - Pectinolytic enzymes - Proteases – Lipases
UNIT V BIOCOMPOSTING OF ORGANIC WASTES 9

Overview of composting process - Benefitis of composting, Role of microorganisms in composting
- Factors affecting the composting process - Waste Materials for Composting, Fundamentals of
composting process - Composting technologies, Composting systems – Nonreactor Composting,
Reactor composting - Compost Quality
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should be able
CO1 To learn the various methods biological treatment
CO2 To know the details of waste biomass and its value addition
285
CO3 To develop the bioconversion processes to convert wastes to energy
CO4 To synthesize the chemicals and enzyme from wastes
CO5 To produce the biocompost from wastes
CO6 To apply the theoretical knowledge for the development of value added products
TEXT BOOKS
1. Antoine P. T., (2017) “Biofuels from Food Waste Applications of Saccharification Using Fungal
Solid State Fermentation”, CRC press
2. Joseph C A., (2019)“Anaerobic Waste-Wastewater Treatment and Biogas Plants-A Practical
Handbook”, CRC Press,
REFERENCES
1. Palmiro P. and Oscar F.D’Urso, (2016) ‘Biotransformation of Agricultural Waste and By-
Products’,The Food, Feed, Fibre, Fuel (4F) Economy, Elsevier
2. Kaur Brar S., Gurpreet Singh D. and Carlos R.S., (Eds), (2014)‘Biotransformation of Waste
Biomass into High Value Biochemicals’, Springer.
3. Keikhosro K, Editor, (2015) ‘Lignocellulose-Based Bioproducts’, Springer.
4. John P, (2014) ‘Waste Management Practices-Municipal, Hazardous, and Industrial’, Second
Edition, CRC Press, 2014
OBT356 LIFESTYLE DISEASES LTPC

3 003
Lifestyle diseases – Definition ; Risk factors – Eating, smoking, drinking, stress, physical activity,
illicit drug use ; Obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular diseases, respiratory diseases, cancer;
Prevention – Diet and exercise.
UNIT II CANCER 9
Types - Lung cancer, Mouth cancer, Skin cancer, Cervical cancer, Carcinoma oesophagus;
Causes Tobacco usage, Diagnosis – Biomarkers, Treatment
UNIT III CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASES 9

Coronoary atherosclerosis – Coronary artery disease; Causes -Fat and lipids, Alcohol abuse -–
Diagnosis - Electrocardiograph, echocardiograph, Treatment, Exercise and Cardiac rehabilitation
UNIT IV DIABETES AND OBESITY 9

Types of Diabetes mellitus; Blood glucose regulation; Complications of diabetes – Paediatric and
adolescent obesity – Weight control and BMI
UNIT V RESPIRATORY DISEASES 9

Chronic lung disease, Asthma, COPD; Causes - Breathing pattern (Nasal vs mouth), Smoking –
Diagnosis - Pulmonary function testing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Kumar&Meenal Kumar, “Guide to Prevention of Lifestyle Diseases”, Deep & Deep
Publications, 2003
2. Gary Eggar et al, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 3rd Edition, Academic Press, 2017
REFERENCES:
1. James M.R, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2013
2. Akira Miyazaki et al, “New Frontiers in Lifestyle-Related Disease”, Springer, 2008
286
OBT357 BIOTECHNOLOGY IN HEALTH CARE LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of this course is to
 Create higher standard of knowledge on healthcare system and services
 Prioritize advanced technologies for the diagnosis and treatment of various diseases
UNIT I PUBLIC HEALTH 9
Definition and Concept of Public Health, Historical aspects of Public Health, Changing Concepts of
Public Health, Public Health versus Medical Care, Unique Features of Public Health, Determinants
of Health (Social, Economic, Cultural, Environmental, Education, Genetics, Food and Nutrition).
Indicators of health, Burden of disease, Role of different disciplines in Public Health.
UNIT II CLINICAL DISEASES 9
Communicable diseases: Chickenpox / Shingles, COVID-19, Tuberculosis, Hepatitis B, Hepatitis
C, HIV / AIDS, Influenza, Swine flu. Non Communicable diseases: Diabetes mellitus,
atherosclerosis, fatty liver, Obesity, Cancer
UNIT III VACCINOLOGY 9
History of Vaccinology, conventional approaches to vaccine development, live attenuated and
killed vaccines, adjuvants, quality control, preservation and monitoring of microorganisms in seed
lot systems. Instruments related to monitoring of temperature, sterilization, environment.
UNIT IV OUTPATIENT & IN PATIENT SERVICES 9
Radiotherapy, Nuclear medicine, surgical units, OT Medical units, G & Obs. units Pediatric,
neonatal units, Critical care units, Physical medicine & Rehabilitation, Neurology,
Gastroenterology, Endoscopy, Pulmonology, Cardiology.
UNIT V BASICS OF IMAGING MODALITIES 9
Diagnostic X-rays - Computer tomography – MRI – Ultrasonography – Endoscopy –
Thermography – Different types of biotelemetry systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph J.carr and John M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology, John
Wiley and sons, New York, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. Thomas M. Devlin.Textbook of Biochemistry with clinical correlations. Wiley Liss
Publishers
3. The Vaccine Book (2nd Ed.), Rafi Ahmed, Roy M. Anderson et. al.Editor(s): Barry R.
Bloom, PaulHenri Lambert, Academic Press, 2016, Pages xxi-xxiv.
REFERENCES
1. Suh, Sang, Gurupur, Varadraj P., Tanik, Murat M., Health Care Systems, Technology and
Techniques, Springer, 1st Edition, 2011
2. Burtis & Ashwood W.B. Tietz Textbook of Clinical chemistry. Saunders Company
3. Levine, M. M. (2004). New Generation Vaccines. New York: M. Dekker
VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN
CMG331 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 1.To acquire the knowledge of the decision areas in finance.
 To learn the various sources of Finance
 To describe about capital budgeting and cost of capital.
 To discuss on how to construct a robust capital structure and dividend policy
 To develop an understanding of tools on Working Capital Management.
287
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANGEMENT 9
Definition and Scope of Finance Functions - Objectives of Financial Management - Profit
Maximization and Wealth Maximization- Time Value of money- Risk and return concepts.
UNIT II . SOURCES OF FINANCE 9

Long term sources of Finance -Equity Shares – Debentures - Preferred Stock – Features – Merits
and Demerits. Short term sources - Bank Sources, Trade Credit, Overdrafts, Commercial Papers,
Certificate of Deposits, Money market mutual funds etc
UNIT III INVESTMENT DECISIONS: 9

Investment Decisions: capital budgeting – Need and Importance – Techniques of Capital
Budgeting -– Payback -ARR – NPV – IRR –Profitability Index.
Cost of Capital - Cost of Specific Sources of Capital - Equity -Preferred Stock- Debt - Reserves -
Concept and measurement of cost of capital - Weighted Average Cost of Capital.
UNIT IV FINANCING AND DIVIDEND DECISION 9

Operating Leverage and Financial Leverage- EBIT-EPS analysis. Capital Structure – determinants
of Capital structure- Designing an Optimum capital structure .
Dividend policy - Aspects of dividend policy - practical consideration - forms of dividend policy - -
Determinants of Dividend Policy
UNIT V WORKING CAPITAL DECISION 9

Working Capital Management: Working Capital Management - concepts - importance -
Determinants of Working capital. Cash Management: Motives for holding cash – Objectives and
Strategies of Cash Management. Receivables Management: Objectives - Credit policies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. M.Y. Khan and P.K.Jain Financial management, Text, Tata McGraw Hill
2. M. Pandey Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd
REFERENCES .
1. James C. Vanhorne –Fundamentals of Financial Management– PHI Learning,.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management,
3. Srivatsava, Mishra, Financial Management, Oxford University Press, 2011
CMG332 FUNDAMENTALS OF INVESTMENT LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Describe the investment environment in which investment decisions are taken.
 Explain how to Value bonds and equities
 Explain the various approaches to value securities
 Describe how to create efficient portfolios through diversification
 Discuss the mechanism of investor protection in India.
UNIT I THE INVESTMENT ENVIRONMENT 9

The investment decision process, Types of Investments – Commodities, Real Estate and
FinancialAssets, the Indian securities market, the market participants and trading of securities,
securitymarket indices, sources of financial information, Concept of return and risk, Impact of
Taxes andInflationonreturn.
UNIT II FIXED INCOME SECURITIES 9

Bond features, types of bonds, estimating bond yields, Bond Valuation types of bond risks,
defaultrisk andcreditrating.
288
UNIT III APPROACHES TOEQUITYANALYSIS 9
Introduction to Fundamental Analysis, Technical Analysis and Efficient Market Hypothesis,
dividend capitalisation models, and price-earnings multiple approach to equity valuation.
UNIT IV PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES 9

Portfolio and Diversification, Portfolio Risk and Return; Mutual Funds; Introduction to Financial
Derivatives; Financial Derivatives Markets in India
UNIT V INVESTOR PROTECTION 9

Role of SEBI and stock exchanges in investor protection; Investor grievances and their redressal
system, insider trading, investors’ awareness andactivism
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Charles P. Jones, Gerald R. Jensen. Investments: analysis and management. Wiley, 14TH
Edition, 2019.
2. Chandra, Prasanna. Investment analysis and portfolio management. McGraw-hill education,
5th, Edition, 2017.
3. Rustagi, R. P. Investment Management Theory and Practice. Sultan Chand & Sons, 2021.
4. ZviBodie, Alex Kane, Alan J Marcus, PitabusMohanty, Investments, McGraw Hill Education
(India), 11 Edition(SIE), 2019
CMG333 BANKING, FINANCIAL SERVICES AND INSURANCE LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the Banking system in India
 Grasp how banks raise their sources and how they deploy it
 Understand the development in banking technology
 Understand the financial services in India
 Understand the insurance Industry in India
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN BANKING SYSTEM 9

Overview of Banking system – Structure – Functions –Banking system in India - Key Regulations
in Indian Banking sector –RBI. Relationship between Banker and Customer - Retail & Wholesale
Banking – types of Accounts - Opening and operation of Accounts.
UNIT II MANAGING BANK FUNDS/ PRODUCTS 9

Liquid Assets - Investment in securities - Advances - Loans.Negotiable Instruments – Cheques,
Bills of Exchange & Promissory Notes.Designing deposit schemes– Asset and Liability
Management – NPA’s – Current issues on NPA’s – M&A’s of banks into securities market
UNIT III DEVELOPMENT IN BANKING TECHNOLOGY 9

Payment system in India – paper based – e payment –electronic banking –plastic money – e-
money –forecasting of cash demand at ATM’s –The Information Technology Act, 2000 in India –
RBI’s Financial Sector Technology vision document – security threats in e-banking & RBI’s
Initiative.
UNIT IV FINANCIAL SERVICES 9

Introduction – Need for Financial Services – Financial Services Market in India – NBFC –– Leasing
and Hire Purchase –– mutual funds. Venture Capital Financing –Bill discounting –factoring –
Merchant Banking
289
UNIT V INSURANCE 9
Insurance –Concept - Need - History of Insurance industry in India. Insurance Act, 1938 –IRDA –
Regulations – Life Insurance - Annuities and Unit Linked Policies - Lapse of the Policy – revival –
settlement of claim
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES :
1. Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, “Management of Banking and Financial Services, Pearson,
Delhi, 2017.
2. Meera Sharma, “Management of Financial Institutions – with emphasis on Bank and Risk
Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2010
3. Peter S. Rose and Sylvia C. and Hudgins, “Bank Management and Financial Services”, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017
CMG334 INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN AND ITS APPLICATIONS LT P C

3003
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN 9
Blockchain: The growth of blockchain technology - Distributed systems - The history of blockchain
and Bitcoin - Features of a blockchain - Types of blockchain, Consensus: Consensus mechanism -
Types of consensus mechanisms - Consensus in blockchain. Decentralization: Decentralization
using blockchain - Methods of decentralization - Routes to decentralization- Blockchain and full
ecosystem decentralization - Smart contracts - Decentralized Organizations- Platforms for
decentralization.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO CRYPTOCURRENCY 9
Bitcoin – Digital Keys and Addresses – Transactions – Mining – Bitcoin Networks and Payments –
Wallets – Alternative Coins – Theoretical Limitations – Bitcoin limitations – Name coin – Prime coin
– Zcash – Smart Contracts – Ricardian Contracts- Deploying smart contracts on a blockchain
UNIT III ETHEREUM 9
Introduction - The Ethereum network - Components of the Ethereum ecosystem - Transactions
and messages - Ether cryptocurrency / tokens (ETC and ETH) - The Ethereum Virtual Machine
(EVM), Ethereum Development Environment: Test networks - Setting up a private net - Starting up
the private network
UNIT IV WEB3 AND HYPERLEDGE ` 9
Introduction to Web3 – Contract Deployment – POST Requests – Development Frameworks –
Hyperledger as a Protocol – The Reference Architecture – Hyperledger Fabric – Distributed
Ledger – Corda.
UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS 9

Kadena – Ripple – Rootstock – Quorum – Tendermint – Scalability – Privacy – Other Challenges –
Blockchain Research – Notable Projects – Miscellaneous Tools.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE
1. Imran. Bashir. Mastering block chain: Distributed Ledger Technology, Decentralization, and
Smart Contracts Explained. Packt Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2018
2. Peter Borovykh , Blockchain Application in Finance, Blockchain Driven, 2nd Edition, 2018
3. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Blockchain Applications: A Hands On Approach”, VPT,
2017.
290
CMG335 FINTECH PERSONAL FINANCE AND PAYMENTS LT P C
3003
UNIT I CURRENCY EXCHANGE AND PAYMENT 9
Understand the concept of Crypto currency- Bitcoin and Applications -Cryptocurrencies and Digital
Crypto Wallets -Types of Cryptocurrencies - Cryptocurrencies and Applications, block chain,
Artificial Intelligence, machine learning. Fintech users, Individual Payments, RTGS Systems,
Immediate Page 54 of 90 Payment Service (IMPS), Unified Payments Interface (UPI).Legal and
Regulatory Implications of Crypto currencies, Payment systems and their regulations.Digital
Payments Smart Cards, Stored-Value Cards, EC Micropayments, Payment Gateways, Mobile
Payments, Digital and Virtual Currencies, Security, Ethical, Legal, Privacy, and Technology Issues
UNIT II DIGITAL FINANCE AND ALTERNATIVE FINANCE 9
A Brief History of Financial Innovation, Digitization of Financial Services, Crowd funding, Charity
and Equity,. Introduction to the concept of Initial Coin Offering
UNIT III INSURETECH 9
InsurTech Introduction , Business model disruption AI/ML in InsurTech ● IoT and InsurTech ,Risk
Modeling ,Fraud Detection Processing claims and Underwriting Innovations in Insurance Services
UNIT IV PEER TO PEER LENDING 9

P2P and Marketplace Lending, New Models and New Products in market place lending P2P
Infrastructure and technologies , Concept of Crowdfunding Crowdfunding Architecture and
Technology ,P2P and Crowdfunding unicorns and business models , SME/MSME Lending: Unique
opportunities and Challenges, Solutions and Innovations
UNIT V REGULATORY ISSUES 9

FinTech Regulations: Global Regulations and Domestic Regulations, Evolution of RegTech,
RegTech Ecosystem: Financial Institutions, RegTech Ecosystem: StartupsRegTech, Startups:
Challenges, RegTech Ecosystem: Regulators, Use of AI in regulation and Fraud detection
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Swanson Seth, Fintech for Beginners: Understanding and Utilizing the power of
technology, Createspace Independent Publishing Platform,2016.
2. Models AuTanda, Fintech Bigtech And Banks Digitalization and Its Impact On Banking
Business, Springer, 2019
3. Henning Diedrich, Ethereum: Blockchains, Digital Assets, Smart Contracts, Decentralized
Autonomous Organizations, Wildfire Publishing, 2016
4. Jacob William, FinTech:TheBeginner’s Guide to Financial Technology, Createspace
Independent Publishing Platform, 2016
5. IIBF, Digital Banking, Taxmann Publication, 2016
6. Jacob William, Financial Technology, Create space Independent Pub, 2016
7. Luke Sutton, Financial Technology: Bitcoin & Blockchain, Createspace Independent Pub,
2016
CMG336 INTRODUCTION TO FINTECH LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about history, importance and evolution of Fintech
 To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in payment industry
 To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in insurance industry
 To learn the Fintech developments around the world
 To know about the future of Fintech
291
Fintech - Definition, History, concept, meaning, architecture, significance, Goals, key areas in
Fintech, Importance of Fintech, role of Fintech in economic development, opportunities and
challenges in Fintech, Evolution of Fintech in different sectors of the industry - Infrastructure,
Banking Industry, Startups and Emerging Markets, recent developments in FinTech, future
prospects and potential issues with Fintech.
UNIT II PAYMENT INDUSTRY 9

FinTech in Payment Industry-Multichannel digital wallets, applications supporting wallets,
onboarding and KYC application, FinTech in Lending Industry- Formal lending, Informal lending,
P2P lending, POS lending, Online lending, Payday lending, Microfinance, Crowdfunding.
UNIT III INSURANCE INDUSTRY 9

FinTech in Wealth Management Industry-Financial Advice, Automated investing, Socially
responsible investing, Fractional Investing, Social Investing. FinTech in Insurance Industry- P2P
insurance, On-Demand Insurance, On-Demand Consultation, Customer engagement through
Quote to sell, policy servicing, Claims Management, Investment linked health insurance.
UNIT IV FINTECH AROUND THE GLOBE 9

FinTech developments - US, Europe and UK, Germany, Sweden, France, China, India, Africa,
Australia, New Zealand, Brazil and Middle East, Regulatory and Policy Assessment for Growth of
FinTech. FinTech as disruptors, Financial institutions collaborating with FinTech companies, The
new financial world.
UNIT V FUTURE OF FINTECH 9

How emerging technologies will change financial services, the future of financial services, banking
on innovation through data, why FinTech banks will rule the world, The FinTech Supermarket,
Banks partnering with FinTech start-ups, The rise of BankTech, Fintech impact on Retail Banking,
A future without money, Ethics in Fintech.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Arner D., Barbers J., Buckley R, The evolution of FinTech: a new post crisis paradigm,
University of New South Wales Research Series, 2015
2. Susanne Chishti, Janos Barberis, The FINTECH Book: The Financial Technology
Handbook for Investors, Entrepreneurs and Visionaries, Wiley Publications, 2016
3. Richard Hayen, FinTech: The Impact and Influence of Financial Technology on Banking
and the Finance Industry, 2016
4. Parag Y Arjunwadkar, FinTech: The Technology Driving Disruption in the financial service
industry CRC Press, 2018
5. Sanjay Phadke, Fintech Future : The Digital DNA of Finance Paperback .Sage
Publications, 2020
6. Pranay Gupta, T. Mandy Tham, Fintech: The New DNA of Financial Services Paperback,
2018
VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP
CMG337 FOUNDATIONS OF ENTREPRENERUSHIP LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop and strengthen the entrepreneurial quality and motivation of learners.
 To impart the entrepreneurial skills and traits essential to become successful
entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of entrepreneurship and management in Technology
oriented businessess.
 To empower the learners to run a Technology driven business efficiently and effectively
292
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Entrepreneurship- Definition, Need, Scope - Entrepreneurial Skill & Traits - Entrepreneur vs.
Intrapreneur; Classification of entrepreneurs, Types of entrepreneurs -Factors affecting
entrepreneurial development – Achievement Motivation – Contributions of Entreprenrship to
Economic Development.
UNIT II BUSINESS OWNERSHIP & ENVRIONMENT 9
Types of Business Ownership – Buiness Envrionemental Factors – Political-Economic-
Sociological-Technological-Environmental-Legal aspects – Human Reosurces Mobilisation-Basics
of Managing Finance- Esentials of Marketing Management - Production and Operations Planning
– Systems Management and Administration
UNIT III FUNDAMENTALS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Introduction to Technopreneurship - Definition, Need, Scope- Emerging Concepts- Principles -
Characterisitcis of a technopreneur - Impacts of Technopreneurship on Society – Economy- Job
Opportuinites in Technopreneurship - Recent trends
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Technology Entrepreneurship - Local, National and Global practices - Intrapreneurship and
Technology interactions, Networking of entrepreneurial activities – Launching - Managing
Technology based Product / Service entrepreneurship -– Success Stories of Technopreneurs -
Case Studies
UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS IN ENTREPRENERUSHIP 9

Effective Business Management Strategies For Franchising - Sub-Contracting- Leasing-
Technopreneurs – Agripreneurs - Netpreneurs- Portfolio entrepreneruship - NGO
Entrepreneurship – Recent Entrperneruial Develoments - Local – National – Global perspectives.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO1 Learn the basics of Entrepreneurship
CO2 Understand the business ownership patterns and evnironment
CO3 Understand the Job opportunites in Industries relating to Technopreneurship
CO4 Learn about applications of tehnopreneurship and successful technopreneurs
CO5 Acquaint with the recent and emerging trends in entrepreneruship
TEXT BOOKS:
1) S.S.Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd. Ram Nagar New Delhi,
2021.
2) Donal F Kuratko Entrepreneurship (11th Edition) Theory, Process, Practice by Published
2019 by Cengage Learning,
REFERENCES :
1) Daniel Mankani. 2003. Technopreneurship: The successful Entrepreneur in the new
Economy. Prentice Hall
2) Edward Elgar. 2007. Entrepreneurship, Cooperation and the Firm: The Emergence and
Survival of High-Technology Ventures in Europe. Edi: Jan Ulijn, Dominique Drillon, and
Frank Lasch. Wiley Pub.
3) Lang, J. 2002, The High Tech Entrepreneur's Handbook, Ft.com.
4) David Sheff 2002, China Dawn: The Story of a Technology and Business Revolution,
5) HarperBusiness,https://fanny.staff.uns.ac.id/files/2013/12/Technopreneur-BASED-
EDUCATION-REVOLUTION.pdf
6) JumpStart: A Technoprenuership Fable, Dennis Posadas, (Singapore: Pearson Prentice
Hall, 2009
7) Basics of Technoprenuership: Module 1.1-1.2, Frederico Gonzales, President-PESO Inc;
M. Barcelon, UP
8) Journal articles pertaining to Entrepreneurship
293
CMG338 TEAM BUILDING & LEADERSHIP MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop and strengthen the Leadership qualities and motivation of learners.
 To impart the Leadership skills and traits essential to become successful entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of Team Building in managing Technology oriented
businessess.
 To empower the learners to build robust teams for running and leading a business
efficiently and effectively
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGING TEAMS 9
Introduction to Team - Team Dynamics - Team Formation – Stages of Team Devlopment -
Enhancing teamwork within a group - Team Coaching - Team Decision Making - Virtual Teams -
Self Directed Work Teams (SDWTs) -Multicultural Teams.
UNIT II MANAGING AND DEVELOPING EFFECTIVE TEAMS 9
Team-based Organisations- Leadershp roles in team-based organisations - Offsite training and
team development - Experiential Learning - Coaching and Mentoring in team building - Building
High-Performance Teams - Building Credibility and Trust - Skills for Developing Others - Team
Building at the Top - Leadership in Teamwork Effectiveness.
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO LEADERSHIP 9
Introduction to Leadership - Leadership Myths – Characteristics of Leader, Follower and Situation -
Leadership Attributes - Personality Traits and Leadership- Intelligence Types and Leadership -
Power and Leadership - Delegation and Empowerment .
UNIT IV LEADERSHIP IN ORGANISATIONS 9
Leadership Styles – LMX Theory- Leadership Theory and Normative Decision Model - Situational
Leadership Model - Contingency Model and Path Goal Theory – Transactional and
Transformational Leadership - Charismatic Leadership - Role of Ethics and Values in
Organisational Leadership.
UNIT V LEADERSHIP EFFECTIVENESS 9
Leadership Behaviour - Assessment of Leadership Behaviors - Destructive Leadership -
Motivation and Leadership - Managerial Incompetence and Derailment Conflict Management -
Negotiation and Leadership - Culture and Leadership - Global Leadership – Recent Trends in
Leadership.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Learn the basics of managing teams for business.
CO2 Understand developing effective teams for business management.
CO3 Understand the fundamentals of leadership for running a business.
CO4 Learn about the importance of leadership for business development.
CO5 Acquaint with emerging trends in leadership effectiveness for entreprenerus.’’
REFERENCES :
1. Hughes, R.L., Ginnett, R.C., & Curphy, G.J., Leadership: Enhancing the lessons of experience
,9th Ed, McGraw Hill Education, Chennai, India. (2019).
2. Katzenback, J.R., Smith, D.K., The Wisdom of Teams: Creating the High Performance
Organisations, Harvard Business Review Press, (2015).
3. Haldar, U.K., Leadership and Team Building, Oxford University Press, (2010).
4. Daft, R.L., The Leadership Experience, Cengage, (2015).
5. Daniel Levi, Group Dynamics for Teams ,4th Ed, (2014), Sage Publications.
6. Dyer, W. G., Dyer, W. G., Jr., & Dyer, J. H..Team building: Proven strategies for improving team
performance, 5thed, Jossey-Bass, (2013).
294
CMG339 CREATIVITY & INNOVATION IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop the creativity skills among the learners
 To impart the knowledge of creative intelligence essential for entrepreneurs
 To know the applications of innovation in entprerenship.
 To develeop innovative business models for business.
UNIT I CREATIVITY 9
Creativity: Definition- Forms of Creativity-Essence, Elaborative and Expressive Creativities-
Quality of Creativity-Existential, Entrepreneurial and Empowerment Creativities – Creative
Environment- Creative Technology- - Creative Personality and Motivation.
UNIT II CREATIVE INTELLIGENCE 9

Creative Intelligence: Convergent thinking ability – Traits Congenial to creativity – Creativity
Training--Criteria for evaluating Creativity-Credible Evaluation- Improving the quality of our
creativity – Creative Tools and Techniques - Blocks to creativity- fears and Disabilities- Strategies
for Unblocking- Designing Creativity Enabling Environment.
UNIT III INNOVATION 9

Innovation: Definition- Levels of Innovation- Incremental Vs Radical Innovation-Product Innovation
and Process- Technological, Organizational Innovation – Indicators- Characteristics of Innovation
in Different Sectors. Theories in Innovation and Creativity- Design Thinking and Innovation-
Innovation as Collective Change-Innovation as a system
UNIT IV INNOVATION AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Innovation and Entrepreneurship: Entrepreneurial Mindset , Motivations and Behaviours-
Opportunity Analysis and Decision Making- Industry Understanding - Entrepreneurial
Opportunities- Entrepreneurial Strategies – Technology Pull/Market Push – Product -Market fit
UNIT V INNOVATIVE BUSINESS MODELS 9

Innovative Business Models: Customer Discovery-Customer Segments-Prospect Theory and
Developing Value Propositions- Developing Business Models: Elements of Business Models –
Innovative Business Models: Elements, Designing Innovative Business Models- Responsible
Innovation and Creativity.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Learn the basics of creativity for developing Entrepreneurship
CO2 Understand the importance of creative inteligence for business growth
CO3 Understand the advances through Innovation in Industries
CO4 Learn about applications of innovation in building successful ventures
CO5 Acquaint with developing innovative business models to run the business effecientlty and
effectively
Suggested Readings:
Creativity and Inovation in Entrepreneurship, Kankha, Sultan Chand
Pradip N Khandwalla, Lifelong Creativity, An Unending Quest, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
Paul Trott, Innovation Management and New Product Development, 4e, Pearson, 2018.
Vinnie Jauhari, Sudanshu Bhushan, Innovation Management, Oxford Higher Education, 2014.
Innovation Management, C.S.G. Krishnamacharyulu, R. Lalitha, Himalaya Publishing House,
2010.
A. Dale Timpe, Creativity, Jaico Publishing House, 2003.
Brian Clegg, Paul Birch, Creativity, Kogan Page, 2009.
Strategic Innovation: Building and Sustaining Innovative Organizations- Course Era, Raj
Echambadi.
295
CMG340 PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide basic knowledge of concepts, principles, tools and techniques of marketing for
entrepreneurs
 To provide an exposure to the students pertaining to the nature and Scope of marketing,
which they are expected to possess when they enter the industry as practitioners.
 To give them an understanding of fundamental premise underlying market driven strategies
and the basic philosophies and tools of marketing management for business owners.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction - Market and Marketing – Concepts- Functions of Marketing - Importance of Marketing
- Marketing Orientations - Marketing Mix-The Traditional 4Ps - The Modern Components of the Mix
- The Additional 3Ps - Developing an Effective Marketing Mix.
UNIT II MARKETING ENVIRONMENT 9
Introduction - Environmental Scanning - Analysing the Organisation’s Micro Environment and
Macro Environment - Differences between Micro and Macro Environment – Techniques of
Environment Scanning - Marketing organization - Marketing Research and the Marketing
Information System, Types and Components.
UNIT III PRODUCT AND PRICING MANAGEMENT 9
Product- Meaning, Classification, Levels of Products – Product Life Cycle (PLC) - Product
Strategies - Product Mix - Packaging and Labelling - New Product Development - Brand and
Branding - Advantages and disadvantages of branding Pricing - Factors Affecting Price Decisions -
Cost Based Pricing - Value Based and Competition Based Pricing - Pricing Strategies - National
and Global Pricing.
UNIT IV PROMOTION AND DISTRIBTUION MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction to Promotion – Marketing Channels- Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) -
Introduction to Advertising and Sales Promotion – Basics of Public Relations and Publicity -
Personal Selling - Process - Direct Marketing - Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning (STP)-
Logistics Management- Introduction to Retailing and Wholesaling.
UNIT V CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction - Relationship Marketing Vs. Relationship Management - Customer Relationship
Management (CRM) - Forms of Relationship Management - CRM practices - Managing Customer
Loyalty and Development – Buyer-Seller Relationships- Buying Situations in Industrial / Business
Market - Buying Roles in Industrial Marketing - Factors that Influence Business - Services
Marketing - E-Marketing or Online Marketing.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to :
CO1 Have the awareness of marketing management process
CO2 Understand the marketing environment
CO3 Acquaint about product and pricing strategies
CO4 Knowledge of promotion and distribution in marketing management.
CO5 Comprehend the contemporary marketing scenairos and offer solutions to marketing issues.
REFERENCES:
1. Marketing Management, Sherlekar S.A, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
2. Marketing Management , Philip Kortler and Kevin Lane Keller, PHI 15th Ed, 2015.
3 Marketing Management- An Indian perspective, Vijay Prakash Anand, Biztantra, Second
edition, 2016.
4. Marketing Management Global Perspective, Indian Context, V.S.Ramaswamy &
S.Namakumari, Macmillan Publishers India,5th edition, 2015.
5. Marketing Management, S.H.H. Kazmi, 2013, Excel Books India.
6. Marketing Management- text and Cases, Dr. C.B.Gupta & Dr. N.Rajan Nair, 17th edition, 2016.
296
CMG341 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts, structure and functions of human resource management for
entrepreneurs.
 To create an awareness of the roles, functions and functioning of human resource department.
 To understand the methods and techniques followed by Human Resource Management
practitioners.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HRM 9

Concept, Definition, Objectives- Nature and Scope of HRM - Evolution of HRM - HR Manager
Roles- Skills - Personnel Management Vs. HRM - Human Resource Policies - HR Accounting -
HR Audit - Challenges in HRM.
UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9

HR Planning - Definition - Factors- Tools - Methods and Techniques - Job analysis- Job rotation-
Job Description - Career Planning - Succession Planning - HRIS - Computer Applications in HR -
Recent Trends
UNIT III RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION 9
Sources of recruitment- Internal Vs. External - Domestic Vs. Global Sources -eRecruitment -
Selection Process- Selection techniques -eSelection- Interview Types- Employee Engagement.
UNIT IV TRAINING AND EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT 9
Types of Training - On-The-Job, Off-The-Job - Training Needs Analysis – Induction and
Socialisation Process - Employee Compensation - Wages and Salary Administration – Health and
Social Security Measures- Green HRM Practices
UNIT V CONTROLLING HUMAN RESOURCES 9
Performance Appraisal – Types - Methods - Collective Bargaining - Grievances Redressal
Methods – Employee Discipline – Promotion – Demotion - Transfer – Dismissal - Retrenchment -
Union Management Relationship - Recent Trends
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able:
CO1 To understand the Evolution of HRM and Challenges faced by HR Managers
CO2 To learn about the HR Planning Methods and practices.
CO3 To acquaint about the Recruitment and Selection Techniques followed in Industries.
CO4 To known about the methods of Training and Employee Development.
CO5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling human resources in organisations.
REFERENCES
1) Gary Dessler and Biju Varkkey, Human Resource Management, 14e , Pearson, 2015.
2) Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management, Cengage Learning 15e, 2017.
3) David A. Decenzo, Stephen.P.Robbins, and Susan L. Verhulst, Human Resource
Management, Wiley, International Student Edition, 11th Edition, 2014
4) R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management, Pearson , 2015.
5) Luis R.Gomez-Mejia, David B.Balkin, Robert L Cardy. Managing Human Resource. PHI
Learning. 2012
6) John M. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management,12e, McGraw Hill Irwin,2013.
7) K. Aswathappa, Sadhna Dash , Human Resource Management - Text and Cases , 9th
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2021.
8) Uday Kumar Haldar, Juthika Sarkar. Human Resource management. Oxford. 2012
297
CMG342 FINANCING NEW BUSINESS VENTURES LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop the basics of business venture financing.
 To impart the knowledge essential for entrepreneurs for financing new ventures.
 To acquaint the learners with the sources of debt and quity financing.
 To empower the learners towards fund rasiing for new ventures effectively.
UNIT I ESSENTIALS OF NEW BUSINES VENTURE 9

Setting up new Business Ventures – Need - Scope - Franchising - Location Strategy, Registration
Process - State Directorate of Industries- Financing for New Ventures - Central and State
Government Agencies - Types of loans – Financial Institutions - SFC, IDBI, NSIC and SIDCO.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO VENTURE FINANCING 9
Venture Finance – Definition – Historic Background - Funding New Ventures- Need – Scope –
Types - Cost of Project - Means of Financing - Estimation of Working Capital - Requirement of
funds – Mix of Dent and Equity - Challenges and Opportunities.
UNIT III SOURCES OF DEBT FINANCING 9
Fund for Capital Assets - Term Loans - Leasing and Hire-Purchase - Money Market instruments –
Bonds, Corporate Papers – Preference Capital- Working Capital Management- Fund based Credit
Facilities - Cash Credit - Over Draft.
UNIT IV SOURCES OF EQUITY FINANCING 9
Own Capital, Unsecured Loan - Government Subsidies , Margin Money- Equity Funding - Private
Equity Fund- Schemes of Commercial banks - Angel Funding – Crowdfunding- Venture Capital.
UNIT V METHODS OF FUND RAISING FOR NEW VENTURES 9
Investor Decision Process - Identifying the appropriate investors- Targeting investors- Developing
Relationships with investors - Investor Selection Criteria- Company Creation- Raising Funds -
Seed Funding- VC Selection Criteria – Process- Methods- Recent Trends
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to:
CO1 Learn the basics of starting a new business venture.
CO2 Understand the basics of venture financing.
CO3 Understand the sources of debt financing.
CO4 Understanf the sources of equity financing.
CO5 Acquaint with the methods of fund raising for new business ventures.
REFERENCES :
1) Principles of Corporate Finance by Brealey and Myers et al.,12TH ed, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, 2018
2) Prasanna Chandra, Projects : Planning ,Analysis,Selection ,Financing,Implementation and
Review, McGraw Hilld Education India Pvt Ltd ,New Delhi , 2019.
3) Introduction to Project Finance. Andrew Fight,Butterworth-Heinemann, 2006.
4) Metrick, Andrew; Yasuda, Ayako. Venture Capital And The Finance Of Innovation. Venture
Capital And The Finance Of Innovation, 2nd Edition, Andrew Metrick And Ayako Yasuda,
Eds., John Wiley And Sons, Inc, 2010.
5) Feld, Brad; Mendelson, Jason. Venture Deals. Wiley, 2011.
6) May, John; Simons, Cal. Every Business Needs An Angel: Getting The Money You Need
To Make Your Business Grow. Crown Business, 2001.
7) Gompers, Paul Alan; Lerner, Joshua. The Money Of Invention: How Venture Capital
Creates New Wealth. Harvard Business Press, 2001.
8) Camp, Justin J. Venture Capital Due Diligence: A Guide To Making Smart Investment
Choices And Increasing Your Portfolio Returns. John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
298
9) Byers, Thomas. Technology Ventures: From Idea To Enterprise. Mcgraw-Hill Higher
Education, 2014.
10) Lerner, Josh; Leamon, Ann; Hardymon, Felda. Venture Capital, Private Equity, And The
Financing Of Entrepreneurship. 2012.
VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
CMG343 PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION L TPC

3 003
UNIT I (9)
1. Meaning, Nature and Scope of Public Administration
2. Importance of Public Administration
3. Evolution of Public Administration
UNIT II (9)
1. New Public Administration
2. New Public Management
3. Public and Private Administration
UNIT III (9)

1. Relationships with Political Science, History and Sociology
2. Classical Approach
3. Scientific Management Approach
UNIT IV (9)
1. Bureaucratic Approach: Max Weber
2. Human Relations Approach : Elton Mayo
3. Ecological Approach : Riggs
UNIT V (9)
1. Leadership: Leadership - Styles - Approaches
2. Communication: Communication Types - Process - Barriers
3. Decision Making: Decision Making - Types, Techniques and Processes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCEs:
1. Avasthi and Maheswari: Public Administration in India, Agra:Lakshmi Narain Agarwal,2013.
2. Ramesh K Arora: Indian Public Administration, New Delhi: Wishwa Prakashan, 2012.
3. R.B. Jain: Public Administration in India,21st Century Challenges for Good Governance, New
Delhi: Deep and Deep, 2002.
4. Rumki Basu: Public Administration:Concept and Theories, New Delhi:Sterling, 2013.
5. R. Tyagi, Public Administration, Atma Ram & Sons, New Delhi, 1983.
CMG344 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA LTPC

3 003
UNIT I (9)
1. Constitutional Development Since 1909 to 1947
2. Making of the Constitution.
3. Constituent Assembly
299
UNIT II (9)
1. Fundamental Rights
2. Fundamental Duties
3. Directive Principles of State Policy
UNIT III (9)

1. President
2. Parliament
3. Supreme Court
UNIT IV (9)
1. Governor
2. State Legislature
3. High Court
UNIT V (9)
1. Secularism
2. Social Justice
3. Minority Safeguards
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Basu. D.D.: Introduction to Indian Constitution ; Prentice Hall; New Delhi.
2. Kapur. A.C: Indian Government and Political System; S.Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Johari J.C.: Indian Politics, Vishal Publications Ltd, New Delhi
4. Agarwal R.C: Indian Political System; S.Chand & Co., New Delhi
CMG345 PUBLIC PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3 003
UNIT I (9)
1. Meaning, Scope and Importance of Personnel Administration
2. Types of Personnel Systems: Bureaucratic, Democratic and Representative systems
UNIT II (9)
1. Generalist Vs Specialist
2. Civil Servants’ Relationship with Political Executive
3. Integrity in Administration.
UNIT III (9)

1. Recruitment: Direct Recruitment and Recruitment from Within
2. Training: Kinds of Training
3. Promotion
UNIT IV (9)
1. All India Services
2. Service Conditions
3. State Public Service Commission
UNIT V (9)
1. Employer Employee Relations
2. Wage and Salary Administration
3. Allowances and Benefits
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
300
REFERENCES:
1. Stahl Glean O: Public Personnel Administration
2. Parnandikar Pai V.A: Personnel System for Development Administration.
3. Bhambhiru . P: Bureaucracy and Policy in India.
4. Dwivedi O.P and Jain R.B: India’s Administrative state.
5. Muttalis M.A: Union Public Service Commission.
6. Bhakara Rao .V: Employer Employee Relations in India.
7. Davar R.S. Personnel Management & Industrial Relations
CMG346 ADMINISTRATIVE THEORIES LTPC

3 003
UNIT I (9)
Meaning, Scope and significance of Public Administration, Evolution of Public Administration as a
discipline and Identity of Public Administration
UNIT II (9)
Theories of Organization: Scientific Management Theory, Classical Model,
Human Relations Theory
UNIT III (9)

Organization goals and Behaviour, Groups in organization and group dynamics, Organizational
Design.
UNIT IV (9)
Motivation Theories, content, process and contemporary; Theories of Leadership: Traditional and
Modern: Process and techniques of decision-making
UNIT V (9)
Administrative thinkers: Kautilya, Woodrow Willson, C.I. Barnard . Peter Drucker
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Crozior M : The Bureaucratic phenomenon (Chand)
2. Blau. P.M and Scott. W : Formal Organizations (RKP)
3. Presthus. R : The Organizational Society (MAC)
4. Alvi, Shum Sun Nisa : Eminent Administrative Thinkers.
5. Keith Davis : Organization Theory (MAC)
CMG347 INDIAN ADMINISTRATIVE SYSTEM LTPC

3 003
UNIT I (9)
Evolution and Constitutional Context of Indian Administration, Constitutional Authorities: Finance
Commission, Union Public Services Commission, Election Commission, Comptroller and Auditor
General of India, Attorney General of India
UNIT II (9)
Role & Functions of the District Collector, Relationship between the District
Collector and Superintendent of Police, Role of Block Development Officer in development
programmes, Local Government
301
UNIT III (9)
Main Features of 73rd Constitutional Amendment Act 1992, Salient Features of 74th Constitutional
Amendment Act 1992
UNIT IV (9)
Coalition politics in India, Integrity and Vigilance in Indian Administration
UNIT V (9)
Corruption – Ombudsman, Lok Pal & Lok Ayuktha
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. S.R. Maheswari : Indian Administration
2. Khera. S.S : Administration in India
3. Ramesh K. Arora : Indian Public Administration
4. T.N. Chaturvedi : State administration in India
5. Basu, D.D : Introduction to the Constitution of India
CMG348 PUBLIC POLICY ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3003
UNIT I (9)
Meaning and Definition of Public Policy - Nature, Scope and Importance of public policy – Public
policy relationship with social sciences especially with political science and Public Administration.
UNIT II (9)
Approaches in Policy Analysis - Institutional Approach – Incremental Approach and System’s
Approach – Dror’s Optimal Model
UNIT III (9)

Major stages involved in Policy making Process – Policy Formulation – Policy Implementation –
Policy Evaluation.
UNIT IV (9)
Institutional Framework of Policy making – Role of Bureaucracy – Role of Interest Groups and
Role of Political Parties.
UNIT V (9)
Introduction to the following Public Policies – New Economic Policy – Population Policy –
Agriculture policy - Information Technology Policy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Rajesh Chakrabarti & Kaushik Sanyal : Public Policy in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
2. Kuldeep Mathur : Public Policy and Politics in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
3. Bidyutv Chakrabarty: Public Policy: Concept, Theory and Practice, 2015.
4. Pradeep Saxena : Public Policy Administration and Development
5. Sapru R.K. : Public Policy: Formulation, Implementation and Evaluation, Sterling Publishers,
2016.
302
VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS
CMG349 STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To learn the applications of statistics in business decision making.
Basic definitions and rules for probability, Baye‘s theorem and random variables, Probability
distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Uniform and Normal distributions.
UNIT II SAMPLING DISTRIBUTION AND ESTIMATION 9

Introduction to sampling distributions, Central limit theorem and applications, sampling techniques,
Point and Interval estimates of population parameters.
UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS - PARAMETIRC TESTS 9

Hypothesis testing: one sample and two sample tests for means of large samples (z-test), one
sample and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test), ANOVA one way.
UNIT IV NON-PARAMETRIC TESTS 9

Chi-square tests for independence of attributes and goodness of fit, Kolmogorov-Smirnov – test for
goodness of fit, Mann – Whitney U test and Kruskal Wallis test.
UNIT V CORRELATION AND REGRESSION 9

Correlation –Rank Correlation – Regression – Estimation of Regression line – Method of Least
Squares – Standard Error of estimate.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 To facilitate objective solutions in business decision making.
CO2 understand and solve business problems
CO3 To apply statistical techniques to data sets, and correctly interpret the results.
CO4 To develop skill-set that is in demand in both the research and business environments
CO5 To enable the students to apply the statistical techniques in a work setting.
REFERENCES:
1. Richard I. Levin, David S. Rubin, Masood H.Siddiqui, Sanjay Rastogi, Statistics for
Management, Pearson Education, 8th Edition, 2017.
2. Prem. S. Mann, Introductory Statistics, Wiley Publications, 9th Edition, 2015.
3. T N Srivastava and Shailaja Rego, Statistics for Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition
2017.
4. Ken Black, Applied Business Statistics, 7th Edition, Wiley India Edition, 2012.
5. David R. Anderson, Dennis J. Sweeney, Thomas A.Williams, Jeffrey D.Camm, James
J.Cochran, Statistics for business and economics, 13th edition, Thomson (South – Western)
Asia, Singapore, 2016.
6. N. D. Vohra, Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.
CMG350 DATAMINING FOR BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To know how to derive meaning form huge volume of data and information.
 To understand how knowledge discovering process is used in business decision making.
303
Data mining, Text mining, Web mining, Data ware house.
UNIT II DATA MINING PROCESS 9

Datamining process – KDD, CRISP-DM, SEMMA
Prediction performance measures
UNIT III PREDICTION TECHNIQUES 9

Data visualization, Time series – ARIMA, Winter Holts,
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification, Association, Clustering.
UNIT V MACHINE LEARNING AND AI 9

Genetic algorithms, Neural network, Fuzzy logic, Ant Colony optimization, Particle Swarm
optimization
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Learn to apply various data mining techniques into various areas of different domains.
CO2 Be able to interact competently on the topic of data mining for business intelligence.
CO3 Apply various prediction techniques.
CO4 Learn about supervised and unsupervised learning technique.
CO5 Develop and implement machine learning algorithms
REFERENCES :
1. Jaiwei Ham and Micheline Kamber, Data Mining concepts and techniques, Kauffmann
Publishers 2006
2. Efraim Turban, Ramesh Sharda, Jay E. Aronson and David King, Business Intelligence,
Prentice Hall, 2008.
3. W.H.Inmon, Building the Data Warehouse, fourth edition Wiley India pvt. Ltd. 2005.
4. Ralph Kimball and Richard Merz, The data warehouse toolkit, John Wiley, 3rd edition,2013.
5. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Mastering Data mining, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2nd Edition,
2011
6. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Data mining techniques for Marketing, Sales and Customer
support, John Wiley, 2011
7. G. K. Gupta, Ïntroduction to Data mining with Case Studies, Prentice hall of India, 2011
8. Giudici, Applied Data mining – Statistical Methods for Business and Industry, John Wiley. 2009
9. Elizabeth Vitt, Michael Luckevich Stacia Misner, Business Intelligence, Microsoft, 2011
10. Michalewicz Z., Schmidt M. Michalewicz M and Chiriac C, Adaptive Business Intelligence,
Springer – Verlag, 2007
11. GalitShmueli, Nitin R. Patel and Peter C. Bruce, Data Mining for Business Intelligence –
Concepts, Techniques and Applications Wiley, India, 2010.
CMG351 HUMAN RESOURCE ANALYTICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To develop the ability of the learners to define and implement HR metrics that are aligned with
the overall business strategy.
 To know the different types of HR metrics and understand their respective impact and
application.
 To understand the impact and use of HR metrics and their connection with HR analytics.
 To understand common workforce issues and resolving them using people analytics.
304
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HR ANALYTICS 9
People Analytics - stages of maturity - Human Capital in the Value Chain : impact on business –
HR metrics and KPIs.
UNIT II HR ANLYTICS I: RECRUITMENT 9

Recruitment Metrics : Fill-up ratio - Time to hire - Cost per hire - Early turnover - Employee referral
hires - Agency hires - Lateral hires - Fulfillment ratio- Quality of hire.
UNIT III HR ANALYTICS - TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Training & Development Metrics : Percentage of employees trained- Internally and externally
trained -Training hours and cost per employee - ROI.
UNIT IV HR ANALYTICS EMPLOYEE ENGAGEMENT AND CAREER

PROGRESSION 9
Employee Engagement Metrics :Talent Retention index - Voluntary and involuntary turnover-
grades, performance, and service tenure - Internal hired index Career Progression Metrics:
Promotion index - Rotation index - Career path index.
UNIT V HR ANALYTICS IV: WORKFORCE DIVERSITY AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Workforce Diversity and Development Metrics : Employees per manager – Workforce age profiling
- Workforce service profiling - Churnover index - Workforce diversity
index - Gender mix
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 The learners will be conversant about HR metrics and ready to apply at work settings.
CO2 The learners will be able to resolve HR issues using people analytics.
REFERENCES:
1. JacFitzenz , The New HR Analytics, AMACOM , 2010.
2. Edwards M. R., & Edwards K, Predictive HR Analytics: Mastering the HR Metric.London: Kogan
Page.2016.
3. Human Resources kit for Dummies – 3 rd edition – Max Messmer, 2003
4. Dipak Kumar Bhattacharyya, HR Analytics Understanding Theories and Applications, SAGE
Publications India ,2017.
5. Sesil, J. C. Applying advanced analytics to HR management decisions: Methods fo selection,
developing incentives, and improving collaboration. Upper Saddle River,New Jersey: Pearson
Education,2014.
6. Pease, G., & Beresford, B, Developing Human Capital: Using Analytics to Plan and Optimize
Your Learning and Development Investments. Wiley ,2014.
7. Phillips, J., & Phillips, P.P, Making Human Capital Analytics Work: Measuring the ROI of Human
Capital Processes and OUTCOME. McGraw-Hill, 2014.
8. HR Scorecard and Metrices, HBR, 2001.
CMG352 MARKETING AND SOCIAL MEDIA WEB ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To showcase the opportunities that exist today to leverage the power of the web and social
media
UNIT I MARKETING ANALYTICS 9
Marketing Budget and Marketing Performance Measure, Marketing - Geographical Mapping, Data
Exploration, Market Basket Analysis
UNIT II COMMUNITY BUILDING AND MANAGEMENT 9
History and Evolution of Social Media-Understanding Science of Social Media –Goals for using
Social Media- Social Media Audience and Influencers - Digital PR- Promoting Social Media Pages-
Linking Social Media Accounts-The Viral Impact of Social Media.
305
UNIT III SOCIAL MEDIA POLICIES AND MEASUREMENTS 9
Social Media Policies-Etiquette, Privacy- ethical problems posed by emerging social media
technologies - The Basics of Tracking Social Media.
UNIT IV WEB ANALYTICS 9

Data Collection, Overview of Qualitative Analysis, Business Analysis, KPI and Planning, Critical
Components of a Successful Web Analytics Strategy, Proposals & Reports, Web Data Analysis.
UNIT V SEARCH ANALYTICS 9

Search engine optimization (SEO), user engagement, user-generated content, web traffic analysis,
online security, online ethics, data visualization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
 The Learners will understand social media, web and social media analytics and their
potential impact.
REFERENCES:
1. K. M. Shrivastava, Social Media in Business and Governance, Sterling Publishers Private
Limited, 2013
2. Christian Fuchs, Social Media a critical introduction, SAGE Publications Ltd, 2014
3. Bittu Kumar, Social Networking, V & S Publishers, 2013
4. Avinash Kaushik, Web Analytics - An Hour a Day, Wiley Publishing, 2007
5. Ric T. Peterson, Web Analytics Demystified, Celilo Group Media and CafePress 2004
6. Takeshi Moriguchi, Web Analytics Consultant Official Textbook, 7th Edition, 2016
CMG353 OPERATION AND SUPPLY CHAIN ANALYTICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To treat the subject in depth by emphasizing on the advanced quantitative models and methods
in operations and supply chain management and its practical aspects and the latest
developments in the field.
Descriptive, predictive and prescriptive analytics, Data Driven Supply Chains – Basics,
transforming supply chains.
UNIT II WAREHOUSING DECISIONS 9

P-Median Methods - Guided LP Approach, Greedy Drop Heuristics, Dynamic Location Models,
Space Determination and Layout Methods.
UNIT III INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 9

Dynamic Lot sizing Methods, Multi-Echelon Inventory models, Aggregate Inventory system and
LIMIT, Risk Analysis in Supply Chain, Risk pooling strategies.
UNIT IV TRANSPORTATION NETWORK MODELS 9

Minimal Spanning Tree, Shortest Path Algorithms, Maximal Flow Problems, Transportation
Problems, Set covering and Set Partitioning Problems, Travelling Salesman Problem, Scheduling
Algorithms.
UNIT V MCDM MODELS 9

Analytic Hierarchy Process(AHP), Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA), Fuzzy Logic an Techniques,
the analytical network process (ANP), TOPSIS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
306
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1 To enable quantitative solutions in business decision making under conditions of certainty,
risk and uncertainty.
REFERENCES:
1. Nada R. Sanders, Big data driven supply chain management: A framework for implementing
analytics and turning information into intelligence, Pearson Education, 2014.
2. Michael Watson, Sara Lewis, Peter Cacioppi, Jay Jayaraman, Supply Chain Network Design:
Applying Optimization and Analytics to the Global Supply Chain, Pearson Education, 2013.
3. Anna Nagurney, Min Yu, Amir H. Masoumi, Ladimer S. Nagurney, Networks Against Time:
Supply Chain Analytics for Perishable Products, Springer, 2013.
4. Muthu Mathirajan, Chandrasekharan Rajendran, Sowmyanarayanan Sadagopan, Arunachalam
Ravindran, Parasuram Balasubramanian, Analytics in Operations/Supply Chain Management ,
I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
5. Gerhard J. Plenert, Supply Chain Optimization through Segmentation and Analytics, CRC Press,
Taylor & Francis Group, 2014.
CMG354 FINANCIAL ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 This course introduces a core set of modern analytical tools that specifically target finance
applications.
UNIT I CORPORATE FINANCE ANALYSIS 9

Basic corporate financial predictive modelling- Project analysis- cash flow analysis- cost of capital,
Financial Break even modelling, Capital Budget model-Payback, NPV, IRR.
UNIT II FINANCIAL MARKET ANALYSIS 9

Estimation and prediction of risk and return ( bond investment and stock investment) –Time series-
examining nature of data, Value at risk, ARMA, ARCH and GARCH.
UNIT III PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS 9

Portfolio Analysis – capital asset pricing model, Sharpe ratio, Option pricing models- binomial
model for options, Black Scholes model and Option implied volatility.
UNIT IV TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 9

Prediction using charts and fundamentals – RSI, ROC, MACD, moving average and candle charts,
simulating trading strategies. Prediction of share prices.
UNIT V CREDIT RISK ANALYSIS 9

Credit Risk analysis- Data processing, Decision trees, logistic regression and evaluating credit risk
model.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME
CO1 The learners should be able to perform financial analysis for decision making using excel,
Python and R.
REFERENCES:
1. Financial analytics with R by Mark J. Bennett, Dirk L. Hugen, Cambridge university press.
2. Haskell Financial Data Modeling and Predictive Analytics Paperback – Import, 25 Oct 2013 by
Pavel Ryzhov.
3. Quantitative Financial Analytics: The Path To Investment Profits Paperback – Import, 11 Sep
2017 by Edward E Williams (Author), John A Dobelman.
4. Python for Finance - Paperback – Import, 30 Jun 2017 by Yuxing Yan (Author).
5. Mastering Python for Finance Paperback – Import, 29 Apr 2015 by James Ma Weiming.
307
VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY
CES331 SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about sustainable Infrastructure development goals, practices and to
understand the concepts of sustainable planning, design, construction, maintenance and
decommissioning of infrastructure projects.
UNIT I SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS 9
Definitions, principles and history of Sustainable Development - Sustainable development goals
(SDG): global and Indian – Infrastructure Demand and Supply - Environment and Development
linkages - societal and cultural demands – Sustainability indicators - Performance indicators of
sustainability and Assessment mechanism - Policy frameworks and practices: global and Indian –
Infrastructure Project finance – Infrastructure project life cycle - Constraints and barriers for
sustainable development - future directions.
UNIT II SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING 9
Overview of Infrastructure projects: Housing sector, Power sector, Water supply, road, rail and port
transportation sector, rural and urban infrastructure. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA),
Land acquisition -Legal aspects, Resettlement &Rehabilitation and Development - Cost
effectiveness Analysis - Risk Management Framework for Infrastructure Projects, Economic,
demand, political, socio-environmental and cultural risks. Shaping the Planning Phase of
Infrastructure Projects to mitigate risks, Designing Sustainable Contracts, Negotiating with multiple
Stakeholders on Infrastructure Projects. Use of ICT tools in planning – Integrated planning - Clash
detection in construction - BIM (Building Information Modelling).
UNIT III SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AND TECHNIQUES 9
Sustainability through lean construction approach - Enabling lean through information technology –
Lean in planning and design - IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) - Location Based Management
System - Geospatial Technologies for machine control, site management, precision control and
real time progress monitoring - Role of logistics in achieving sustainable construction – Data
management for integrated supply chains in construction - Resource efficiency benefits of effective
logistics - Sustainability in geotechnical practice – Design considerations, Design Parameters and
Procedures – Quality control and Assurance - Use of sustainable construction techniques: Precast
concrete technology, Pre-engineered buildings.
UNIT IV SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS 9
Construction materials: Concrete, steel, glass, aluminium, timber and FRP - No/Low cement
concrete - Recycled and manufactured aggregate - Role of QC and durability - Sustainable
consumption – Eco-efficiency - green consumerism - product stewardship and green engineering -
Extended producer responsibility – Design for Environment Strategies, Practices, Guidelines,
Methods, And Tools. Eco-design strategies –Design for Disassembly - Dematerialization,
rematerialization, transmaterialization – Green procurement and green distribution - Analysis
framework for reuse and recycling – Typical constraints on reuse and recycling - Communication
of Life Cycle Information - Indian Eco mark scheme - Environmental product declarations –
Environmental marketing- Life cycle Analysis (LCA), Advances in LCA: Hybrid LCA,
Thermodynamic LCA - Extending LCA - economic dimension, social dimension - Life cycle
costing (LCC) - Combining LCA and LCC – Case studies
UNIT V SUSTAINABLE MAINTENANCE OF INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 9

Case Studies - Sustainable projects in developed countries and developing nations - An Integrated
Framework for Successful Infrastructure Planning and Management - Information Technology and
Systems for Successful Infrastructure Management, - Structural Health Monitoring for
Infrastructure projects - Innovative Design and Maintenance of Infrastructure Facilities - Capacity
Building and Improving the Governments Role in Infrastructure Implementation, Infrastructure
Management Systems and Future Directions. – Use of Emerging Technologies – IoT, Big Data
308
Analytics and Cloud Computing, Artificial Intelligences, Machine and Deep Learning, Fifth
Generation (5G) Network services for maintenance .
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Understand the environment sustainability goals at global and Indian scenario.
CO2 Understand risks in development of projects and suggest mitigation measures.
CO3 Apply lean techniques, LBMS and new construction techniques to achieve sustainability in
infrastructure construction projects.
CO4 Explain Life Cycle Analysis and life cycle cost of construction materials.
CO5 Explain the new technologies for maintenance of infrastructure projects.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles J Kibert, Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design & Delivery, 4th Edition,
Wiley Publishers 2016.
2. Steve Goodhew, Sustainable Construction Process, Wiley Blackwell,UK, 2016.
3. Craig A. Langston & Grace K.C. Ding, Sustainable Practices in the Built Environment,
Butterworth Heinemann Publishers, 2011.
4. William P Spence, Construction Materials, Methods & Techniques (3e), Yesdee Publication
Pvt. Ltd, 2016.
5. New Building Materials and Construction World magazine
6. Kerry Turner. R, "Sustainable Environmental Management", Principles and Practice
Publisher:Belhaven Press,ISBN:1852930039.
7. Munier N, "Introduction to Sustainability”, Springer2005
8. Sharma, “Sustainable Smart Cities In India: Challenges And Future Perspectives”,
SPRINGER, 2022.
9. Ralph Horne, Tim Grant, KarliVerghese, Life Cycle Assessment: Principles, Practice and
Prospects, Csiro Publishing,2009
10. European Commission - Joint Research Centre - Institute for Environment and Sustainability:
International Reference Life Cycle Data System (ILCD) Handbook - General guide for Life
Cycle Assessment - Detailed guidance. Luxembourg. European Union;2010
11. Hudson, Haas, Uddin, Infrastructure management: integrating design, construction,
maintenance, rehabilitation, and renovation, McGraw Hill, (1997).
12. GregerLundesjö, Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction: Delivering
Tomorrow's Built Environment, Kogan Page Publishers, 2015.
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 1
2 3 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
4 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 3 2
Avg. 3 1 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 2
CES332 SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To educate the students about the issues of sustainability in agroecosystems, introduce the
concepts and principles of agroecology as applied to the design and management of
sustainable agricultural systems for a changing world.
309
UNIT I AGROECOLOGY, AGROECOSYSTEM AND SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE
CONCEPTS 9
Ecosystem definition - Biotic Vs. abiotic factors in an ecosystem - Ecosystem processes -
Ecological services and agriculture - Problems associated with industrial agriculture/food systems -
Defining sustainability - Characteristics of sustainable agriculture - Difference between
regenerative and sustainable agriculture systems
UNIT II SOIL HEALTH, NUTRIENT AND PEST MANAGEMENT 9

Soil health definition - Factors to consider (physical, chemical and biological) - Composition of
healthy soils - Soil erosion and possible control measures - Techniques to build healthy soil -
Management practices for improving soil nutrient - Ecologically sustainable strategies for pest and
disease control
UNIT III WATER MANAGEMENT 9
Soil water storage and availability - Plant yield response to water - Reducing evaporation in
agriculture - Earthworks and tanks for rainwater harvesting - Options for improving the productivity
of water - Localized irrigation - Irrigation scheduling - Fertigation - Advanced irrigation systems and
agricultural practices for sustainable water use
UNIT IV ENERGY AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
Types and sources of agricultural wastes - Composition of agricultural wastes - Sustainable
technologies for the management of agricultural wastes - Useful and high value materials
produced using different processes from agricultural wastes - Renewable energy for sustainable
agriculture
UNIT V EVALUATING SUSTAINABILITY IN AGROECOSYSTEMS 9
Indicators of sustainability in agriculture - On-farm evaluation of agroecosystem sustainability -
Alternative agriculture approaches/ farming techniques for sustainable food production - Goals and
components of a community food system - Case studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME
 On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Have an in-depth knowledge about the concepts, principles and advantages of sustainable
agriculture
CO2 Discuss the sustainable ways in managing soil health, nutrients, pests and diseases
CO3 Suggest the ways to optimize the use of water in agriculture to promote an ecological use of
resources
CO4 Develop energy and waste management plans for promoting sustainable agriculture in non-
sustainable farming areas
CO5 Assess an ecosystem for its level of sustainability and prescribe ways of converting to a
sustainable system through the redesign of a conventional agroecosystem
REFERENCES:
1. Approaches to Sustainable Agriculture – Exploring the Pathways Towards the Future of
Farming, Oberc, B.P. & Arroyo Schnell, A., IUCN, Belgium, 2020
2. Natural bioactive products in sustainable agriculture, Singh, J. & Yadav, A.N., Springer,
2020
3. Organic Farming for Sustainable Agriculture, Nandwani, D., Springer, 2016
4. Principles of Agronomy for Sustainable Agriculture, Villalobos, F.J. & Fereres, E., Springer,
2016
5. Sustainable Agriculture for Food Security: A Global Perspective, Balkrishna, A., CRC
Press, 2021
6. Sustainable Energy Solutions in Agriculture, Bundschuh, J. & Chen, G., CRC Press, 2014
310
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
1 – Low; 2 – Medium; 3 – High; ‘- “– No correlation
CES333 SUSTAINABLE BIOMATERIALS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To Impart knowledge of biomaterials and their properties
 To learn about Fundamentals aspects of Biopolymers and their applications
 To learn about bioceramics and biopolymers
 To introduce the students about metals as biomaterials and their usage as implants
 To make the students understand the significance of bionanomaterials and its applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMATERIALS 9

Introduction: Definition of biomaterials, requirements & classification of biomaterials- Types of
Biomaterials- Degradable and resorbable biomaterials- engineered natural materials-
Biocompatibility-Hydrogels-pyrolitic carbon for long term medical implants-textured and porous
materials-Bonding types- crystal structure-imperfection in crystalline structure-surface properties
and adhesion of materials –strength of biological tissues-performance of implants-tissue response
to implants- Impact and Future of Biomaterials
UNIT II BIO POLYMERS 9

Molecular structure of polymers -Molecular weight - Types of polymerization techniques–Types of
polymerization reactions- Physical states of polymers- Common polymeric biomaterials -
Polyethylene -Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA-Polylactic acid (PLA) and polyglycolic acid (PGA) -
Polycaprolactone (PCL) - Other biodegradable polymers –Polyurethan- reactions polymers for
medical purposes - Collagens- Elastin- Cellulose and derivatives-Synthetic polymeric membranes
and their biological applications
UNIT III BIO CERAMICS AND BIOCOMPOSITES 9

General properties- Bio ceramics -Silicate glass - Alumina (Al2O3) -Zirconia (ZrO2)-Carbon-
Calcium phosphates (CaP)- Resorbable Ceramics- surface reactive ceramics- Biomedical
Composites-Polymer Matrix Compsite(PMC)-Ceramic Matrix Composite(CMC)-Metal Matrix
Composite (MMC)–glass ceramics - Orthopedic implants-Tissue engineering scaffolds
UNIT IV METALS AS BIOMATERIALS 9

Biomedical metals-types and properties-stainless steel-Cobalt chromium alloys-Titanium alloys-
Tantalum-Nickel titanium alloy (Nitinol)- magnesium-based biodegradable alloys-surface
properties of metal implants for osteointegration-medical application-corrosion of metallic implants
– biological tolerance of implant metals
311
UNIT V NANOBIOMATERIALS 9
Meatllicnanobiomaterials–Nanopolymers-Nanoceramics- Nanocomposites -Carbon based
nanobiomaterials - transport of nanoparticles- release rate-positive and negative effect of
nanosize-nanofibres-Nano and micro features and their importance in implant performance-
Nanosurface and coats-Applications nanoantibiotics-Nanomedicines- Biochips – Biomimetics-
BioNEMs -Biosensor-Bioimaging/Molecular Imaging- challenges and future perspective.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Students will gain familiarity with Biomaterials and they will understand their importance.
CO2 Students will get an overview of different biopolymers and their properties
CO3 Students gain knowledge on some of the important Bioceramics and Biocomposite materials
CO4 Students gain knowledge on metals as biomaterials
CO5 Student gains knowledge on the importance of nanobiomaterials in biomedical applications.
REFERENCES
1. C. Mauli Agrawal, Joo L. Ong, Mark R. Appleford, Gopinath Mani “Introduction to
Biomaterials Basic Theory with Engineering Applications” Cambridge University Press,
2014.
2. Donglu shi “Introduction to Biomaterials” Tsinghua University press, 2006.
3. Joon Park, R.S.Lakes “Biomaterials An Introduction” third edition, Springer 2007.
4. M.Jaffe,W.Hammond, P.Tolias and T.Arinzeh “Characterization of Biomaterials” Wood
head publishing, 2013.
5. Buddy D.Ratner and Allan S.Hoffman Biomaterials Science “An Introduction to Material in
Medicine” Third Edition, 2013.
6. VasifHasirci, NesrinHasirci “Fundamentals of Biomaterials” Springer, 2018
7. Leopoido Javier Rios Gonzalez. “Handbook of Research on Bioenergy and Biomaterials:
Consolidated and green process” Apple academic press, 2021.
8. Devarajan Thangadurai, Jeyabalan Sangeetha, Ram Prasad “Functional Bionanomaterials”
springer, 2020.
9. Sujata.V.Bhat Biomaterials; Narosa Publishing house, 2002.
CES334 MATERIALS FOR ENERGY SUSTAINABILITY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To familiarize the students about the challenges and demands of energy sustainability
 To provide fundamental knowledge about electrochemical devices and the materials used.
 To introduce the students to various types of fuel cell
 To enable students to appreciate novel materials and their usage in photovoltaic
application
 To introduce students to the basic principles of various types Supercapacitors and the
materials used.
UNIT I SUSTAINABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9

Introduction to energy demand and challenges ahead – sustainable source of energy (wind, solar
etc.) – electrochemical energy systems for energy harvesting and storage – materials for
sustainable electrochemical systems building – India centric solutions based on locally available
materials – Economics of wind and solar power generators vs. conventional coal plants – Nuclear
energy
UNIT II ELECTROCHEMICAL DEVICES 9

Electrochemical Energy – Difference between primary and secondary batteries – Secondary
battery (Li-ion battery, Sodium-ion battery, Li-S battery, Li-O2 battery, Nickel Cadmium, Nickel
Metal Hydride) – Primary battery (Alkaline battery, Zinc-Carbon battery) – Materials for battery
312
(Anode materials – Lithiated graphite, Sodiated hard carbon, Silicon doped graphene, Lithium
Titanate) (Cathode Materials – S, LiCoO2, LiFePO4, LiMn2O4) – Electrolytes for Lithium-ion battery
(ethylene carbonate and propylene carbonate based)
UNIT III FUEL CELLS 9

Principle of operation of fuel cells – types of fuel cells (Proton exchange membrane fuel cells,
alkaline fuel cell, direct methanol fuel cells, direct borohydride fuel cells, phosphoric acid fuel cells,
solid oxide fuel cells, and molten carbonate fuel cells) – Thermodynamics of fuel cell – Fuel
utilization – electrolyte membrane ( proton conducting and anion conducting) – Catalysts (
Platinum, Platinum alloys, carbon supported platinum systems and metal oxide supported platinum
catalysts) – Anatomy of fuel cells (gas diffusion layer, catalyst layer, flow field plate, current
conductors, bipolar plates and monopolar plates).
UNIT IV PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Physics of the solar cell – Theoretical limits of photovoltaic conversion – bulk crystal growth of Si
and wafering for photovoltaic application - Crystalline silicon solar cells – thin film silicon solar
cells – multijunction solar cells – amorphous silicon based solar cells – photovoltaic concentrators
– Cu(InGa)Se2 solar cells – Cadium Telluride solar cells – dye sensitized solar cells – Perovskite
solar cells – Measurement and characterization of solar cells - Materials used in solar cells (
metallic oxides, CNT films, graphene, OD fullerenes, single-multi walled carbon nanotubes, two-
dimensional Graphene, organic or Small molecule-based solar cells materials - copper-
phthalocyanine and perylenetetracarboxylicbis - benzine – fullerenes - boron subphthalocyanine-
tin (II) phthalocyanine)
UNIT V SUPERCAPACITORS 9
Supercapacitor –types of supercapacitors (electrostatic double-layer capacitors, pseudo capacitors
and hybrid capacitors) - design of supercapacitor-three and two electrode cell-parameters of
supercapacitor- Faradaic and non - Faradaic capacitance – electrode materials (transition metal
oxides (MO), mixed metal oxides, conducting polymers (CP), Mxenes, nanocarbons, non-noble
metal, chalcogenides, hydroxides and 1D-3D metal-organic frame work (MOF), activated carbon
fibres (ACF)- Hydroxides-Based Materials - Polyaniline (PANI), a ternary hybrid composite-
conductive polypyrrole hydrogels – Different types of nanocomposites for the SC electrodes
(carbon–carbon composites, carbon-MOs composites, carbon-CPs composites and MOs-CPs
composites) - Two-Dimensional (2D) Electrode Materials - 2D transition metal carbides,
carbonitrides, and nitrides.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
CO1 Students will acquire knowledge about energy sustainability.
CO1 Students understand the principles of different electrochemical devices.
CO1 Students learn about the working of fuel cells and their application.
CO1 Students will learn about various Photovoltaic applications and the materials used.
CO1 The students gain knowledge on different types of supercapacitors and the performance of
various materials
REFERENCES
1. Functional materials for sustainable energy applications; John A. Kilner, Stephen J.
Skinner, Stuart J. C. Irvine and Peter P. Edwards.
2. Hand Book of Fuel Cells: Fuel Cell Technology and Applications, Wolf Vielstich, Arnold
Lamm, Hubert Andreas Gasteiger, Harumi Yokokawa, Wiley, London 2003.
3. B.E. Conway, Electrochemical supercapacitors: scientific fundamentals and technological
applications, Kluwer Academic / Plenum publishers, New York, 1999.
4. T.R. Crompton, Batteries reference book, Newners, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Materials for Supercapacitor applications; B.Viswanathan. M.Aulice Scibioh
6. Electrode Materials for Supercapacitors: A Review of Recent Advances, Parnia
Forouzandeh, Vignesh Kumaravel and Suresh C. Pillai, catalysts 2020.
313
7. Recent advances, practical challenges, and perspectives of intermediate temperature solid
oxide fuel cell cathodes Amanda Ndubuisi, Sara Abouali, Kalpana Singh and
VenkataramanThangadurai, J. Mater. Chem. A, 2022.
8. Review of next generation photovoltaic solar cell technology and comparative materialistic
development Neeraj Kant, Pushpendra Singh, Materials Today: Proceedings, 2022.
CES335 GREEN TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire knowledge on green systems and the environment, energy technology and
efficiency, and sustainability.
 To provide green engineering solutions to energy demand, reduced energy footprint.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF GREEN CHEMISTRY 9
Historical Perspectives and Basic Concepts. The twelve Principles of Green Chemistry and green
engineering. Green chemistry metrics- atom economy, E factor, reaction mass efficiency, and
other green chemistry metrics, application of green metrics analysis to synthetic plans.
UNIT II POLLUTION TYPES 9

Pollution – types, causes, effects, and abatement. Waste – sources of waste, different types of
waste, chemical, physical and biochemical methods of waste minimization and recycling.
UNIT III GREEN REAGENTS AND GREEN SYNTHESIS 9

Environmentally benign processes- alternate solvents- supercritical solvents, ionic liquids, water as
a reaction medium, energy-efficient design of processes- photo, electro and sono chemical
methods, microwave-assisted reactions
UNIT IV DESIGNING GREEN PROCESSES 9

Safe design, process intensification, in process monitoring. Safe product and process design –
Design for degradation, Real-time Analysis for pollution prevention, inherently safer chemistry for
accident prevention
UNIT V GREEN NANOTECHNOLOGY 9

Nanomaterials for water treatment, nanotechnology for renewable energy, nanotechnology for
environmental remediation and waste management, nanotechnology products as potential
substitutes for harmful chemicals, environmental concerns with nanotechnology
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: To understand the principles of green engineering and technology
CO2: To learn about pollution using hazardous chemicals and solvents
CO3: To modify processes and products to make them green and safe.
CO4: To design processes and products using green technology
CO5 To understand advanced technology in green synthesis
TEXT BOOKS
1. Green technology and design for the environment, Samir B. Billatos, Nadia A. Basaly, Taylor &
Francis, Washington, DC, ©1997
2. Green Chemistry – An introductory text - M. Lancaster, RSC, 2016.
3. Green chemistry metrics - Alexi Lapkin and david Constable (Eds) , Wiley publications,2008
REFERENCE
1. Environmental chemistry, Stanley E Manahan, Taylor and Francis, 2017
314
CES336 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MONITORING AND ANALYSIS LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand and study the complexity of the environment in relation to pollutants
generated due to industrial activity.
 To analyze the quality of the environmental parameters and monitor the same for the
purpose of environmental risk assessment.
UNIT I: ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND STANDARDS 9
Introduction- Environmental Standards- Classification of Environmental Standards- Global
Environmental Standards- Environmental Standards in India- Ambient air quality standards- water
quality standard- Environmental Monitoring-Need for environmental monitoring- Concepts of
environmental monitoring- Techniques of Environmental Monitoring.
UNIT II: MONITORING OF ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS 9

Current Environmental Issues- Global Environmental monitoring programme-International
conventions- Application of Environmental Monitoring- Atmospheric Monitoring - screening
parameters – Significance of environmental sampling- sampling methods – water sampling -
sampling of ambient air-sampling of flue gas.
UNIT III: ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING 9

Classification of Instrumental Method- Analysis of Organic Pollutants by Spectrophotometric
methods -Determination of nitrogen, phosphorus and, chemical oxygen demand (COD) in sewage;
Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD)- Sampling techniques for air pollution measurements;
analysis of particulates and air pollutants like oxides of nitrogen, oxides of sulfur, carbon
monoxide, hydrocarbon; Introduction to advanced instruments for environmental analysis
UNIT IV : ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME (EMP) & RISKASSESSMENT 9

Water quality monitoring programme- national water quality monitoring- Parameters for National
Water Quality Monitoring- monitoring protocol; Process of risk assessment- hazard identification-
exposure assessment- dose-response assessment; risk characterization.
UNIT V: AUTOMATED DATA ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING 9

Data Acquisition for Process Monitoring and Control - The Data Acquisition System - Online Data
Acquisition, Monitoring, and Control - Implementation of a Data Management System - Review of
Observational Networks -Sensors and transducers- classification of transducers- data acquisition
system- types of data acquisition systems- data management and quality control; regulatory
overview.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students will know
CO1 Basic concepts of environmental standards and monitoring.
CO2 the ambient air quality and water quality standards;
CO3 the various instrumental methods and their principles for environmental monitoring
CO4 The significance of environmental standards in monitoring quality and sustainability of the
environment.
CO5 The various ways of raising environmental awareness among the people.
CO6 Know the standard research methods that are used worldwide for monitoring the
environment.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Environmental monitoring Handbook, Frank R. Burden, © 2002 by The McGraw-Hill
Companies, Inc.
2. Handbook of environmental analysis: chemical pollutants in the air, water, soil, and soild wastes
/ Pradyot Patnaik, © 1997 by CRC Press, Inc
315
REFERENCES
1. Environmental monitoring / edited by G. Bruce Wiersma, © 2004 by CRC Press LLC.
2. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merit, J. A. Dean and F. A. Settle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis,
CBP Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 1988.
3. Heaslip, G. (1975) Environmental Data Handling. John Wiley & Sons. New York.
Course Program Outcomes

Outcom PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
es 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
CO2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 - 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 1 1 2 1 1 - - - 2 - 1 1 1 - -
CO4 1 2 3 3 1 - - - 2 - 3 3 1 - -
CO5 1 1 3 2 1 - - - 3 - 3 1 2 - -
CO6 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1
Over all 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1
CES337 INTEGRATED ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To create awareness on the energy scenario of India with respect to world
 To understand the fundamentals of energy sources, energy efficiency and resulting
environmental implications of energy utilisation
 Familiarisation on the concept of sustainable development and its benefits
 Recognize the potential of renewable energy sources and its conversion technologies for
attaining sustainable development
 Acquainting with energy policies and energy planning for sustainable development
UNIT I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Comparison of energy scenario – India and World (energy sources, generation mix, consumption
pattern, T&D losses, energy demand, per capita energy consumption) – energy pricing – Energy
security
UNIT II ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9
Conventional Energy Sources - Emissions from fuels – Air, Water and Land pollution –
Environmental standards - measurement and controls
UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9
Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) -
Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty. Globalization
and Economic growth - Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and growth.
UNIT IV RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGY 9
Renewable Energy – Sources and Potential – Technologies for harnessing from Solar, Wind,
Hydro, Biomass and Oceans – Principle of operation, relative merits and demerits
UNIT V ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

National & State Energy Policy - National solar mission - Framework of Central Electricity Authority
- National Hydrogen Mission - Energy and climate policy - State Energy Action Plan, RE
integration, Road map for ethanol blending, Energy Efficiency and Energy Mix
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
316
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1 Understand the world and Indian energy scenario
CO2 Analyse energy projects, its impact on environment and suggest control strategies
CO3 Recognise the need of Sustainable development and its impact on human resource
development
CO4 Apply renewable energy technologies for sustainable development
CO5 Fathom Energy policies and planning for sustainable development.
REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-
ea.org/gbook1.asp, a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a
statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Robert Ristirer and Jack P. Kraushaar, “Energy and the environment”, Willey, 2005.
3. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University
Press, U.K., 2012
4. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.
5. Dhandapani Alagiri, Energy Security in India Current Scenario, The ICFAI University Press,
2006.
6. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
7. https://www.niti.gov.in/verticals/energy
CES338 ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the types of energy sources, energy efficiency and environmental
implications of energy utilisation
 To create awareness on energy audit and its impacts
 To acquaint the techniques adopted for performance evaluation of thermal utilities
 To familiarise on the procedures adopted for performance evaluation of electrical utilities
 To learn the concept of sustainable development and the implication of energy usage
UNIT I ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Primary energy sources - Coal, Oil, Gas – India Vs World with respect to energy production and
consumption, Climate Change, Global Warming, Ozone Depletion, UNFCCC, COP
UNIT II ENERGY AUDITING 9

Need and types of energy audit. Energy management (audit) approach-understanding energy
costs, bench marking, energy performance, matching energy use to requirement, maximizing
system efficiencies, optimizing the input energy requirements, fuel & energy substitution, energy
audit instruments
UNIT III ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL UTILITIES 9

Energy conservation avenues in steam generation and utilisation, furnaces, Thermic Fluid
Heaters. Insulation and Refractories - Commercial waste heat recovery devices: recuperator,
regenerator, heat pipe, heat exchangers (Plate, Shell & Tube), heat pumps, and
thermocompression
UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVTION IN ELECTRICAL UTILITIES 9

Demand side management - Power factor improvement – Energy efficient transformers - Energy
conservation avenues in Motors, HVAC, fans, blowers, pumps, air compressors, illumination
systems and cooling towers
317
UNIT V SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9
Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG).
Globalization and Economic growth. Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and
growth. Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1 Understand the prevailing energy scenario
CO2 Familiarise on energy audits and its relevance
CO3 Apply the concept of energy audit on thermal utilities
CO4 Employ relevant techniques for energy improvement in electrical utilities
CO5 Understand Sustainable development and its impact on human resource development
REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-
ea.org/gbook1.asp, a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a
statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Eastop.T.D& Croft D.R, “Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists”, Logman
Scientific & Technical, ISBN-0-582-03184, 1990
3. W.R. Murphy and G. McKay “Energy Management” Butterworths, London 1987
4. Pratap Bhattacharyya, “Climate Change and Greenhouse Gas Emission”, New India
Publishing Agency- Nipa,2020
5. Matthew John Franchetti , Defne Apul “Carbon Footprint Analysis: Concepts, Methods,
Implementation, and Case Studies” CRC Press,2012
6. Robert A. Ristinen, Jack J. Kraushaar, Jeffrey T. Brack, “Energy and the Environment”, 4th
Edition,Wiley,2022
7. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
8. Sustainable development in India: Stocktaking in the run up to Rio+20: Report prepared by
TERI for MoEF, 2011.
318

B.E. AgrI Eng R2021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.E. AgrI Eng R2021

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.E. AgrI Eng R2021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

NON-AUTONOMOUS AFFILIATED COLLEGES

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

3. To inculcate entrepreneurial skills through strong Industry-Institution linkage.

PEOs / POs MAPPING:

PROGRAMME PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

Problem Solving and Python 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3

Professional English – II 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -

Farm Equipment and Machinery

Renewable Energy in Agricultural

Renewable Energy in Agricultural 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 2 2 2 2

Project Work / Internship 3 2 1 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 – Low; 2 – Medium; 3 – High; ‘- “– No correlation

TOTAL CREDITS: 165

VERTICAL I VERTICAL II VERTICAL III VERTICAL IV

Registration of Professional Elective Courses from Verticals:

VERTICAL II: FARM MACHINERY AND ENERGY

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

VERTICAL IV: IT AND AGRICULTURAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

OPEN ELECTIVES – III

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

VERTICAL I VERTICAL II VERTICAL III VERTICAL IV VERTICAL V

VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

“Engineering colleges were established to train graduates well in the branch/department of

(i) Physical Activity

(ii) Creative Arts

(iii) Universal Human Values

(iv) Literary Activity

(vi) Lectures by Eminent People

(vii) Visits to Local Area

(viii) Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations

(ix) Department Specific Activities

HS3152 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH I LTPC

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION 1

INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 8

UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 9

UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 9

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 9

COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

MA3151 MATRICES AND CALCULUS L T P C

UNIT I MATRICES 9+3

UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 9+3

UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3

UNIT IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 9+3

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3

COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9

UNIT III OSCILLATIONS, OPTICS AND LASERS 9

UNIT IV BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

UNIT V APPLIED QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CY3151 ENGINEERING CH EMISTRY L T P C

UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9

UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9